Infiniti G37-09-Coupe1

ENGINE
SECTION
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
ACC
ACC
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION .............................................. 2 .
PRECAUTIONS .................................................. 2 .
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................. 2 .
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 3 .

ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .............. 3
Exploded View ......................................................... 3 . Removal and Installation ......................................... 3 . Inspection ................................................................ 3 .
Revision: 2009 October
ACC-1
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000004685372
The Supplemental Restraint System such as AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS AIR BAG and SEAT BELT of this Service Manual. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS AIR BAG. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS

WARNING: When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
ACC-2
2009 G37 Coupe

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004251137
ACC
G
JPBIA0253GB
H
1. Accelerator pedal assembly : Vehicle front Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. 2. Bolt cap
I
INFOID:0000000004251138
Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3.
Remove the bolt cap and the inside mounting bolt. Remove accelerator pedal assembly. Disconnect accelerator pedal position sensor harness connector. CAUTION: Never disassemble accelerator lever. Never remove accelerator pedal position sensor from accelerator lever. Avoid impact from dropping etc. during handling. Be careful to keep accelerator lever away from water.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Inspection
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
N
INFOID:0000000004251139
Check accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the whole operation range when it is fully depressed and released. Check accelerator pedal securely returns to the fully released position. For the electrical inspection of accelerator pedal position sensor, refer to EC-467, "Description", EC-471, "Description" and EC-475, "Description". CAUTION: When harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Refer to EC-18, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Description".
ACC-3
2009 G37 Coupe
BODY INTERIOR
SECTION
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
ADP
CONTENTS
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 6 .
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ......... 6 .
Work Flow ................................................................ 6 . AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Diagram .....................................................13 . AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Description .................................................14 . AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location .....................................15 . AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : Component Description .........................................17 . MANUAL FUNCTION ...............................................19 . MANUAL FUNCTION : System Diagram ...............19 . MANUAL FUNCTION : System Description ...........19 . MANUAL FUNCTION : Component Parts Location ..........................................................................21 . MANUAL FUNCTION : Component Description ....23 SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION .................24 . SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION : System Diagram ...........................................................24 . SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION : System Description .......................................................24 . SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION : Component Parts Location .............................................26 . SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION : Component Description .........................................28 . MEMORY FUNCTION ...............................................29 . MEMORY FUNCTION : System Diagram ..............29 . MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description ..........29 . MEMORY FUNCTION : Component Parts Location ..........................................................................31 . MEMORY FUNCTION : Component Description....33 INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION .........34 . INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram .....................................................34 . INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Description .................................................34 . INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : Component Parts Location .....................................36 . INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : Component Description .........................................38 .
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................... 9 .

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................... 9 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description ...... 9 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement ...................................................... 9 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT ......................................................... 9 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................. 9 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ...... 9 SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ....................................... 10 . SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description ................ 10 . SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Special Repair Requirement ............................................................... 10 . MEMORY STORING ................................................. 10 . MEMORY STORING : Description ......................... 10 . MEMORY STORING : Special Repair Requirement ....................................................................... 10 . SYSTEM SETTING ................................................... 11 . SYSTEM SETTING : Description ........................... 11 . SYSTEM SETTING : Special Repair Requirement .... 11
ADP
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 13 .

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM....13
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM .......... 13 .
ADP-1
2009 G37 Coupe
POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION ................................ 38 . POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Diagram... 39 POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description ......................................................................... 39 . POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Parts Location ........................................................ 41 . POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Description ........................................ 43 .
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .............................. 64 . DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 64 . DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .......................................................... 65 . AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT .......................................................................... 65 . AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................................. 65 . AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ....................... 66 .
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT C/U) .... 45 .

Diagnosis Description ............................................ 45 . CONSULT-III Function .......................................... 45 .
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 48 .

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 48 .
Description ............................................................. 48 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 48 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 48 . Special Repair Requirement .................................. 48 .
SLIDING SWITCH ............................................ 67 .

Description ............................................................. 67 . Component Function Check ................................. 67 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 67 . Component Inspection ........................................... 68 .
RECLINING SWITCH ....................................... 69 .

B2112 SLIDING MOTOR .................................. 49 .

Description ............................................................. 49 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 49 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 49 .
LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) ............................. 71 .

B2113 RECLINING MOTOR ............................. 51 .

B2118 TILT SENSOR ....................................... 53 .

LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) ............................... 73 .

B2119 TELESCOPIC SENSOR ........................ 56 .

FORWARD SWITCH ........................................ 75 .

B2126 DETENT SW .......................................... 59 .

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH ....................... 77 .

B2127 PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ................. 61 .

Description ............................................................. 61 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 61 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 61 . Component Inspection ........................................... 62 .
SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH .................................. 79 .

B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE ........... 63 .

POWER WALK-IN SWITCH ............................. 81 .

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 64 .

BCM .......................................................................... 64 . BCM : Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 64 .
ADP-2
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT SWITCH ....................................................83 .

Component Function Check ............................... 104 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 104 .
LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) ........................... 107

Description ............................................................ 107 . Component Function Check ............................... 107 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 107 . B
TELESCOPIC SWITCH .....................................85 .

LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) ............................. 110

Description ............................................................ 110 . Component Function Check ............................... 110 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 110 .
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH .................................87 .

TILT SENSOR ................................................. 113

Description ............................................................ 113 . Component Function Check ............................... 113 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 113 . E
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH .............................................................90 .

MIRROR SWITCH .................................................... 90 . MIRROR SWITCH : Description ............................ 90 . MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check.... 90 MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ............. 90 . MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection .......... 91 . CHANGEOVER SWITCH ......................................... 92 . CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Description ................. 92 . CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Function Check ..................................................................... 92 . CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure.... 92 CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection ......................................................................... 93 .
TELESCOPIC SENSOR .................................. 116

Description ............................................................ 116 . Component Function Check ............................... 116 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 116 .
MIRROR SENSOR .......................................... 119

DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 119 . DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 119 . DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ..... 119 . DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 119 . PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 121 . PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 121 . PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ............................... 121 . PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 121 .
ADP
POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ....95

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 95 .
SLIDING MOTOR ............................................ 124

Description ............................................................ 124 . Component Function Check ............................... 124 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 124 . Component Inspection .......................................... 125 .
TILT &TELESCOPIC SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ...................................................................96 .

DETENTION SWITCH .......................................97 .

RECLINING MOTOR ....................................... 126

Description ............................................................ 126 . Component Function Check ............................... 126 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 126 . Component Inspection .......................................... 127 . M
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH .............................99 .

Description ............................................................. 99 . Component Function Check ................................. 99 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 99 . Component Inspection ......................................... 100 .
LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) ............................. 128

Description ............................................................ 128 . Component Function Check ............................... 128 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 128 . Component Inspection .......................................... 129 . O
SLIDING SENSOR .......................................... 101 .

Description ........................................................... 101 . Component Function Check ............................... 101 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 101 .
LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) ............................... 130

Description ............................................................ 130 . Component Function Check ............................... 130 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 130 . Component Inspection .......................................... 131 .
RECLINING SENSOR ..................................... 104 .

Description ........................................................... 104 .
TILT MOTOR ................................................... 132

Description ............................................................ 132 .
ADP-3
2009 G37 Coupe
Component Function Check ...............................132 . Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................132 . Component Inspection ..........................................133 .
TELESCOPIC MOTOR ................................... 134 .

Description ............................................................134 . Component Function Check ...............................134 . Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................134 . Component Inspection ..........................................135 .
STEERING POSITION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE : Description ....................................... 212 . STEERING POSITION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 213 . SEAT SLIDING ....................................................... 213 . SEAT SLIDING : Description ............................... 213 . SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 213 . SEAT RECLINING .................................................. 213 . SEAT RECLINING : Description .......................... 213 . SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 214 . SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) ........................................ 214 . SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Description ................ 214 . SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure . 214 SEAT LIFTING (REAR) .......................................... 215 . SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Description .................. 215 . SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure ... 215 . STEERING TILT ..................................................... 215 . STEERING TILT : Description ............................. 215 . STEERING TILT : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 215 . STEERING TELESCOPIC ...................................... 216 . STEERING TELESCOPIC : Description .............. 216 . STEERING TELESCOPIC : Diagnosis Procedure. 216 DOOR MIRROR ...................................................... 216 . DOOR MIRROR : Description .............................. 217 . DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 217 .
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR ................................ 136 .

Description ............................................................136 . Component Function Check .................................136 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................136 . Component Inspection ..........................................137 .
SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR ......................... 139 .

Description ............................................................139 . Component Function Check ...............................139 . Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................139 .
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM .............................. 141 .

Wiring Diagram - DOOR MIRROR (WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) - ............................141 .
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 146 .

DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT (WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) .................... 146 .
Reference Value ...................................................146 . Wiring Diagram - AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM - ............................152 . Fail Safe ...............................................................161 . DTC Index ............................................................162 .
MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE.. 218

ALL COMPONENT ................................................. 218 . ALL COMPONENT : Description ......................... 218 . ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 218 . SEAT SLIDING ....................................................... 218 . SEAT SLIDING : Description ............................... 218 . SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 218 . SEAT RECLINING .................................................. 219 . SEAT RECLINING : Description .......................... 219 . SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 219 . SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) ........................................ 219 . SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Description ................ 219 . SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure . 219 SEAT LIFTING (REAR) .......................................... 220 . SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Description .................. 220 . SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure ... 220 . STEERING TELESCOPIC ...................................... 220 . STEERING TELESCOPIC : Description .............. 220 . STEERING TELESCOPIC : Diagnosis Procedure. 220 STEERING TILT ..................................................... 221 . STEERING TILT : Description ............................. 221 . STEERING TILT : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 221 . DOOR MIRROR ...................................................... 221 .
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT ..................................................... 163 .

Reference Value ...................................................163 . Wiring Diagram - AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM - ............................167 .
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ............... 177 .

Reference Value ...................................................177 . Wiring Diagram - BCM - .......................................200 . Fail-safe ................................................................205 . DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................207 . DTC Index ............................................................209 .
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 212 .

MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE. 212
ALL COMPONENT .................................................212 . ALL COMPONENT : Description ..........................212 . ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure ...........212 . POWER SEAT .........................................................212 . POWER SEAT : Description .................................212 . POWER SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure .................212 . STEERING POSITION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ...............................................................212 .
ADP-4
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR : Description .............................. 221 . DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 221 .
Service .................................................................. 228 . Work ..................................................................... 228 .
MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ............................................................... 222 .

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 222 .
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............ 230 .

DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .................... 230
Exploded View ...................................................... 230 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 230 . B
SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 223 .

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 231

Exploded View ...................................................... 231 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 231 .
POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ........................................................ 224 .

SEAT MEMORY SWITCH ............................... 232

Exploded View ...................................................... 232 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 232 . E
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 226 .

POWER SEAT SWITCH ................................. 233

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION .............. 227 .

Description ........................................................... 227 .
PRECAUTION ........................................... 228 .

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 228 .
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .............................................................. 228 . Precaution for Battery Service ............................. 228 .
SIDE SUPPORT SWITCH ............................... 234

TILT&TELESCOPIC SWITCH ........................ 235

ADP
ADP-5
2009 G37 Coupe
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW

< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
INFOID:0000000004535127
JMJIA2428GB
DETAILED FLOW
ADP-6
2009 G37 Coupe

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred).
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM

Check Self Diagnostic Result with CONSULT-III. Refer to ADP-162, "DTC Index" Is any symptom described and any DTC is displayed? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed.>>GO TO 3. Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed.>>GO TO 6. Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed.>>GO TO 4.
C D
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. >> GO TO 6.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. >> GO TO 5.
G
5.CHECK NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION

Check normal operating condition. Refer to ADP-227, "Description". Is the incident normal operation? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 7.
6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Perform the confirmation procedure for the detected DTC. Is the DTC displayed? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
ADP
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 8.
8.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

Perform the component function check for the isolated malfunctioning point. >> GO TO 9.
N O
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

Isolate the malfunctioning point by performing the diagnosis procedure relevant to the symptom during the component diagnosis. >> GO TO 10.
10.REPARE OR REPLACE
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
ADP-7
2009 G37 Coupe

< BASIC INSPECTION > >> GO TO 11.
11.FINAL CHECK
Perform the DTC confirmation procedure (if DTC is detected) or component function check (if no DTC is detected) again, and then check that the malfunction can be repaired securely. Are all malfunctions corrected? YES >> INSPECTION END Symptom is detected.>> GO TO 5. DTC is detected.>> GO TO 6.
ADP-8
2009 G37 Coupe
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description
Each function is reset to the following condition when the battery terminal is disconnected.
INFOID:0000000004535128
C
Function Memory (Seat, steering, mirror) Intelligent Key interlock Seat synchronization Condition Erased Erased OFF Procedure Perform memory storing Perform memory storing
NOTE: When disconnecting the battery terminal or replacing the driver seat control unit, DTC, registered items of memory storing, and details of system setting detected in the past are erased. Perform operation after checking the contents.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004535129
1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Perform system initialization. Refer to ADP-10, "SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description". >> GO TO 2.
2.SYSTEM SETTING
Perform system setting. Refer to ADP-11, "SYSTEM SETTING : Description". >> GO TO 3.
ADP
3.MEMORY STORING
Perform memory storing. Refer to ADP-10, "MEMORY STORING : Description". >> END
K
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000004535130
Each function is reset to the following condition when the driver seat control unit is replaced.
Function Memory (Seat, steering, mirror) Intelligent Key interlock Seat synchronization Condition Erased Erased OFF Procedure Perform memory storing Perform memory storing
NOTE: When disconnecting the battery terminal or replacing the driver seat control unit, DTC, registered items of memory storing, and details of system setting detected in the past are erased. Perform operation after checking the contents.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004535131
1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
ADP-9
2009 G37 Coupe

< BASIC INSPECTION > Perform system initialization. Refer to ADP-10, "SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description".
>> GO TO 2.
2.SYSTEM SETTING
Perform system setting. Refer to ADP-11, "SYSTEM SETTING : Description". >> GO TO 3.
3.MEMORY STORING
Perform memory storing. Refer to ADP-10, "MEMORY STORING : Description". >> END
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description
INFOID:0000000004535132
When disconnecting battery negative terminal or replacing control unit, always perform the system initialization. Otherwise, the backward operation for power walk-in function does not activate normally.
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Special Repair Requirement

INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
INFOID:0000000004535133
1. STEP-1
Slide the seat to the front edge. NOTE: STEP-1 is the initialization procedure for power walk-in function. If the seat sliding position is already at the front edge, slide the seat rearward once, and then slide it to the front edge again. >> END
MEMORY STORING
MEMORY STORING : Description
INFOID:0000000004636979
Always perform the memory storage when the battery terminal is disconnected or the driver seat control unit is replaced. The memory function and Intelligent Key interlock function will not operate normally if no memory storage is performed.
MEMORY STORING : Special Repair Requirement

Memory Storage Procedure
INFOID:0000000004636980
Two positions for the driver seat, steering column and outside mirror can be stored for memory operation by following procedure.
1.STEP 1
Shift AT selector lever to P position (AT model) or applied parking brake (MT model). >> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
Turn ignition switch ON. >> GO TO 3.
3.STEP 3
Adjust driver seat, steering column and outside mirror position manually.
ADP-10
2009 G37 Coupe

>> GO TO 4.
A
4.STEP 4
1. Push set switch. NOTE: Memory indicator for which driver seat position is already retained in memory is illuminated for 5 seconds. Memory indicator for which driver seat position is not retained in memory is illuminated for 0.5 second. 2. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) for at least 1 second within 5 seconds after pushing the set switch. NOTE: If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted. Do you need linking of Intelligent Key? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 5.
B
5.STEP 5
Confirm the operation of each part with memory operation. >> END
F
6.STEP 6
Turn ignition switch OFF (LOCK). >> GO TO 7.
7.STEP 7
I Press and release set switch. Memory switch indicator is illuminated for 5 seconds. During memory switch indicator is illuminated, press Intelligent Key unlock button while pressing memory switch 1 or 2. NOTE: Memory switch indicator lamp blinks for 5 seconds when registration is complete. ADP
>> GO TO 8.
8.STEP 8
Confirm the operation of each part with memory operation and Intelligent Key interlock operation. >> END
SYSTEM SETTING
SYSTEM SETTING : Description
The setting of the automatic driving positioner system can be changed using the set switch.
INFOID:0000000004535136
SYSTEM SETTING : Special Repair Requirement

SETTING PROCEDURE
N
INFOID:0000000004535137
1.STEP-1
Set the vehicle to the following condition. Ignition position: ACC A/T selector lever: P position (A/T models) Parking brake: Applied only (M/T models) >> GO TO 2.
2.STEP-2
Press set switch and hold for more than 10 seconds, then confirm blinking of the memory switch indicator.
ADP-11
2009 G37 Coupe

< BASIC INSPECTION > Seat synchronization are ON : Memory switch indicator blink two times. Seat synchronization are OFF : Memory switch indicator blink once. NOTE: After memory setting registration, by pushing set switch for approximately 10 seconds, memory switch indicator lamp turns 4 seconds. turns OFF, blinks 1 or 2 times, and then the switching operation is complete. Push and hold set switch during the switching operation.
>> END.
ADP-12
2009 G37 Coupe
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004535060
ADP
JMJIA2436GB
ADP-13
2009 G37 Coupe

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Description

OUTLINE
INFOID:0000000004535061
The system automatically moves the driver seat, steering column and door mirror position by the driver seat control unit and the automatic drive positioner control unit. The driver seat control unit corresponds with the automatic drive positioner control unit by UART communication.
Function Manual function Seat synchronization function Memory function Description The driving position (seat, steering column and door mirror position) can be adjusted by using the power seat switch, tilt & telescopic switch or door mirror remote control switch. The positions of the steering column and door mirror are adjusted to the proper position automatically while linking with manual operation [seat sliding, seat lifting (rear) or seat reclining]. The seat, steering column and outside mirror move to the stored driving position by pressing seat memory switch (1 or 2). The seat is made to advance when the seat back of driver seat is folded down and press the walkin switch. The seat is made to retreat to former position when the seat back of driver seat is folded up and press the walk-in switch. Perform memory operation, exiting operation and entry operation by Intelligent Key unlock operation or driver side door request switch unlock operation.
Power walk-in function
Intelligent Key interlock function
NOTE: The lumbar support system and the side support system are controlled independently with no link to the automatic drive positioner system.
ADP-14
2009 G37 Coupe

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000004535062
ADP
L
JMJIA2415ZZ
1. 4. 7.
BCM M118, M119, M122, M123 Unified meter and A/C amp. M67 Key slot M22
2. 5. 8.
Automatic drive positioner control unit 3. M51, M52 A/T assembly F51 Tilt sensor M48 6. 9.
Driver seat control unit B503, B504 Tilt & telescopic switch M31 Telescopic sensor M48
10. Seat memory switch D5 A. Dash side lower (passenger side)
11. Door mirror remote control switch D17 B. C. View with instrument driver lower panel removed (Remove 4WAS front control unit with 4WAS models) A/T assembly (TCM is built in A/T assembly) F. Backside of seat cushion (driver side)
D. G
Behind cluster lid C View with steering column cover lower and upper removed
E.
View with instrument driver lower panel removed
ADP-15
2009 G37 Coupe

JMJIA2416ZZ
12. Driver side door switch B16 15. Door mirror (driver side) D3 18. Forward switch B512 21. Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) B13 H. K. View with center console assembly is removed.
13. A/T shift selector (detention switch) M137 16. Telescopic motor M49 19. Sliding limit switch B514
14. Parking brake switch B14 17. Tilt motor M49 20. Power walk-in switch B513
I.
View with center console assembly is removed. View with seat cushion pad is removed.
J.
View with instrument driver lower panel is removed.
View with seat back pad is removed. L.
ADP-16
2009 G37 Coupe

A
E
JMJIA2455ZZ
F
22. Reclining motor B523 23. Reclining switch (Power seat switch) B510 26. Lifting motor (front) B527 24. Sliding, lifting switch (Power seat switch) B510 27. Sliding motor B525
25. Sliding sensor B526 28. Lifting motor (rear) B529 M.
View with seat cushion pad and seat- N. back pad are removed.
Backside of seat cushion
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : Component Description

CONTROL UNITS
INFOID:0000000004535063
ADP
Item Function Main units of automatic drive positioner system. It is connected to the CAN. It communicates with the automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication. It communicates with the driver seat control unit via UART communication. Perform various controls with the instructions of driver seat control unit. Perform the controls of the tilt & telescopic, door mirror and the seat memory switch. Transmit the following status to the driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Driver door: OPEN/CLOSE Ignition switch position: ACC/ON Door lock: UNLOCK (with Intelligent Key or driver side door request switch operation) Key ID Key switch: Insert/Pull out Intelligent Key Starter: CRANKING/OTHER Transmit the vehicle speed signal to the driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Transmit the shift position signal (P range) to the driver seat control unit via CAN communication.
Driver seat control unit
Automatic drive positioner control unit
BCM
Unified meter and A/C amp. TCM
INPUT PARTS
Switches
ADP-17
2009 G37 Coupe

Item Key slot Driver side door switch A/T shift selector (detention switch) Parking break switch Set switch Memory switch 1/2 Function The key switch is installed to detect the key inserted/removed status. Detect front door (driver side) open/close status. Detect the P range position of A/T selector lever. (A/T models) Detect the parking brake status. (M/T models) The registration and system setting can be performed with its operation. The registration and operation can be performed with its operation. The following switch is installed. Reclining switch Lifting switch (front) Lifting switch (rear) Sliding switch The specific parts can be operated with the operation of each switch. Perform the power walk-in operation by operating the power walk-in switch. Detect the front end position of seat sliding during the power walk-in function frontward operation. Detect the seat belt fastening/releasing condition. Detect the folded up/folded down condition of seatback that is the operation condition of power walk-in function. The following switch is installed. Tilt switch Telescopic switch The specific parts can be operated with the operation of each switch. The following switch is installed. Mirror switch Changeover switch The specific parts can be operated with the operation of each switch.
Power seat switch
Power walk-in switch Sliding limit switch Seat belt buckle switch Forward switch
Tilt & telescopic switch
Door mirror remote control switch
Sensors
Item Door mirror sensor (driver side/passenger side) Tilt & telescopic sensor Lifting sensor (front) Lifting sensor (rear) Reclining sensor Sliding sensor Function Detect the upward/downward and leftward/rightward position of outside mirror face. Detect the upward/downward and forward/backward position of steering column. Detect the upward/downward position of seat lifting (front). Detect the upward/downward position of seat lifting (rear). Detect the tilt of seatback. Detect the forward/backward position of seat.
OUTPUT PARTS
Item Door mirror motor (driver side/passenger side) Tilt & telescopic motor Lifting motor (front) Lifting motor (rear) Reclining motor Sliding motor Memory indicator Function Move the outside mirror face upward/downward and leftward/rightward. Move the steering column upward/downward and frontward/rearward. Move the seat lifting (front) upward/downward. Move the seat lifting (rear) upward/downward. Tilt and raise up the seatback. Slide the seat forward/backward. Illuminates or blinks according to the registration/operation status.
SLEEP MODE
The seat control unit adopts the sleep mode to reduce the electric power consumption.
ADP-18
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > The sleep mode is activated when all of the following condition are fulfilled. 1. Ignition switch turn OFF (steering LOCK position) 2. No load is applied to the seat control 3. The seat control unit 45seconds timer in not activated 4. Set switch and memory switch (1 and 2) turn OFF
WAKE-UP MODE
The sleep mode is cancelled when any status change is detected for the followings. 1. CAN communication 2. Power seat switch 3. Set switch and memory switch (1 and 2) 4. Power walk-in switch 5. Door mirror switch 6. Steering column switch
C
MANUAL FUNCTION
MANUAL FUNCTION : System Diagram
E
INFOID:0000000004535064
ADP
JMJIA2438GB
MANUAL FUNCTION : System Description

OUTLINE
INFOID:0000000004535065
The driving position (seat, steering column and door mirror position) can be adjusted manually with power seat switch, tilt & telescopic switch and door mirror remote control switch.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Operate power seat switch, tilt & telescopic switch or door mirror remote control switch. The driver seat, steering column or door mirror operates according to the operation of each switch.
DETAIL FLOW
Seat
ADP-19
2009 G37 Coupe

Order 1 Input Power seat switch (sliding, lifting, reclining) Output Motors (sliding, lifting, reclining) Control unit condition The power seat switch signal is inputted to the driver seat control unit when the power seat switch is operated. The driver seat control unit outputs signals to each motor according to the power seat switch input signal.
Tilt & Telescopic

Order 1 Input Tilt & telescopic switch Output Motors (Tilt, telescopic) Control unit condition The tilt & telescopic switch signals are inputted to the automatic drive positioner control unit when the tilt & telescopic switch are operated. The automatic drive positioner control unit actuates each motor according to the operation of the tilt & telescopic switch. The automatic drive positioner control unit recognizes any operation limit of each actuator via each sensor and will not operate the actuator anymore at that time.*
Sensors (Tilt, telescopic)
*: Tilt does not operates upward when tilt sensor value is less than 1.1 V, tilt does not operate downward when the sensor value is more than 3.9 V. Telescopic does not operates backward when telescopic sensor value is less than 0.5 V, telescopic does not operate forward when the sensor value is more than 4.5 V.
Door Mirror
Order 1 Input Door mirror remote control switch Sensors (Mirror) Output Motors (Door mirror motor) Control unit condition The door mirror remote control switch signal is inputted to the automatic drive positioner control unit when the door mirror remote control switch is operated. The automatic drive positioner control unit actuates each motor according to the signal from the door mirror remote control switch. The automatic drive positioner control unit monitors the input of mirror sensor. It stops the operation if the input reaches the operation limit.
NOTE: The door mirrors can be operated manually when ignition switch is in either ACC or ON position. The ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) is transmitted from BCM to the driver seat control unit via CAN communication and from the driver seat control unit to the automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication.
ADP-20
2009 G37 Coupe

MANUAL FUNCTION : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000004556335
ADP
L
JMJIA2415ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
D. G
E.
ADP-21
2009 G37 Coupe

JMJIA2416ZZ
I.
J.
ADP-22
2009 G37 Coupe

A
E
JMJIA2455ZZ
F
MANUAL FUNCTION : Component Description

CONTROL UNITS
INFOID:0000000004535067
ADP
Item Driver seat control unit Function Operates the specific seat motor with the signal from the power seat switch. Transmits the ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) via UART communication to the automatic drive positioner control unit. Operates the specific motor with the signal from tilt & telescopic switch or door mirror remote control switch. Recognizes the following status and transmits it to the driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Ignition position: ACC/ON
BCM
INPUT PARTS
Switches N
Item Function The following switch is installed. Reclining switch Lifting switch (front) Lifting switch (rear) Sliding switch The specific parts can be operated with the operation of each switch. The following switch is installed. Tilt switch Telescopic switch The specific parts can be operated with the operation of each switch.
Power seat switch
Tilt & telescopic switch
ADP-23
2009 G37 Coupe

Item Forward switch Function Detect folded down or folded up of the seat back. The following switch is installed. Mirror switch Changeover switch The specific parts can be operated with the operation of each switch.
Door mirror remote control switch
Sensors
Item Tilt & telescopic sensor Door mirror sensor (driver side / passenger side) Function Detect the upward/downward & forward/backward position of steering column. Detect the upward/downward and leftward/rightward position of outside mirror face.
OUTPUT PARTS
Item Door mirror motor (driver side/passenger side) Tilt & telescopic motor Lifting motor (front) Lifting motor (rear) Reclining motor Sliding motor Function Move the outside mirror face upward/downward and leftward/rightward. Move the steering column upward/downward and forward/backward. Move the seat lifter (front) upward/downward. Move the seat lifter (rear) upward/downward. Tilt and raise up the seatback. Slide the seat forward/backward.
SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION

SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION : System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004535068
JMJIA2435GB
SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION : System Description

OUTLINE
INFOID:0000000004535069
ADP-24
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > The steering column position and door mirror position is adjusted to the position automatically according to the direction and distance of seat movement when performing the manual operation of sliding, reclining or lifting (rear). This function saves adjusting the mirror and steering column when adjusting the seat. NOTE: This function is set to OFF before delivery. (initial setting) For the system setting procedure. Refer to ADP-11, "SYSTEM SETTING : Description".
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Adjust seat position [sliding, reclining, lifting (rear)]. 3. The steering and outside mirror is adjusted automatically. NOTE: The seat synchronization function will not operate if seat adjusting value is more than limit value.
Item Seat sliding Seat reclining Seat lifter (rear) Limit value 76 mm 9.1 degrees 20 mm
The seat synchronization function will not operate if the steering column or door mirror moves to the operating end while this function is operating. Perform memory function or drive the vehicle at vehicle speed of 7 km/h or more once to activate this function again. If the seat position is uncomfortable after the adjustment, seat position can be adjusted easily by memory operation.
OPERATION CONDITION
Satisfy all of the following items. The seat synchronization function is not performed if these items are not satisfied.
Item System setting Ignition position Seat back A/T selector lever (A/T models) Parking break (M/T models) Switch inputs Power seat switch Tilt & telescopic switch Door mirror remote control switch Set switch Memory switch Request status ON ON Folded up P position Applied
ADP
OFF (Not operated)
DETAIL FLOW
When performing the sliding, reclining or lifting (rear) operation in manual function, the driver seat control unit performs the seat synchronization function as follows.
Order 1 Input Sensors [Sliding, reclining, lifting (rear)] Output Control unit condition The driver seat control unit judges the direction and distance of seat movement according to the signal input from each seat sensor during manual operation. Driver seat control unit requests the operation to position according to the direction and distance of seat movement to the automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication. The automatic drive positioner control unit operates each motor. Driver seat control unit stops the operation of each motor when the value of each sensor that is input to automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication reaches the target address.
2 Sensors (Tilt, telescopic, outside mirror)
Motors (Tilt, telescopic, outside mirror)
ADP-25
2009 G37 Coupe

SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000004556336
JMJIA2415ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
D. G
E.
ADP-26
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
L
JMJIA2416ZZ
I.
J.
ADP-27
2009 G37 Coupe

JMJIA2455ZZ
22. Reclining motor B523
23. Reclining switch (Power seat switch) B510 26. Lifting motor (front) B527
24. Sliding, lifting switch (Power seat switch) B510 27. Sliding motor B525
SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION : Component Description

CONTROL UNITS
Item Driver seat control unit Automatic drive positioner control unit Function
INFOID:0000000004535071
Operates the specific seat motor with the signal from the power seat switch. Operates the steering motor and door mirror with the signal from the driver seat control unit.
INPUT PARTS
Switches
Item Function The following switch is installed. Reclining switch Lifting switch (front) Lifting switch (rear) Sliding switch The specific parts can be operated with the operation of each switch. Detect folded down or folded up of the seat back.
Power seat switch
Forward switch
Sensors
Item Door mirror sensor (driver side/passenger side) Tilt & telescopic sensor Lifting sensor (rear) Function Detect the upward/downward and leftward/rightward position of outside mirror face. Detect the upward/downward and forward/backward position of steering column. Detect the upward/downward position of seat lifter (rear).
ADP-28
2009 G37 Coupe

Item Reclining sensor Sliding sensor Detect the tilt of seatback. Detect the frontward/rearward position of seat. Function
OUTPUT PARTS
Item Door mirror motor (driver side/passenger side) Tilt & telescopic motor Lifting motor (rear) Reclining motor Sliding motor Function
C
Move the outside mirror face upward/downward and leftward/rightward. Move the steering column upward/downward and forward/backward. Move the seat lifter (rear) upward/downward. Tilt and raise up the seatback. Slide the seat forward/backward.
MEMORY FUNCTION
MEMORY FUNCTION : System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004535072
ADP
M
JMJIA2437GB
MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description

OUTLINE
N
INFOID:0000000004535073
The driver seat control unit can store the optimum driving positions (seat, steering column and door mirror position) for 2 people. If the front seat position is changed, one-touch (pressing desired memory switch for more than 0.5 second) operation allows changing to the other driving position. NOTE: Further information for the memory storing procedure. Refer to ADP-10, "MEMORY STORING : Description".
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON Press desired memory switch for more than 0.5 second. Driver seat, steering and door mirror will move to the memorized position.
OPERATION CONDITION
ADP-29
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Satisfy all of the following items. The memory function is not performed if these items are not satisfied.
Item Ignition position Seat back A/T selector lever (A/T models) Parking break (M/T models) Switch inputs Power seat switch Tilt & telescopic switch Door mirror control switch Set switch Memory switch Request status ON Folded up P position Applied
OFF (Not operated)
DETAIL FLOW
Order Input Output Control unit condition The memory switch signal is inputted to the automatic drive positioner control unit when memory switch 1 or 2 is operated. Memory switch signal is output to driver seat control unit via UART communication. Driver seat control unit operates each motor of seat when it recognizes the memory switch pressed for 0.5 second or more and requests each motor operation to automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication. The automatic drive positioner control unit operates each motor. Driver seat control unit requests the flashing of memory indicator to automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication while either of the motors is operating. The automatic drive positioner control unit illuminates the memory indicator. Driver seat control unit judges the operating seat position with each seat sensor input. The positions of the steering column and outside mirror are monitored with each sensor signal that is input from auto drive positioner control unit via UART communication. Driver seat control unit stops the operation of each motor when each part reaches the recorded address. Driver seat control unit requests the illumination of memory indicator to auto drive positioner control unit via UART communication after all motors stop. The auto driving positioner control unit illuminates the memory indicator for 5 seconds.
Memory switch
Motors (Seat, steering, door mirror) 2 Memory switch Indicator
Sensors (Seat, steering, door mirror)
Memory switch Indicator
ADP-30
2009 G37 Coupe

MEMORY FUNCTION : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000004556337
ADP
L
JMJIA2415ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
D. G
E.
ADP-31
2009 G37 Coupe

JMJIA2416ZZ
I.
J.
ADP-32
2009 G37 Coupe

A
E
JMJIA2455ZZ
F
MEMORY FUNCTION : Component Description

CONTROL UNITS
INFOID:0000000004535075
ADP
Item Function The address of each part is recorded. Operates each motor of seat to the registered position. Requests the operations of steering column and door mirror to automatic drive positioner control unit Operates the steering column and door mirror with the signal from the driver seat control.
INPUT PARTS
Switches
Item Memory switch 1/2 Forward switch Function The registration and memory function can be performed with its operation. Detect folded down or folded up of the seat back.
Sensors
Item Door mirror sensor (driver side/passenger side) Tilt & telescopic sensor Lifting sensor (front) Lifting sensor (rear) Function Detect the upward/downward and leftward/rightward position of outside mirror face. Detect the upward/downward and forward/backward position of steering column. Detect the upward/downward position of seat lifting (front). Detect the upward/downward position of seat lifting (rear).
ADP-33
2009 G37 Coupe

Item Reclining sensor Sliding sensor Detect the tilt of seatback. Detect the forward/backward position of seat. Function
OUTPUT PARTS
Item Door mirror motor (driver side/passenger side) Tilt & telescopic motor Lifting motor (front) Lifting motor (rear) Reclining motor Sliding motor Memory indicator Function Move the outside mirror face upward/downward and leftward/rightward. Move the steering column upward/downward and forward/backward. Move the seat lifter (front) upward/downward. Move the seat lifter (rear) upward/downward. Tilt and raise up the seatback. Slide the seat forward/backward. Illuminates or blinks according to the registration/operation status.
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION

INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004535076
JMJIA0117GB
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Description

OUTLINE
INFOID:0000000004535077
When unlocking doors by using Intelligent Key or driver side door request switch, the system performs memory operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Unlock doors by using Intelligent Key or driver side door request switch. 2. The system performs memory operation, and then performs exit assist operation. NOTE: If the seat position is in memorized position before unlocking doors, memory operation does not perform. NOTE:
ADP-34
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Further information for Intelligent Key interlock function. Refer to ADP-10, "MEMORY STORING : Description".
OPERATION CONDITION
Satisfy all of the following items. The Intelligent Key interlock function is performed if these items are satisfied.
B
Item Key switch Ignition position Seat back A/T selector lever (A/T models) Parking break (M/T models) Switch inputs Power seat switch Tilt & telescopic switch Door mirror control switch Set switch Memory switch Request status OFF (Key is removed.) LOCK Folded up P position Applied
E
OFF (Not operated)
DETAIL FLOW
Order 1 2 Input Door unlock signal (CAN) Key ID signal (CAN) Output Control unit condition Driver seat control unit receives the door unlock signal and the key ID signal from BCM when unlocking the door with Intelligent Key or driver side door request switch. Driver seat control unit performs the memory function.
ADP
ADP-35
2009 G37 Coupe

INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000004556338
JMJIA2415ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
D. G
E.
ADP-36
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
L
JMJIA2416ZZ
I.
J.
ADP-37
2009 G37 Coupe

JMJIA2455ZZ
22. Reclining motor B523
23. Reclining switch (Power seat switch) B510 26. Lifting motor (front) B527
24. Sliding, lifting switch (Power seat switch) B510 27. Sliding motor B525
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : Component Description

CONTROL UNITS
Item Driver seat control unit Automatic drive positioner control unit Function
INFOID:0000000004535079
It performs memory function after receiving the door unlock signal from BCM. Operates the steering column and door mirror with the instructions from the driver seat control unit. Recognizes the following status and transmits it to the driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Door lock: UNLOCK (with Intelligent Key or driver side door request swtich)
BCM
POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION
ADP-38
2009 G37 Coupe

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004535080
H
JMJIA2396GB
POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description

OUTLINE
INFOID:0000000004535081
Slide the driver seat automatically with the power walk-in switch operation so as to easily facilitate the entry to ADP the rear seat.
Forward Operation Slide (forward) the driver seat to the front end position (sliding limit switch: ON) by operating the power walk-in switch when the seatback is folded down. The forward operation is stopped by folding the seatback (forward switch: OFF) during the forward operation. Backward Operation The seat back is folded up after performing the forward operation of power walk-in function. Slide (backward) it to the position before performing the forward operation by operating the power walk-in switch. If the manual operation, memory operation, and Intelligent Key interlock operation are performed after performing the forward operation, do not perform the backward operation. K
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Forward Operation N
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Open driver door. Pull the walk-in lever on the upper part of seatback, and then the seatback is folded down. Press the power walk-in switch. Slide the seat to the front end position. Open driver door. Fold up the seatback after performing the forward operation. Press the power walk-in switch. Slide the seat to the previous position before the forward operation was performed.
Backward Operation
OPERATION CONDITION
Perform the power walk-in function when the following conditions are satisfied.
ADP-39
2009 G37 Coupe

Forward Operation
Item Driver side door Driver side seat belt Power seat switch (sliding) Vehicle speed Seat position (sliding) Seat back Request status Open Not fastened Not operated 0 km/h Other than front end Folded down
Backward Operation
Item Initialize Driver side seat belt Switch inputs Power seat switch (sliding) Set switch Memory switch Vehicle speed Seat position (sliding) Seat back Request status Done Not fastened
Not operated
0 km/h The seat sliding position will not move after performing the forward operation. Folded up
DETAIL FLOW
Forward Operation
Order 1 Inputs Forward switch Outputs Control unit condition Driver seat control unit detects that the seatback is folded down by the signal from the forward switch. The operation signal is inputted to the driver seat control unit when the power walk-in switch is operated. Driver seat control unit operates the seat sliding motor forward when it detects that the power walkin switch is operated. Driver seat control unit stops the seat sliding motor when it detects that the seat sliding reaches the front end position by the sliding limit switch.
Power walk-in switch
Sliding motor (forward)
Sliding limit switch
Backward Operation
Order 1 Inputs Forward switch Outputs Control unit condition Driver seat control unit detects that the seatback is folded up by the signal from the forward switch. The operation signal is inputted to the driver seat control unit when the power walk-in switch is operated. Driver seat control unit operates the sliding motor backward when it detects that the power walk-in switch is operated. Driver seat control unit stops the seat sliding motor when the seat sliding position reaches the position before performing the forward operation by the signal from sliding sensor.
Sliding motor (backward)
Sliding sensor
ADP-40
2009 G37 Coupe

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000004556339
ADP
L
JMJIA2415ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
D. G
E.
ADP-41
2009 G37 Coupe

JMJIA2416ZZ
I.
J.
ADP-42
2009 G37 Coupe

A
E
JMJIA2455ZZ
F
POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Description

CONTROL UNITS
INFOID:0000000004535083
ADP
Item Function Main units of automatic drive positioner system It is connected to the CAN. It communicates with the automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication. Transmit the following status to the driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Driver door: OPEN/CLOSE Starter: CRANKING/OTHER Transmit the vehicle speed signal to the driver seat control unit via CAN communication.
BCM
Unified meter and A/C amp.
INPUT PARTS
Switches
Item Front door switch (driver side) Power walk-in switch Sliding limit switch Seat belt buckle switch Forward switch Function Detect front door (driver side) open/close status. Perform the power walk-in operation by operating the power walk-in switch. Detect the front end position of seat sliding during the power walk-in function frontward operation. Detect the seat belt fastening/releasing condition. Detect the folded up/folded down condition of seatback that is the operation condition of power walk-in function.
Sensors
ADP-43
2009 G37 Coupe

Item Sliding sensor Function Detect the forward/backward position of seat.
OUTPUT PARTS
Item Sliding motor Slide the seat forward/backward. Function
ADP-44
2009 G37 Coupe
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT C/U)


Diagnosis Description
INFOID:0000000004535084
The automatic drive positioner system can be checked and diagnosed for component operation using CONSULT-III.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
C
Diagnostic mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ACTIVE TEST ECU PART NUMBER Description Performs self-diagnosis for the auto drive positioner system and displays the results. Displays input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors to driver seat control unit in real time. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. Drives each output device. Displays part numbers of driver seat control unit.
INFOID:0000000004535085
CONSULT-III Function
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Refer to ADP-162, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item SET SW MEMORY SW 1 MEMORY SW 2 SLIDE SWFR*
3
Unit ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

3
Main Signals
Selection From Menu
H
Contents ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal. ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal. ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal. ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (forward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (backward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (forward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (backward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (upward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (downward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (upward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (downward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (upward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (downward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (passenger side) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (driver side) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to right) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to left) signal.
ADP
SLIDE SWRR*3 RECLN SWFR*3 RECLN SWRR*3 LIFT FR SWUP*
ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
LIFT FR SWDN*3 LIFT RR SWUP*3 LIFT RR SWDN*3 MIR CON SWUP MIR CON SWDN MIR CON SWRH MIR CON SWLH MIR CHNG SWR MIR CHNG SWL
ADP-45
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item TILT SW-UP TILT SW-DOWN TELESCO SW-FR TELESCO SW-RR FORWARD SW*3 WALK-IN SW*3 FWD LIMIT SW*3 SEAT BELT SW*3 DETENT SW*1 PARK BRAKE SW*2 STARTER SW Unit ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Main Signals Selection From Menu Contents ON/OFF status judged from the tilt switch (upward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the tilt switch (downward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the telescoping switch (forward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the telescoping switch (backward) signal. ON/OFF status judged from the forward switch signal. ON/OFF status judged from the power walk-in switch signal. ON/OFF status judged from the sliding limit switch signal. ON/OFF status judged from the seat belt buckle switch signal. The selector lever position OFF (P position) / ON (other than the P position) judged from the detention switch signal. The parking brake condition ON (applied) / OFF (release) judged from the parking brake switch signal. Ignition key switch ON (START, ON) /OFF (ACC, OFF) status judged from the ignition switch signal. Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases. Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases. Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) upward/ downward is displayed. Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) leftward/ rightward is displayed. Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) upward/downward is displayed. Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) leftward/rightward is displayed. Voltage input from tilt sensor upward/downward is displayed. Voltage input from telescopic sensor forward/backward is displayed.
SLIDE PULSE*3
RECLN PULS*4
LIFT FR PULSE*4 LIFT RR PULSE*4 MIR/SEN RH UD MIR/SEN RH RL MIR/SEN LH UD MIR/SEN LH RL TILT SEN TELESCO SEN
*1: *2
V V V V V V
M/T models display all item except this item.
: A/T models display all item except this item. Only this item is displayed for driver seat without automatic drive positioner system. It is displayed but is not operated for models with driver seat without automatic driver positioner system.
*3: *4:
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION: When driving vehicle, never perform active test.
Test item SEAT SLIDE SEAT RECLINING Activates/deactivates the sliding motor. Activates/deactivates the reclining motor. Description
ADP-46
2009 G37 Coupe

Test item SEAT LIFTER FR SEAT LIFTER RR TILT MOTOR* TELESCO MOTOR* MIRROR MOTOR RH* MIRROR MOTOR LH* MEMORY SW INDCTR* Description Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (front). Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (rear). Activates/deactivates the tilt motor. Activates/deactivates the telescopic motor. Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (passenger side). Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (driver side). Turns ON/OFF the memory indicator.
*: Does not display without automatic driver position system.
ADP
ADP-47
2009 G37 Coupe
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
Description
INFOID:0000000004534910
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name CAN COMM CIRCUIT DTC detecting condition Driver seat control unit cannot communicate to other control units. Driver seat control unit cannot communicate for more than the specified time.
INFOID:0000000004534911
Possible cause Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted)
U1000
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.STEP 1
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 3 seconds or more. 2. Check Self diagnostic result using CONSULT-III. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-48, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
INFOID:0000000004534912
Special Repair Requirement

Refer to ADP-10, "SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description".
INFOID:0000000004534913
ADP-48
2009 G37 Coupe
B2112 SLIDING MOTOR

B2112 SLIDING MOTOR

Description
The seat sliding motor is installed to the seat cushion frame. The seat sliding motor is installed with the driver seat control unit. Slides the seat frontward/ rearward by changing the rotation direction of sliding motor.
INFOID:0000000004534914
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE: First perform diagnosis for B2126 if B2126 is detected.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name SEAT SLIDE DTC detecting condition The driver seat control unit detects the output of sliding motor output terminal for 0.1 second or more even if the sliding switch is not input.
INFOID:0000000004534915
Possible cause Driver seat control unit Slide motor harness is power shorted
B2112

1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check Self diagnostic result using CONSULT-III. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-49, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END
I
INFOID:0000000004534916
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT (POWER SHORT)

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding motor and driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground.
(+) Sliding motor Connector B525 Terminals 35 42 Ground 0 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. 2. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Driver seat control unit Connector B525 Terminals 35 42 Ground 0 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal?

ADP-49
2009 G37 Coupe
B2112 SLIDING MOTOR

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation"
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". >> INSPECTION END
ADP-50
2009 G37 Coupe
B2113 RECLINING MOTOR


Description
The seat reclining motor is installed to the seatback frame. The seat reclining motor is activated with the driver seat control unit. Tilts the seatback frontward/rearward by changing the rotation direction of reclining motor.
INFOID:0000000004534917
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE: First perform diagnosis for B2126 if B2126 is detected.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name SEAT RECLINING DTC detecting condition The driver seat control unit detects the output of reclining motor output terminal for 0.1 second or more even if the reclining switch is not input.
INFOID:0000000004534918
Possible cause Driver seat control unit Reclining motor harness is power shorted
B2113
1.PEFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Diagnosis Procedure
I
INFOID:0000000004534919
1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT (POWER SHORT)

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect reclining motor and driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.
(+) Reclining motor Connector B523 Terminals 15 71 Ground 0 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. 2. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Driver seat control unit Connector B523 Terminals 15 71 Ground 0 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)

ADP-51
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation".

ADP-52
2009 G37 Coupe
B2118 TILT SENSOR

B2118 TILT SENSOR

Description
INFOID:0000000004534920
The tilt sensor is installed to the steering column assembly. The resistance of tilt sensor is changed according to the up/down position of steering column. The terminal voltage of automatic drive positioner control unit will be changed according to a change of tilt sensor resistance. Automatic drive positioner control unit calculates the tilt position from the voltage.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition
INFOID:0000000004534921
D
Possible cause
E
The input voltage of tilt sensor is less then 0.1V or more than 4.9V. Harness and connectors (Tilt sensor circuit is opened/ shorted, tilt sensor power supply circuit is opened/shorted.) Tilt sensor
B2118
TILT SENSOR

I
INFOID:0000000004534922
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK TILT SENSOR SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select TILT SEN in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check tilt sensor signal under the following condition.
Monitor item TILT SEN Tilt position Condition Value Change between 1.1 V (close to top) 3.9 V (close to bottom)
ADP
Is the value normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TILT SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and tilt & telescopic sensor connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and tilt & telescopic sensor harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 7 Tilt & telescopic sensor Connector M48 Terminal 3 Continuity Existed
4.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
ADP-53
2009 G37 Coupe
B2118 TILT SENSOR

Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 7 Ground Continuity Not existed
3.CHECK TILT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. Connect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between tilt & telescopic sensor harness connector and ground.
(+) Tilt & telescopic sensor Connector M48 Terminal 1 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TILT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and tilt & telescopic sensor harness connector.
4.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer toADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK TILT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace tilt & telescopic sensor. NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
ADP-54
2009 G37 Coupe
B2118 TILT SENSOR

>> INSPECTION END
A
ADP
ADP-55
2009 G37 Coupe
B2119 TELESCOPIC SENSOR


Description
INFOID:0000000004534923
The telescopic sensor is installed to the steering column assembly. The resistance of telescopic sensor is changed according to the forward/backward position of steering column. The terminal voltage of automatic drive positioner control unit will be changed according to a change of telescopic sensor resistance. Automatic drive positioner control unit calculates the telescopic position from the voltage.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004534924
Possible cause Harness and connectors (Telescopic sensor circuit is opened/shorted, telescopic sensor power supply circuit is opened/shorted.) Telescopic sensor
B2119
TELESCOPIC SENSOR
The input voltage of telescopic sensor is less than 0.1V or more than 4.9V.

1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check Self diagnostic result using CONSULT-III. Is the DTC is detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-56, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534925
1.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select TELESCO SEN in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check the tilt sensor signal under the following condition.
Monitor item TELESCO SEN Condition Telescopic position Value Change between 0.5 V (close to top) 4.5 V (close to bottom)
Is the valve normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR CIRCUIT

4.
ADP-56
2009 G37 Coupe

3.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

4.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 33 Tilt & telescopic sensor Connector M48 Terminal 1 Continuity
ADP
Existed
4.
K
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 41 Tilt & telescopic sensor Connector M48 Terminal 4 Continuity
P
Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace tilt & telescopic sensor. NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
ADP-57
2009 G37 Coupe

>> INSPECTION END
ADP-58
2009 G37 Coupe
B2126 DETENT SW
B2126 DETENT SW
Description
INFOID:0000000004534926
Detention switch is installed on A/T shift selector. It is turned OFF when the A/T selector lever is in P position. The driver seat control unit judges that the A/T selector lever is in P position if continuity does not exist in this circuit.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004534927
D
Possible cause
E
Selector lever is in P position and the vehicle speed of 74 km/h is detected. Harness and connectors (Detention switch circuit is opened/shorted.) Detention switch Unified meter and A/C amp. (CAN communication)
B2126
DETENT SW

1. Drive the vehicle at 74 km/h or more. 2. Check Self diagnostic result using CONSULT-III. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-59, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END
H
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534928
ADP
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

Check Self diagnostic result for BCM using CONSULT-III. Is the either DTC B2601,B2602, B2603, B2604 or B2605 detected? YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BCS-76, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK DTC WITH METER/M&A

Check Self diagnostic result for METER/M&A using CONSULT-III. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to MWI-81, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DETENTION SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select DETENT SW in the Data Monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check detention switch signal under the following condition.
Monitor item DETENT SW selector lever Condition P position Other than above Status OFF ON
Is the status normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DETENTION SWITCH CIRCUIT

ADP-59
2009 G37 Coupe
B2126 DETENT SW
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and A/T shift selector connector. 3. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and A/T shift selector harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 21 A/T shift selector Connector M137 Terminal 11 Continuity Existed
4.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 21 Ground Continuity Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer toADP-230, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.

ADP-60
2009 G37 Coupe
B2127 PARKING BRAKE SWITCH


Description
INFOID:0000000004534929
Parking brake switch is installed on parking brake lever. It is turned ON when the parking brake is applied. The driver seat control unit judges that the parking brake is engaged if continuity exists in this circuit.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004534930
Possible cause Harness and connectors (Parking brake switch circuit is opened/shorted.) Parking brake switch Combination meter (CAN communication) Driver seat control unit
B2127
PARKING BRAKE
Parking brake is engaged and the vehicle speed of 7 km/h (4MPH) or more is detected.
1.STEP 1
1. Drive the vehicle at 7 km/h (4 MPH) or more. 2. Check Self Diagnostic Result using CONSULT-III. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-61, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END
I
INFOID:0000000004534931
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select PARK BRAKE SW in the Data Monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check parking brake switch signal under the following condition.
Monitor item PARK BRAKE SW Parking brake Condition Applied Release Status ON OFF
ADP
Is the status normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect parking brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between parking brake switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Parking brake switch Connector B14 Terminal 1 Ground Battery voltage (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.)

ADP-61
2009 G37 Coupe

3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH HARNESS CONTINUITY

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and parking brake switch connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and parking brake switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 8 Parking brake switch Connector B14 Terminal 1 Continuity Existed
4.
4.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Refer to ADP-62, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Adjust or replace parking brake switch.

Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000004534932

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect parking brake switch connector. Check continuity between parking brake switch terminal and ground part of parking brake switch.
Terminal Parking brake switch 1 Ground part of parking brake switch Parking brake Condition Applied Other than above Continuity Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Adjust or replace parking brake switch.
ADP-62
2009 G37 Coupe
B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE

B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE

Description
INFOID:0000000004534933
Driver seat control unit performs UART communication with the automatic drive positioner control unit using 2 communication lines, TX and RX line. Driver seat control unit receives the operation signals of tilt & telescopic switch, door mirror remote control switch, set switch and memory switch and the position signals of tilt & telescopic sensor and door mirror sensor from the automatic drive positioner control unit and transmits the operation request signal.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004534934
Possible cause UART communication line (UART communication line is open or shorted) Driver seat control unit Automatic drive positioner control unit
B2128
UART COMM
The communication between driver seat control unit and auto drive positioner control unit is interrupted for a period of time.

1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Operate tilt & telescopic switch for more than 2 seconds. 3. Check Self diagnostic result using CONSULT-III. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-63, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END
H
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534935
ADP
1.CHECK UART COMMUNICATION LINE CONTINUITY

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 1 17 Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 10 26 Continuity
Existed
4.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 1 17 Ground Not existed Continuity
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace harness.
ADP-63
2009 G37 Coupe
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


BCM
BCM : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534936
1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown.
Signal name Battery power supply Fuse and fusible link No. K (40A) 10 (10A)
Is the fuse fusing? YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is blown. NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+) BCM Connector M118 M119 Terminal 1 11 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (Approx.)
Is the measurement value normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM Connector M119 Terminal 13 Ground Continuity Existed
Does continuity exist? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector.
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT

DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534937
NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery negative terminal and the driver seat control unit connector until DTC is confirmed using CONSULT-III.

1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
ADP-64
2009 G37 Coupe

(+) Driver seat control unit Connector B504 Terminal 33 40 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
B
Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check the following. Repair or replace harness between driver seat control unit and fuse block (J/B). Circuit breaker.

Check continuity between the driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 B504 Terminal 32 48 Ground Existed Continuity
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness.
H
INFOID:0000000004534938
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement
1.PERFORM ADDITIONAL SERVICE

Perform additional service when removing battery negative terminal. >> Refer to ADP-64, "DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
ADP
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534939
NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery negative terminal and the driver seat control unit connector until DTC is confirmed using CONSULT-III.

1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 34 39 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO - 1 >> Repair or replace harness between automatic drive positioner control unit and fuse block (J/B). NO - 2 >> Check circuit breaker.

Check continuity between the automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
ADP-65
2009 G37 Coupe

Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 40 48 Ground Existed Continuity
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement

INFOID:0000000004534940
1.PERFORM ADDITIONAL SERVICE

Perform additional service when removing battery negative terminal. >> Refer to ADP-9, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description".
ADP-66
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIDING SWITCH
SLIDING SWITCH
Description
INFOID:0000000004534941
Sliding switch is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface. The operation signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the sliding switch is operated.
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000004534942
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select SLIDE SW-FR, SLIDE SW-RR in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check sliding switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item SLIDE SW-FR Sliding switch (forward) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Status ON OFF ON OFF
SLIDE SW-RR
Sliding switch (backward)
Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-67, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534943
1.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Power seat switch Connector B510 Terminal 11 26 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 11 26 Power seat switch Connector B510 Terminal 11 26 Continuity
Existed
4.
ADP-67
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIDING SWITCH
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH

Refer to ADP-68, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-233, "Removal and Installation".

INFOID:0000000004534944

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch connector. Check continuity between power seat switch terminals.
Power seat switch Terminal 11 32 26 Sliding switch (forward) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
Sliding switch (backward)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-233, "Removal and Installation".
ADP-68
2009 G37 Coupe
RECLINING SWITCH
RECLINING SWITCH
Description
INFOID:0000000004534945
Reclining switch is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface. The operation signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the reclining switch is operated.
INFOID:0000000004534946
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select RECLN SW-FR, RECLN SW-RR in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check reclining switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item RECLINE SW-FR Reclining switch (forward) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Status ON OFF ON OFF
RECLINE SW-RR
Reclining switch (backward)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534947
1.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH SIGNAL

ADP
2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT

Existed
4.
ADP-69
2009 G37 Coupe
RECLINING SWITCH
3.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH


INFOID:0000000004534948

Power seat switch Terminal 12 32 27 Reclining switch (forward) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
Reclining switch (backward)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer toADP-233, "Removal and Installation".
ADP-70
2009 G37 Coupe
LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)


Description
INFOID:0000000004534949
Lifting switch (front) is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface. The operation signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the lifting switch (front) is operated.
INFOID:0000000004534950
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select LIFT FR SW-UP, LIFT FR SW-DN in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check lifting switch (front) signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item LIFT FR SW-UP Lifting switch front (up) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Status ON OFF ON OFF
LIFT FR SW-DN
Lifting switch front (down)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534951
1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH SIGNAL

ADP
2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT

Existed
4.
ADP-71
2009 G37 Coupe

3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)


INFOID:0000000004534952

Power seat switch Terminal 13 32 28 Lifting switch front (up) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
ADP-72
2009 G37 Coupe
LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)


Description
INFOID:0000000004534953
Lifting switch (rear) is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface. The operation signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the lifting switch (rear) is operated.
INFOID:0000000004534954
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select LIFT RR SW-UP, LIFT RR SW-DN in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check lifting switch (rear) signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item LIFT RR SW-UP Lifting switch rear (up) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Status ON OFF ON OFF
LIFT RR SW-DN
Lifting switch rear (down)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534955
1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) SIGNAL

ADP
2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT

Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 14 29 Power sear switch Connector B510 Terminal 14 29 Continuity
Existed
4.
ADP-73
2009 G37 Coupe

3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)


INFOID:0000000004534956

Power seat switch Terminal 14 32 29 Lifting switch rear (up) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
ADP-74
2009 G37 Coupe
FORWARD SWITCH
FORWARD SWITCH
Description Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000004534957
Forward switch is installed on the seat back frame. Forward switch detects condition of seat back.
INFOID:0000000004534958
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. Select FORWARD SW in the Data Monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check the forward switch signal under the following condition.
Test item FORWARD SW Driver side seat back Condition Folded up Folded down Status ON OFF
F
INFOID:0000000004534959
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect forward switch harness connector. Check voltage between forward switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Forward switch Connector B512 Terminal 41 Ground Seat back is folded up and power walk-in switch pressed () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
5
2.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and forward switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B504 Terminal 41 Connector B512 Forward switch Terminal 41 Continuity
N
Existed
3.
O
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation" NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.FORWARD SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between forward switch harness connector and ground.
ADP-75
2009 G37 Coupe
FORWARD SWITCH
Forward switch Connector B512 Terminal 32 Ground Continuity Existed
4.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH

Refer to ADP-76, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace forward switch (Built in seat back frame). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

INFOID:0000000004534960

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect forward switch connector. Check continuity between forward switch terminals.
Forward switch Connector B512 41 Terminal 32 Condition Driver side seat back Folded up Folded down Continuity Not existed Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace forward switch (Built in seat back frame). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
ADP-76
2009 G37 Coupe
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH


INFOID:0000000004534961
Seat belt buckle switch is installed in seat belt buckle. Seat belt buckle switch detects condition of seat belt.
INFOID:0000000004534962
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. Select SEAT BELT SW in the Data Monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check the seat belt buckle switch signal under the following condition.
Test item SEAT BELT SW Driver side seat belt Condition Fastened Released Status ON OFF
Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-77, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
INFOID:0000000004534963
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch harness connector. Check voltage between seat belt buckle switch harness connector harness connector and ground.
(+) Seat belt buckle switch Connector B13 Terminal 1 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and seat belt buckle switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 5 Seat belt buckle switch Connector B13 Terminal 1 Continuity Existed
3.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 5 Ground
O
Continuity Not existed
3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch harness connector and ground.
ADP-77
2009 G37 Coupe

Seat belt buckle switch Connector B13 Terminal 2 Ground Continuity Existed
4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH

Refer to ADP-78, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (Built in seat belt buckle). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

INFOID:0000000004534964

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch connector. Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch terminals.
Seat belt buckle switch Connector B13 1 Terminal 2 Condition Driver side seat belt Fastened Released Continuity Not existed Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (Built in seat belt buckle). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
ADP-78
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH


INFOID:0000000004534965
Sliding limit switch is installed on seat cushion frame. Sliding limit switch detects condition of seat sliding.
INFOID:0000000004534966
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. Select FWD LIMIT SW in the Data Monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check the sliding limit switch signal under the following condition.
Test item FWD LIMIT SW Seat sliding Condition Front edge Other than above Status ON OFF
Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to ADP-79, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
INFOID:0000000004534967
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding limit switch harness connector. Check voltage between sliding limit switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Sliding limit switch Connector B514 Terminal 4 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding limit switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 4 Sliding limit switch Connector B514 Terminal 4 Continuity Existed
3.
O
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation" NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between sliding limit switch harness connector and ground.
ADP-79
2009 G37 Coupe

Sliding limit switch Connector B514 Terminal 32 Ground Continuity Existed
4.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH

Refer to ADP-80, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace forward switch (Built in seat back frame). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

INFOID:0000000004534968

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding limit switch connector. Check continuity between sliding limit switch terminals.
Sliding limit switch Connector B514 4 Terminal 32 Seat sliding Condition Front edge Other than above Continuity Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace forward switch (Built in seat back frame). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
ADP-80
2009 G37 Coupe
POWER WALK-IN SWITCH


Description
INFOID:0000000004534969
Power walk-in switch is installed on seat back. The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when power walk-in switch is operated.
INFOID:0000000004534970
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. Select WALK-IN SW in the Data Monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check the power walk-in switch signal under the following condition.
Test item WALK-IN SW Power walk-in switch Condition Pressed Released Status ON OFF
Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534971
1.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power walk-in switch harness connector. Check voltage between power walk-in switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Power walk-in switch Connector B513 Terminal 30 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and power walk-in switch connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power walk-in switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 30 Power walk-in switch Connector B513 Terminal 30 Continuity
N
Existed
3.
O
3.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between power walk-in switch harness connector and ground.
ADP-81
2009 G37 Coupe

Power walk-in switch Connector B513 Terminal 32 Ground Continuity Existed
4.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH

Refer to ADP-82, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace power walk-in switch (Built in walk-in lever). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

INFOID:0000000004534972

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power walk-in switch connector. Check continuity between power walk-in switch terminals.
Power walk-in switch Connector B513 30 Terminal 32 Power walk-in switch Condition Pressed Released Continuity Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace power walk-in switch (Built in walk-in lever). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
ADP-82
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT SWITCH
TILT SWITCH
Description
INFOID:0000000004534973
Tilt switch is equipped to the steering column. The operation signal is input to the automatic drive positioner control unit when the tilt switch is operated.
INFOID:0000000004534974
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select TILT SW-UP, TILT SW-DN in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check tilt switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item TILT SW-UP Tilt switch (up) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Status ON OFF ON OFF
TILT SW-DN
Tilt switch (down)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534975
1.CHECK TILT SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect tilt & telescopic switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between tilt & telescopic switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Tilt & telescopic switch Connector M31 Terminal 4 5 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK TILT SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and tilt & telescopic switch harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 1 17 Tilt & telescopic switch Connector M31 Terminal 4 5 Continuity
Existed
4.
ADP-83
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT SWITCH
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 1 17 Ground Not existed Continuity
3.CHECK TILT SWITCH

Refer to ADP-84, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace tilt & telescopic switch. Refer to ADP-235, "Removal and Installation".

INFOID:0000000004534976
1.CHECK TILT SWITCH

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect tilt & telescopic switch connector. Check continuity between tilt & telescopic switch terminals.
Tilt & telescopic switch Terminal 4 1 5 Tilt switch (down) Tilt switch (up) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace tilt & telescopic switch. Refer toADP-235, "Removal and Installation".
ADP-84
2009 G37 Coupe
TELESCOPIC SWITCH
TELESCOPIC SWITCH
Description
INFOID:0000000004534977
Telescopic switch is equipped to the steering column. The operation signal is input to the automatic drive positioner control unit when the telescopic switch is operated.
INFOID:0000000004534978
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select TELESCO SW-FR, TELESCO SW-RR in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check telescopic switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item TELESCO SW-FR Condition Telescopic switch (forward) Operate Release Operate Release Status ON OFF ON OFF
TELESCO SW-RR
Telescopic switch (backward)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534979
1.CHECK TELESCOPIC SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect tilt & telescopic switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between tilt & telescopic switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Tilt & telescopic switch Connector M31 Terminal 2 3 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK TELESCOPIC SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and tilt & telescopic switch harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 11 27 Tilt & telescopic switch Connector M31 Terminal 2 3 Continuity
Existed
4.
ADP-85
2009 G37 Coupe
TELESCOPIC SWITCH
3.CHECK TELESCOPIC SWITCH

Refer to ADP-86, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace tilt & telescopic switch. Refer to ADP-235, "Removal and Installation".

INFOID:0000000004534980

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect tilt & telescopic switch connector. Check continuity between tilt & telescopic switch terminals.
Tilt & telescopic switch Terminal 2 1 3 Telescopic switch (backward) Condition Operate Release Operate Release Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
Telescopic switch (forward)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace tilt & telescopic switch. Refer toADP-235, "Removal and Installation".
ADP-86
2009 G37 Coupe
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH

SEAT MEMORY SWITCH

Description
INFOID:0000000004534981
Memory switch is equipped on the seat set switch and seat memory switch installed to the driver side door trim. The operation signal is input to the automatic drive positioner control unit when the set switch or memory switch is operated.
INFOID:0000000004534982
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select MEMORY SW 1, MEMORY SW 2 SET SW in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check seat memory switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item SET SW SET SW Condition Push Release Push Release Push Release Status ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
MEMORY SW 1
Memory switch 1
MEMORY SW 2
Memory switch 2
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534983
1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat memory switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between seat memory switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Seat memory switch Connector Terminal 3 D5 1 2 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK MEMORY SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and seat memory switch harness connector.
ADP-87
2009 G37 Coupe
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH

Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal 24 M51 9 25 D5 Seat memory switch Connector Terminal 3 1 2 Existed Continuity
4.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal 24 M51 9 25 Ground Not existed Continuity
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer toADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK MEMORY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between seat memory switch harness connector and ground.
Seat memory switch Connector D5 Terminal 4 Ground Continuity Existed
4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH

Refer to ADP-88, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace seat memory switch. Refer toADP-232, "Removal and Installation".

INFOID:0000000004534984

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat memory switch connector. Check continuity between seat memory switch terminals.
ADP-88
2009 G37 Coupe
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH

Seat memory switch Terminal 3 Set switch Condition Push Release Push Release Push Release Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
Memory switch 1
Memory switch 2
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace seat memory switch.Refer to ADP-232, "Removal and Installation".
ADP
ADP-89
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH


MIRROR SWITCH
MIRROR SWITCH : Description
It operates angle of the door mirror face. It transmits mirror face adjust operation to AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT.
INFOID:0000000004534985
MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000004534986
1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH FUNCTION

Check the operation on MIR CON SWUP/DN and MIR CON SWRH/LH in the DATA MONITOR mode using CONSULT-III.
Monitor item MIR CON SW-UP/DN Condition When operating the mirror switch up or down side. Other than above. When operating the mirror switch right or left side. Other than above. : ON : OFF : ON : OFF
MIR CON SW-RH/LH
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Mirror switch function is OK. NO >> Refer to ADP-90, "MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534987
1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Door mirror remote control switch Connector Terminal 4 D17 12 13 15 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
2.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror remote control switch harness connector.
ADP-90
2009 G37 Coupe

Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal 3 M51 4 19 20 D17 Door mirror remote control switch Connector Terminal 15 13 12 4 Continuity
B
Existed
4.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal 3 M51 4 19 20 Ground Not existed Continuity
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground.
Door mirror remote control switch Connector D17 Terminal 7 Ground Continuity Existed
ADP
4.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH

Check door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch). Refer toADP-91, "MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch). Refer to MIR-21, "Removal and Installation".

Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". >> INSPECTION END
N
O
INFOID:0000000004534988
MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals.
ADP-91
2009 G37 Coupe

Door mirror remote control switch Connector 4 Terminal Condition RIGHT Other than above LEFT 7 15 Mirror switch Other than above UP Other than above DOWN Other than above Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
13 D17
12
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. Refer to MIR-21, "Removal and Installation".
CHANGEOVER SWITCH
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Description
INFOID:0000000004534989
Changeover switch is integrated into door mirror remote control switch. Changeover switch has three positions (L, N and R). It changes operating door mirror motor by transmitting control signal to automatic drive positioner control unit.
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000004534990
1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH FUNCTION

Check the operation on MIR CHNG SW-R or MIR CHNG SW-L in the DATA MONITOR mode using CONSULT-III.
Monitor item MIR CHNG SW-R/L Condition When operating the changeover toward the right or left side. Other than above. : ON : OFF
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Changeover switch function is OK. NO >> Refer to ADP-92, "CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534991
1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Door mirror remote control switch Connector D17 Terminal 10 11 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
2.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH CIRCUIT

ADP-92
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. 3. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror remote control switch harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 2 18 Door mirror remote control switch Connector D17 Terminal 11 10 Continuity
Existed
4.
D
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground.
Door mirror remote control switch Connector D17 Terminal 7 Ground Continuity Existed
ADP
4.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH

Check door mirror remote control switch (changeover switch). Refer to ADP-93, "CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace door mirror remote control switch (changeover switch). Refer to MIR-21, "Removal and Installation".
K L

Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". >> INSPECTION END
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000004534992
1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals.
P
ADP-93
2009 G37 Coupe

Door mirror remote control switch Connector 10 D17 11 7 Changeover switch Terminal Condition LEFT Other than above RIGHT Other than above Continuity Existed Not existed Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. Refer to MIR-21, "Removal and Installation".
ADP-94
2009 G37 Coupe
POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534993
1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch connector. Check continuity between power seat switch connector and ground.
Power seat switch Connector B510 Terminal 32 Ground Continuity Existed
2.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH INTERNAL CIRCUIT

Check reclining switch. Refer to ADP-70, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-233, "Removal and Installation".

ADP
ADP-95
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT &TELESCOPIC SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

TILT &TELESCOPIC SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004534994
1.CHECK POWER TILT & TELESCOPIC SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power tilt & telescopic switch connector. Check continuity between power seat switch connector and ground.
Tilt & telescopic switch Connector M31 Terminal 1 Ground Continuity Existed
2.CHECK POWER TILT & TELESCOPIC SWITCH INTERNAL CIRCUIT

Check tilt switch. Refer to ADP-84, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace tilt & telescopic switch. Refer to ADP-235, "Removal and Installation".

ADP-96
2009 G37 Coupe
DETENTION SWITCH
DETENTION SWITCH
Description
INFOID:0000000004534995
Detention switch is installed on A/T shift selector. It is turned OFF when the Selector lever is in P position. The driver seat control unit judges that the Selector lever is in P position if continuity does not exist in this circuit.
INFOID:0000000004534996
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select DETENT SW signal in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check detention switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item DETENT SW Selector lever Condition P position Other than above Status OFF ON
G
INFOID:0000000004534997
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

Check Self Diagnostic Result for BCM using CONSULT-III. Is the either DTC B2601, B2602, B2603, B2604 or B2605 detected? YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to ADP-209, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DETENTION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/T shift selector harness connector and ground.
(+) A/T shift selector Connector M137 Terminal 11 Ground Battery voltage (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
3.CHECK DETENTION SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and A/T shift selector harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 21 A/T shift selector Connector M137 Terminal 11 Continuity Existed
4.
ADP-97
2009 G37 Coupe
DETENTION SWITCH
4.CHECK DETENTION SWITCH

Refer to ADP-98, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-277, "2WD : Removal and Installation".

INFOID:0000000004534998

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. Check A/T shift selector terminals.
A/T shift selector Connector M137 10 Terminal 11 Selector lever Condition P position Other than above Continuity Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-277, "2WD : Removal and Installation".
ADP-98
2009 G37 Coupe
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH


Description
INFOID:0000000004534999
Parking brake switch is installed on parking brake lever. It is turned ON when the parking brake is applied. The driver seat control unit judges that the parking brake is engaged if continuity exists in this circuit.
INFOID:0000000004535000

1. 2. Select PARK BRAKE SW in the Data Monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check parking brake switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item PARK BRAKE SW Parking brake Condition Applied Release Status ON OFF
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535001

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between parking brake switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Parking brake switch Connector B14 Terminal 1 Ground Battery voltage (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and parking brake switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 8 Parking brake switch Connector B14 Terminal 1 Continuity Existed
4.
ADP-99
2009 G37 Coupe


Refer to ADP-100, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Adjust or replace parking brake switch.

INFOID:0000000004535002

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect parking brake switch connector. Check continuity between parking brake switch terminal and ground part of parking brake switch.
Parking brake Terminal 1 Ground part of parking brake switch Parking brake Condition Applied Release Continuity Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO-1 >> Adjust or replace parking brake switch (pedal type). Refer toPB-6, "PEDAL TYPE : Exploded View". NO-2 >> Adjust or replace parking brake switch (lever type). Refer toPB-7, "LEVER TYPE : Exploded View".
ADP-100
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIDING SENSOR
SLIDING SENSOR
Description
The sliding sensor is installed to the seat slide cushion frame. The pulse signal is input to the driver seat control unit when sliding is performed. The driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the sliding amount of the seat.
INFOID:0000000004535003
INFOID:0000000004535004
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select SLIDE PULSE in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check sliding sensor signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Operate (forward) SLIDE PULSE Seat sliding Operate (backward) Release
*1:
E
Valve Change (increase)*1 Change (decrease)*1 No change*1
The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768.
H
INFOID:0000000004535005
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR SIGNAL

1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.
(+) Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
L
Operate B503 24 Ground Seat sliding
M
JMJIA0119ZZ
Other than above
N
0 or 5
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and sliding sensor connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness connector.
ADP-101
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIDING SENSOR
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 24 Connector B526 Sliding sensor Terminal 24 Continuity Existed
4.
3.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding sensor harness connector and ground.
(+) Sliding sensor Connector B526 Terminal 16 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
4.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness connector.
4.
5.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness connector.
ADP-102
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIDING SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace harness.
6.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 2

1. 2. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 31 Ground Continuity Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding sensor (Built in seat slide cushion frame). Refer to ST-21, "WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View". NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation".
ADP
ADP-103
2009 G37 Coupe
RECLINING SENSOR
RECLINING SENSOR
Description
The reclining motor is installed to the seatback frame. The pulse signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the reclining is operated. The driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the reclining amount of the seat.
INFOID:0000000004535006
INFOID:0000000004535007
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select RECLN PULSE in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check reclining sensor signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Operate (forward) RECLN PULSE Seat reclining Operate (backward) Release
*1:
Value Change (increase)*1 Change (decrease)*1 No change*1
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535008
1.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR SIGNAL

Operate B503 9 Ground Seat reclining
JMJIA0119ZZ
Other than above
0 or 5
2.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector.
ADP-104
2009 G37 Coupe
RECLINING SENSOR
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 9 Reclining motor Connector B523 Terminal 9 Continuity Existed
4.
3.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.
(+) Reclining motor Connector B523 Terminal 16 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
4.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3.
Turn ignition switch OFF. ADP Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector. K
4.
M
5.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector.
ADP-105
2009 G37 Coupe
RECLINING SENSOR
6.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 2

1. 2. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between reclining sensor harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View". NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation".
ADP-106
2009 G37 Coupe
LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT)


Description
INFOID:0000000004535009
The lifting sensor (front) is installed to the seat slide cushion frame. The pulse signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the lifting (front) is operated. The driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the lifting (front) amount of the seat.
INFOID:0000000004535010
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select LIFT FR PULSE in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check the lifting sensor (front) signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Operate (Up) LIFT FR PULSE Seat lifting (front) Operate (Down) Release
*1:The
E
value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768.
H
INFOID:0000000004535011
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) SIGNAL

1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the voltage signal driver seat control unit harness connector and ground with an oscilloscope.
ADP
L
Operate
B503
25
Ground
Seat Lifting (front)
M
JMJIA0119ZZ
Other than above
N
0 or 5
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer toADP-230, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front) connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (front) harness connector.
ADP-107
2009 G37 Coupe

Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 25 Lifting motor (front) Connector B527 Terminal 25 Continuity Existed
4.
3.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.
(+) Lifting motor (front) Connector B527 Terminal 16 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
4.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (front) harness connector.
4.
5.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT 1

ADP-108
2009 G37 Coupe

6.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT 2

1. 2. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View". NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation".
ADP
ADP-109
2009 G37 Coupe
LIFTING SENSOR (REAR)


Description
INFOID:0000000004535012
The lifting sensor (rear) is installed to the seat slide cushion frame. The pulse signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the lifting (rear) is operated. The driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the lifting (rear) amount of the seat.
INFOID:0000000004535013
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select LIFT RR PULSE in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check lifting sensor (rear) signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Operate (Up) LIFT RR PULSE Seat lifting (rear) Operate (Down) Release
*1:
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535014
1.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) SIGNAL

B503
10
Ground
Seat Lifting (rear)
Operate
JMJIA0119ZZ
Other than above
0 or 5
2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear) connector. Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness connector.
ADP-110
2009 G37 Coupe

Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 10 Lifting motor (rear) Connector B529 Terminal 10 Continuity Existed
4.
Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit Connector B503 Terminal 10 Ground Continuity Not Existed
3.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the voltage between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.
(+) Lifting motor (rear) Connector B529 Terminal 16 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
4.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3.
Turn ignition switch OFF. ADP Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness connector. K
4.
Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
M
5.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT 1

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness connector.
ADP-111
2009 G37 Coupe

6.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT 2

1. 2. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View". NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation".
ADP-112
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT SENSOR
TILT SENSOR
Description
INFOID:0000000004535015
The tilt sensor is installed to the steering column assembly. The resistance of tilt sensor changes according to the up/down position of steering column. The terminal voltage of automatic drive positioner control unit changes according to a change of tilt sensor resistance. Automatic drive positioner control unit calculates the tilt position from the voltage.
INFOID:0000000004535016
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select TILT SEN in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check the tilt sensor signal under the following condition.
Monitor item TILT SEN Tilt position Condition Value Change between 1.1 V (Close to top) 3.9 V (Close to bottom)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535017
1.CHECK TILT SENSOR SIGNAL

1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 7 Ground Tilt position Change between 1.1 V (Close to top) 3.9 V (Close to bottom) (-) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer toADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TILT SENSOR CIRCUIT

4.

ADP-113
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK TILT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

4.CHECK TILT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4.
5.CHECK TILT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1

6.CHECK TILT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 2

1. 2. Connect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 41 Ground Continuity Existed
ADP-114
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace tilt & telescopic sensor (Built in steering column assembly). Refer to ST-18, "WITHOUT ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View". NO >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation".
ADP
ADP-115
2009 G37 Coupe
TELESCOPIC SENSOR
TELESCOPIC SENSOR
Description
INFOID:0000000004535018
The telescopic sensor is installed to the steering column assembly. The resistance of telescopic sensor changes according to the forward/backward position of steering column. The terminal voltage of automatic drive positioner control unit changes according to a change of telescopic sensor resistance. Automatic drive positioner control unit calculates the telescopic position from the voltage.
INFOID:0000000004535019
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select TELESCO SEN in the Data monitor mode using CONSULT-III. Check the tilt sensor signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item TELESCO SEN Condition Telescopic position Value Change between 0.5 [V] (close to top) 4.5 [V] (close to bottom)
Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END. NO >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535020
1.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR SIGNAL

(+) Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 23 Ground Telescopic position Change between 0.5 [V] (close to top) 4.5 [V] (close to bottom) (-) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR CIRCUIT

4.

ADP-116
2009 G37 Coupe
TELESCOPIC SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

4.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 33 Ground Continuity
ADP
Not existed
5.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1

6.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 2

1. 2. Connect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive control unit harness connector and ground.
ADP-117
2009 G37 Coupe
TELESCOPIC SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace tilt & telescopic sensor (Built in steering column assembly). Refer to ST-18, "WITHOUT ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View". NO >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation".
ADP-118
2009 G37 Coupe
MIRROR SENSOR
MIRROR SENSOR
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description
INFOID:0000000004535021
The mirror sensor (driver side) is installed to the door mirror (driver side). The resistance of 2 sensors (horizontal and vertical) is changed when the door mirror (driver side) is operated. Automatic drive positioner control unit calculates the door mirror position according to the change of the voltage of 2 sensor input terminals.
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000004535022
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select MIR/SEN LH U-D, MIR/SEN LH R-L in the Data monitor using CONSULT-III. Check mirror sensor (driver side) signal under the following condition.
Monitor item MIR/SEN LH U-D Door mirror (driver side) MIR/SEN LH R-L Condition Value Change between 3.4 [V] (close to peak) 0.6 [V] (close to valley) Change between 0.6 [V] (close to left edge) 3.4 [V] (close to right edge)
Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-119, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535023
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR (DRIVER SIDE) SIGNAL

(+) Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal 6 M51 22 Ground Door mirror (Driver side) position Change between 3.4 [V] (close to peak) 0.6 [V] (close to valley) Change between 3.4 [V] (close to left edge) 0.6 [V] (close to right edge) () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector and door mirror (drive side) connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness connector.
P
ADP-119
2009 G37 Coupe
MIRROR SENSOR
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 6 22 Door mirror (driver side) Connector D3 Terminal 9 10 Continuity
Existed
4.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. Connect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.
(+) Door mirror (driver side) Connector D3 Terminal 11 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 33 Door mirror (driver side) Connector D3 Terminal 11 Continuity Existed
4.
5.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR GROUND 1

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness connector.
ADP-120
2009 G37 Coupe
MIRROR SENSOR
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 41 Door mirror (driver side) Connector D3 Terminal 12 Continuity Existed
6.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR GROUND 2

Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace door mirror sensor (Built in passenger side door mirror). Refer to MIR-18, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Description
INFOID:0000000004535024
The mirror sensor (passenger side) is installed to the door mirror (passenger side). The resistance of 2 sensors (horizontal and vertical) is changed when the door mirror (passenger side) is operated. Automatic drive positioner control unit calculates the door mirror position according to the change of the voltage of 2 sensor input terminals.
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000004535025
ADP
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select MIR/SEN RH U-D, MIR/SEN RH R-L in the Data monitor using CONSULT-III. Check the mirror sensor (passenger side) signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item MIR/SEN RH U-D Door mirror (passenger side) MIR/SEN RH R-L Condition Value Change between 3.4 [V] (close to peak) 0.6 [V] (close to valley) Change between 3.4 [V] (close to left edge) 0.6 [V] (close to right edge)
Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-121, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535026
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR (PASSENGER SIDE) SIGNAL

ADP-121
2009 G37 Coupe
MIRROR SENSOR
(+) Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal 5 M51 21 Ground Door mirror (Passenger side) position Change between 3.4 [V] (close to peak) 0.6 [V] (close to valley) Change between 3.4 [V] (close to left edge) 0.6 [V] (close to right edge) () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 5 21 Door mirror (passenger side) Connector D33 Terminal 9 10 Continuity
Existed
4.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR (PASSENGER SIDE) POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. Connect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
(+) Door mirror (passenger side) Connector D33 Terminal 11 Ground 5 () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) harness connector.
ADP-122
2009 G37 Coupe
MIRROR SENSOR
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 33 Door mirror (passenger side) Connector D33 Terminal 11 Continuity Existed
4.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic driver positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR GROUND 1

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 41 Door mirror (passenger side) Connector D33 Terminal 12 Continuity Existed
6.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR GROUND 2

ADP
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace door mirror sensor (Built in passenger side door mirror). Refer to MIR-18, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
ADP-123
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIDING MOTOR
SLIDING MOTOR
Description
The seat sliding motor is installed to the seat cushion frame. The seat sliding motor is activated with the driver seat control unit. The seat is slid frontward/rearward by changing the rotation direction of sliding motor.
INFOID:0000000004535027
INFOID:0000000004535028
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select SEAT SLIDE in Active test mode using CONSULT-III. Check the sliding motor operation.
Test item OFF SEAT SLIDE FR RR Seat sliding Description Stop Forward Backward
Is the operation of relevant parts normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to ADP-124, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535029
1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding motor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Perform Active test (SEAT SLIDE) using CONSULT-lll Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground.
(+) Sliding motor Connector Terminal OFF 35 B525 42 Ground SEAT SLIDE FR (forward) RR (backward) OFF FR (forward) RR (backward) 0 Battery voltage 0 0 0 Battery voltage (-) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding motor. (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding motor harness connector.
ADP-124
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIDING MOTOR
Driver seat control unit Connector B504 Terminal 35 42 Connector B525 Sliding motor Terminal 35 42 Continuity
Existed
4.
Driver seat control unit Connector B504 Terminal 35 42 Ground Not existed
C
Continuity
3.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR

Refer to ADP-125, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace sliding motor. (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004535030
1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR-1

Visually check the sliding motor for foreign object, and check that the sliding motor is not broken. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (sliding motor).
I

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding motor connector. Supply sliding motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.
Terminal (+) 35 42 () 42 35 Operation Forward Backward
ADP
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Sliding motor is OK. NO >> Replace sliding motor. (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
ADP-125
2009 G37 Coupe
RECLINING MOTOR
RECLINING MOTOR
Description
INFOID:0000000004535031
The seat reclining motor is installed to the seat back frame. The seat reclining motor is activated with the driver seat control unit. The seatback is reclined frontward/rearward by changing the rotation direction of reclining motor.
INFOID:0000000004535032
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select SEAT RECLINING in Active test mode using CONSULT-III. Check the reclining motor operation.
Test item OFF SEAT RECLINING FR RR Seat reclining Description Stop Forward Backward
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535033
1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect reclining motor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Perform Active test (SEAT RECLINING) using CONSULT-III Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.
(+) Reclining motor Connector Terminal OFF 36 B523 44 Ground SEAT RECLINING FR (forward) RR (backward) OFF FR (forward) RR (backward) 0 Battery voltage 0 0 0 Battery voltage () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace reclining motor. (Built in seat back frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector.
ADP-126
2009 G37 Coupe
RECLINING MOTOR
Driver seat control unit Connector B504 Terminal 36 44 Reclining motor Connector B523 Terminal 36 44 Continuity
Existed
4.
C
Continuity
3.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR

Refer to ADP-127, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace reclining motor. (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004535034
1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR-1

Visually check the reclining motor for foreign object, and check that the reclining motor is not broken. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace seatback frame (reclining motor).
I
2.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR-2

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect reclining motor connector. Supply reclining motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.
ADP
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Reclining motor is OK. NO >> Replace reclining motor. (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
ADP-127
2009 G37 Coupe
LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)


Description
INFOID:0000000004535035
The lifting motor (front) is installed to the seat slide cushion frame. The lifting motor (front) is activated with the driver seat control unit. The lifter (front) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (front).
INFOID:0000000004535036
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select SEAT LIFTER FR in Active test mode using CONSULT-III. Check the lifting motor (front) operation.
Test item OFF SEAT LIFTER FR UP DWN Seat lifting (front) Description Stop Upward Downward
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535037
1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect lifting motor (front) connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Perform Active test (SEAT LIFTER FR) using CONSULT-III. Check voltage between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.
(+) Lifting motor (front) Connector Terminal OFF 37 B527 45 Ground SEAT LIFTER FR UP DWN (down) OFF UP DWN (down) 0 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace lifting motor (front). (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT

ADP-128
2009 G37 Coupe

Driver seat control unit Connector B504 Terminal 37 45 Lifting motor (front) Connector B527 Terminal 37 45 Continuity
Existed
4.
C
Continuity
3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)

Refer to ADP-129, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace lifting motor (front). (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004535038
1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR-1

Visually the lifting motor (front) for foreign object, and check that the lifting motor (front) is not broken. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (lifting motor).
I

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect lifting motor connector. Supply lifting motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.
Item Terminal (+) 45 37 () 37 45 Operation Up Down
ADP
Lifting motor (front)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Lifting motor (front) is OK. NO >> Replace lifting motor (front). (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
ADP-129
2009 G37 Coupe
LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)


Description
INFOID:0000000004535039
The lifting motor (rear) is installed to the seat slide cushion frame. The lifting motor (rear) is activated with the driver seat control unit. The seat lifter (rear) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (rear).
INFOID:0000000004535040
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select SEAT LIFTER RR in Active test mode using CONSULT-III. Check the lifting motor (rear) operation.
Test item OFF SEAT LIFTER RR UP DWN Seat lifting (rear) Description Stop Upward Downward
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535041
1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect lifting motor (rear) connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Perform Active test (SEAT LIFTER RR) using CONSULT-III Check voltage between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.
(+) Lifting motor (rear) Connector Terminal OFF 38 B529 39 Ground SEAT LIFTER RR UP DWN (DOWN) OFF UP DWN (DOWN) 0 Battery voltage 0 0 0 Battery voltage () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace lifting motor (rear). (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and lifting motor (rear) connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness connector.
ADP-130
2009 G37 Coupe

Driver seat control unit Connector B504 Terminal 38 39 Lifting motor (rear) Connector B529 Terminal 38 39 Continuity
Existed
4.
C
Continuity
3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)

Refer to ADP-131, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace lifting motor (rear). (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004535042

Visually the lifting motor (rear) for foreign object, and check that the lifting motor (rear) is not broken. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (lifting motor).
I

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect lifting motor connector. Supply lifting motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.
Item Terminal (+) 38 39 () 39 38 Operation Up Down
ADP
Lifting motor (rear)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Lifting motor (rear) is OK. NO >> Replace lifting motor (rear). (Built in seat slide cushion frame.) Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
ADP-131
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT MOTOR
TILT MOTOR
Description
The tilt motor is installed to the steering column assembly. The tilt motor is activated with the automatic drive positioner control unit. The steering column is tilted upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of tilt motor.
INFOID:0000000004535043
INFOID:0000000004535044
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select TILT MOTOR in Active test mode using CONSULT-III. Check the tilt motor operation.
Test item OFF TILT MOTOR UP DWN Steering tilt Description Stop Upward Downward
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535045
1.CHECK TILT MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect tilt & telescopic motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Active test (TILT MOTOR) using CONSULT-III. Check voltage between tilt & telescopic motor harness connector and ground.
(+) Tilt & telescopic motor Connector Terminal OFF 3 M49 4 Ground TILT MOTOR UP DWN (down) OFF UP DWN (down) 0 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace tilt motor. (Built in steering column assembly.) Refer to ST-21, "WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TILT MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and tilt & telescopic motor harness connector.
ADP-132
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT MOTOR
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 35 42 Tilt & telescopic motor Connector M49 Terminal 4 3 Continuity
Existed
4.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 35 42 Ground Not existed
C
Continuity
3.CHECK TILT MOTOR

Refer to ADP-133, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace tilt motor. (Built in steering column assembly.) Refer to ST-21, "WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004535046

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect tilt motor connector. Supply tilt motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.
Terminal (+) 4 3 () 3 4 Operation Up Down
ADP
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Tilt motor is OK. NO >> Replace tilt motor. (Built in steering column assembly.) Refer to ST-21, "WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View".
ADP-133
2009 G37 Coupe
TELESCOPIC MOTOR
TELESCOPIC MOTOR
Description
The telescopic motor is installed to the steering column assembly. The telescopic motor is activated with the automatic drive positioner control unit. Compresses the steering column by changing the rotation direction of telescopic motor.
INFOID:0000000004535047
INFOID:0000000004535048
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select TELESCO MOTOR in Active test mode using CONSULT-III. Check the telescopic motor operation.
Test item OFF TELESCO MOTOR FR RR Steering telescopic Description Stop Forward Backward
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535049
1.CHECK TELESCOPIC MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect tilt & telescopic motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Active test (TELESCO MOTOR) using CONSULT-III Check voltage between tilt & telescopic motor harness connector and ground.
(+) Tilt & telescopic motor Connector Terminal OFF 1 M49 2 Ground TELESCOPIC MOTOR FR (forward) RR (backward) OFF FR (forward) RR (backward) 0 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace telescopic motor. (Built in steering column assembly.) Refer to ST-21, "WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TELESCOPIC MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and tilt & telescopic motor harness connector.
ADP-134
2009 G37 Coupe
TELESCOPIC MOTOR
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 36 44 Tilt & telescopic motor Connector M49 Terminal 2 1 Continuity
Existed
4.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M52 Terminal 36 44 Ground Not existed
C
Continuity

Refer to ADP-135, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-231, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace telescopic motor. (Built in steering column assembly.) Refer to ST-21, "WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004535050

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect telescopic motor connector. Supply telescopic motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.
ADP
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Telescopic motor is OK. NO >> Replace telescopic motor. (Built in steering column assembly.) Refer to ST-21, "WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View".
ADP-135
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR

DOOR MIRROR MOTOR

Description
INFOID:0000000004535051
It makes mirror face operate from side to side and up and down with the electric power that automatic drive positioner control unit supplies.
INFOID:0000000004535052
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR FUNCTION

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select DOOR MIRROR MOTOR LH and DOOR MIRROR MOTOR RH in Active test mode using CONSULT-III. Check the door mirror motor operation.
Test item OFF L DOOR MIRROR MOTOR LH R UP DWN Test item OFF L DOOR MIRROR MOTOR RH R UP DWN Door mirror face Description Stop Inward Outward Upward Downward Door mirror face Description Stop Outward Inward Upward Downward
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535053
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror connector and ground.
(+) Door mirror Connector Terminal 5 D3 (Driver side) D33 (Passenger side) Door mirror remote control switch UP Other than above Ground LEFT Other than above DOWN / RIGHT Other than above Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 () Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)

ADP-136
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and door mirror connector.
[Door mirror driver side]
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal 16 M51 31 32

[Door mirror passenger side]
Door mirror (driver side) Connector Terminal 7 D3 5 6
Continuity
C
Existed
Door mirror (passenger side) Connector Terminal 5 D33 6 7
Continuity
Existed
4.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground.
[Door mirror driver side]

[Door mirror passenger side]
Continuity
H
Ground Not existed
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal 14 M51 15 30 Ground
Continuity
ADP
Not existed
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR

Check door mirror motor. Refer to ADP-137, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace door mirror. Refer to MIR-18, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".

INFOID:0000000004535054
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR-I

Check that door mirror motor does not trap foreign objects and does not have any damage. Refer to MIR-17, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
ADP-137
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace door mirror.Refer to MIR-18, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR-II

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror connector. Apply 12V to each power supply terminal of door mirror motor.
Door mirror Connector Terminal (+) 7 D3 (Driver side) D33 (Passenger side) 6 5 7 () 6 7 7 5 RIGHT LEFT UP DOWN Operational direction
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace door mirror. Refer to MIR-18, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
ADP-138
2009 G37 Coupe
SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR


Description
INFOID:0000000004535055
Memory indicator is equipped on the seat memory switch installed to the driver side door trim. The operation signal is inputted to the automatic drive positioner control unit when the memory switch is operated. The status of automatic drive positioner system can be checked according to the illuminating/flashing status.
INFOID:0000000004535056
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select MEMORY SW INDCTR in Active test mode using CONSULT-III. Check the memory indicator operation.
Test item OFF MEMORY SW INDCTR ON-1 ON-2 Memory switch indicator Description OFF Indicator 1: ON Indicator 2: ON
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535057
1.CHECK MEMORY INDICATOR POWER SUPPLY

Check voltage between seat memory switch harness connector and ground.
(+) Seat memory switch Connector D5 Terminal 5 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (V) (Approx.)
ADP
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check the following. 10A fuse [No.10 located in fuse block (J/B)]. Harness for open or short between memory indicator and fuse.
2.CHECK MEMORY INDICATOR CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and seat memory switch connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and seat memory switch harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M51 Terminal 12 13 Seat memory switch Connector D5 Terminal 6 7 Continuity
Existed
4.
ADP-139
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-232, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.
ADP-140
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM

DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram - DOOR MIRROR (WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) INFOID:0000000004684734
ADP
P
JCLWM2661GB
ADP-141
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM

JCLWM2662GB
ADP-142
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM

A
ADP
O
JCLWM2663GB
ADP-143
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM

JCLWM2664GB
ADP-144
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM

A
ADP
O
JCLWM2665GB
ADP-145
2009 G37 Coupe
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT (WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER)

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
INFOID:0000000004555928
Monitor Item SET SW Set switch
Condition Push Release Push Release Push Release Operate Release Operate Release Operate Release Operate Release Operate Release Operate Release Operate Release Operate Release Up Other than above Down Other than above Right Other than above Left Other than above Right Other than above Left Other than above Up Other than above Down Other than above
Value/Status ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
MEMORY SW1
Memory switch 1
MEMORY SW2
Memory switch 2
SLIDE SWFR
Sliding switch (front)
SLIDE SWRR
Sliding switch (rear)
RECLN SWFR
Reclining switch (front)
RECLN SWRR
Reclining switch (rear)
LIFT FR SW-UP
Lifting switch front (up)
LIFT FR SW-DN
LIFT RR SWUP
Lifting switch rear (up)
LIFT RR SWDN
MIR CON SWUP
Mirror switch
MIR CON SWDN
Mirror switch
MIR CON SWRH
Mirror switch
MIR CON SWLH
Mirror switch
MIR CHNG SW-R
Changeover switch
MIR CHNG SWL
Changeover switch
TILT SW-UP
Tilt switch
TILT SW-DOWN
Tilt switch
ADP-146
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item TELESCO SW-FR Telescopic switch Condition Forward Other than above Backward Other than above Folded down Other than above Pressed Other than above Front edge Other than above Fastened Other than above P position Other than above Applied Release Cranking Other than above Forward SLIDE PULSE Seat sliding Backward Other than above Forward RECLN PULSE Seat reclining Backward Other than above Up LIFT FR PULSE Seat lifter (front) Down Other than above Up LIFT RR PULSE Seat lifter (rear) Down Other than above MIR/SEN RH U-D MIR/SEN RH R-L MIR/SEN LH U-D MIR/SEN LH RL TILT SEN TELESCO SEN
*1 *2
Value/Status ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF The numeral value decreases *3 The numeral value increases *3 No change to numeral value*3 The numeral value decreases *3 The numeral value increases *3 No change to numeral value*3 The numeral value decreases *3 The numeral value increases *3 No change to numeral value*3 The numeral value decreases *3 The numeral value increases *3 No change to numeral value*3 Change between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) Change between 3.4 (close to left edge) 0.6 (close to right edge) Change between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) Change between 0.6 (close to left edge) 3.4 (close to right edge) Change between 1.2 (close to top) 3.4 (close to bottom) Change between 3.4 (close to top) 0.8 (close to bottom)
TELESCO SW-RR
Tilt switch
FORWARD SW
Seat back
WALK-IN SW
FWD LIMIT SW
Seat sliding
SEAT BELT SW
Seat belt
DETENT SW*1 PARK BRAKE SW*2
A/T selector lever
Parking brake
STARTER SW
Ignition position
ADP
Door mirror (passenger side) Door mirror (passenger side) Door mirror (driver side) Door mirror (driver side) Tilt position Telescopic position
: A/T model : M/T model The value at the position attained when the battery is connected is regarded as 32768.
*3:
ADP-147
2009 G37 Coupe

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > TERMINAL LAYOUT
JMJIA0199ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No. + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Voltage (V) (Approx)
1 L/W
Ground
UART communication (RX)
Input
Ignition switch ON
JMJIA0118ZZ
3 R/Y 4 O/B
CAN-H Sliding limit switch signal Seat belt buckle switch signal (driver side) Parking brake switch signal
Seat sliding front edge
0 5 5 0 Applied Release 0 Battery voltage
Ground
Input
Seat switch & power walk-in switch is pressed Seat belt fastened & seat switch pressed Other than above
5 L 8 L/Y
Ground
Input
Ground
Input
Parking brake
9 W/G
Ground
Reclining sensor signal
Input
Seat reclining
Operate
JMJIA0119ZZ
Stop
0 or 5
10 P/B
Ground
Lifting sensor (rear) signal
Input
Seat lifting (rear)
Operate
JMJIA0119ZZ
Stop
0 or 5
ADP-148
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. + Description Signal name Input/ Output Input Condition Voltage (V) (Approx)
11 (BR)
Ground
Sliding switch backward signal
Sliding switch
Operate (backward) Release
0 Battery voltage
12 (SB)
Ground
Reclining switch backward signal
Input
Reclining switch
Operate (backward) Release
C
0 Battery voltage
13 (LG/R)
Ground
Lifting switch (front) downward signal
Input
Lifting switch (front)
Operate (downward) Release Operate (downward) Release
D
0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage Battery voltage
14 (GB) 16 (O)
Ground
Lifting switch (rear) downward signal Sensor power supply
Input Output
Lifting switch (rear)
Ground
G
17 (Y/R) UART communication (TX) Output
Ground
Ignition switch ON
JMJIA0121ZZ
19 (V)
CAN-L
P position
ADP
21 (L/Y)
Ground
Detention switch switch
Input
A/T selector lever
K
Except P position
L
JMJIA0120ZZ
M
24 (R Sliding sensor signal Operate
Ground
Input
Seat sliding
N
JMJIA0119ZZ
Stop
0 or 5
P
25 (Y/B) Ground Lifting sensor (front) signal Input Seat lifting (front) Operate
JMJIA0119ZZ
Stop
0 or 5
ADP-149
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. + Description Signal name Input/ Output Input Condition Voltage (V) (Approx) Operate (forward) Release Input Reclining switch Operate (forward) Release Input Seat lifting switch (front) Operate (upward) Release Operate (upward) Release Pressed Other than above Operate (forward) Release Seat reclining Operate (forward) Release Seat lifting (front) Operate (downward) Stop Seat lifting (rear) Operate (upward) Stop Seat lifting (rear) Operate (downward) Stop Seat back is floded down and power walk-in switch pressed 41 (Y/G) Ground Forward switch signal Input Seat back is fold up and seat rclining is operation Seat back is fold up and power walkin switch is pressed 42 (W) Ground Sliding motor backward output Output Seat sliding Operate (backward) Stop
26 (Y)
Ground
Sliding switch forward signal
Sliding switch
0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 0 Battery voltage Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 battery voltage 5 Battery voltage 0
27 (R/G)
Ground
Reclining switch forward signal
28 (W/B)
Ground
Lifting switch (front) upward signal
29 (P/L) 30 (P) 31 (GR) 32 (B/W) 33 (R) 35 (W/R)
Ground
Lifting switch (rear) upward signal Power walk-in switch signal Sensor ground Ground (signal) Power source (C/B) Sliding motor forward output
Input
Seat lifting switch (rear) Power walk-in switch
Ground Ground Ground Ground
Input Input Output
Ground
Seat sliding
36 (G/Y)
Ground
Reclining motor forward output signal
Output
37 (G/W)
Ground
Lifting motor (front) downward output
Output
38 (L/Y)
Ground
Lifting motor (rear) upward output
Output
39 (R/B) 40 (R/W)
Ground
Lifting motor (rear) downward output Power source (Fuse)
Output Input
Ground
ADP-150
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. + Description Signal name Input/ Output Output Condition Voltage (V) (Approx)
44 (P)
Ground
Reclining motor backward output
Seat reclining
Operate (backward) Stop
Battery voltage 0
45 (L/R) 48 (B)
Ground
Lifting motor (front) upward output Ground (power)
Output
Seat lifting (front)
Operate (upward) Stop
C
Battery voltage 0
D
Ground 0
ADP
ADP-151
2009 G37 Coupe

Wiring Diagram - AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM INFOID:0000000004250399
JCJWM0667GB
ADP-152
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0668GB
ADP-153
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0669GB
ADP-154
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0670GB
ADP-155
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0671GB
ADP-156
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0672GB
ADP-157
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0673GB
ADP-158
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0674GB
ADP-159
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0675GB
ADP-160
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0676GB
Fail Safe
The fail-safe mode may be activated if the following symptoms are observed.
INFOID:0000000004250400
ADP-161
2009 G37 Coupe

Operating in fail-safe mode Malfunction Item Related DTC Diagnosis With ADP: ADP-48 Without ADP: ADP-48 With ADP: ADP-53 Without ADP: ADP-53 ADP-56 ADP-59 ADP-61 ADP-63 ADP-49 ADP-51
CAN communication*1
U1000
Only manual functions operate normally.
Tilt sensor*1
B2118
Telescopic sensor Detent switch Parking brake switch Only manual functions, except door mirror, operate normally. Only manual functions, except seat sliding, operate normally. Only manual functions, except seat reclining, operate normally. *1: UART communication Seat sliding output Seat reclining output
B2119 B2126 B2127 B2128 B2112 B2113
Driver seat without automatic driver positioner system display only U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUITand B2112 SEAT SLIDE.
INFOID:0000000004250401
DTC Index
Timing*1 Current malfunction Previous malfunction Item
CONSULT-III display
Reference page
CAN COMM [U1000]
CIRCUIT*2
1-39
CAN communication
With ADP: ADP-48 Without ADP: ADP-48 With ADP: ADP-49 Without ADP: ADP-49 ADP-51 ADP-53 ADP-56 ADP-59 ADP-61 ADP-63
SEAT SLIDE* [B2112]
1-39
Seat slide motor output
SEAT RECLINING [B2113] TILT SENSOR [B2118] TELESCO SENSOR [B2119] DETENT SW*2 [B2126] PARKING BRAKE [B2127] UART COMM [B2128]
*1:
0 0 0 0 0 0
1-39 1-39 1-39 1-39 1-39 1-39
Seat reclining motor output Tilt sensor input Telescopic sensor input Detention switch condition Parking brake switch condition UART communication
0: Current malfunction is present 1-39: Displayed if any previous malfunction is present when current condition is normal. The numeral value increases by one at each IGN ON to OFF cycle from 1 to 39. The counter remains at 39 even if the number of cycles exceeds it. However, the counter is reset to 1 if any malfunction is detected again, the normal operation is resumed and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON. *2: Driver seat without automatic driver positioner system display only U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUITand B2112 SEAT SLIDE.
ADP-162
2009 G37 Coupe


Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
INFOID:0000000004555929
JMJIA0199ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No. (Wire color) +
F
Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
G
Operate (upward) Other than above RH Neutral or LH Operated (upward) Other than above Operated (leftward) Other than above 0 5 0
1 (Y)
Ground
Tilt switch upward signal
Input
Tilt switch
2 (LG)
Ground
Changeover switch RH signal
Input
Changeover switch position
I
5 0 5 0 5 Change between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) Change between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) Change between 1.2 (close to top) 3.8 (close to bottom)
3 (G)
Ground
Mirror switch upward signal
ADP
Input
Mirror switch
4 (V) 5 (R) 6 (GR) 7 (O) 9 (L)
Ground
Mirror switch leftward signal Door mirror sensor (RH) upward/downward signal Door mirror sensor (LH) upward/downward signal Tilt sensor signal
Input
Mirror switch
Ground Ground Ground
Input Input Input
Mirror face (door mirror RH) Mirror face (door mirror LH) Tilt position Press
0 5
Ground
Memory switch 1 signal
Input
Memory switch 1
Other than above
P
10 (V) Ground UART communication (TX) Output Ignition switch ON
JMJIA0118ZZ
ADP-163
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
11 (GR)
Ground
Telescopic switch forward signal
Input
Telescopic switch
Operate (forward) Other than above Illuminate
0 5 1 Battery voltage 1 Battery voltage Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0
12 (O)
Ground
Memory indictor 1 signal
Output
Memory indictor 1
Other than above Illuminate
13 (P)
Ground
Memory indictor 2 signal
Output
Memory indictor 2
Other than above Operate (upward) Other than above Operate (leftward) Other than above Operate (downward)
14 (W)
Ground
Door mirror motor (RH) upward output
Output
Door mirror RH
15 (O)
Ground
Door mirror motor (RH) leftward output
Output
Door mirror RH
Door mirror motor (LH) downward output 16 (Y) Ground Door mirror motor (LH) rightward output Output Door mirror (LH)
Battery voltage
Other than above Operate (rightward) Other than above Operate (downward) Other than above
0 Battery voltage 0
17 (BR)
Ground
Tilt switch downward signal
Input
Tilt switch
5 0 5
18 (P)
Ground
Changeover switch LH signal
Input
Changeover switch position
LH Neutral or RH Operate (downward) Other than above Operate (rightward) Other than above
19 (SB)
Ground
Mirror switch downward signal
Input
Mirror switch
5 0 5 Change between 3.4 (close to left edge) 0.6 (close to right edge) Change between 0.6 (close to left edge) 3.4 (close to right edge) Change between 0.8 (close to top) 4.4 (close to bottom)
20 (BR) 21 (L) 22 (SB) 23 (P)
Ground
Mirror switch rightward signal Door mirror sensor (RH) leftward/rightward signal Door mirror sensor (LH) leftward/rightward signal Telescopic sensor signal
Input
Mirror switch
Ground Ground Ground
Input Input Input
Door mirror RH position Door mirror LH position Telescopic position
ADP-164
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + 24 (R) Description Signal name Input/ Output Input Set switch Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) 0 5 0 5
Press Ground Set switch signal Other than above Press Ground Memory switch 2 signal Input Memory switch 2 Other than above
25 (LG)
26 (P)
Ground
UART communication (RX)
Input
Ignition switch ON
JMJIA0121ZZ
27 (G)
Ground
Telescopic switch backward signal
Input
Telescopic switch
Operate (backward) Other than above Operate (downward)
G
5
Door mirror motor (RH) downward output 30 (SB) Ground Door mirror motor (RH) rightward output Output Door mirror (RH)
Battery voltage
Other than above Operate (rightward) Other than above Operate (upward) Other than above Operate (leftward) Other than above
0 Battery voltage
ADP
0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 5 Battery voltage
31 (G)
Ground
Door mirror motor (LH) upward output
Output
Door mirror (LH)
32 (L) 33 (W) 34 (V) 35 (L)
Ground
Door mirror motor (LH) leftward output
Output
Door mirror (LH)
Ground Ground
Sensor power supply Power source (Fuse)
Input Input
Operate (upward) Other than above Operate (forward) Other than above
Battery voltage
Ground
Tilt motor upward output
Output
Steering tilt
O
0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0
36 (GR) 39 (W) 40 (B)
Ground
Telescopic motor forward output signal
Output
Steering telescopic
Ground Ground
Power source (C/B) Ground
Input
ADP-165
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + 41 (Y) Ground Description Signal name Sensor ground Input/ Output Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Operate (downward) Other than above Steering telescopic Operate (backward) Other than above
42 (O)
Ground
Tilt motor downward output
Battery voltage
Output
Steering tilt
0 Battery voltage 0 0
44 (G) 48 (B)
Ground
Telescopic motor backward output
Output
Ground
Ground
ADP-166
2009 G37 Coupe

Wiring Diagram - AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM INFOID:0000000004250403
ADP
JCJWM0667GB
ADP-167
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0668GB
ADP-168
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0669GB
ADP-169
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0670GB
ADP-170
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0671GB
ADP-171
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0672GB
ADP-172
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0673GB
ADP-173
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0674GB
ADP-174
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCJWM0675GB
ADP-175
2009 G37 Coupe

JCJWM0676GB
ADP-176
2009 G37 Coupe
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)


Reference Value
INFOID:0000000004685555
B
Condition Value/Status Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Wiper intermittent dial position Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Off On Off On Off Off
Monitor Item FR WIPER HI Other than front wiper switch HI Front wiper switch HI Other than front wiper switch LO Front wiper switch LO Front washer switch OFF Front washer switch ON Other than front wiper switch INT Front wiper switch INT Front wiper is not in STOP position Front wiper is in STOP position
FR WIPER LOW
FR WASHER SW
FR WIPER INT
FR WIPER STOP INT VOLUME TURN SIGNAL R
Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7 Other than turn signal switch RH Turn signal switch RH Other than turn signal switch LH Turn signal switch LH Other than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND Other than lighting switch HI Lighting switch HI Other than lighting switch 2ND Lighting switch 2ND Other than lighting switch 2ND Lighting switch 2ND Other than lighting switch PASS Lighting switch PASS Other than lighting switch AUTO Lighting switch AUTO Front fog lamp switch OFF Front fog lamp switch ON NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Driver door closed Driver door opened Passenger door closed Passenger door opened NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored.
TURN SIGNAL L
TAIL LAMP SW
ADP
HI BEAM SW
HEAD LAMP SW 1
HEAD LAMP SW 2
PASSING SW
AUTO LIGHT SW
FR FOG SW RR FOG SW DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL
ADP-177
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item DOOR SW-BK CDL LOCK SW Condition NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Other than power door lock switch LOCK Power door lock switch LOCK Other than power door lock switch UNLOCK Power door lock switch UNLOCK Other than driver door key cylinder LOCK position Driver door key cylinder LOCK position Other than driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position Driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Hazard switch is OFF Hazard switch is ON NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Trunk lid opener cancel switch OFF Trunk lid opener cancel switch ON Trunk lid opener switch OFF While the trunk lid opener switch is turned ON Trunk lid closed Trunk lid opened LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed TRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed TRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is pressed PANIC button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed PANIC button of the Intelligent Key is pressed UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed and held simultaneously LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held simultaneously OPTICAL SENSOR Bright outside of the vehicle Dark outside of the vehicle Driver door request switch is not pressed Driver door request switch is pressed Passenger door request switch is not pressed Passenger door request switch is pressed NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Value/Status Off Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Off On Off Off Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Close to 5 V Close to 0 V Off On Off On Off Off
CDL UNLOCK SW
KEY CYL LK-SW
KEY CYL UN-SW KEY CYL SW-TR HAZARD SW REAR DEF SW H/L WASH SW TR CANCEL SW
TR/BD OPEN SW
TRNK/HAT MNTR
RKE-LOCK
RKE-UNLOCK
RKE-TR/BD
RKE-PANIC
RKE-P/W OPEN
RKE-MODE CHG
REQ SW -DR
REQ SW -AS REQ SW -RR REQ SW -RL
ADP-178
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item REQ SW -BD/TR Condition Trunk lid opener request switch is not pressed Trunk lid opener request switch is pressed Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is not pressed Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed Ignition switch in OFF or ACC position Ignition switch in ON position NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. The clutch pedal is not depressed The clutch pedal is depressed The brake pedal is depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown BRAKE SW 1 The brake pedal is not depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown, or No. 7 fuse is normal The brake pedal is not depressed The brake pedal is depressed Selector lever in P position (Except M/T models) The clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models) Selector lever in any position other than P (Except M/T models) The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models) Selector lever in any position other than P and N Selector lever in P or N position Steering is unlocked Steering is locked Steering is locked Steering is unlocked Ignition switch in OFF or ACC position Ignition switch in ON position Driver door is unlocked Driver door is locked Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is not pressed Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is pressed Ignition switch in OFF or ACC position Ignition switch in ON position Selector lever in any position other than P Selector lever in P position Selector lever in any position other than P and N (Except M/T models) The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models) Selector lever in P or N position The clutch pedal is depressed Selector lever in any position other than P Selector lever in P position Selector lever in any position other than N Selector lever in N position Value/Status Off On Off On Off On Off Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On
PUSH SW
IGN RLY2 -F/B ACC RLY -F/B CLUCH SW
BRAKE SW 2
DETE/CANCL SW
SFT PN/N SW
S/L -LOCK
S/L -UNLOCK
ADP
S/L RELAY-F/B
UNLK SEN -DR
PUSH SW -IPDM
IGN RLY1 -F/B
DETE SW -IPDM
SFT PN -IPDM
SFT P -MET
SFT N -MET
ADP-179
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item Engine stopped ENGINE STATE While the engine stalls At engine cranking Engine running S/L LOCK-IPDM Steering is unlocked Steering is locked Steering is locked Steering is unlocked Steering lock system is not the LOCK condition and the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK Steering lock system are not the LOCK condition or the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK While driving While driving Driver door is locked DOOR STAT-DR Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) Driver door is unlocked Passenger door is locked DOOR STAT-AS Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) Passenger door is unlocked ID OK FLAG Steering is locked Steering is unlocked The engine start is prohibited The engine start is permitted NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. The Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot The Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot During the operation of the Intelligent Key NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by any key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by any key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM. Condition Value/Status Stop Stall Crank Run Off On Off On Off On Equivalent to speedometer reading Equivalent to speedometer reading LOCK READY UNLOCK LOCK READY UNLOCK Reset Set Reset Set Reset Off On Operation frequency of the Intelligent Key Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done
S/L UNLK-IPDM
S/L RELAY-REQ
VEH SPEED 1 VEH SPEED 2
PRMT ENG STRT PRMT RKE STRT KEY SW -SLOT RKE OPE COUN1 RKE OPE COUN2
CONFRM ID ALL
CONFIRM ID4
CONFIRM ID3
ADP-180
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item Condition The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the second key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the second key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM. The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is registered to BCM The ID of third Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM The ID of third Intelligent Key is registered to BCM The ID of second Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM The ID of second Intelligent Key is registered to BCM The ID of first Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM The ID of first Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) ID of front LH tire transmitter is registered ID of front LH tire transmitter is not registered ID of front RH tire transmitter is registered ID of front RH tire transmitter is not registered ID of rear RH tire transmitter is registered ID of rear RH tire transmitter is not registered ID of rear LH tire transmitter is registered ID of rear LH tire transmitter is not registered Tire pressure indicator OFF Tire pressure indicator ON Tire pressure warning alarm is not sounding Tire pressure warning alarm is sounding Value/Status
A
Yet Done Yet
CONFIRM ID2
CONFIRM ID1
C
Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Air pressure of front LH tire Air pressure of front RH tire Air pressure of rear RH tire Air pressure of rear LH tire Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Off On Off On
TP 4
TP 3
TP 2
TP 1 AIR PRESS FL AIR PRESS FR AIR PRESS RR AIR PRESS RL ID REGST FL1
ADP
ID REGST FR1
ID REGST RR1
ID REGST RL1
WARNING LAMP
BUZZER
ADP-181
2009 G37 Coupe

JPMIA0062ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
ADP-182
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + 1 (W) 2 (Y) 3 (O) Ground Ground Ground Description Signal name Battery power supply P/W power supply (BAT) P/W power supply (RAP) Input/ Output Input Output Output Condition Value (Approx.) Battery voltage 12 V 12 V 0V
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON Interior room lamp battery saver is activated. (Cuts the interior room lamp power supply)
4 (LG)
Ground
Interior room lamp power supply
Output
Interior room lamp battery saver is not activated. (Outputs the interior room lamp power supply) Passenger door UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) Other than UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated) ON OFF LOCK (Actuator is activated) Other than LOCK (Actuator is not activated) UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) Other than UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated)
12 V
5 (P)
Ground
Passenger door UNLOCK
12 V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V
Output
7 (SB)
Ground
Step lamp
Output
Step lamp
8 (V)
Ground
All doors, fuel lid LOCK
Output
All doors, fuel lid
I
12 V 0V Battery voltage
9 (G) 11 (R) 13 (B)
Ground
Driver door, fuel lid UNLOCK
Output
Driver door, fuel lid
ADP
Ground Ground
Battery power supply Ground
Input
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON OFF
K
0V 0V NOTE: When the illumination brightening/dimming level is in the neutral position. Output Tail lamp ON
14 (W)
Ground
Push-button ignition switch illumination ground
JSNIA0010GB
15 (O)
Ground
ACC indicator lamp
Output
Ignition switch
OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated) ACC
Battery voltage 0V
ADP-183
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Turn signal switch OFF Value (Approx.) 0V
17 (W)
Ground
Turn signal RH (Front)
Output
Ignition switch ON
Turn signal switch RH
PKID0926E
6.5 V Turn signal switch OFF 0V
18 (O)
Ground
Turn signal LH (Front)
Output
Ignition switch ON
Turn signal switch LH
PKID0926E
6.5 V 19 (V) Ground Room lamp timer control Output Interior room lamp OFF ON Turn signal switch OFF 12 V 0V 0V
20 (V)
Ground
Turn signal RH (Rear)
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKID0926E
6.5 V OPEN (Trunk lid opener actuator is activated) Other than OPEN (Trunk lid opener actuator is not activated) Turn signal switch OFF 12 V
23 (L)
Ground
Trunk lid open
Output
Trunk lid
0V 0V
25 (Y)
Ground
Turn signal LH (Rear)
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKID0926E
6.5 V 30 (P) Ground Trunk room lamp Output Trunk room lamp ON OFF 0V 12 V
ADP-184
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Value (Approx.)
B
When Intelligent Key is in the passenger compartment
JMKIA0062GB
34 (SB)
Ground
Trunk room antenna ()
Output
Ignition switch OFF
E
When Intelligent Key is not in the passenger compartment
JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB
35 (V)
Ground
Trunk room antenna (+)
Output
Ignition switch OFF
ADP
JMKIA0063GB
M
When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area When the trunk lid opener request switch is operated with ignition switch OFF When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area
JMKIA0063GB JMKIA0062GB
38 (B)
Ground
Rear bumper antenna ()
Output
ADP-185
2009 G37 Coupe

39 (W)
Ground
Rear bumper antenna (+)
Output
47 (Y)
Ground
Ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control
Output
Ignition switch
OFF or ACC ON
12 V 0V
50 (R)
Ground
Trunk room lamp switch
Input
OFF (Trunk lid is closed)
JPMIA0011GB
11.8 V ON (Trunk lid is opened) Ignition switch ON (A/T models) 52 (SB) Ground Starter relay control Output Ignition switch ON (M/T models) When selector lever is in P or N position When selector lever is not in P or N position When the clutch pedal is depressed When the clutch pedal is not depressed ON (Pressed) 0V 12 V 0V Battery voltage 0V 0V
61 (SB)
Ground
Trunk lid opener request switch
Input
Trunk lid opener request switch
OFF (Not pressed)
JPMIA0016GB
1.0 V 64 (L) Ground Intelligent Key warning buzzer (Engine room) Output Intelligent Key warning buzzer (Engine room) Sounding Not sounding 0V 12 V
ADP-186
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Pressed Value (Approx.) 0V
67 (GR)
Ground
Trunk lid opener switch
Input
C
Not pressed
D
JPMIA0011GB
11.8 V
E
JMKIA0062GB
72 (R)
Ground
Room antenna 2 () (Center console)
Output
Ignition switch OFF
H
JMKIA0063GB
ADP

JMKIA0062GB
L
73 (G) Ground Room antenna 2 (+) (Center console) Output Ignition switch OFF
M
JMKIA0063GB
ADP-187
2009 G37 Coupe

When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area When the passenger door request switch is operated with ignition switch OFF When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area
74 (SB)
Ground
Passenger door antenna ()
Output
75 (BR)
Ground
Passenger door antenna (+)
Output
When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area When the driver door request switch is operated with ignition switch OFF When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area
76 (V)
Ground
Driver door antenna ()
Output
ADP-188
2009 G37 Coupe

B
77 (LG)
Ground
Driver door antenna (+)
Output

JMKIA0062GB
78 (Y)
Ground
Room antenna 1 () (Instrument panel)
Output
Ignition switch OFF
ADP
JMKIA0063GB
M
JMKIA0062GB
79 (BR)
Ground
Room antenna 1 (+) (Instrument panel)
Output
Ignition switch OFF

JMKIA0063GB
ADP-189
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + 80 (GR) 81 (W) 82 (R) Ground Description Signal name NATS antenna amp (Built in key slot) NATS antenna amp (Built in key slot) Ignition relay [Fuse block (J/B)] control Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Output During waiting Condition Ignition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelligent Key into the key slot. Ignition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelligent Key into the key slot. OFF or ACC ON Value (Approx.) Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should move. Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should move. 0V 12 V
Ground
During waiting
Ground
Ignition switch
During waiting
JMKIA0064GB
83 (Y)
Ground
Remote keyless entry receiver communication
Input/ Output
When operating either button on the Intelligent Key
JMKIA0065GB
All switches OFF (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
87 (Y)
Ground
Combination switch INPUT 5
Input
Combination switch
Front fog lamp switch ON (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0037GB
1.3 V
Any of the conditions below with all switches OFF Wiper intermittent dial 1 Wiper intermittent dial 2 Wiper intermittent dial 6 Wiper intermittent dial 7
JPMIA0040GB
1.3 V
ADP-190
2009 G37 Coupe

B
JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
E
Lighting switch HI (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
F
JPMIA0036GB
88 (O)
Ground
Input
Combination switch
1.3 V
Lighting switch 2ND (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0037GB
1.3 V
ADP
Any of the conditions below with all switches OFF Wiper intermittent dial 1 Wiper intermittent dial 2 Wiper intermittent dial 3
JPMIA0040GB
1.3 V 89 (BR) 90 (P) 91 (L) Ground Push-button ignition switch (Push switch) CAN-L CAN-H Input Input/ Output Input/ Output Push-button ignition switch (push switch) Pressed Not pressed OFF 0V Battery voltage 0V
Ground Ground
92 (LG)
Ground
Key slot illumination
Output
Blinking
JPMIA0015GB
6.5 V ON 12 V
ADP-191
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + 93 (Y) 95 (O) 96 (GR) 97 (L) 98 (P) Ground Description Signal name Input/ Output Output Ignition switch Condition OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated) ON Ground ACC relay control A/T shift selector (Detention switch) power supply Steering lock condition No. 1 Steering lock condition No. 2 Selector lever P position switch ASCD clutch switch (M/T models without ICC) Output Ignition switch OFF ACC or ON LOCK status UNLOCK status LOCK status UNLOCK status P position Any position other than P OFF (Clutch pedal is depressed) ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed) OFF (Clutch pedal is depressed) ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed) ON (Pressed) Value (Approx.) Battery voltage 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V 0V
ON indicator lamp
Ground
Output
Ground
Input
Steering lock
Ground
Input
Steering lock
Selector lever
99 (R)
Ground
Input
ASCD clutch switch
ICC clutch switch (M/ T models with ICC)
ICC clutch switch
100 (Y)
Ground
Passenger door request switch
Input
Passenger door request switch
OFF (Not pressed)
JPMIA0016GB
1.0 V ON (Pressed) 0V
101 (P)
Ground
Driver door request switch
Input
Driver door request switch
OFF (Not pressed)
JPMIA0016GB
1.0 V 102 (O) 103 (LG) 106 (W) Ground Blower fan motor relay control Remote keyless entry receiver power supply Steering lock unit power supply Output Ignition switch OFF or ACC ON 0V 12 V 12 V 12 V 0V
Ground
Output
Ignition switch OFF OFF or ACC ON
Ground
Output
Ignition switch
ADP-192
2009 G37 Coupe

All switches OFF
JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
E
F
JPMIA0037GB
1.3 V
G
Combination switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
107 (LG)
Ground
H
Input
JPMIA0036GB
1.3 V
ADP
Front wiper switch LO
K
JPMIA0038GB
1.3 V
M
Front washer switch ON
N
JPMIA0039GB
1.3 V
ADP-193
2009 G37 Coupe

JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch AUTO (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0038GB
108 (R)
Ground
Input
Combination switch
1.3 V
Lighting switch 1ST (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0036GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0039GB
1.3 V
ADP-194
2009 G37 Coupe

All switches OFF
JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
E
Lighting switch PASS
F
JPMIA0037GB
1.3 V
G
109 (W)
Ground
H
Lighting switch 2ND
Input
JPMIA0036GB
1.3 V
ADP
Front wiper switch INT
K
JPMIA0038GB
1.3 V
M
Front wiper switch HI
N
JPMIA0040GB
1.3 V ON 0V
P
110 (G) Ground Hazard switch Input Hazard switch OFF
JPMIA0012GB
1.1 V
ADP-195
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition LOCK status Value (Approx.) 12 V
LOCK or UNLOCK 111 (Y) Ground Steering lock unit communication Input/ Output Steering lock
JMKIA0066GB
For 15 seconds after UNLOCK 15 seconds or later after UNLOCK 113 (O) Ignition switch ON When bright outside of the vehicle When dark outside of the vehicle OFF (Clutch pedal is not depressed) ON (Clutch pedal is depressed) OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed) ON (Brake pedal is depressed)
12 V 0V Close to 5 V Close to 0 V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage
Ground
Optical sensor
Input
114 (R) 116 (SB)
Ground
Clutch interlock switch
Input
Ground
Stop lamp switch 1
Input
Stop lamp switch 2 (Without ICC) 118 (BR) Ground Stop lamp switch 2 (With ICC) Input
Stop lamp switch
Stop lamp switch OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed) and ICC brake hold relay OFF Stop lamp switch ON (Brake pedal is depressed) or ICC brake hold relay ON
119 (SB)
Ground
Driver side door lock assembly (Unlock sensor)
Input
Driver door
LOCK status (Unlock sensor switch OFF)

JPMIA0012GB
1.1 V UNLOCK status (Unlock switch sensor ON) 121 (SB) When the Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot When the Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot Ignition switch OFF or ACC ON 0V
12 V 0V 0V Battery voltage
Ground
Key slot switch
Input
123 (W)
Ground
IGN feedback
Input
ADP-196
2009 G37 Coupe

124 (LG)
Ground
Passenger door switch
Input
OFF (Door close)
JPMIA0011GB
11.8 V ON (Door open) 0V
129 (O)
Ground
Trunk lid opener cancel switch
Input
CANCEL
JPMIA0012GB
1.1 V ON 0V
132 (V)
Ground
Power window switch communication
Input/ Output
Ignition switch ON
JPMIA0013GB
10.2 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC ON (Tail lamps OFF) 12 V 9.5 V NOTE: The pulse width of this wave is varied by the illumination brightening/dimming level. 133 (L) Ground Push-button ignition switch illumination Output Push-button ignition switch illumination ON (Tail lamps ON)
ADP
JPMIA0159GB
OFF 134 (LG) 137 (O) 138 (V) Ground Ground Ground LOCK indicator lamp Receiver and sensor ground Receiver and sensor power supply Output Input Output LOCK indicator lamp OFF ON
0V Battery voltage 0V 0V 0V 5.0 V
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF ACC or ON
ADP-197
2009 G37 Coupe

Standby state
139 (L)
Ground
Tire pressure receiver communication
Input/ Output
Ignition switch ON
OCC3881D
When receiving the signal from the transmitter
OCC3880D
140 (GR)
Ground
Selector lever P/N position (A/T models)
Input
Selector lever
P or N position Except P and N positions ON
12 V 0V 0V
141 (R)
Ground
Security indicator
Output
Security indicator
Blinking
JPMIA0014GB
11.3 V OFF All switches OFF Lighting switch 1ST Combination switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Lighting switch HI Lighting switch 2ND 12 V 0V
142 (BR)
Ground
Combination switch OUTPUT 5
Output

JPMIA0031GB
10.7 V All switches OFF (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Front wiper switch HI (Wiper intermittent dial 4) 143 (V) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 1 Output Combination switch Any of the conditions below with all switches OFF Wiper intermittent dial 1 Wiper intermittent dial 2 Wiper intermittent dial 3 Wiper intermittent dial 6 Wiper intermittent dial 7 0V
JPMIA0032GB
10.7 V
ADP-198
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition All switches OFF (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Front washer switch ON (Wiper intermittent dial 4) 144 (G) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 2 Output Combination switch Value (Approx.) 0V
C
Any of the conditions below with all switches OFF Wiper intermittent dial 1 Wiper intermittent dial 5 Wiper intermittent dial 6 10.7 V All switches OFF Front wiper switch INT 0V
D
JPMIA0033GB
145 (L)
Ground
Output
Lighting switch AUTO

JPMIA0034GB
G
10.7 V
All switches OFF Front fog lamp switch ON Combination switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Lighting switch 2ND Lighting switch PASS
0V
146 (SB)
Ground
Output
ADP
JPMIA0035GB
10.7 V 149 (W) Ground Tire pressure warning check switch Input 12 V
150 (R)
Ground
Driver door switch
Input
Driver door switch
OFF (Door close)
JPMIA0011GB
11.8 V ON (Door open) 151 (G) Ground Rear window defogger relay control Output Rear window defogger Active Not activated 0V 0V Battery voltage
ADP-199
2009 G37 Coupe

Wiring Diagram - BCM -
INFOID:0000000004685556
JCMWM3046GB
ADP-200
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCMWM3047GB
ADP-201
2009 G37 Coupe

JCMWM3048GB
ADP-202
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCMWM3049GB
ADP-203
2009 G37 Coupe

JCMWM3050GB
ADP-204
2009 G37 Coupe

A
ADP
O
JCMWM3051GB
Fail-safe
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.
P
INFOID:0000000004685557
ADP-205
2009 G37 Coupe

Display contents of CONSULT B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM B2195: ANTI SCANNING B2557: VEHICLE SPEED Fail-safe Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit steering lock Erase DTC Erase DTC Erase DTC Erase DTC Erase DTC Erase DTC Ignition switch ON OFF When normal vehicle speed signals are received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 500 ms 500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status becomes consistent Starter control relay signal Starter relay status signal 500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consistent Selector lever P position switch signal P range signal (CAN) 5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Ignition switch is in the ON position Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery voltage) Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more 500 ms after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Ignition switch is in the ON position Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery voltage) Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V) 500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Status 1 - Ignition switch is in the ON position - Selector lever P/N position signal: P and N position (battery voltage) - P range signal or N range signal (CAN): ON Status 2 - Ignition switch is in the ON position - Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V) - P range signal and N range signal (CAN): OFF 500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Status 1 - Ignition switch is in the ON position - Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V) - Interlock/PNP switch signal (CAN): OFF Status 2 - Ignition switch is in the ON position - Selector lever P/N position signal: P or N position (battery voltage) - PNP switch signal (CAN): ON 500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status becomes consistent Steering lock relay signal (Request signal) Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal) Cancellation
B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY
Inhibit engine cranking
B2601: SHIFT POSITION
Inhibit steering lock
B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS
B2604: PNP SW
B2605: PNP SW
B2606: S/L RELAY
ADP-206
2009 G37 Coupe

Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation 500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status has becomes consistent Steering lock relay signal (Request signal) Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal) 500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent Starter motor relay control signal Starter relay status signal (CAN) When the following steering lock conditions agree BCM steering lock control status Steering lock condition No. 1 signal status Steering lock condition No. 2 signal status 500 ms after the following conditions are fulfilled IGN relay (IPDM E/R) control signal: OFF (Battery voltage) Ignition ON signal (CAN to IPDM E/R): OFF (Request signal) Ignition ON signal (CAN from IPDM E/R): OFF (Condition signal) When any of the following conditions are fulfilled Power position changes to ACC Receives engine status signal (CAN) When any of the following conditions are fulfilled Steering lock unit status signal (CAN) is received normally The BCM steering lock control status matches the steering lock status recognized by the steering lock unit status signal (CAN from IPDM E/R) 1 second after the starter motor relay control inside BCM becomes normal 1 second after the ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control inside BCM becomes normal 1 second after the steering lock unit power supply output control inside BCM becomes normal BCM initialization When any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Status 1 - Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): ON - Clutch interlock switch signal: OFF (0 V) Status 2 - Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): OFF - Clutch interlock switch signal: ON (Battery voltage) When BCM transmits the LOCK request signal to steering lock unit, and receives LOCK response signal from steering lock unit, the following conditions are fulfilled Steering condition No. 1 signal: LOCK (0 V) Steering condition No. 2 signal: LOCK (Battery voltage)
B2607: S/L RELAY
B2608: STARTER RELAY
B2609: S/L STATUS
Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit steering lock
B260A: IGNITION RELAY
B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST
Maintains the power supply position attained at the time of DTC detection
B2612: S/L STATUS
B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC B2618: BCM B2619: BCM B261E: VEHICLE TYPE
Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking
ADP
B26E8: CLUTCH SW
B26E9: S/L STATUS
HIGH FLASHER OPERATION

BCM detects the turn signal lamp circuit status by the current value. BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or harness open is detected with the turn signal lamp operating. NOTE: The blinking speed is normal while activating the hazard warning lamp.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
INFOID:0000000004685558
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart.
ADP-207
2009 G37 Coupe

Priority 1 2 B2562: LOW VOLTAGE U1000: CAN COMM U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM B2195: ANTI SCANNING B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM B2553: IGNITION RELAY B2555: STOP LAMP B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B2557: VEHICLE SPEED B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY B2601: SHIFT POSITION B2602: SHIFT POSITION B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS B2604: PNP SW B2605: PNP SW B2606: S/L RELAY B2607: S/L RELAY B2608: STARTER RELAY B2609: S/L STATUS B260A: IGNITION RELAY B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST B2612: S/L STATUS B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC B2618: BCM B2619: BCM B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B261E: VEHICLE TYPE B26E8: CLUTCH SW B26E9: S/L STATUS B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG DTC
ADP-208
2009 G37 Coupe

Priority C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL C1708: [NO DATA] FL C1709: [NO DATA] FR C1710: [NO DATA] RR C1711: [NO DATA] RL C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL C1720: [CODE ERR] FL C1721: [CODE ERR] FR C1722: [CODE ERR] RR C1723: [CODE ERR] RL C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL C1734: CONTROL UNIT DTC
B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA

INFOID:0000000004685559
DTC Index
NOTE: The details of time display are as follows. ADP CRNT: A malfunction is detected now. PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past. IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to BCS-14, "COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)". K
Freeze Frame Data Vehicle Speed Odo/Trip Meter Vehicle condition Tire pressure monitor warning lamp ON
CONSULT display
Fail-safe
Intelligent Key warning lamp ON
Reference page
No DTC is detected. further testing may be required. U1000: CAN COMM U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM B2195: ANTI SCANNING B2553: IGNITION RELAY B2555: STOP LAMP
BCS-35 BCS-36 BCS-37 SEC-55 SEC-56 SEC-47 SEC-50 SEC-51 SEC-53 SEC-54 PCS-48 SEC-59
ADP-209
2009 G37 Coupe

CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data Vehicle Speed Odo/Trip Meter Vehicle condition Intelligent Key warning lamp ON (Turn ON for 15 seconds) (Turn ON for 15 seconds) (Turn ON for 15 seconds) Tire pressure monitor warning lamp ON WT-17 Reference page SEC-61 SEC-63 SEC-64 BCS-38 SEC-65 SEC-68 SEC-70 SEC-73 SEC-75 SEC-77 SEC-78 SEC-80 SEC-82 PCS-50 SEC-86 SEC-87 SEC-88 SEC-89 SEC-94 PCS-52 PCS-54 PCS-56 SEC-98 PCS-58 SEC-100 PCS-59 SEC-101 DLK-55 DLK-57 DLK-59 SEC-90 SEC-92 SEC-93
B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B2557: VEHICLE SPEED B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY B2562: LOW VOLTAGE B2601: SHIFT POSITION B2602: SHIFT POSITION B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS B2604: PNP SW B2605: PNP SW B2606: S/L RELAY B2607: S/L RELAY B2608: STARTER RELAY B2609: S/L STATUS B260A: IGNITION RELAY B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST B2612: S/L STATUS B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC B2618: BCM B2619: BCM B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B261E: VEHICLE TYPE B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA B26E8: CLUTCH SW B26E9: S/L STATUS B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL
ADP-210
2009 G37 Coupe

CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data Vehicle Speed Odo/Trip Meter Vehicle condition Intelligent Key warning lamp ON Tire pressure monitor warning lamp ON WT-32 WT-33 WT-29 WT-26 WT-24 WT-21 WT-19 Reference page
C1708: [NO DATA] FL C1709: [NO DATA] FR C1710: [NO DATA] RR C1711: [NO DATA] RL C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL C1720: [CODE ERR] FL C1721: [CODE ERR] FR C1722: [CODE ERR] RR C1723: [CODE ERR] RL C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR C1734: CONTROL UNIT
ADP
ADP-211
2009 G37 Coupe
MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
ALL COMPONENT
ALL COMPONENT : Description ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535086
All functions do not operate when manually operated.(power seat, tilt & telescopic, and door mirror.
INFOID:0000000004535087
1.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check driver seat control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ADP-64, "DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check automatic drive positioner control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ADP-65, "AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION

Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1.
POWER SEAT
POWER SEAT : Description
Power seat does not operate when manually operated.
INFOID:0000000004535088
POWER SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535089
1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power seat switch ground circuit. Refer to ADP-95, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

STEERING POSITION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

STEERING POSITION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE : Description
Tilt & telescopic do not operate when manually operated.
INFOID:0000000004535090
ADP-212
2009 G37 Coupe

STEERING POSITION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000004535091
1.CHECK TILT & TELESCOPIC SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check tilt & telescopic switch ground circuit. Refer to ADP-96, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
B C

SEAT SLIDING
SEAT SLIDING : Description
Seat sliding alone does not operate when manually operated.
F
INFOID:0000000004535092
SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure
G
INFOID:0000000004535093
1.CHECK SLIDING MECHANISM

Check for the following. Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials. Interference with other parts because of poor installation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Check sliding switch. Refer to ADP-67, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
ADP

Check sliding motor. Refer to ADP-124, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
M

Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1.
O P
SEAT RECLINING
SEAT RECLINING : Description
Seat reclining only does not operate when manually operated.
INFOID:0000000004535094
ADP-213
2009 G37 Coupe

SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535095
1.CHECK RECLINING MECHANISM


Check reclining switch. Refer to ADP-104, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR

Check reclining motor. Refer to ADP-126, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

SEAT LIFTING (FRONT)

SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Description
Seat lifting (front) only does not operate when manually operated.
INFOID:0000000004535096
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535097
1.CHECK LIFTING (FRONT) MECHANISM


Check lifting switch (front). Refer to ADP-71, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)

Check lifting motor (front). Refer to ADP-128, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal?
ADP-214
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

B
SEAT LIFTING (REAR)

SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Description
Seat lifting (rear) only does not operate when manually operated.
INFOID:0000000004535098
SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535099
1.CHECK LIFTING (REAR) MECHANISM

F

Check lifting switch (rear). Refer to ADP-73, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)

Check lifting motor (rear). Refer to ADP-130, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
ADP

STEERING TILT
STEERING TILT : Description
Steering tilt only does not operate when manually operated.
INFOID:0000000004535100
O
INFOID:0000000004535101
STEERING TILT : Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK STEERING TILT MECHANISM

Check for the following. Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials. Interference with other parts because of poor installation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2.
ADP-215
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK TILT SWITCH

Check tilt switch. Refer to ADP-83, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK TILT MOTOR

Check tilt motor. Refer to ADP-132, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

STEERING TELESCOPIC
STEERING TELESCOPIC : Description
Steering telescopic only does not operate when manually operated.
INFOID:0000000004535102
STEERING TELESCOPIC : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535103
1.CHECK STEERING TELESCOPIC MECHANISM


Check telescopic switch. Refer to ADP-85, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK TELESCOPIC MOTOR

Check telescopic motor. Refer to ADP-134, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

DOOR MIRROR
ADP-216
2009 G37 Coupe

DOOR MIRROR : Description

Door mirror does not operate when manually operated.
INFOID:0000000004535104
DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535105
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MECHANISM

C

Check mirror switch. Refer to ADP-90, "MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK MIRROR MOTOR

Check mirror motor. Refer to ADP-136, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

ADP
ADP-217
2009 G37 Coupe
MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE


ALL COMPONENT
ALL COMPONENT : Description ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535106
All functions do not operate when memory operated. (power seat, tilt & telescopic, and door mirror)
INFOID:0000000004535107
1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION

Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-212, "ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.PERFORM MEMORY STORING PROCEDURE

Perform memory storing procedure. Refer to ADP-10, "MEMORY STORING : Special Repair Requirement". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Memory function is normal. NO >> GO TO 3.

Check seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-87, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace seat memory switch.

Check detention switch. Refer to ADP-97, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

SEAT SLIDING
SEAT SLIDING : Description
Seat sliding only does not operate when memory operated.
INFOID:0000000004535108
SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535109

Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-213, "SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR

Check sliding sensor.
ADP-218
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Refer to ADP-101, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

SEAT RECLINING
SEAT RECLINING : Description
Seat reclining only does not operate when memory operated.
INFOID:0000000004535110
E
INFOID:0000000004535111
SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure

Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-214, "SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR

Check reclining sensor. Refer to ADP-104, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

ADP
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT)

SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Description
Seat lifting (front) only does not operate when memory operated.
INFOID:0000000004535112
M
INFOID:0000000004535113
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure

Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-214, "SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT)

Check lifting sensor (front). Refer to ADP-107, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
ADP-219
2009 G37 Coupe


SEAT LIFTING (REAR)

SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Description
Seat lifting (rear) only does not operate when memory operated.
INFOID:0000000004535114
SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535115

Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-215, "SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR)

Check lifting sensor (rear). Refer to ADP-110, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

STEERING TELESCOPIC
STEERING TELESCOPIC : Description
Steering telescopic only does not operate when memory operated.
INFOID:0000000004535116
STEERING TELESCOPIC : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535117

Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-216, "STEERING TELESCOPIC : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR

Check steering telescopic sensor. Refer to ADP-116, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
ADP-220
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NO >> GO TO 1.
STEERING TILT
STEERING TILT : Description
Steering tilt only does not operate when memory operated.
INFOID:0000000004535118
B
INFOID:0000000004535119
STEERING TILT : Diagnosis Procedure

Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-215, "STEERING TILT : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.CHECK TILT SENSOR

Check steering tilt sensor. Refer to ADP-113, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

DOOR MIRROR
DOOR MIRROR : Description
Door mirror does not operate when memory operated.
INFOID:0000000004535120
ADP
DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535121

Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-217, "DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure"
L
2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR

Check mirror sensor. Refer to ADP-119, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". (Driver side) Refer to ADP-121, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". (Passenger side) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

ADP-221
2009 G37 Coupe
MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT ILLUMINATE

MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT ILLUMINATE

Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535122
1.CHECK MEMORY INDICATOR

Check memory indicator. Refer to ADP-139, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

ADP-222
2009 G37 Coupe
SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535123
1.CHECK SYSTEM SETTING

Check system setting. Refer to ADP-11, "SYSTEM SETTING : Special Repair Requirement". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Synchronization function is normal. NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ALL FUNCTIONS MAMUAL OPERATION

Check all functions manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Refer to ADP-212, "ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure".

ADP
ADP-223
2009 G37 Coupe
POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE


Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535124
1.CHECK POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION

Check power walk-in function. Refer to ADP-39, "POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Power walk-in function is OK. NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE

Perform initialization procedure. Refer to ADP-10, "SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Special Repair Requirement". 2. Check power walk-in function. Refer to ADP-39, "POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Power walk-in function is normal. NO >> GO TO 3. 1.

Check power walk-in switch. Refer to ADP-81, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Check seat belt buckle switch. Refer to ADP-77, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Check forward switch. Refer to ADP-75, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Check sliding limit switch. Refer to ADP-79, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
7.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check driver side door switch. Refer to DLK-62, "Component Function Check" Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Check the operation again.
ADP-224
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Refer to ADP-39, "POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description". Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1.
ADP
ADP-225
2009 G37 Coupe
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004535125
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

Check door lock function. Refer to DLK-7, "Work Flow". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.PERFORM MEMORY STORING PROCEDURE

1. Perform memory storing procedure. Refer to ADP-10, "MEMORY STORING : Special Repair Requirement". 2. Check Intelligent Key interlock function. Refer to ADP-34, "INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Description". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Intelligent Key inter lock function is normal. NO >> GO TO 1.
ADP-226
2009 G37 Coupe
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION


Description
The following symptoms are normal operations, and they do not indicate a malfunction.
Symptom Cause The synchronization function will not operate if the steering (tilt, telescopic) or the door mirror moves to the operating end while the seat synchronization function is operating. Seat adjustment value has exceed any of the values below. Seat sliding: 76 mm Seat reclining: 9.1 degrees Seat lifting (rear): 20 mm The side support and the lumbar support are controlled independently with no link to the automatic drive positioner system. Action to take Perform the memory function or drive the vehicle at more than 7km/h (4 MPH). Reference page
INFOID:0000000004535126
C
ADP-24
Seat synchronization function does not operate.
Side support or lumbar support does not perform memory operation.
Side support: SE-23 Lumbar support: SE-26 Memory function: ADP-29
Memory function, power walk-in function, seat synchronization function, or Intelligent Key interlock function does not operate.
The operating conditions are not fulfilled.
Fulfill the operation conditions.
Power walk-in function: ADP-39 Seat synchronization function: ADP-24 Intelligent Key interlock function: ADP-34
ADP
ADP-227
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
INFOID:0000000004250425

Precaution for Battery Service
INFOID:0000000004535059
Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interference between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, the window slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automatic window function will not work with the battery disconnected.
Service
INFOID:0000000004250426
When removing or installing various parts, place a cloth or padding onto the vehicle body to prevent scratches. Handle trim, molding, instruments, grille, etc. carefully during removing or installing. Be careful not to oil or damage them. Apply sealing compound where necessary when installing parts. When applying sealing compound, be careful that the sealing compound does not protrude from parts. When replacing any metal parts (for example body outer panel, members, etc.), be sure to take rust prevention measures.
Work
INFOID:0000000004250427
When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth. When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it. Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them. Replace a deformed or damaged clip. If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one.
ADP-228
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque. After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally. Follow the steps below to clean components. - Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the fouled area. Then rub with a soft and dry cloth. - Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipe the fouled area. Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub with a soft and dry cloth. Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, and gasoline. For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
ADP
ADP-229
2009 G37 Coupe


Exploded View
Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004250428

REMOVAL
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. 1. Remove driver seat (1). Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove mounting bolts (A). 3. Remove driver seat control unit (2).
INFOID:0000000004250429
JMJIA0230ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Be sure to clump the harness to the right place. NOTE: After installing driver seat, perform additional service when replacing control unit. Refer to ADP-9, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
ADP-230
2009 G37 Coupe


Exploded View
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004250430
B
INFOID:0000000004250431

REMOVAL
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. 1. Remove instrument driver lower panel. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove screws (A). 3. Remove automatic drive positioner control unit (1).
JMJIA0198ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Be sure to clump the harness to the right place.
H
ADP
ADP-231
2009 G37 Coupe
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH

SEAT MEMORY SWITCH

Exploded View
Refer to INT-11, "Exploded View"
INFOID:0000000004250432

REMOVAL
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. 1. Remove front door finisher (1). Refer to INT-11, "Removal and Installation". 2. Press pawls and remove seat memory switch (2) from front door finisher (1).
: Pawl
INFOID:0000000004250433
JMJIA0197ZZ
INSTALLATION
ADP-232
2009 G37 Coupe
POWER SEAT SWITCH

POWER SEAT SWITCH

Exploded View
Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004250434
B
INFOID:0000000004250435

REMOVAL
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
1. 2. 3.
Remove seat cushion outer finisher (1). Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installation". Remove screws (A). Remove power seat switch (2) from seat cushion outer finisher (1).
G
JMJIA0319JP
INSTALLATION
ADP
ADP-233
2009 G37 Coupe
SIDE SUPPORT SWITCH

SIDE SUPPORT SWITCH

Exploded View
Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View"
INFOID:0000000004250436

REMOVAL
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. 1. Remove seat cushion outer finisher (1). Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installation" 2. Remove screws (A). 3. Remove side support switch (2) from seat cushion outer finisher.
INFOID:0000000004250437
JMJIA0192ZZ
INSTALLATION
ADP-234
2009 G37 Coupe
TILT&TELESCOPIC SWITCH
TILT&TELESCOPIC SWITCH
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004250438
B
INFOID:0000000004250439

REMOVAL
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. 1. Remove steering column mask (1). Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". 2. Press pawls and remove tilt & telescopic switch (2) from steering column mask (1).
: Pawl
G
JMJIA0912ZZ
INSTALLATION
ADP
ADP-235
2009 G37 Coupe
DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
SECTION
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
CONTENTS
BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 10 .
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........10 .
Work Flow .............................................................. 10 . DTC Logic ...............................................................32 .
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 33

Description ..............................................................33 . DTC Logic ...............................................................33 . G
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ...................................... 34

Description ..............................................................34 . DTC Logic ...............................................................34 . Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................34 . H

MULTI AV SYSTEM ..........................................12 .
System Diagram ..................................................... 12 . System Description ................................................ 12 . Component Parts Location ..................................... 14 . Component Description .......................................... 15 .
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................. 36

Description ..............................................................36 . DTC Logic ...............................................................36 . Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................36 .
AUDIO SYSTEM ................................................16 .

U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT .............................. 38

Description ..............................................................38 . K
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 39

AV CONTROL UNIT .................................................39 . AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..........39 . DISPLAY UNIT ..........................................................39 . DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ...................39 . MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ......................................40 . MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................................................................40 . SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .....................................41 . SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure ........................................................................41 . L
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)....19

Diagnosis Description ............................................ 19 . CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV) ..................... 26 .

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................29 .
Description ............................................................. 29 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 29 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 29 .
AV
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) .........................30 .

Description ............................................................. 30 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 30 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 30 .
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................... 42

Description ..............................................................42 . Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................42 . P
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ..............................31 .

Description ............................................................. 31 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 31 .
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 43

Description ..............................................................43 . Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................43 .
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ..............................32 .

Description ............................................................. 32 .
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 44

2009 G37 Coupe
AV-1
Description ............................................................. 44 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 44 .
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..... 45 .

Reference Value .................................................... 79 . Wiring Diagram - BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM - ............................................... 81 .
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................. 92 .

Reference Value .................................................... 92 . Wiring Diagram - BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM - ............................................... 93 .
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 46 .

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 104

MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ................... 104 .
Symptom Table .................................................... 104 .
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................................................... 47 .


Description ........................................................... 106 .
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................................................ 48 .

PRECAUTION ........................................... 108

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 108 .
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .............................................................. 108 . Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ......................... 108 . Precaution for Harness Repair ............................. 108 .
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........................ 49 .

CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT .......................... 51 .

PREPARATION ......................................... 110

PREPARATION ............................................... 110 .
Commercial Service Tools ................................... 110 .
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CONT-SAT) ..................................................... 52 .

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 111

AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 111 .
Exploded View ..................................................... 111 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 111 .
REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SATCONT) ... 54

DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 112 .

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ....... 55 .

Description ............................................................. 55 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 55 . Component Inspection ........................................... 55 .
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................ 113 .

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 57 .

REAR SPEAKER ............................................. 114 .

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT ... 59

TWEETER ........................................................ 115 .

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 61 .

AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 61 .
Reference Value .................................................... 61 . Wiring Diagram - BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM - ............................................... 67 . DTC Index ............................................................. 77 .
ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 116 .

SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 117 .

DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 79 .

SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ...................... 118 .

Exploded View ..................................................... 118 .
AV-2
2009 G37 Coupe
Removal and Installation ...................................... 118 .
Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 152 .
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................ 119 .

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 153

Description ............................................................ 153 . DTC Logic ............................................................. 153 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 153 .
PRESET SWITCH ........................................... 120 .

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 154

Description ............................................................ 154 . DTC Logic ............................................................. 154 . C
STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 121 .

U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 155

Description ............................................................ 155 . DTC Logic ............................................................. 155 .
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................. 122 .

U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 156

Description ............................................................ 156 . DTC Logic ............................................................. 156 .
ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) ......................... 123 .

Harness Layout .................................................... 123 .
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 157

Description ............................................................ 157 . DTC Logic ............................................................. 157 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 157 .
ANTENNA FEEDER (SATELLITE RADIO) .... 124 .

Harness Layout .................................................... 124 .
BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION BASIC INSPECTION ................................ 125 .

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 125 .
Work Flow ............................................................ 125 .
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................ 159

Description ............................................................ 159 . DTC Logic ............................................................. 159 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 159 . H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 127 .

MULTI AV SYSTEM ........................................ 127 .
System Diagram ................................................... 127 . System Description .............................................. 127 . Component Parts Location ................................... 129 . Component Description ........................................ 130 .
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 161

Description ............................................................ 161 .
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 162

J AV CONTROL UNIT ............................................... 162 . AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ........ 162 . DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................ 162 . DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 162 . MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .................................... 163 . MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ...................................................................... 163 . BOSE AMP. ............................................................ 164 . BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 164 . WOOFER AMP. ...................................................... 165 . WOOFER AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 165 . IPOD ADAPTER ..................................................... 165 . iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 165 . SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................................... 166 . SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure ...................................................................... 166 . TEL ADAPTER UNIT .............................................. 166 . TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ....... 166 . K
AUDIO SYSTEM .............................................. 132 .

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM .................... 135 .

AV
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT).. 138

Diagnosis Description .......................................... 138 . CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV) ................... 147 .
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT) 150 ..

Diagnosis Description .......................................... 150 .
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ...................... 152 .

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 152 .
Description ........................................................... 152 . DTC Logic ............................................................ 152 .
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 168

Description ............................................................ 168 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 168 .
AV-3
2009 G37 Coupe
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............. 169 .

Description ............................................................169 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................169 .
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 187 . Component Inspection ......................................... 187 .
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT.. 189

Description ........................................................... 189 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 189 . Component Inspection ......................................... 189 .
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 170 .

RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT ... 171 .

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 191

AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 191 .
Reference Value .................................................. 191 . Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM - ............................................. 198 . DTC Index ............................................................ 216 .
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 172 .

HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................................................. 173 .

DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 218 .

Reference Value .................................................. 218 . Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM - ............................................. 220 .
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .......................................................... 174 .

BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 239 .

AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 175 .

WOOFER AMP. ............................................... 260 .

CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........................ 177 .

iPod ADAPTER ............................................... 279 .

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 178 .

SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 299 .

CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........................ 180 .

TEL ADAPTER UNIT ....................................... 319 .

MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 181 .

COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CONT-SAT) ................................................... 182 .

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 339

MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ................... 339 .
Symptom Table .................................................... 339 .
REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SATCONT) . 184


Description ........................................................... 343 .
PRECAUTION ........................................... 345

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 345 .
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .............................................................. 345 . Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ......................... 345 . Precaution for Harness Repair ............................. 345 .
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ..... 185 .

Description ............................................................185 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................185 . Component Inspection ..........................................185 .
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ..... 187 .

Description ............................................................187 .
AV-4
2009 G37 Coupe
PREPARATION ........................................ 347 .

PREPARATION ............................................... 347 .
PRESET SWITCH ........................................... 362

Exploded View ...................................................... 362 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 362 . A

AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 348 .
STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 363

iPod ADAPTER ............................................... 364

DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 349 .

iPod CONNECTOR ......................................... 365

DOOR SQUAWKER ........................................ 350 .

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................ 366

DOOR WOOFER ............................................. 351 .

MICROPHONE ................................................ 367

Exploded View ...................................................... 367 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 367 . G
REAR SPEAKER ............................................ 352 .

TEL ADAPTER UNIT ...................................... 368

Exploded View ...................................................... 368 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 368 . H
TWEETER ....................................................... 353 .

ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) ......................... 369

Harness Layout .................................................... 369 . I
CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 354 .

ANTENNA FEEDER (SATELLITE RADIO) .... 370

Harness Layout .................................................... 370 . J
ANTENNA FEEDER (TEL) ............................. 371

Harness Layout .................................................... 371 .
REAR WOOFER .............................................. 355 .

BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION BASIC INSPECTION ................................ 372 .

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ..... 372
Work Flow ............................................................. 372 .
BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 356 .

WOOFER AMP. ............................................... 357 .

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................ 374

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................................ 374 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description .. 374 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement .................................................. 374 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT ..................................................... 374 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 374 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ... 374 . REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT ...................... 374 .
ANTENNA AMP. ............................................. 358 .

AV
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ........................... 359 .



AV-5
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description ..374 REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement ..................................................374 .
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 418 .

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 375 .

MULTI AV SYSTEM ........................................ 375 .
System Diagram ...................................................375 . System Description ...............................................375 . Component Parts Location ...................................378 . Component Description ........................................379 .
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 419 .

U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 420 .

NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................. 381 .

U1220 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 421 .

U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 422 .

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .................. 386 .

U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 423 .

AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................. 389 .

U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 424 .

U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 425 .

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 393

Diagnosis Description ...........................................393 . CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV) ....................408 .
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 426 .

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 412 .

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 412 .
Description ............................................................412 . DTC Logic .............................................................412 . Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................412 .
U121F AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 427 .

Description ........................................................... 427 . DTC Logic ............................................................ 427 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 427 .
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ...................... 413 .

Description ............................................................413 . DTC Logic .............................................................413 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................413 .
U1204 GPS ...................................................... 428 .

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 414 .

Description ............................................................414 . DTC Logic .............................................................414 .
U1205 GPS ...................................................... 429 .

U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 415 .

U1206 GPS ...................................................... 430 .

U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 416 .

U1207 GPS ...................................................... 431 .

U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 417 .

AV-6
2009 G37 Coupe
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 432 .

RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 447

U1244 GPS ANTENNA ................................... 434 .

HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 448

Description ............................................................ 448 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 448 . C
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ................. 435 .

VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .......................................................... 449

U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ........... 436 .

AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 450

Description ............................................................ 450 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 450 . F
MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 451

Description ............................................................ 451 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 451 . G
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 437 .

Description ........................................................... 437 .
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 438 .

AV CONTROL UNIT ............................................... 438 . AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ........ 438 . DISPLAY UNIT ....................................................... 438 . DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 438 . MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .................................... 439 . MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ...................................................................... 439 . CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .................................... 440 . CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .. 440 BOSE AMP. ............................................................ 440 . BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 440 . WOOFER AMP. ...................................................... 441 . WOOFER AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 441 . IPOD ADAPTER ..................................................... 441 . iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 442 .
CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......................... 452

Description ............................................................ 452 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 452 . H
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 453

Description ............................................................ 453 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 453 . I
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA CONTROL UNIT) ............................................................... 455
CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................... 456

Description ............................................................ 456 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 456 . L
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) .... 457
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 443 .

Description ........................................................... 443 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 443 .
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL 1, 2 CIRCUIT .......................................................... 458

AV
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 444 .

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT ................................................................ 460

RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 445 .

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ..... 462

Description ............................................................ 462 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 462 . Component Inspection .......................................... 462 .
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT .... 446 .

Description ........................................................... 446 .
AV-7
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ..... 464 .

PREPARATION ............................................... 615 .

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 616

AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 616 .
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT . 466

DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 617 .

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 468 .

AV CONTROL UNIT ....................................... 468 .
Reference Value ...................................................468 . Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM - ...................................................474 . Fail-Safe ...............................................................493 . DTC Index ............................................................495 .
DOOR SQUAWKER ........................................ 618 .

DOOR WOOFER ............................................. 619 .

DISPLAY UNIT ............................................... 496 .

Reference Value ...................................................496 . Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM - ...................................................498 .
REAR SPEAKER ............................................. 620 .

BOSE AMP. .................................................... 518 .

TWEETER ........................................................ 621 .

WOOFER AMP. .............................................. 540 .

CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 622 .

REAR WOOFER .............................................. 623 .

iPod ADAPTER .............................................. 560 .

BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 624 .

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................ 581 .

WOOFER AMP. ............................................... 625 .


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................. 603 .
Symptom Table ....................................................603 .
ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 626 .

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 608 .

Description ............................................................608 .

PRECAUTION ........................................... 613 .

PRECAUTIONS .............................................. 613 .
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ...............................................................613 . Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .........................613 . Precaution for Harness Repair .............................613 .

PRESET SWITCH ............................................ 629 .

PREPARATION ......................................... 615 .

STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 630 .

Exploded View ..................................................... 630 .
AV-8
2009 G37 Coupe
Removal and Installation ...................................... 630 .
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................. 637

Exploded View ...................................................... 637 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 637 . Adjustment ............................................................ 637 . A
iPod ADAPTER ............................................... 631 .

iPod CONNECTOR ......................................... 632 .

REAR VIEW CAMERA .................................... 638

Exploded View ...................................................... 638 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 638 . Adjustment ............................................................ 638 .
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................. 633 .

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 640

Exploded View ...................................................... 640 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 640 . Adjustment ............................................................ 640 . D
MICROPHONE ................................................ 634 .

ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) ......................... 641

Harness Layout .................................................... 641 .
GPS ANTENNA ............................................... 635 .

Exploded View ..................................................... 635 . Harness Layout .................................................... 635 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 636 .
ANTENNA FEEDER (SATELLITE RADIO) .... 642

Harness Layout .................................................... 642 .
ANTENNA FEEDER (GPS) ............................. 643

Harness Layout .................................................... 643 . G
AV
AV-9
2009 G37 Coupe

< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
INFOID:0000000004246530
JSNIA0732GB
Reference 1 Refer to AV-26, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Reference 2 Refer to AV-77, "DTC Index". Reference 3 Refer to AV-104, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION

Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items. Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred). Check the symptom. Is the occurred symptom malfunction? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III

AV-10
2009 G37 Coupe

[BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < BASIC INSPECTION > 1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for MULTI AV. Refer to AV-26, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". NOTE: Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if MULTI AV is not displayed. 2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the self-diagnosis results. Is DTC displayed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC

1. 2. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-77, "DTC Index". >> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-104, "Symptom Table". >> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR

1. 2. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts. Perform a self-diagnosis for MULTI AV with CONSULT-III. NOTE: Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results. 3. Check that the symptom does not occur. Does the symptom occur? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END
AV
AV-11
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MULTI AV SYSTEM
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004246531
JPNIA1375GB
NOTE: The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH virtually.
System Description
Multi AV system means that the following systems are integrated.
System name AUDIO SYSTEM System explanation AV-16, "System Description"
INFOID:0000000004246532
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM
Indicates the status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy and maintenance. AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while receiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp and BCM. Refer to SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM shown below. Refer to AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM shown below.
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM
AV control unit functions by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV communication lines (H, L). Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise. AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. Transmitting/receiving of data signal is performed by BCM. Also, it transmits the required signal of vehicle setting and receives the response signal.
AV-12
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
[BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > AV control unit is connected with display unit and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal of display and display control and receives the response signal from display unit. Also, it is connected with satellite radio by serial communication, and it transmits the operating signal and receives the display signal. NOTE: AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis. CONSULT-III self-diagnosis: refer to AV-26, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". On board self-diagnosis: refer to AV-19, "Diagnosis Description".
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM

Satellite radio tuner is controlled by communication signal and request signal with AV control unit. Audio signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna and transmitted to AV control unit. AV control unit is output the audio signal (satellite radio) to each speaker.
H
JPNIA0578GB
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM

Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks. Operation can be performed with multifunction switch and steering switch. Multifunction switch transmits operation signal to AV control unit with communication.
JSNIA0207GB
AV
AV-13
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246533
Component Parts Location
JPNIA0466ZZ
1. 4. 7.
Tweeter LH Rear speaker LH Satellite radio antenna
2. 5. 8.
Door speaker LH Satellite radio tuner Door speaker RH
3. 6. 9.
Antenna amp. Rear speaker RH Tweeter RH
10. Display unit 13. Auxiliary input jacks A. Within rear pillar finisher LH
11. Steering switch 14. AV control unit B. Trunk room RH
12. Preset switch 15. Multifunction switch
AV-14
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246534
Component Description
Part name Description
AV CONTROL UNIT
It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication signals from the AV control unit. AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function. It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp via CAN communication to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function. It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function. It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming control. It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and parking brake). Auxiliary image signal and auxiliary sound signal are input from the auxiliary input jacks. Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing). Synchronizing signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit. Auxiliary image signal is input from the AV control unit. Outputs sound signal from AV control unit. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from AV control unit. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from AV control unit. Outputs high range sound. Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and auxiliary input operations are integrated. Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air conditioner operations are integrated. Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. The operation of audio, etc. can be performed. Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit. The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the AV control unit to the display unit, and it outputs the sound signal to the AV control unit. Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control unit. Power (antenna amp ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit. Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the sound signal to the AV control unit. It is controlled with the AV control unit and serial communication (communication signal and request signal). Receives the satellite radio signal and outputs it to the satellite radio tuner.
DISPLAY UNIT
DOOR SPEAKER REAR SPEAKER TWEETER
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
ANTENNA AMP.
AV
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
AV-15
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004246535
JSNIA0208GB
System Description
INFOID:0000000004246536
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function can be operated with the multifunction switch, preset switch or steering switch. It indicates the operation status of AUDIO to the display.
Function AM/FM radio CD
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Operating Signal Operation of the audio system can be performed with the multifunction switch, preset switch or steering switch. Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction switch or preset switch. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering switch. Screen Display The display switching of the screen is performed with the communication signal between the display unit and the AV control unit. The image signal to display operating condition is performed with RGB signal, RGB area signal and RGB image synchronizing signal. AM/FM Radio Mode AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit. Audio signal is received by glass antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp, and finally it is input to AV control unit. AV control unit outputs the audio signal to each speaker. CD Mode CD function is built into AV control unit. AV control unit outputs the audio signal to each speaker when inserting the CD to AV control unit.
AV-16
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246537
JPNIA0466ZZ
1. 4. 7.
Tweeter LH Rear speaker LH Satellite radio antenna
2. 5. 8.
Door speaker LH Satellite radio tuner Door speaker RH
3. 6. 9.
Antenna amp. Rear speaker RH Tweeter RH
10. Display unit 13. Auxiliary input jacks A. Within rear pillar finisher LH
11. Steering switch 14. AV control unit B. Trunk room RH
12. Preset switch 15. Multifunction switch
L
INFOID:0000000004246538
Part name AV CONTROL UNIT DISPLAY UNIT DOOR SPEAKER REAR SPEAKER TWEETER Description
The AM/FM receiving function and the CD playing function are equipped. Outputs the audio signal from each function to each speaker. Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit. Outputs sound signal from AV control unit. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from AV control unit. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from AV control unit. Outputs high range sound. Each audio operation can be operated. Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication.
AV
AV-17
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
Part name
[BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Description Each audio and air conditioner operation can be operated. Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire Each audio operation can be operated. Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit. Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control unit. Power (antenna amp ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
PRESET SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
ANTENNA AMP.
AV-18
2009 G37 Coupe
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)

A
INFOID:0000000004246539

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode Press the BACK switch and the UP switch of the 4-direction switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. The buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and the selfdiagnosis mode starts. The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal. CAUTION: The hazard switch and CD eject switch cannot be checked.
JSNIA0136GB
F Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
MULTI AV SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis. Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
H
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually. Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display. The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking, modifying or adjusting actions generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judgment automatically). On Board Diagnosis Item
Mode Self-Diagnosis Description AV control unit diagnosis. Perform the connection diagnosis between each of the units.
AV
AV-19
2009 G37 Coupe

Mode Display Diagnosis Vehicle Signals Speaker Test Climate Control Confirmation/ Adjustment Error History Vehicle CAN Diagnosis AV COMM Diagnosis Delete Unit Connection Log Initialize Settings

Description The confirmations of the tint with the color spectrum bar display and shading of color with the gradation bar display can be performed. Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake, lights, ignition switch, and reverse. The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone. Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis. The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past are displayed. The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored. The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be monitored. Erase the connection history of unit and error history. Initializes the AV control unit memory.
STARTING PROCEDURE
1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Turn the audio system OFF. While pressing the SETTING button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing BACK button.
JSNIA0137GB
4.
The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the items of Self Diagnosis and Confirmation/Adjustment can be selected.
JSNIA0138GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select Self-diagnosis. Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the selfdiagnosis mode starts. The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
JSNIA0139GB
AV-20
2009 G37 Coupe

[BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > 2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded according to the diagnostic results.
Diagnosis results Normal Connection malfunction Unit malfunction Note
NOTE: Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red. Replace AV control unit if Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-111, "Exploded View".
Unit Green Gray Red
Connection line Green Yellow Green

JSNIA0209GB
If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order of priority: red > yellow > gray. The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a component in the diagnosis result screen.
JSNIA0141GB
Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit. Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function cannot be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch.
AV
JPNIA0514GB
NOTE: Onboard self-diagnosis cannot be started when an error occurs on the dotted-line part above.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
Self-diagnosis Result Chart
AV-21
2009 G37 Coupe

Area with yellow connection lines Description

Possible malfunction location / Action to take
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
Replace the AV control unit.
JSNIA0211GB
Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction
Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit.
Communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit.
JPNIA0464GB
JSNIA0212GB
Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuits between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. 2. Start the diagnosis function and select Confirmation/Adjustment. The confirmation/adjustment mode indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted. Select each switch on the Inspection & Adjustment Mode screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press the BACK switch to return to the initial Inspection & Adjustment Mode screen.
JSNIA0147GB
AV-22
2009 G37 Coupe

Display Diagnosis A
JSNIA0688GB
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB signal error is detected.
G
R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error
: Light blue (Cyan) tint : Purple (Magenta) tint : Yellow tint
Vehicle Signals A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system.
JSNIA0149GB
Diagnosis item Vehicle speed
Display ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Vehicle status Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Light switch ON Light switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch in ACC position Shift the selector lever to R position Shift the selector lever other than R position
Remarks
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
AV
Parking brake
Lights
Ignition
P
Reverse OFF
Speaker Test
AV-23
2009 G37 Coupe

[BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Select SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. Press Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press End to stop the test tones. NOTE: The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
Tweeter Front speaker Rear speaker : 3 kHz : 300 Hz : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
Climate Control Refer to HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM for details. Error History The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when Self-diagnosis is selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed. However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the Error Record to detect any error that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation. Count up method A The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle. The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch or CONSULT-III. Count up method B The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle. The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch or CONSULT-III.
Display type of occurrence frequency Count up method A Count up method B Error history display item CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication) Other than the above
JSNIA0151GB
Error item Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items
AV-24
2009 G37 Coupe

Error item Description

Possible malfunction factor/Action to take Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and then repair the malfunctioning parts according to the diagnosis results. Refer to AV-26, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)".
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN communication malfunction is detected.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CONTROL UNIT (AV) FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit CAN Controller Memory Error
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV communication circuit initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit malfunction is detected. Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit. Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Replace the AV control unit.
E
Display unit power supply and ground circuit. Communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit.
Front Display Connection Error
G
SAT Connection Error
J
Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch.
AV COMM CIRCUIT Switches Connection Error
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis CAN communication status and error counter is displayed. The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39. The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Malfunction counter (Past) OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39
JSNIA0080GB
AV
Items Tx (HVAC) Rx (ECM) Rx (Cluster) Rx (BCM) Rx (HVAC) Rx (USM)
Display (Current) OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN
AV COMM Diagnosis
AV-25
2009 G37 Coupe

[BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Displays the communication status between AV control unit (master unit) and each unit. The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39. The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Items C Tx (ITMSW) C Rx (PrimarySWITM) C Rx (XMITM) Status (Current) OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN Counter (Past) OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39
JSNIA0213GB
Delete Unit Connection Log Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been removed)
JSNIA0154GB
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
JSNIA0155GB
CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)

CONSULT-III FUNCTIONS
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit.
Diagnosis mode Ecu Identification Self Diagnostic Result Data Monitor Description The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
INFOID:0000000004246540
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively. The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
AV COMMUNICATION
When AV communication of CAN Diag Support Monitor is selected, the following function will be performed.
AV&NAVI C/U AUDIO Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error counter. Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.
AV communication
AV-26
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > ECU IDENTIFICATION The part number of AV control unit is displayed. [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT

In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively. The current malfunction indicates CRNT. The past malfunction indicates PAST. The timing is displayed as 0 if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected. The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
Self-diagnosis Detection Range B
G
JPNIA0515GB
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item

Error item Description CAN communication malfunction is detected. CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV communication circuit initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit malfunction is detected. Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit. Possible malfunction factor/Action to take Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and then repair the malfunctioning parts according to the diagnosis results. Refer to AV-29, "Diagnosis Procedure".
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] CAN CONT [U1216]
K
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243]
AV
AV-27
2009 G37 Coupe

Error item Description Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch.

Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
SAT CONN [U1255]
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240]
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit. For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.
Display Item VHCL SPD SIG
Display On Off On Off On Off On Off On
Vehicle status Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Light switch ON Light switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch in ACC position Shift the selector lever to R position Shift the selector lever other than R position
Remarks
PKB SIG
ILLUM SIG
IGN SIG
REV SIG
Off
SELECTION FROM MENU Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the selected vehicle signals.
Item to be selected VHCL SPD SIG PKB SIG ILLUM SIG IGN SIG REV SIG The same as when ALL SIGNALS is selected. Description
AV-28
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
Description
INFOID:0000000004246541
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III CAN COMM CIRCUIT Diagnostic item is detected when ... AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more.
INFOID:0000000004246542
Probable malfunction location
U1000
CAN communication system.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246543
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check Self Diagnostic Result of MULTI AV. Is CAN COMM CIRCUIT displayed? YES >> Refer to LAN system. Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
I
AV
AV-29
2009 G37 Coupe
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)


Description
Initial diagnosis of AV control unit.
INFOID:0000000004246544
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC U1010 Display contents of CONSULT-III CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Diagnostic item is detected when ... CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
INFOID:0000000004246545
Probable malfunction location AV control unit.

INFOID:0000000004246546
Diagnosis Procedure
1.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit. >> INSPECTION END
AV-30
2009 G37 Coupe
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246547

Description
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-111, "Exploded View".
Part name Description It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication signals from the AV control unit. AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function. It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp via CAN communication to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function. It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function. It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming control. It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and parking brake). Auxiliary image signal and auxiliary sound signal are input from the auxiliary input jacks.
INFOID:0000000004246548
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U1310 Display contents of CONSULT-III CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] DTC Detection Condition An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication circuit.
Action to take Replace AV control unit.
AV
AV-31
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246550 INFOID:0000000004246549
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III Cont Unit FLASH- ROM [U1200] DTC Detection Condition An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit (FLASH-ROM).
Action to take
U1200
Replace AV control unit.
AV-32
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246551

Description
INFOID:0000000004246552
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U1216 Display contents of CONSULT-III CAN CONT [U1216] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (CAN controller) is detected.
AV
AV-33
2009 G37 Coupe
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

Description
Part name Description Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. Inputs the RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from AV control unit and the auxiliary image signal from the auxiliary input jacks. Outputs the synchronizing signals (HP and VP) to the AV control unit.
INFOID:0000000004246554 INFOID:0000000004246553
DISPLAY UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III DTC Detection Condition Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit.
Possible causes
U1243
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246555
1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-39, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Display unit Connector M71 Terminals 11 22 AV control unit Connector M83 Terminals 56 44
Continuity
Existed
4.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit Connector M71 Terminals 11 22 Ground Not existed
Continuity
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
AV-34
2009 G37 Coupe
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

(+) Display unit Connector Terminal () Condition Reference value

A
M71
11
Ground
When adjusting display brightness.
D
PKIB5039J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace AV control unit.

Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
M71
22
Ground
PKIB5039J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace display unit.
AV
AV-35
2009 G37 Coupe
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER


Description
Part name Description Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs it to the AV control unit. It is controlled with the communication (communication signal, request signal) from AV control unit.
INFOID:0000000004246557 INFOID:0000000004246556
DTC Logic
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III DTC Detection Condition Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
Possible causes Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
INFOID:0000000004246558
U1255
SAT CONN [U1255]
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-41, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV control unit connector and satellite radio tuner connector. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and satellite radio tuner harness connector.
AV control unit Connector Terminals 28 M82 29 30 B236 Satellite radio tuner Connector Terminals 8 9 10 Existed
Continuity
4.
Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit Connector Terminals 28 M82 29 30 Ground Not existed
Continuity
AV-36
2009 G37 Coupe

A
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE

1. 2. 3. Connect AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) AV control unit Connector Terminals () Reference value (Approx.)
D
28 Ground
E
SKIA9299J
M82
29
Ground
SKIA9300J
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV control unit connector. Connect satellite radio tuner. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
(+) Satellite radio tuner Connector Terminal () Reference value (Approx.)
B236
10
Ground
AV
SKIA9301J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.
AV-37
2009 G37 Coupe
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT


Description
INFOID:0000000004246559
U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simultaneously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line. Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM

DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] DTC Detection Condition Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Possible causes Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch.
U1300 U1240
AV-38
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246560

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
Power source Battery Ignition switch ACC or ON Ignition switch ON or START Fuse No. 34 19 3
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.

Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.
Signal name Battery power supply ACC power supply Ignition signal Connector No. M81 M81 M85 Terminal No. 19 7 104 Ignition switch position OFF ACC ON Value (Approx.) Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV control unit connectors. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.
Signal name Connector No. M81 Ground M81 M85 Terminal No. 8 20 85 OFF Existed Ignition switch position Continuity
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector.
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246561
AV
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (DISPLAY SIDE)

Check voltage between display unit harness connector and ground.
Signal name Inverter VCC Signal VCC Connector No. M71 Terminal No. 2 3 Ignition switch position ACC Value (Approx.) 9V

AV-39
2009 G37 Coupe

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the harness connector between display unit and AV control unit. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M71 and AV control unit harness connector M83.
Signal name Inverter VCC Signal VCC Display unit (M71) 2 3 AV control unit (M83) 59 47 Continuity Existed Existed
4.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M71 and ground.
Signal name Inverter VCC Signal VCC Display unit (M71) 2 3 Ground Ground Continuity Not existed Not existed
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)

1. 2. 3. Connect the AV control unit harness connector. Turn ignition switch ACC. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replacement of AV control unit.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector. Check continuity between display unit harness connectors and ground.
Signal name Ground Connector No. M71 Terminal No. 1 Ignition switch position OFF Continuity Existed
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246562
1.CHECK FUSE
Power source Ignition switch ACC or ON Fuse No. 19
AV-40
2009 G37 Coupe

A

Check voltage between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.
Signal name ACC power supply Connector No. M72 Terminal No. 3 Ignition switch position ACC Value (Approx.) Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between multifunction switch and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect multifunction switch connector. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.

SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246563
1.CHECK FUSE
Power source Battery Ignition switch ACC or ON Fuse No. 34 19

Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
Signal name Battery power supply ACC power supply Connector No. B236 B236 Terminal No. 12 16 Ignition switch position OFF ACC Value (Approx.) Battery voltage Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between satellite radio tuner and fuse.
AV

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect satellite radio tuner. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
Signal name Ground Connector No. B236 Terminal No. 15 Ignition switch position OFF Continuity Existed
AV-41
2009 G37 Coupe
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Description
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
INFOID:0000000004246564
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246565
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Display unit Connector M71 Terminal 17 AV control unit Connector M83 Terminal 40
Continuity Existed
4.

Display unit Connector M71 Terminal 17 Ground
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL

M71
17
Ground
Start confirmation/adjustment mode, and then display color bar by selecting Color Spectrum Bar on DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS screen.
SKIB2238J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace display unit. NO >> Replace AV control unit.
AV-42
2009 G37 Coupe
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246566

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246567
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Continuity Existed
4.

2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL

M71
Ground
SKIB2236J
AV
AV-43
2009 G37 Coupe
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Description
INFOID:0000000004246568
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246569
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Continuity Existed
4.

2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL

M71
18
Ground
SKIB2237J
AV-44
2009 G37 Coupe
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246570

Description
Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed with AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246571
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT

E
Continuity Existed
4.

2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL

(+) Display unit Connector Terminal () Reference value
M71
19
Ground
AV
SKIB3603E
AV-45
2009 G37 Coupe
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Description
INFOID:0000000004246572
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246573
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Continuity Existed
4.

2.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL

(+) Display unit Connector Terminal At RGB image displayed 5V () Condition Reference value (Approx.)
M71
Ground
At AUX image is displayed.
PKIB4948J
AV-46
2009 G37 Coupe
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246574

Description
In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246575
1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

E
Continuity Existed
4.

G
Display unit Connector M71 Terminal 8 Ground Continuity Not existed
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL

M
M71 8 Ground
AV
SKIB3601E
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace AV control unit. NO >> Replace display unit.
AV-47
2009 G37 Coupe
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Description
INFOID:0000000004246576
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246577
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Continuity Existed
4.

2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL

M71
20
Ground
SKIB3598E
AV-48
2009 G37 Coupe
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246578

Description
Transmits the image signal of AUX device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit. AV control unit transmits the image signal that is inputted to the display unit.
B
INFOID:0000000004246579
Diagnosis Procedure
1. 2. 3.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AUX INPUT JACKS AND AV CONTROL UNIT)
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Auxiliary input jacks Connector M154*1 M362*2 *1: A/T models *2: M/T models Terminal 7 AV control unit Connector M84 Terminal 66
E
Continuity
Existed
4.
Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.
Auxiliary input jacks Connector M154*1 M362*2 *1: A/T models *2: M/T models Terminal Ground 7 Not existed
H
Continuity
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL (AUX INPUT JACKS TO AV CONTROL UNIT)

1. 2. 3. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.
(+) Auxiliary input jacks Connector M154*1 Terminal () Condition Reference value
AV
O
M362*2 7 Ground At AUX image displayed.
P
SKIB2251J
*1: A/T models *2: M/T models
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check that there is no malfunction in the external device.
AV-49
2009 G37 Coupe

3.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT AND DISPLAY UNIT)
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Continuity Existed
4.

4.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
M71
15
Ground
At AUX image displayed.
SKIB2251J
AV-50
2009 G37 Coupe
CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246580

Description Diagnosis Procedure
The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed.
INFOID:0000000004246581
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Multifunction switch Connector M72 Terminal 14 AV control unit Connector M85 Terminal 103
Continuity Existed
4.
Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.

Multifunction switch Connector M72 Terminal 14 Ground

1. 2. 3. Connect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) AV control unit Connector M85 Terminal 103 Ground Pressing the eject switch Except for above 0V 3.3 V () Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace preset switch. NO >> Replace AV control unit.
AV
AV-51
2009 G37 Coupe
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CONT-SAT)


Description
INFOID:0000000004246582
Satellite radio tuner and AV control unit are connected with a serial communication. They transmit the operation signal from AV control unit to satellite radio tuner, and transmit the display signal from satellite radio tuner to AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246583
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect satellite radio tuner connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Satellite radio tuner Connector B236 Terminals 9 10 AV control unit Connector M82 Terminals 29 30
Continuity
Existed
4.
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
Satellite radio tuner Connector B236 Terminals 9 10 Ground Not existed
Continuity

1. 2. 3. Connect satellite radio tuner connector and AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
(+) Satellite radio tuner Connector Terminal () Condition Reference value
B236
Ground
When satellite radio mode is selected.
SKIA9300J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.

Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
AV-52
2009 G37 Coupe


A
B236
10
Ground
D
SKIA9301J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace satellite radio tuner. NO >> Replace AV control unit.
AV
AV-53
2009 G37 Coupe
REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SATCONT)


Description
INFOID:0000000004246584
Request signal transmits the signal to recognize the connection of satellite radio tuner from satellite radio tuner to AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246585
1.CHECK CONTINUITY REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect satellite radio tuner connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Satellite radio tuner Connector B236 Terminal 8 AV control unit Connector M82 Terminal 28
Continuity Existed
4.
Satellite radio tuner Connector B236 Terminal 8 Ground

B236
Ground
SKIA9299J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace AV control unit. NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.
AV-54
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246586

Description
Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.
B
INFOID:0000000004246587
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT

1. 2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
D
AV control unit Connector M81 Terminal 6 Spiral cable Connector M36 Terminal 24 Continuity
E
Existed
3.

F
AV control unit Connector M81 Terminal 6 Ground Continuity Not existed
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE

Check spiral cable. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace spiral cable.
I J

1. 2. 3. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.
(+) AV control unit Connector M81 Terminal 6 () AV control unit Connector M81 Terminal 15 3.3 V Voltage (Approx.)
AV
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-55, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace steering switch.
Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.
INFOID:0000000004246588
AV-55
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 MENU DOWN switch ON MENU UP switch ON SOURCE switch ON Between terminals 15 and 17 VOL UP switch ON VOL DOWN switch ON
: Approx. 318 324 : Approx. 120 122 : Approx. 0
: Approx. 120 122 : Approx. 0
JSNIA0215GB
AV-56
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246589

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246590
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT

D
E
Existed
3.

F

I J

AV

INFOID:0000000004246591
AV-57
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard
JSNIA0215GB
AV-58
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246592

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246593
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT

D
E
Existed
3. Connect AV control unit connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harness or connector.


1. 2. Connect AV control unit connector. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
J
AV control unit Connector M81 Terminal 15 Ground Continuity
K
Not existed

M AV
INFOID:0000000004246594
AV-59
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard
JSNIA0215GB
AV-60
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A

AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000004246595
C
Condition Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Light switch ON Light switch OFF Selector lever in R position Selector lever in any position other than R Value/Status On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off
Monitor Item VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
ILLUM SIG
IGN SIG
REV SIG
TERMINAL LAYOUT
K
JPNIA0012ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition
L
Reference value (Approx.)
AV
2 (L) 3 (W) Sound signal door speaker LH Output Ignition switch ON Voice output
SKIB3609E
4 (LG)
5 (SB)
Sound signal rear speaker LH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
AV-61
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

Keep pressing SOURCE switch. 6 (G) 15 (B) Steering switch signal A Input Ignition switch ON Keep pressing Keep pressing Except for above. 7 (V) 8 (B) 9 (L) Ground ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON OFF switch. switch.
0V 0.7 V 1.3 V 3.3 V Battery voltage
Ground
GND
Lighting switch is OFF. Lighting switch is ON.
0V 0V 12 V
Ground
Illumination signal
Input
11 (BR)
12 (GR)
Sound signal door speaker RH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
13 (L)
14 (P)
Sound signal rear speaker RH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
15 (B)
Ground
Steering switch signal GND
Ignition switch ON
Keep pressing VOL DOWN switch. Keep pressing VOL UP switch. Except for above.
0V
0V 0.7 V 3.3 V Battery voltage
16 (L)
15 (B)
Steering switch signal B
Input
Ignition switch ON
19 (Y) 20 (B)
Ground
Battery power supply
Input
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
Ground
GND
0V
22 (B)
21 (W)
Satellite radio sound signal LH
Input
Ignition switch ON
When satellite radio mode is selected
SKIB3609E
AV-62
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

B
Ignition switch ON
24 (G)
23 (R)
Satellite radio sound signal RH
Input
SKIB3609E
25 26
Shield Shield
28 (P)
Ground
Request signal (SATCONT)
Input
Ignition switch ON
G
SKIA9299J
H
29 (G) Ground Communication signal (SATCONT) Input Ignition switch ON When satellite radio mode is selected
I
SKIA9300J
J
Ignition switch ON
30 (L)
Ground
Communication signal (CONTSAT)
Output
SKIA9301J
33 34 35
Ground
FM sub AMFM main Antenna amp. ON signal
Input Input Output
Ignition switch ACC
12 V
AV
36 (R)
Ground
AUX image signal
Output
Ignition switch ON
At AUX image is displayed
SKIB2251J
37 (L)
Ground
AUX image GND
Ignition switch ON
0V
AV-63
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

38 (P)
Ground
RGB signal (B: blue)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2237J
39 (L)
Ground
RGB signal (G: green)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2236J
40 (G)
Ground
RGB signal (R: red)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2238J
41 (W)
Ground
RGB synchronizing signal
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3603E
42
Shield
At RGB image is displayed
5V
43 (B)
Ground
RGB area (YS) signal
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKIB4948J
44 (BR)
Ground
Communication signal (DISPCONT)
Input
Ignition switch ON
PKIB5039J
AV-64
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

B
Ignition switch ON
45 (R)
Ground
Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal
Input
SKIB3601E
46 (LG) 47 (O) 49 50 55
Ground
Signal GND
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ACC
0V
E
9V
Ground
Signal VCC Shield Shield Shield
Output
56 (Y)
Ground
Communication signal (CONTDISP)
Output
Ignition switch ON
H
I
PKIB5039J
J
57 (G) Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal Ignition switch ON
Ground
Input
SKIB3598E
58 (BR) 59 (Y)
Ground
Inverter GND
0V
M
9V
Ground
Inverter VCC
Output
AV
Ignition switch ON
66 (G)
Ground
AUX image signal
Input
When AUX mode is selected
SKIB2251J
73 74 (R)
Ground
Shield AUX image signal GND
Ignition switch ON
0V
AV-65
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal (Wire color) + 85 (B) 86 (L) 87 (P) 88 (SB) 89 (W) 90 (L) 91 (P) Description Signal name Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Ignition switch ON Condition

Ground
GND
0V
CANH CANL AV communication signal (H) AV communication signal (L) AV communication signal (H) AV communication signal (L)
95 (R)
Ground
AUX sound signal RH
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
96 (W)
Ground
AUX sound signal LH
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
97 (B) 101 (BR) 103 (LG) 104 (G) 105 (O)
Ground
AUX sound signal GND
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON R position
0V
Ground
SW GND
Pressing the eject switch Except for above
0V 0V 3.3 V Battery voltage 12 V 0V
Ground
Eject signal
Input
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
Ground
Reverse signal
Input
Other than R position
AV-66
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

Reference value (Approx.) 0V
Parking brake ON
106 (SB)
Ground
Parking brake signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
C
Parking brake OFF
D
JSNIA0007GB
NOTE: Maximum voltage may be 12 V due to specifications (connected units). 107 (GR) Ground Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse) Input Ignition switch ON When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25MPH)
G
SKIA6649J
Wiring Diagram - BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM NOTE:
H
INFOID:0000000004246596
AV
AV-67
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
[BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1767GB
AV-68
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1768GB
AV-69
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1769GB
AV-70
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1770GB
AV-71
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1771GB
AV-72
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1772GB
AV-73
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1773GB
AV-74
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1774GB
AV-75
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1775GB
AV-76
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1776GB
DTC Index
P
INFOID:0000000004246597
AV-77
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC U1000 U1010 U1310 U1200 U1216 U1243 U1255 U1300 U1240 Display item CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] CAN CONT [U1216] FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] SAT CONN [U1255] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240]

Refer to AV-29, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-30, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-31, "DTC Logic" AV-32, "DTC Logic" AV-33, "DTC Logic" AV-34, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-36, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-38, "Description"
AV-78
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
INFOID:0000000004246598
DISPLAY UNIT
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0006ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal (Wire color) + 1 (B) 2 (Y) 3 (O) 4 (L) 5 Description Signal name Input/ Output Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON Condition Reference value (Approx.)
Ground
GND
0V
Ground
Inverter VCC
Input
9V
Ground
Signal VCC
Input
9V
Ground
AUX image GND Shield
0V
6 (L)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
M
SKIB2236J
Shield
AV
O
8 (R) Ground Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal Output Ignition switch ON
P
SKIB3601E
AV-79
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT

9 (B)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
PKIB4948J
11 (Y)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
PKIB5039J
13 (BR) 14 (LG)
Ground
Inverter GND
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON
0V
Ground
Signal GND
0V
15 (R)
Ground
AUX image signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2251J
17 (G)
Ground
RGB signal (R: red)
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2238J
18 (P)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2237J
AV-80
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT

B
Ignition switch ON
19 (W)
Ground
Input
SKIB3603E
20 (G)
Ground
Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal
Output
Ignition switch On
F
SKIB3598E
21
Shield
22 (BR)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
I
PKIB5039J
23
Shield
J
INFOID:0000000004555429
AV
AV-81
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1767GB
AV-82
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1768GB
AV-83
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1769GB
AV-84
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1770GB
AV-85
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1771GB
AV-86
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1772GB
AV-87
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1773GB
AV-88
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1774GB
AV-89
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1775GB
AV-90
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1776GB
AV-91
2009 G37 Coupe


Reference Value
INFOID:0000000004246600
JPNIA0010ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Reference value (Approx.)
2 (R)
1 (G)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
4 (B)
3 (W)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
5 6
Shield Shield
8 (Y)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIA9299J
9 (O)
Ground
Communication signal (SATCONT)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIA9300J
AV-92
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition

B
10 (BR) Ground Communication signal (CONTSAT) Input Ignition switch ON When satellite radio mode is selected
SKIA9301J
12 (SB) 15 (B) 16 (V) 33 34
Ground
Input
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ACC
Battery voltage
E
0V
Ground
GND
F
Battery voltage
INFOID:0000000004555430
Ground
ACC power supply Satellite antenna Shield
Input Input
AV
AV-93
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1767GB
AV-94
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1768GB
AV-95
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1769GB
AV-96
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1770GB
AV-97
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1771GB
AV-98
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1772GB
AV-99
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1773GB
AV-100
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1774GB
AV-101
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1775GB
AV-102
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1776GB
AV-103
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Table
OPERATION
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom
INFOID:0000000004246602
Symptoms
Check items All switches cannot be operated. MULTI AV is displayed with CONSULT-III. All switches cannot be operated. MULTI AV is not displayed on system selection screen the CONSULTIII is initialized. Only specified switch cannot be operated.
Possible malfunction location / Action to take Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit. AV communication circuits between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-26, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-39, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction. Perform multifunction switch and preset switch self-diagnosis function. Refer toAV-40, "MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Multifunction switch and preset switch operation does not work.
RELATED TO RGB IMAGE

Symptoms
Check items There is malfunction in the CONSULTIII self-diagnosis result.
Possible malfunction location / Action to take Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-26, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Display unit power supply circuit. Refer to AV-39, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit. Refer to AV-48, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (R: red) circuit. Refer to AV-42, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (G: green) circuit. Refer to AV-43, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (B: blue) circuit. Refer to AV-44, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB synchronizing signal circuit. Refer to AV-45, "Diagnosis Procedure". Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-26, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Ignition signal circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-39, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB image is not shown.
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III self-diagnosis results.
Light blue (Cyan) tint. Color of RGB image is not proper. Purple (Magenta) tint. Screen looks yellowish. RGB screen is rolling. There is malfunction in the CONSULTIII self-diagnosis result. There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III self-diagnosis results.
Fuel economy display is malfunctioning.
RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms The CD cannot be removed.
Check items No sound from all speakers.
Possible malfunction location / Action to take CD eject signal circuit. Refer to AV-51, "Diagnosis Procedure". AV control unit Refer to AV-111, "Exploded View". Sound signal circuit of malfunctioning system.
Audio sound is not heard.
Sound is not heard only from the specific places (RH front, RH rear, LH front and LH rear).
AV-104
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptoms Check items

Possible malfunction location / Action to take Perform the following inspection procedure. 1. Check satellite radio antenna mounting nut for looseness. NOTE: Tightening torque: 6.5 Nm (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb.) 2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder. 3. Replace the satellite radio antenna. Refer to AV-118, "Exploded View". 4. Replace the satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-117, "Exploded View". Perform the following inspection procedure. 1. Check the connection between Satellite radio tuner and antenna feeder. 2. Check the connection between Satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder. 3. Check Antenna feeder for open circuit. 4. Replace the satellite radio antenna. Refer toAV-118, "Exploded View". 5. Replace the satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-117, "Exploded View". Satellite radio sound signal circuit malfunction between satellite radio tuner and AV control unit. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-26, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Antenna amp. ON signal circuit. Antenna feeder.
ANTENNA is not displayed even when the channel is turned to 0 in Satellite radio mode.
Satellite radio is not received.
ANTENNA is displayed when the channel is turned to 0 in Satellite radio mode.
The sound of Satellite radio is not heard. It does not change to Satellite radio mode. AM/FM radio is not received.
Other audio sounds are normal. There is malfunction in the CONSULTIII self-diagnosis result. Other audio sounds are normal.
RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

I
Inspection location / Probable malfunction location Steering switch signal GND circuit. Refer to AV-59, "Diagnosis Procedure". Steering switch. Refer to AV-121, "Exploded View". Steering switch signal A circuit. Refer to AV-55, "Diagnosis Procedure". Steering switch signal B circuit. Refer to AV-57, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Symptoms None of the steering switch operations work. Only specified switch cannot be operated. SOURCE, MENU UP, MENU DOWN switches of steering switch are not operated. VOL UP, VOL DOWN switches of steering switch are not operated.
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT

NOTE: Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
Symptoms No voice sound is heard when AUX mode is selected.
Check items Voice sound is heard when other modes are selected.
Probable malfunction location AUX sound signal circuits malfunction between auxiliary input jacks and AV control unit. AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary input jacks and AV control unit. Refer to AV-49, "Diagnosis Procedure". Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-47, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-46, "Diagnosis Procedure". Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-48, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AV
Image is not displayed when AUX mode is selected.
It does not change from AUX mode to other modes.
AV-105
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Description
BASIC OPERATIONS
Symptom Possible cause The brightness is at the lowest setting. No image is displayed. The system in the video mode. The display is turned off. The screen is too dim. The movement is slow. Some pixels in the display are darker or brighter than others. Some menu items cannot be selected. The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low. This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid crystal displays. Some menu items become unavailable while the vehicle is driven. Possible solution Adjust the brightness of the display. Press <DISC> to change the mode. Press <Day/Night> to turn on the display. Wait until the interior of the vehicle has warmed up. This is not a malfunction. Park the vehicle in a safe location, and then operate the multi AV system.
INFOID:0000000004246603
RELATED TO AUDIO
The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction. The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause. NOTE: CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incorrectly mastered by the customer on a computer. Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disk Logo. If not, the disk is not mastered to the red book Compact Disk Standard and may not play.
Symptom Cause and Counter measure Check if the CD was inserted correctly. Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than .MP3, .WMA, .mp3, or .wma cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disk or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disk close, is done for the disk. Check if the CD is protected by copyright. Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate files Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multisession disk, some time may be required before the music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.
AV-106
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptom Move immediately to the next song when playing The songs do not play back in the desired order.

Cause and Counter measure When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of .MP3, .WMA, .mp3, or .wma, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other sources, is not a malfunction. NOTE: Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking the signal. Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.
AV
AV-107
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
INFOID:0000000004246604

Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246605
Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals. Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair

Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
INFOID:0000000004246606
PKIA0306E
AV-108
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
[BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < PRECAUTION > Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.)
C
PKIA0307E
AV
AV-109
2009 G37 Coupe
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name Description
INFOID:0000000004246607
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0191E
AV-110
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A

AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246608
DISASSEMBLY
D
JPNIA0470ZZ
1. 4.
Unified meter and A/C amp. Bracket RH
2.
Bracket LH
3.
AV control unit
J
INFOID:0000000004246609

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3. Remove display unit. Remove AV control unit with a unified meter and A/C amp. as a single unit from the body. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
INSTALLATION
M Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same form, be careful not to insert them wrongly. AV
AV-111
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246610

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". Remove display unit with bracket as a single unit.
INFOID:0000000004246611
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
AV-112
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR SPEAKER
A
INFOID:0000000004246612
DOOR SPEAKER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0471ZZ
E
1. 2. Door speaker Speaker bracket

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Exploded View". Remove the door speaker from speaker bracket.
F
INFOID:0000000004246613
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-113
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246614
JPNIA0472ZZ
1.
Rear speaker
INFOID:0000000004246615

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-17, "Exploded View". Remove rear speaker from rear parcel shelf.
INSTALLATION
AV-114
2009 G37 Coupe
TWEETER
A
INFOID:0000000004246616
TWEETER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0473ZZ
E
1. 2. Door finisher Tweeter

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Exploded View". Remove the tweeter from the door finisher.
F
INFOID:0000000004246617
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-115
2009 G37 Coupe
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246618
JSNIA0123ZZ
1. 2.
AM-FM main connector Antenna amp.

INFOID:0000000004246619

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove back pillar garnish LH. Refer to INT-14, "Exploded View". Remove antenna amp. from rear pillar LH.
INSTALLATION
AV-116
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246620

Exploded View
G
JPNIA0504ZZ
1.
Bracket (front)
2.
Satellite radio tuner
3.
Bracket (rear)

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove trunk floor spacer RH. Refer to INT-27, "Exploded View". Remove nuts (A) from the trunk room RH, and satellite radio tuner (1) from trunk room side.
INFOID:0000000004246621
JPNIA0475ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-117
2009 G37 Coupe


Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246622
JPNIA0476ZZ
1. :
Satellite radio antenna Vehicle front
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.

REMOVAL
1.
INFOID:0000000004246623
2.
Remove headlining assembly (rear) to secure work space between vehicle and headlining. Refer to INT21, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" [with normal roof] or INT-24, "SUNROOF : Exploded View" [with sunroof]. Remove nut, and then remove satellite radio antenna from roof panel.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Satellite radio antenna mounting nut : 6.5 Nm (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
CAUTION: Be careful about tightening torque. Antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, roof panel may be deformed, when satellite radio antenna mounting nut tightening torque is loose.
AV-118
2009 G37 Coupe
A
INFOID:0000000004246624
Exploded View
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0126ZZ
F
1. 2. Center ventilator grille Multifunction switch

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". Remove multifunction switch mounting screws. Remove multifunction switch from center ventilator.
G
INFOID:0000000004246625
INSTALLATION
J
AV
AV-119
2009 G37 Coupe
PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246626
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0477ZZ
1.
Clock
2.
Cluster lid C
3.
Preset switch
INFOID:0000000004246627

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". Remove preset switch screws (A), (B), and (C), and then remove preset switch (2) from cluster lid C.
1. Clock
JPNIA0478ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When installing preset switch, do not allow the print wire that connects preset switch and multifunction switch to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch.
AV-120
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING SWITCH
A
INFOID:0000000004246628
STEERING SWITCH
Exploded View
Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
B
INFOID:0000000004246629

REMOVAL
Refer to ST-17, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-121
2009 G37 Coupe
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS


Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246630
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0131ZZ
1.
Auxiliary input jacks

INFOID:0000000004246631

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove center console. (M/T models) Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View". Remove center console cup. (A/T models) Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View". Remove auxiliary input jacks from center console. (M/T models) Remove auxiliary input jacks from center console cup. (A/T models)
INSTALLATION
AV-122
2009 G37 Coupe
ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO)

A
INFOID:0000000004246632

Harness Layout
AV
P
JPNIA0479GB
AV-123
2009 G37 Coupe
ANTENNA FEEDER (SATELLITE RADIO)


Harness Layout
INFOID:0000000004246633
JPNIA0479GB
AV-124
2009 G37 Coupe

< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
INFOID:0000000004246634
JSNIA0732GB
AV
DETAILED FLOW


AV-125
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < BASIC INSPECTION > 1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for MULTI AV. Refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". NOTE: Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if MULTI AV is not displayed. 2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the self-diagnosis results. Is DTC displayed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4.


5.ERROR PART REPAIR

Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts. Perform a self-diagnosis for MULTI AV with CONSULT-III. NOTE: Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results. 3. Check that the symptom does not occur. Does the symptom occur? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2.
AV-126
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MULTI AV SYSTEM
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004246635
J
JPNIA1376GB
System Description
System name AUDIO SYSTEM System explanation AV-132, "System Description"
INFOID:0000000004246636
Indicates the status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy and maintenance. AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while receiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp and BCM. AV-135, "System Description" Refer to SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM shown below. Refer to AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM shown below.
AV
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM
AV control unit functions by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV communication lines (H, L). Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise. AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. TransRevision: 2009 October
AV-127
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
[BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > mitting/receiving of data signal is performed by BCM. Also, it transmits the required signal of vehicle setting and receives the response signal. AV control unit is connected with display unit and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal of display and display control and receives the response signal from display unit. Also, it is connected with satellite radio by serial communication, and it transmits the operating signal and receives the display signal. NOTE: AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis. CONSULT-III self-diagnosis: refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". On board self-diagnosis: refer to AV-138, "Diagnosis Description". On board self-diagnosis of TEL adapter unit can be performed. Refer to AV-150, "Diagnosis Description" for on board self-diagnosis.
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM

Satellite radio tuner is controlled by communication signal and request signal with AV control unit. Audio signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna and transmitted to AV control unit. Audio signal (satellite radio) is transmitted from AV control unit to BOSE amp. and transmitted from BOSE amp. to woofer amp. and each speaker.
JSNIA0549GB

Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks. Operation can be performed with multifunction switch and steering switch. Multifunction switch transmits operation signal to AV control unit with communication.
JPNIA1377GB
AV-128
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246637
JPNIA0467ZZ
1. 4. 7.
Center speaker Door woofer LH BOSE amp.
2. 5. 8.
Tweeter LH Rear speaker LH Woofer amp.
3. 6. 9.
Door squawker LH Antenna amp. Rear woofer LH
AV
10. Satellite radio tuner 13. Rear speaker RH 16. Door squawker RH 19. iPod adapter 22. Auxiliary input jacks 25. Multifunction switch A. D. Within rear pillar finisher LH Rear view of the display unit
11. TEL adapter unit 14. Satellite radio antenna 17. Tweeter RH 20. Steering switch 23. iPod connector 26. Display unit B. Trunk room LH
12. Rear woofer RH 15. Door woofer RH 18. Microphone 21. Preset switch 24. AV control unit C. Trunk room RH
AV-129
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246638
AV CONTROL UNIT
It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication signals from the AV control unit. AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function. It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp via CAN communication to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function. It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function. It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming control. It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and parking brake). Auxiliary image signal and auxiliary sound signal are input from the auxiliary input jacks. Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing). Synchronizing signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit. Auxiliary image signal is input from AV control unit. Inputs power (amp ON) and sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound signal to woofer amp. and each speaker. Inputs power (amp ON) and sound signal from BOSE amp., and outputs sound signal to rear woofer. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs low-pitched sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs midrange sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high range sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from woofer amp. Outputs low-pitched sound. Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and auxiliary input operations are integrated. Connected with AV control unit via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air conditioner operations are integrated. Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. Operations such as audio and hands-free phone are possible. Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit. Used only when hands-free phone is operated. Outputs Mic. signal (TEL voice signal) to the TEL adapter unit. The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from the TEL adapter unit. The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the AV control unit to the display unit, and it outputs the sound signal to the AV control unit. Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control unit. Power (antenna amp ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
DISPLAY UNIT
BOSE AMP. WOOFER AMP. DOOR WOOFER DOOR SQUAWKER REAR SPEAKER TWEETER CENTER SPEAKER REAR WOOFER
PRESET SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
MICROPHONE
ANTENNA AMP.
AV-130
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
Part name
[BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Description Inputs the TEL voice signal from TEL antenna and outputs it to the AV control unit. It is connected with the AV control unit via AV communication and controlled with the AV control unit. Receives the TEL voice signal and outputs it to the TEL adapter unit. Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the sound signal to the AV control unit. It is controlled with the AV control unit and serial communication (communication signal and request signal). Receives the satellite radio signal and outputs it to the satellite radio tuner. Inputs iPod sound signal from iPod, and outputs iPod sound signal to AV control unit.
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
TEL ANTENNA
iPod ADAPTER
Receiving/transmitting of iPod operation signals are performed as follows: - between AV control unit and iPod adapter: AV communication. - between iPod and iPod adapter: serial communication.
AV
AV-131
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004246639
JPNIA1378GB
System Description
INFOID:0000000004246640
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function can be operated with the multifunction switch, preset switch or steering switch. It indicates the operation status of AUDIO to the display.
Function AM/FM radio CD iPod connection Driver's Audio Stage
Operating Signal Operation of the audio system can be performed with the multifunction switch, preset switch or steering switch. Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction switch or preset switch. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering switch. Screen Display The display switching of the screen is performed with the communication signal between the display unit and the AV control unit. The image signal to display operating condition is performed with RGB signal, RGB area signal and RGB image synchronizing signal. AM/FM Radio Mode AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit. Audio signal is received by glass antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp, and finally it is input to AV control unit. Audio signal is input to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer amp. and each speaker for AV control unit. CD Mode CD function is built into AV control unit. AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer amp. and each speaker when CD is inserted to AV control unit. iPod Connection
AV-132
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
Connect iPod and iPod adapter with wire harness and iPod adapter input iPod sound signal from iPod. When iPod mode is selected, iPod adapter output iPod sound signal to AV control unit. AV control unit output sound signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. output sound signal to woofer amp. and each speaker. Receiving/transmitting of iPod operation signals are performed as follows: - between AV control unit and iPod adapter: AV communication. - between iPod and iPod adapter: serial communication. The iPod connection status can be recognized whether iPod adapter receives iPod connection recognition signal. The iPod adapter is possible to charge iPod.
Driver's Audio Stage Mode Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to be the center of sounds. ON/OFF signals of Driver's Audio Stage are transmitted from AV control unit to BOSE amp. using Mode signal.
INFOID:0000000004246641
AV
JPNIA0467ZZ
AV-133
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
1. 4. 7. Center speaker Door woofer LH BOSE amp. 2. 5. 8. Tweeter LH Rear speaker LH Woofer amp.

3. 6. 9. Door squawker LH Antenna amp. Rear woofer LH
Part name AV CONTROL UNIT DISPLAY UNIT BOSE AMP. WOOFER AMP. DOOR WOOFER DOOR SQUAWKER REAR SPEAKER TWEETER CENTER SPEAKER REAR WOOFER Description
INFOID:0000000004246642
The AM/FM receiving function and the CD playing function are equipped. Audio signal is output to BOSE amp. from each function. Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit. Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound signal to woofer amp. and each speaker. Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signal from BOSE amp., and outputs sound signal to rear woofer. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs low-pitched sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs midrange sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high range sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from woofer amp. Outputs low-pitched sound. Each audio operation can be operated. Connected with AV control unit via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. Each audio operation can be operated. It is connected to the multifunction switch via cable. The operation signal is transmitted to the AV control unit via AV communication. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. Each audio operation can be operated. Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit. Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control unit. Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit. Inputs iPod sound signal from iPod, and outputs iPod sound signal to AV control unit.
PRESET SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
ANTENNA AMP.
iPod ADAPTER
AV-134
2009 G37 Coupe
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

A
INFOID:0000000004246643

System Diagram
D
JPNIA1379GB
System Description
INFOID:0000000004246644
TEL adapter unit is controlled with AV communication from AV control unit. The connection between portable telephone and TEL adapter unit is performed with Bluetooth. The voice guidance signal is input from the TEL adapter unit to the AV control unit and output via BOSE amp. to the front speaker and center speaker when operating the TEL. TEL adapter unit has the on board self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-150, "Diagnosis Description".
WHEN RECEIVING A CALL

TEL voice signal received with the portable telephone is input from TEL antenna via TEL adapter unit to AV control unit with Bluetooth communication and output via BOSE amp. to the front speaker. The operation is performed with the steering switch or voice recognition function (TEL operation only).
H
WHEN A CALL IS TRANSMITTED

Speech sound (TEL voice signal) is input from the microphone to the TEL adapter unit. It is input from the TEL antenna via Bluetooth communication to the portable telephone. It is transmitted to the phone on the other side. The operation is performed with the steering switch or voice recognition function (TEL operation only).
I
AV
AV-135
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004246645
JPNIA0467ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
3. 6. 9.
AV-136
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004246646
AV CONTROL UNIT
Inputs TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from TEL adapter unit and outputs it to BOSE amp. during reception. Connects with TEL adapter unit and AV communication and controls hands free phone system. Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. Inputs RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from AV control unit and displays the status of hands free phone system. Inputs TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from AV control unit and outputs it to front speaker and center speaker.
DISPLAY UNIT
BOSE AMP. FRONT DOOR WOOFER FRONT DOOR SQUAWKER TWEETER CENTER SPEAKER PRESET SWITCH
E
Outputs the TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from Bose amp.
F
Adjust the sound when using TEL. The operation signal is transmitted to the AV control unit via AV communication. The hands free phone system can be operated. Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit. Uses when operating the hands-free phone. Outputs Mic. signal (TEL voice signal) to the TEL adapter unit. The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from the TEL adapter unit. Receives the steering switch signal (operation signal) from the steering switch. Inputs the TEL voice signal from TEL antenna during reception and outputs it to the AV control unit. Inputs the TEL voice signal from microphone during speech recognition and outputs it to the TEL antenna. Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit. Connects with the portable telephone via Bluetooth and communicates the TEL voice signal.
STEERING SWITCH
MICROPHONE
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
TEL ANTENNA
AV
AV-137
2009 G37 Coupe


Self-diagnosis Mode Press the BACK switch and the UP switch of the 4-direction switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. The buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and the selfdiagnosis mode starts. The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal. CAUTION: The hazard switch and CD eject switch cannot be checked.
JSNIA0136GB INFOID:0000000004246647
Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually. Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display. The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking, modifying or adjusting generally requires human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judgment automatically). On Board Diagnosis Item
Mode Self Diagnosis Description AV control unit diagnosis Perform the connection diagnosis between each of the units.
AV-138
2009 G37 Coupe

Mode Display Diagnosis Vehicle Signals Speaker Test Climate Control Confirmation/ Adjustment Error History Vehicle CAN Diagnosis AV COMM Diagnosis Delete Unit Connection Log Initialize Settings

Description The confirmations of the tint with the color spectrum bar display and shading of color with the gradation bar display can be performed. Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake, lights, ignition switch, and reverse. The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone. Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis. The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past are displayed. The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored. The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be monitored. Erase the connection history of unit and error history. Initializes the AV control unit memory.
STARTING PROCEDURE
JSNIA0137GB
4.
The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the items of Self Diagnosis and Confirmation/Adjustment can be selected.
M
JSNIA0138GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select Self-diagnosis. Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the selfdiagnosis mode starts. The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
AV
JSNIA0139GB
AV-139
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > 2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded according to the diagnostic results.
NOTE: Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red. Replace AV control unit if Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-348, "Exploded View".
Unit Green Gray Red
Connection line Green Yellow Green

JSNIA0601GB
If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order of priority: red > yellow > gray. The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a component in the diagnosis result screen.
JSNIA0141GB
AV-140
2009 G37 Coupe

A
JSNIA0565GB
NOTE: Onboard selfdiagnosis cannot be started when an error occurs on the dottedline part above.
Self-diagnosis Result Chart
J
Area with yellow connection lines Description Possible malfunction location / Action to take
JSNIA0602GB
AV
Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit.
P
Communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit.
JPNIA0463GB
AV-141
2009 G37 Coupe

Area with yellow connection lines Description Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.

JSNIA0603GB
TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit.
JSNIA0604GB
TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuit. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit.
iPod adapter power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and iPod adapter. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter.
JSNIA0605GB
iPod adapter power supply and ground circuit. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and iPod adapter.
1. 2. Start the diagnosis function and select Confirmation/Adjustment. The confirmation/adjustment mode indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted. Select each switch on the Confirmation/Adjustment Mode screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press the BACK switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment Mode screen.
JSNIA0147GB
AV-142
2009 G37 Coupe

Display Diagnosis A
JSNIA0688GB
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB signal error is detected.
G
R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error
: Light blue (Cyan) tint : Purple (Magenta) tint : Yellow tint
JSNIA0149GB
Diagnosis item Vehicle speed
Display ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Vehicle status Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Light switch ON Light switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch in ACC position Shift the selector lever to R position Shift the selector lever other than R position
Remarks
AV
Parking brake
Lights
Ignition
P
Reverse OFF
Speaker Test
AV-143
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Select SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. Press Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press End to stop the test tones. NOTE: The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
Tweeter Front speaker Rear speaker : 3 kHz : 300 Hz : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
Climate Control Refer to HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM for details. Error History The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when Self-diagnosis is selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed. However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the Error Record to detect any error that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation. Count up method A The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle. The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch or CONSULT-III. Count up method B The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle. The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch or CONSULT-III.
JSNIA0151GB
AV-144
2009 G37 Coupe

Error item Description

Possible malfunction factor/Action to take Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and then repair the malfunctioning parts according to the diagnosis results. Refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)".
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CONTROL UNIT (AV) FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit CAN Controller Memory Error
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV communication circuit initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit malfunction is detected. Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit. Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch. iPod adapter power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and iPod adapter. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter. TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and the junction of multifunction switch and AV control unit. Replace the AV control unit.
E
G
SAT Connection Error
J
Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch.
AV COMM CIRCUIT iPod Connection Error
AV
AV COMM CIRCUIT H/F Unit Connection Error
AV COMM CIRCUIT Switches Connection Error iPod Unit Connection Error H/F Unit Connection Error
AV communication circuit between AV control unit and the junction of multifunction switch and AV control unit.
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis
AV-145
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CAN communication status and error counter is displayed. The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39. The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Items Tx (HVAC) Rx (ECM) Rx (Cluster) Rx (BCM) Rx (HVAC) Rx (USM) Display (Current) OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN Malfunction counter (Past) OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39
JSNIA0080GB
AV COMM Diagnosis Displays the communication status between AV control unit (master unit) and each unit. The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39. The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Status (Current) OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN Counter (Past) OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39 OK / 0 - 39
JPNIA0512GB
Items C Tx(ITMSW) C Rx(PrimarySWITM) C Rx(BTHFITM) C Rx(iPod Adpt.ITM)
Delete Unit Connection Log Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been removed)
JSNIA0154GB
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
JSNIA0155GB
AV-146
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004246648

B
Diagnosis mode Ecu Identification Self Diagnostic Result Data Monitor Description The part number of AV control unit can be checked. Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively. The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
AV COMMUNICATION
AV communication
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.

Self-diagnosis Detection Range
AV
P
JSNIA0566GB
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item
AV-147
2009 G37 Coupe

Error item Description CAN communication malfunction is detected. CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV communication circuit initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit malfunction is detected. Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit. Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch. iPod adapter power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and iPod adapter. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter. TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and the junction of multifunction switch and AV control unit. Replace the AV control unit

Possible malfunction factor/Action to take Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and then repair the malfunctioning parts according to the diagnosis results. Refer to AV-152, "Diagnosis Procedure".
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] CAN CONT [U1216]
SAT CONN [U1255]
Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch.
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] IPOD CONN [U1254]
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuit. AV communication circuit between TEL adapter unit and AV control unit.
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] IPOD CONN [U1254] HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
DATA MONITOR
AV-148
2009 G37 Coupe

A ALL SIGNALS Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit. For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.
B
Display Item VHCL SPD SIG Display On Off On Off On Off On Off On REV SIG Off Vehicle status Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Light switch ON Light switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch in ACC position Shift the selector lever to R position Shift the selector lever other than R position Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal. Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal. Remarks
PKB SIG
ILLUM SIG
IGN SIG
AV
AV-149
2009 G37 Coupe
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)


HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
During on board diagnosis the diagnosis function of TEL adapter unit starts with the operation of the steering switch and performs the diagnosis when ignition switch ACC.
INFOID:0000000004246649
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM

The on board diagnosis has 3 modes: the self-diagnosis mode that performs the trouble diagnosis, the speaker adaptation data deleting mode, and the hands-free phone system initialization mode. CAUTION: Perform the diagnosis with the vehicle stopped. Perform STEP2 if necessary.
STEP MODE Description The self-diagnosis mode performs the microphone test and the diagnosis of TEL adapter unit, TEL antenna and steering unit, and then reads out the results with the sound and indicates them on the display. The speaker adaptation data deleting mode can delete the speaker adaptation data. Hands-free phone system initialization mode can perform the initialization of hands-free phone system.
STEP1
Self-diagnosis
Speaker adaptation data deleting STEP2 Hands-free phone system initialization
Self-diagnosis mode reads out the self-diagnosis results and indicates DTC on the display. NOTE: Error count is read out simultaneously when reading out the DTC name. The errors are read out continuously when some errors occur at the same time. The DTC displays are combined and displayed. For example, DTC 01100 is displayed when DTC 01000 and DTC 00100 are indicated at the same time.
Self-diagnosis results
DTC DTC 10000 DTC 01000 DTC 00100 DTC 00010 DTC 00001 DTC 00000 INTERNAL FAILURE
DTC name
Possible causes TEL adapter unit TEL antenna
ANT. SHORT TO BATT OR OPEN ANT. SHORT TO GROUND STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK A STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK B THERE ARE NO FAILURE RECORDS TO REPORT
Steering switch
The Details of Error Count The error count guides 0 when the error occurs. The next time it counts up 1 if it is normal with the ignition switch ON. It continues the count up unless the initialization of hands-free phone system is performed.
AV-150
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > FLOW CHART OF TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
AV
O
JSNIA0169GB
AV-151
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Description
INFOID:0000000004246650
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004246651
U1000
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246652
AV-152
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246653

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246654
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
C
INFOID:0000000004246655
Diagnosis Procedure

G F
AV
AV-153
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246657 INFOID:0000000004246656
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
AV-154
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246658

Description
INFOID:0000000004246659
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III Cont Unit FLASH- ROM [U1200] DTC Detection Condition An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit (FLASH-ROM).
Action to take
U1200
AV
AV-155
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246661 INFOID:0000000004246660
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
AV-156
2009 G37 Coupe
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246662
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

Description
Part name Description Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. Inputs the RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from AV control unit and the auxiliary image signal from the auxiliary input jacks. Outputs the synchronizing signals (HP and VP) to the AV control unit.
INFOID:0000000004246663
DISPLAY UNIT
DTC Logic
Possible causes
U1243
G
INFOID:0000000004246664
Diagnosis Procedure


Continuity
Existed
4.

Continuity
AV

AV-157
2009 G37 Coupe
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

M71
11
Ground
PKIB5039J

M71
22
Ground
PKIB5039J
AV-158
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246665

Description
Part name Description Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs it to the AV control unit. It is controlled with the communication (communication signal, request signal) from AV control unit.
INFOID:0000000004246666
DTC Logic
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III DTC Detection Condition Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
Possible causes Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Communication circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Request signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
INFOID:0000000004246667
U1255
SAT CONN [U1255]
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-166, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
I J
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV control unit connector and satellite radio tuner connector. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and satellite radio tuner harness connector.
AV control unit Connector Terminals 28 M82 29 30 B236 Satellite radio tuner Connector Terminals 8 9 10 Existed
Continuity
AV
4.
Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector.

AV control unit Connector Terminals 28 M82 29 30 Ground Not existed
O
Continuity
AV-159
2009 G37 Coupe


1. 2. 3. Connect AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) AV control unit Connector Terminals () Reference value (Approx.)
28
Ground
SKIA9299J
M82
29
Ground
SKIA9300J
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV control unit connector. Connect satellite radio tuner. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
(+) Satellite radio tuner Connector Terminal () Reference value (Approx.)
B236
10
Ground
SKIA9301J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.
AV-160
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246668

Description

DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] DTC Detection Condition Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch. iPod adapter power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and iPod adapter. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter. TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit. Possible causes
D
U1300 U1240
U1300 U1254
iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and iPod adapter.
U1300 U1256
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] HAND FREE CONN [U1256] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] IPOD CONN [U1254] HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
U1300 U1240 U1254 U1256
Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and the junction of multifunction switch and AV control unit.
AV
AV-161
2009 G37 Coupe


AV CONTROL UNIT
INFOID:0000000004246669
1.CHECK FUSE

Signal name Battery power supply ACC power supply Ignition signal Connector No. M81 M81 M85 Terminal No. 19 7 104 Ignition switch position OFF ACC ON Value (Approx.) Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage

Signal name Ground Connector No. M81 M85 Terminal No. 20 85 Ignition switch position OFF Continuity Existed
DISPLAY UNIT
INFOID:0000000004246670
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (DISPLAY SIDE)

AV-162
2009 G37 Coupe

A
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the harness connector between display unit and AV control unit. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M71 and AV control unit harness connector M83.
Signal name Inverter VCC Signal VCC Display unit (M71) 2 3 AV control unit (M83) 59 47 Continuity Existed Existed
4.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M71 and ground.
Signal name Inverter VCC Signal VCC Display unit (M71) 2 3 Ground Ground Continuity Not existed Not existed
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)

1. 2. 3. Connect the AV control unit harness connector. Turn ignition switch ACC. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replacement of AV control unit.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector. Check continuity between display unit harness connectors and ground.
INFOID:0000000004246671
AV
1.CHECK FUSE
AV-163
2009 G37 Coupe



BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246672
1.CHECK FUSE
Power source Battery Fuse No. 5, 8

Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
Signal name Battery power supply Connector No. B42 Terminal No. 10 11 Ignition switch position OFF Value (Approx.) Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
Signal name Ground Connector No. B42 Terminal No. 7 12 Ignition switch position OFF Continuity Existed
AV-164
2009 G37 Coupe

A
WOOFER AMP.
WOOFER AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246673
1.CHECK FUSE
Power source Battery Fuse No. 34

Check voltage between woofer amp. harness connector and ground.
Signal name Battery power supply Connector No. B43 Terminal No. 7 Ignition switch position OFF Value (Approx.) Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between woofer amp. and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect woofer amp. connector. Check continuity between woofer amp. harness connector and ground.
iPod ADAPTER
iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246674
1.CHECK FUSE
AV

Check voltage between iPod adapter harness connector and ground.
Signal name Battery power supply ACC power supply Connector No. M111 M111 Terminal No. 5 3 Ignition switch position OFF ACC Value (Approx.) Battery voltage Battery voltage

AV-165
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check harness between iPod adapter and fuse. [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246675
1.CHECK FUSE

Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between satellite radio tuner and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect satellite radio tuner. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246676
1.CHECK FUSE

Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.
AV-166
2009 G37 Coupe

Signal name Battery power supply ACC power supply Ignition signal Connector No. B237 B237 B237 Terminal No. 1 2 3

Ignition switch position OFF ACC ON Value (Approx.) Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between TEL adapter unit and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.
Signal name Ground Connector No. B237 Terminal No. 4, 14, 19, 22, 24 Ignition switch position OFF Continuity Existed
AV
AV-167
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246677
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246678

Continuity Existed
4.


M71
17
Ground
SKIB2238J
AV-168
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246679

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246680
Diagnosis Procedure

Continuity Existed
4.


M71
Ground
SKIB2236J
AV
AV-169
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246681
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246682

Continuity Existed
4.


M71
18
Ground
SKIB2237J
AV-170
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246683

Description
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246684

E
Continuity Existed
4.


M71
19
Ground
AV
SKIB3603E
AV-171
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246685
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246686

Continuity Existed
4.


(+) Display unit Connector Terminal At RGB image displayed 5V () Condition Reference value (Approx.)
M71
Ground
PKIB4948J
AV-172
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246687

Description
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246688

E
Continuity Existed
4.

G

M
M71 8 Ground
AV
SKIB3601E
AV-173
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246689
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246690

Continuity Existed
4.


M71
20
Ground
SKIB3598E
AV-174
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246691

Description
Transmits the image signal of AUX device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit. AV control unit transmits the image signal that is inputted to the display unit.
B
INFOID:0000000004246692
Diagnosis Procedure
1. 2. 3.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AUX INPUT JACKS AND AV CONTROL UNIT)
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Auxiliary input jacks Connector M154*1 M362*2 *1: A/T models *2: M/T models Terminal 7 AV control unit Connector M84 Terminal 66
E
Continuity
Existed
4.
H
Continuity
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL (AUX INPUT JACKS TO AV CONTROL UNIT)

1. 2. 3. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.
AV
O
M362*2 7 Ground At AUX image displayed.
P
SKIB2251J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check that there is no malfunction in the external device.
AV-175
2009 G37 Coupe

3.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT AND DISPLAY UNIT)
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Continuity Existed
4.


1. 2. 3. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
M71
15
Ground
At AUX image displayed.
SKIB2251J
AV-176
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246693

INFOID:0000000004246694

Continuity Existed
4.


1. 2. 3. Connect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) AV control unit Connector M85 Terminal 103 Ground Pressing the eject switch Except for above 0V 3.3 V () Condition Voltage (Approx.)
AV
AV-177
2009 G37 Coupe
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Description
INFOID:0000000004246695
Supply power from TEL adapter unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound/voice to the microphone.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246696
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN TEL ADAPTER UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector and microphone connector. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
TEL adapter unit Connector Terminals 7 B237 8 29 R17 Microphone Connector Terminals 1 2 4 Existed
Continuity
4.
Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.
TEL adapter unit Connector M237 Terminals 7 29 Ground Not existed
Continuity
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC

1. 2. 3. Connect TEL adapter unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector.
(+) TEL adapter unit Connector B237 Terminal 29 () TEL adapter unit Connector B237 Terminal 8 5V Voltage (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace TEL adapter unit.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL

1. 2. Connect microphone connector. Check signal between TEL adapter unit harness connector.
AV-178
2009 G37 Coupe

(+) TEL adapter unit Connector Terminal () TEL adapter unit Connector Terminal Condition Reference value

A
C
B237 7 B237 8 give a voice.
D
PKIB5037J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit. NO >> Replace microphone.
AV
AV-179
2009 G37 Coupe
CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT

CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT

INFOID:0000000004246697
TEL adapter unit identifies the vehicle model according to the control signal and performs the control.
INFOID:0000000004246698
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.
TEL adapter unit Connector B237 Terminals 22 24 Ground Existed
Continuity
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit. NO >> Repair harness or connector.
AV-180
2009 G37 Coupe
MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246699

Description
AV control unit transmits the mode change signal to BOSE amp. Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to be the center of sounds.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246700
1.CHECK CONTINUITY MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
BOSE amp. Connector B41 Terminal 37 AV control unit Connector M82 Terminal 27
E
Continuity Existed
4.
Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.

G
BOSE amp. Connector B41 Terminal 37 Ground Continuity Not existed
2.CHECK MODE CHANGE SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Connect BOSE amp. connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
(+) BOSE amp. Connector B41 Terminal 37 Ground Driver's Audio Stage ON Driver's Audio Stage OFF 0V 8.5 V () Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace AV control unit. NO >> Replace BOSE amp.
AV
AV-181
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246701
Satellite radio tuner and AV control unit are connected with a serial communication. They transmit the operation signal from AV control unit to satellite radio tuner, and transmit the display signal from satellite radio tuner to AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246702
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Satellite radio tuner Connector B236 Terminals 9 10 AV control unit Connector M82 Terminals 29 30
Continuity
Existed
4.
Satellite radio tuner Connector B236 Terminals 9 10 Ground Not existed
Continuity

B236
Ground
SKIA9300J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.

Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
AV-182
2009 G37 Coupe


A
B236
10
Ground
D
SKIA9301J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace satellite radio tuner. NO >> Replace AV control unit.
AV
AV-183
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246703
Request signal transmits the signal to recognize the connection of satellite radio tuner from satellite radio tuner to AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246704
1.CHECK CONTINUITY REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Satellite radio tuner Connector B236 Terminal 8 AV control unit Connector M82 Terminal 28
Continuity Existed
4.
Satellite radio tuner Connector B236 Terminal 8 Ground

B236
Ground
SKIA9299J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace AV control unit. NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.
AV-184
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246705

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246706
Diagnosis Procedure

D
E
Existed
3.

F

I J

AV

INFOID:0000000004246707
AV-185
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 switch ON MENU DOWN switch ON MENU UP switch ON SOURCE switch ON Between terminals 15 and 17 switch ON VOL UP switch ON VOL DOWN switch ON : Approx. 318 324 : Approx. 120 122 : Approx. 0
JSNIA0216GB
: Approx. 716 730 : Approx. 318 324 : Approx. 120 122 : Approx. 0
AV-186
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246708

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246709
Diagnosis Procedure

D
E
Existed
3.

F

I J

(+) AV control unit Connector M81 Terminal 16 () AV control unit Connector M81 Terminal 15 3.3 V
A V
L
Voltage (Approx.)

INFOID:0000000004246710
AV-187
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard
JSNIA0216GB
AV-188
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246711

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246712
Diagnosis Procedure

D
E
Existed


J
AV control unit Connector M81 Terminal 15 Ground Continuity
K
Not existed

M AV
INFOID:0000000004246713
AV-189
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard
JSNIA0216GB
AV-190
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A

AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000004246714
C
Condition Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Light switch ON Light switch OFF Selector lever in R position Selector lever in any position other than R Value/Status On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off
Monitor Item VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
ILLUM SIG
IGN SIG
REV SIG
TERMINAL LAYOUT
K
JPNIA0009ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
L
Terminal (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Reference value (Approx.)
Keep pressing SOURCE switch. Ignition switch ON Keep pressing Keep pressing Keep pressing switch Except for above. 7 (V) 9 (L) Ground ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC OFF Lighting switch is OFF. Lighting switch is ON. switch. switch.
0V 0.7 V 1.3 V 2V 3.3 V Battery voltage 0V 12 V
AV
6 (G)
15 (B)
Steering switch signal A
Input
Ground
Illumination signal
Input
AV-191
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal (Wire color) + 15 (B) Description Signal name Input/ Output Ignition switch ON Condition

Ground
Keep pressing VOL DOWN switch.
0V
0V 0.7 V 1.3 V 3.3 V Battery voltage
16 (L)
15 (B)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Keep pressing VOL UP switch. Keep pressing Except for above. switch.
19 (Y) 20 (B)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
Ground
GND
0V
22 (B)
21 (W)
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
24 (G)
23 (R)
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
25 26 27 (SB)
Ground
Shield Shield Mode change signal
Output
Ignition switch ON
Driver's Audio Stage ON Driver's Audio Stage OFF
0V 8.5 V
28 (P)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIA9299J
29 (G)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIA9300J
AV-192
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

B
Ignition switch ON
30 (L)
Ground
Output
SKIA9301J
33 34 35
Ground
Input Input Output
Ignition switch ACC
12 V
36 (R)
Ground
AUX image signal
Output
Ignition switch ON
H
SKIB2251J
37 (L)
Ground
AUX image ground
Ignition switch ON
0V
38 (P)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2237J
39 (L)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2236J
AV
40 (G)
Ground
RGB signal (R: red)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2238J
AV-193
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

41 (W)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3603E
42
Shield
5V
43 (B)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKIB4948J
44 (BR)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
PKIB5039J
45 (R)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3601E
46 (LG) 47 (O) 49 50 55
Ground
Signal GND
0V
Ground
Signal VCC Shield Shield Shield
Output
9V
56 (Y)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKIB5039J
AV-194
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

B
Ignition switch ON
57 (G)
Ground
Input
SKIB3598E
58 (BR) 59 (Y)
Ground
Inverter GND
0V
E
9V
Ground
Inverter VCC
Output
66 (G)
Ground
AUX image signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
G
H
SKIB2251J
73 74 (R)
Ground
Shield AUX image signal GND
Ignition switch ON
I
0V
J
Ignition switch ON During voice guide output with the switch pressed
80 (L)
79 (P)
TEL voice signal
Input
SKIB3609E
81
Shield
M
83 (B) 82 (G) iPod sound signal RH Input Ignition switch ON When iPod mode is selected
AV
SKIB3609E
85 (B) 86 (L) 87 (P) 88 (V)
Ground
GND
Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output
Ignition switch ON
O
0V
CANH CANL AV communication signal (H)
AV-195
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal (Wire color) + 89 (LG) 90 (L) 91 (P) Description Signal name AV communication signal (L) AV communication signal (H) AV communication signal (L) Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Condition

95 (R)
Ground
AUX sound signal RH
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
96 (W)
Ground
AUX sound signal LH
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
97 (B)
Ground
AUX sound signal GND
Ignition switch ON
0V
99 (R)
98 (W)
iPod sound signal LH
Input
Ignition switch ON
When iPod mode is selected
SKIB3609E
100 101 (BR) 103 (LG) 104 (G) 105 (O)
Ground
Shield SW GND
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON R position
0V 0V 3.3 V Battery voltage 12 V 0V
Ground
Eject signal
Input
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
Ground
Reverse signal
Input
AV-196
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

Parking brake ON
106 (SB)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
C
Parking brake OFF
D
JSNIA0007GB
NOTE: Maximum voltage may be 12 V due to specifications (connected units). 107 (GR) Ground Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse) Input Ignition switch ON When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
G
SKIA6649J
H
Ignition switch ON
108 (BR)
114 (Y)
Sound signal rear RH
Output
Voice output
SKIB3609E
109 (R)
115 (G)
Sound signal front RH
Output
Ignition switch ON
K
Voice output
L
SKIB3609E
110 (SB) 111
Ground
Amp. ON signal Shield
Output
Ignition switch ON
10 V
AV
AV-197
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

112 (V)
118 (LG)
Sound signal rear LH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
113 (O)
119 (W)
Sound signal front LH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM NOTE:
INFOID:0000000004246715
AV-198
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
[BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH virtually.
AV
JCNWM1777GB
AV-199
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1778GB
AV-200
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1779GB
AV-201
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1780GB
AV-202
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1781GB
AV-203
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1782GB
AV-204
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1783GB
AV-205
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1784GB
AV-206
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1785GB
AV-207
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1786GB
AV-208
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1787GB
AV-209
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1788GB
AV-210
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1789GB
AV-211
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1790GB
AV-212
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1791GB
AV-213
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1792GB
AV-214
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1793GB
AV-215
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1794GB
DTC Index
INFOID:0000000004246716
AV-216
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC U1000 U1010 U1310 U1200 U1216 U1243 U1255 U1300 U1240 U1300 U1254 U1300 U1256 U1300 U1240 U1254 U1256 Display item CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] CAN CONT [U1216] FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] SAT CONN [U1255] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] IPOD CONN [U1254] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] HAND FREE CONN [U1256] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] IPOD CONN [U1254] HAND FREE CONN [U1256]

Refer to AV-152, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-153, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-154, "DTC Logic" AV-155, "DTC Logic" AV-156, "DTC Logic" AV-157, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-159, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-161, "Description" AV-161, "Description" AV-161, "Description"
F
AV-161, "Description"
AV
AV-217
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
INFOID:0000000004246717
JPNIA0006ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal (Wire color) + 1 (B) 2 (Y) 3 (O) 4 (L) 5 Description Signal name Input/ Output Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON Condition
Ground
GND
0V
Ground
Inverter VCC
Input
9V
Ground
Signal VCC
Input
9V
Ground
AUX image GND Shield
0V
6 (L)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2236J
Shield
8 (R)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3601E
AV-218
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT

9 (B)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
C
D
PKIB4948J
E
11 (Y) Communication signal (CONTDISP) Ignition switch ON When adjusting display brightness.
Ground
Input
PKIB5039J
13 (BR) 14 (LG)
Ground
Inverter GND
0V
H
0V
Ground
Signal GND
I
Ignition switch ON
15 (R)
Ground
AUX image signal
Input
SKIB2251J
17 (G)
Ground
RGB signal (R: red)
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2238J
18 (P)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2237J
AV
AV-219
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT

19 (W)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3603E
20 (G)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch On
SKIB3598E
21
Shield
22 (BR)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKIB5039J
23
Shield
INFOID:0000000004555423
AV-220
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1777GB
AV-221
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1778GB
AV-222
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1779GB
AV-223
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1780GB
AV-224
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1781GB
AV-225
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1782GB
AV-226
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1783GB
AV-227
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1784GB
AV-228
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1785GB
AV-229
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1786GB
AV-230
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1787GB
AV-231
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1788GB
AV-232
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1789GB
AV-233
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1790GB
AV-234
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1791GB
AV-235
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1792GB
AV-236
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1793GB
AV-237
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1794GB
AV-238
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
INFOID:0000000004246719
BOSE AMP.
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0008ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
H
1 (L) 2 (W) Sound signal door squawker LH Output Ignition switch ON Voice output
I
SKIB3609E
J
Ignition switch ON
4 (V)
3 (LG)
Sound signal door squawker RH
Output
Voice output
SKIB3609E
M
5 (G) 6 (R) Sound signal door woofer RH Output Ignition switch ON Voice output
AV
SKIB3609E
7 (B) 10 (Y) 11 (GR) 12 (B)
Ground
GND
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
0V
Ground
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
GND
0V
AV-239
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.

14 (B)
9 (W)
Sound signal door woofer LH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
16 (SB)
17 (V)
Sound signal rear woofer
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
18 (L)
19 (P)
Sound signal rear speaker LH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
20 (W) 21 22 (GR)
Ground Ground
Amp. ON signal Shield Woofer Amp. ON signal
Input Output
Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ACC
10 V 10 V
24 (V)
23 (SB)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
26 (BR)
25 (Y)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
AV-240
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.

B
Ignition switch ON
29 (L)
30 (O)
Sound signal center speaker
Output
Voice output
SKIB3609E
31 (LG)
32 (Y)
Output
Ignition switch ON
E
Voice output
F
SKIB3609E
G
33 (R) 34 (G) Sound signal front RH Input Ignition switch ON Voice output
SKIB3609E
35 (P)
36 (L)
Input
Ignition switch ON
J
Voice output
K
SKIB3609E
37 (SB)
Ground
Mode change signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
0V 8.5 V
INFOID:0000000004555424
AV
AV-241
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1777GB
AV-242
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1778GB
AV-243
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1779GB
AV-244
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1780GB
AV-245
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1781GB
AV-246
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1782GB
AV-247
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1783GB
AV-248
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1784GB
AV-249
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1785GB
AV-250
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1786GB
AV-251
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1787GB
AV-252
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1788GB
AV-253
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1789GB
AV-254
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1790GB
AV-255
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1791GB
AV-256
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1792GB
AV-257
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1793GB
AV-258
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1794GB
AV-259
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
WOOFER AMP.
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
INFOID:0000000004246721
JPNIA0513ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
1 (G)
2 (R)
Sound signal rear woofer RH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
3 (GR)
Ground
Woofer amp. ON signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
10 V
5 (W)
4 (B)
Sound signal rear woofer LH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
7 (Y)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch OFF
Battery voltage
8 (SB)
9 (V)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
10 (B)
Ground
GND
Ignition switch ON
0V
AV-260
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
INFOID:0000000004555425
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM -
AV
JCNWM1777GB
AV-261
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1778GB
AV-262
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1779GB
AV-263
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1780GB
AV-264
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1781GB
AV-265
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1782GB
AV-266
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1783GB
AV-267
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1784GB
AV-268
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1785GB
AV-269
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1786GB
AV-270
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1787GB
AV-271
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1788GB
AV-272
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1789GB
AV-273
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1790GB
AV-274
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1791GB
AV-275
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1792GB
AV-276
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1793GB
AV-277
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1794GB
AV-278
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
INFOID:0000000004246723
IPOD ADAPTER
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA0618ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
H
1 (R) 13 (W) iPod sound signal LH Output Ignition switch ON When iPod mode is selected
I
SKIB3609E
J
Ignition switch ON
2 (B)
14 (G)
iPod sound signal RH
Output
SKIB3609E
3 (V) 4 (R) 5 (Y) 8 (W)
Ground
ACC power supply AV communication signal (L) Battery power supply
Input Input/ Output Input
Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
AV
Battery voltage
Ground
Ground
iPod battery charge
Output
Connected to iPod
O
12 V
AV-279
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER

9 (P)
Ground
Communication signal (iPod adapteriPod)
Output
Ignition switch ON
The wave pattern is displayed just after iPod connection.

JPNIA0462GB
NOTE: After the wave pattern display, the value continues Approx 3.3 V
10 (L)
Ground
Communication signal (iPod iPod adapter)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Connected to iPod
JPNIA0462GB
11 (O)
Ground
ACCESSORY-IDENTIFY
Ignition switch ON
Connected to iPod
0V
12 (W)
23 (R)
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
16 (G) 17 (BR) 19 21 (LG) 22 (G)
AV communication signal (H) GND Shield iPod connection recognition signal
Input/ Output Input
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON
Ground Ground
Not connected to iPod
0V 4V 0V 0V
Connected to iPod Connected to iPod
Ground
ACCESSORY-DETECT
24 (B)
23 (R)
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E

INFOID:0000000004555426
AV-280
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1777GB
AV-281
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1778GB
AV-282
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1779GB
AV-283
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1780GB
AV-284
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1781GB
AV-285
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1782GB
AV-286
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1783GB
AV-287
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1784GB
AV-288
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1785GB
AV-289
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1786GB
AV-290
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1787GB
AV-291
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1788GB
AV-292
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1789GB
AV-293
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1790GB
AV-294
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1791GB
AV-295
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1792GB
AV-296
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1793GB
AV-297
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1794GB
AV-298
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246725

Reference Value
JPNIA0010ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Reference value (Approx.)
2 (R)
1 (G)
Output
Ignition switch ON
H
I
SKIB3609E
J
4 (B) 3 (W) Satellite radio sound signal RH Output Ignition switch ON When satellite radio mode is selected
SKIB3609E
5 6
Shield Shield
M
Ignition switch ON
8 (Y)
Ground
Output
AV
SKIA9299J
9 (O)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
P
SKIA9300J
AV-299
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition

10 (BR)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIA9301J
12 (SB) 15 (B) 16 (V) 33 34
Ground
Input
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ACC
Battery voltage
Ground
GND
0V
Ground
ACC power supply Satellite antenna Shield
Input Input
Battery voltage
INFOID:0000000004555427
AV-300
2009 G37 Coupe

AV
JCNWM1777GB
AV-301
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1778GB
AV-302
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1779GB
AV-303
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1780GB
AV-304
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1781GB
AV-305
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1782GB
AV-306
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1783GB
AV-307
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1784GB
AV-308
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1785GB
AV-309
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1786GB
AV-310
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1787GB
AV-311
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1788GB
AV-312
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1789GB
AV-313
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1790GB
AV-314
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1791GB
AV-315
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1792GB
AV-316
2009 G37 Coupe

A
AV
O
JCNWM1793GB
AV-317
2009 G37 Coupe

JCNWM1794GB
AV-318
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246727
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

Reference Value
JPNIA0011ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal (Wire color) + 1 (GR) 2 (LG) 3 (W) 4 (B) 5 6 Description Signal name Input/ Output Input Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Condition Reference value (Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
Ground
ACC power supply
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
GND Shield Shield
0V
7 (B)
8 (R)
Microphone signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
Give a voice
AV
PKIB5037J
8 (R)
Ground
Microphone GND
Ignition switch ON
0V
9 (Y)
10 (G)
TEL voice signal
Output
Ignition switch ON
During voice guide output with the pressed switch
SKIB3609E
AV-319
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

Terminal (Wire color) + 14 (B) 19 (B) 22 (B) 24 (B) Description Signal name Input/ Output Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Condition

Ground
GND
0V
Ground
GND
0V
Ground
Control signal
Input
0V
Ground
Control signal
Input
0V NOTE: Maximum voltage may be 12 V due to specifications (connected units).
28 (P)
Ground
Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse)
Input
Ignition switch ON
When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25MPH)
SKIA6649J
29 (W) 33 34 35 (L) 36 (P)
8 (R)
Microphone VCC TEL antenna Shield AV communication signal (H) AV communication signal (L)
Output Input Input/ Output Input/ Output
Ignition switch ON
5V
INFOID:0000000004555428
AV-320
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

AV
JCNWM1777GB
AV-321
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1778GB
AV-322
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1779GB
AV-323
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1780GB
AV-324
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1781GB
AV-325
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1782GB
AV-326
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1783GB
AV-327
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1784GB
AV-328
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1785GB
AV-329
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1786GB
AV-330
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1787GB
AV-331
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1788GB
AV-332
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1789GB
AV-333
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1790GB
AV-334
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1791GB
AV-335
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1792GB
AV-336
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1793GB
AV-337
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

JCNWM1794GB
AV-338
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Table
OPERATION
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
Symptoms Check items All switches cannot be operated. MULTI AV is displayed on system selection screen when the CONSULT-III is started. Multifunction switch and preset switch operation does not work. All switches cannot be operated. MULTI AV is not displayed on system selection screen when the CONSULT-III is started. Only specified switch cannot be operated. Possible malfunction location / Action to take Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-162, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction. Perform multifunction switch and preset switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-138, "Diagnosis Description".
INFOID:0000000004246729
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

Basic Inspection Check that the cellular phone is corresponding type (Bluetooth correspond) when the hands-free related malfunction vehicle is in service before performing a diagnosis. There is a case that malfunction occurs due to the version change of the phone type, etc. even though it is a corresponding type. Therefore, confirm it by changing the cellular phone to another corresponding type phone, and check that it operates normally. It is necessary to distinguish whether the cause is the vehicle or cellular phone.
Simple check for Bluetooth communication
If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth communication, following procedure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction. 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on a cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth communication. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows. Set CONSULT-III near a cellular phone.
When operated Bluetooth registration by cellular phone, check if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name. (If other Bluetooth device is located near cellular phone, a name of the device would be displayed also.) NOTE: *:Displayed device name is NISSAN. If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunctioning. Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis. If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is normal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
AV
JPNIA0441GB
On Board Self-diagnosis of Hands-free Phone System Always perform the on board self-diagnosis at first after completing the basic inspection when the malfunction is detected on the hands-free phone system. Narrow down possible causes using the Diagnosis Chart if there is no malfunction in the on board self-diagnosis. Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
AV-339
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptoms Does not recognize cellular phone connection. (No connection is displayed on the display at the guide.) Check items

Probable malfunction location TEL adapter unit malfunction. Refer to AV-368, "Exploded View". Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". No malfunction. TEL adapter unit malfunction. Refer to AV-368, "Exploded View". Malfunction is detected. Refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". TEL voice signal circuit malfunction between TEL adapter unit and AV control unit. Control signal circuit. Refer to AV-150, "Diagnosis Description". TEL adapter unit. Refer to AV-368, "Exploded View". Microphone signal circuit. Refer to AV-178, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
Hands-free phone cannot be established.
Both the reception and the speech cannot be performed
The other party's voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone.
The operation of the be performed. The operation of the not be performed.
switch can
switch can-
Originating sound is not heard by the other party with handsfree phone communication.
Sound operation function is normal. Sound operation function does not work.

Symptoms
Check items There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis result.
Possible malfunction location / Action to take Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer toAV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-162, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit. Refer to AV-174, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (R: red) circuit. Refer to AV-168, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (G: green) circuit. Refer to AV-169, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (B: blue) circuit. Refer to AV-170, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB synchronizing signal circuit. Refer to AV-171, "Diagnosis Procedure". Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Ignition signal circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-162, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III self-diagnosis results.
Light blue (Cyan) tint. Color of RGB image is not proper. Purple (Magenta) tint. Screen looks yellowish. RGB screen is rolling. There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis result. There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III self-diagnosis results.
Fuel economy display is malfunctioning.
RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms The disk cannot be removed.
Check items
Possible malfunction location / Action to take Disk eject signal circuit.
AV-340
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptoms Check items No sound from all speakers.

Possible malfunction location / Action to take BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-164, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure". Amp. ON signal circuit Woofer amp. power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-165, "WOOFER AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure". Sound signal circuit between BOSE amp. and woofer amp. Sound signal circuit between woofer amp. and rear woofer. Woofer amp. ON signal circuit between BOSE amp. and woofer amp. Sound signal center speaker circuit.
Sound is not heard from rear woofer.
Sound is not heard from center speaker.
Sound is heard only from specific places Sound signal circuit of malfunctioning system. (RH front, RH rear, LH front and LH rear). It does not change to Driver's Audio Stage mode. Mode change signal circuit. Refer to AV-181, "Diagnosis Procedure". Perform the following inspection procedure. 1. Check satellite radio antenna mounting nut for looseness. NOTE: Tightening torque: 6.5 Nm (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb.) 2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder. 3. Replace the satellite radio antenna. Refer to AV-360, "Exploded View". 4. Replace the satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-359, "Exploded View". Perform the following inspection procedure. 1. Check the connection between Satellite radio tuner and antenna feeder. 2. Check the connection between Satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder. 3. Check Antenna feeder for open circuit. 4. Replace the satellite radio antenna. Refer to AV-360, "Exploded View". 5. Replace the satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-359, "Exploded View". Satellite radio sound signal circuit between AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Antenna amp. ON signal circuit. Antenna feeder.
ANTENNA is not displayed even when the channel is turned to 0 in Satellite radio mode.
ANTENNA is displayed when the channel is turned to 0 in Satellite radio mode.
The sound of Satellite radio is not heard. It does not change to Satellite radio mode. AM/FM radio is not received.
Other audio sounds are normal. There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis result. Other audio sounds are normal.
RELATED TO iPod
AV
Connect another iPod and check if the symptom is reproduced or not. If the symptom is reproduced, diagnose the vehicle. If no malfunction is detected, replace the iPod harness. NOTE: It is unable to check that between iPod and iPod harness.
AV-341
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptoms The sound of iPod is not heard. It does not change to iPod mode. iPod is not connected is displayed when it comes to iPod mode. iPod cannot charge the battery. The title of music file in the iPod is not indicated. Accessing the is unavailable from the vehicle. iPod Communication circuit between iPod and iPod adapter. Check items

Possible malfunction location / Action to take iPod sound signal circuit between AV control unit and iPod adapter. iPod sound signal circuit between iPod and iPod adapter. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-147, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". iPod connection recognition signal circuit between iPod and iPod adapter. iPod battery charge circuit between iPod and iPod adapter.
Other audio sounds are normal.
There is malfunction in the CONSULTIII self-diagnosis. Connected to iPod.

Symptoms None of the steering switch operations work. Only specified switch cannot be operated. SOURCE, MENU UP, MENU DOWN, of steering switch are not operated. VOL UP, VOL DOWN, are not operated. switches
Probable malfunction location Steering switch signal GND circuit. Refer to AV-189, "Diagnosis Procedure". Steering switch. Refer to AV-363, "Exploded View". Steering switch signal A circuit. Refer to AV-185, "Diagnosis Procedure". Steering switch signal B circuit. Refer to AV-187, "Diagnosis Procedure".
switches of steering switch

Symptoms No voice sound is heard when AUX mode is selected.
Check items Voice sound is heard when other modes are selected.
Probable malfunction location AUX sound signal circuits malfunction between auxiliary input jacks and AV control unit. AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary input jacks and AV control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Diagnosis Procedure". Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-173, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-172, "Diagnosis Procedure". Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-174, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Image is not displayed when AUX mode is selected.
It does not change from AUX mode to other modes.
AV-342
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
INFOID:0000000004246730

Description
BASIC OPERATIONS
Symptom Possible cause The brightness is at the lowest setting. No image is displayed. The system is in the video mode. The display is turned off. The screen is too dim. The movement is slow. Some pixels in the display are darker or brighter than others. Some menu items cannot be selected. The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low. This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid crystal displays. Some menu items become unavailable while the vehicle is driven. Possible solution Adjust the brightness of the display. Press <DISC> to change the mode. Press < > to turn on the display.
Wait until the interior of the vehicle has warmed up. This is not a malfunction. Park the vehicle in a safe location, and then operate the multi AV system.
RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION

Related to Telephone The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolves.
Symptom 1. Ensure that the command is valid. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. System fails to interpret the command correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See Speaker adaptation (SA) mode earlier in this section. Refer to OWNERS MANUAL. The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the List Names command. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name. Solution
RELATED TO AUDIO
The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction. The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause. NOTE: CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incorrectly mastered by the customer on a computer. Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disk Logo. If not, the disk is not mastered to the red book Compact Disk Standard and may not play.
AV
AV-343
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptom

Cause and Counter measure Check if the CD was inserted correctly. Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than .MP3, .WMA, .mp3, or .wma cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disk or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disk close, is done for the disk. Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate files Move immediately to the next song when playing The songs do not play back in the desired order.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multisession disk, some time may be required before the music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data. When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of .MP3, .WMA, .mp3, or .wma, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might not play in the desired order.
AV-344
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
INFOID:0000000004246731


INFOID:0000000004246732

INFOID:0000000004246733
AV
PKIA0306E
AV-345
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
[BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION] < PRECAUTION > Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
AV-346
2009 G37 Coupe
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
A
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
INFOID:0000000004246734
Power tool
E
PBIC0191E
AV
AV-347
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246735
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0470ZZ
1. 4.
2.
Bracket LH
3.
AV control unit

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246736
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same form, be careful not to insert them wrongly.
AV-348
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
INFOID:0000000004246737
DISPLAY UNIT
Exploded View
B
INFOID:0000000004246738

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
E
AV
AV-349
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR SQUAWKER
DOOR SQUAWKER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246739
JPNIA0480ZZ
1. 2.
Door finisher Door squawker

INFOID:0000000004246740

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Exploded View". Remove door squawker from door finisher.
INSTALLATION
AV-350
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR WOOFER
A
INFOID:0000000004246741
DOOR WOOFER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0481ZZ
E
1. 2. Door woofer Woofer bracket

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Exploded View". Remove door woofer from woofer bracket.
F
INFOID:0000000004246742
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-351
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246743
JPNIA0482ZZ
1.
Rear speaker
INFOID:0000000004246744

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove rear side finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Exploded View". Remove rear speaker from rear side finisher.
INSTALLATION
AV-352
2009 G37 Coupe
TWEETER
A
INFOID:0000000004246745
TWEETER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0483ZZ
E
1. 2. Tweeter Corner cover

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove corner cover. Refer to MIR-17, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View". Remove tweeter from corner cover.
F
INFOID:0000000004246746
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-353
2009 G37 Coupe
CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246747
JSNIA0120ZZ
1.
Center speaker
INFOID:0000000004246748

REMOVAL
1. Remove upper grille, and then remove center speaker. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
AV-354
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR WOOFER
A
INFOID:0000000004246749
REAR WOOFER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0484ZZ
E
1. Rear woofer
INFOID:0000000004246750

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-17, "Exploded View". Remove rear woofer from rear parcel shelf.
INSTALLATION
H
AV
AV-355
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246751
JPNIA0485ZZ
1. :
BOSE amp. Vehicle front

INFOID:0000000004246752

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove trunk floor spacer LH. Refer to INT-27, "Exploded View". Remove BOSE amp. from trunk room LH.
INSTALLATION
AV-356
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
INFOID:0000000004246753
WOOFER AMP.
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0469ZZ
E
1. : Woofer amp. Vehicle front

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove trunk floor spacer LH. Refer to INT-27, "Exploded View". Remove Woofer amp. from BOSE amp.
F
INFOID:0000000004246754
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-357
2009 G37 Coupe
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246755
JPNIA0474ZZ
1. 2.

INFOID:0000000004246756

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV-358
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246757

Exploded View
G
JPNIA0495ZZ
1. 4.
TEL adapter unit Bracket (rear)
2.
Bracket (front)
3.
H
INFOID:0000000004246758

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove trunk floor spacer RH. Refer to INT-27, "Exploded View". Remove nuts (A) from the trunk room RH, and remove TEL adapter unit and satellite radio tuner (1) from trunk room side.
JPNIA0503ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-359
2009 G37 Coupe


Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246759
JPNIA0476ZZ
1. :
Satellite radio antenna Vehicle front

REMOVAL
1.
INFOID:0000000004246760
2.
INSTALLATION
AV-360
2009 G37 Coupe
A
INFOID:0000000004555187
Exploded View
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0126ZZ
F
1. 2. Center ventilator grille Multifunction switch

REMOVAL
G
INFOID:0000000004555188
INSTALLATION
J
AV
AV-361
2009 G37 Coupe
PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004555189
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0477ZZ
1.
Clock
2.
Cluster lid C
3.
Preset switch
INFOID:0000000004555190

REMOVAL
1. Clock
JPNIA0478ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV-362
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING SWITCH
A
INFOID:0000000004246765
STEERING SWITCH
Exploded View
B
INFOID:0000000004246766

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-363
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246767
JPNIA0493ZZ
1.
iPod adapter
INFOID:0000000004246768

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3. Remove display unit assy. Refer to AV-349, "Removal and Installation". Remove display unit from display bracket. Remove iPod adapter from display bracket.
INSTALLATION
AV-364
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD CONNECTOR
A
INFOID:0000000004246769
IPOD CONNECTOR
Exploded View
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0491ZZ
F
1. iPod connector
INFOID:0000000004246770

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove center console. (M/T models) Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View". Remove center console. (A/T models) Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View". Push the pawl from the back of center console to remove iPod connector.
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-365
2009 G37 Coupe


Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246771
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0131ZZ
1.
Auxiliary input jacks

INFOID:0000000004246772

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV-366
2009 G37 Coupe
MICROPHONE
A
INFOID:0000000004246773
MICROPHONE
Exploded View
REMOVAL
Refer to INL-98, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0132ZZ
F
1. Microphone
INFOID:0000000004246774

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove map lamp. Refer to INL-98, "Exploded View". Remove microphone from map lamp.
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-367
2009 G37 Coupe
TEL ADAPTER UNIT

TEL ADAPTER UNIT

Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246775
JPNIA0495ZZ
1. 4.
TEL adapter unit Bracket (rear)
2.
Bracket (front)
3.

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove trunk floor spacer RH. Refer to INT-27, "Exploded View". Remove nuts (A) from the trunk room RH, and remove TEL adapter unit and satellite radio tuner (1) from trunk room side.
INFOID:0000000004246776
JPNIA0503ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV-368
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246777

Harness Layout
AV
P
JPNIA0496GB
AV-369
2009 G37 Coupe


Harness Layout
INFOID:0000000004246778
JPNIA0496GB
AV-370
2009 G37 Coupe
ANTENNA FEEDER (TEL)

A
INFOID:0000000004246779
ANTENNA FEEDER (TEL)

Harness Layout
AV
P
JPNIA0496GB
AV-371
2009 G37 Coupe
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW

< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
INFOID:0000000004246780
JSNIA0732GB
DETAILED FLOW


AV-372
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < BASIC INSPECTION > 1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for MULTI AV. Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". NOTE: Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if MULTI AV is not displayed. 2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the self-diagnosis results. Is DTC displayed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4.


5.ERROR PART REPAIR

1. 2. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts. Perform a self-diagnosis for MULTI AV with CONSULT-III. NOTE: Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results. 3. Check that the symptom does not occur. Does the symptom occur? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END
AV
AV-373
2009 G37 Coupe

< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description
INFOID:0000000004246781
Always correct the center position of the rear view monitor's possible route line after disconnecting the battery negative terminal.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004246782
1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF REAR VIEW MONITOR'S POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE

Refer to the following for details. >> Refer to AV-374, "REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".

INFOID:0000000004246783
When camera control unit is replaced, the center position of rear view monitor possible route line is corrected.
INFOID:0000000004246784
1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF REAR VIEW MONITOR'S POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE

Refer to the following for details. >> Refer to AV-374, "REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT

REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
Adjust the center position of the possible route line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.
INFOID:0000000004246785
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004246786
1.STEERING OPERATION
Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost ends. >> GO TO 2
2.DRIVING
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more. >> END
AV-374
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MULTI AV SYSTEM
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004246787
J
JPNIA1380GB
System Description
System name NAVIGATION SYSTEM AUDIO SYSTEM REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM System explanation AV-381, "System Description" AV-389, "System Description" AV-386, "System Description"
INFOID:0000000004246788
AV
Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy, maintenance and navigation is displayed. AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while receiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp. and BCM. Refer to the following HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM. Refer to the following AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM. Refer to the following VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM. Refer to the following TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM
AV control unit function by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV communication lines (H, L).
AV-375
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise. AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. Transmitting/receiving of data signal is performed by BCM. Also, it transmits the required signal of vehicle setting and receives the response signal. AV control unit is connected with display unit and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal of display and display control and receives the response signal from display unit. Also, it is connected with satellite radio by serial communication, and it transmits the operating signal and receives the display signal. NOTE: AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis. CONSULT-III self diagnosis: Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". On board self diagnosis: Refer to AV-393, "Diagnosis Description".

Hands-free communication can be operated by connecting using Bluetooth with cellular phone. Operation is performed by steering switch, and operating condition is indicated on display. Guide sound that is heard during operation is input from AV control unit to BOSE amp., and is output from door speaker.
JPNIA0510GB
When A Call Is Originated Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (Mic. Signal) is input to AV control unit. AV control unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth communication as a TEL voice signal. Voice sound is then heard at the other party. When Receiving A Call Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party. TEL voice signal is output to door speaker, and the signal is input to BOSE amp. via AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth communication from cellular phone.

Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks. Operation can be performed with multifunction switch and steering switch. Multifunction switch transmits operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication.
JSNIA0056GB
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by inputting sound to microphone.
AV-376
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Start of sound recognition system can be performed by steering switch.
A
C
JSNIA0053GB
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM

Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by directly touching a display.
G
JPNIA1381GB
AV
AV-377
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246789
JPNIA0468ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
3. 6. 9.
10. Rear view camera 13. Rear speaker RH 16. Door squawker RH 19. GPS antenna 22. Steering angle sensor 25. iPod connector 28. Display unit A. D. Within rear pillar finisher LH Instrument panel rear side
11. Camera control unit 14. Satellite radio antenna 17. Tweeter RH 20. iPod adapter 23. Preset switch 26. AV control unit B. E. Trunk room LH Rear view of the display unit
12. Rear woofer RH 15. Door woofer RH 18. Microphone 21. Steering switch 24. Auxiliary input jacks 27. Multifunction switch C. F. Trunk room RH Spiral cable part
AV-378
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246790
AV CONTROL UNIT
Integrates hard disk drive (HDD) allowing map data and music data to be stored. It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication signals from the AV control unit. The AV control unit includes the audio, hands-free phone, voice control, navigation, satellite radio, and vehicle information functions. It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function. It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function. It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming control. It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and parking brake). Auxiliary sound signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks. Update of map data is performed with the CONSULT-III and the applicable cable. Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing). Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jack. Camera image signal is input from camera control unit. Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit. Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display directly. Inputs power (amp ON) and sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound signal to woofer amp. and each speaker. Inputs power (amp ON) and sound signal from BOSE amp., and outputs sound signal to rear woofer. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs low-pitched sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs midrange sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high range sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from woofer amp. Outputs low-pitched sound. Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio, auxiliary input and navigation operations are integrated. Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air conditioner operations are integrated. Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. Camera image signal is input from rear view camera. Camera image signal output to display. Power (camera ON signal) is transmitted to rear view camera. Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit. AV control unit recognizes the presence of camera system with camera connection recognition signal.
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
PRESET SWITCH
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV-379
2009 G37 Coupe
MULTI AV SYSTEM
Part name REAR VIEW CAMERA STEERING SWITCH STEERING ANGLE SENSOR MICROPHONE
[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Description The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to camera control unit. Operations for audio, hands-free phone, audio response and navigation, etc. are possible. Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit. Sensor signal (steering angle) is transmitted to camera control unit. Used for hands-free phone operation and voice recognition. Mic signal is transmitted to AV control unit. Power (Mic VCC) is supplied from AV control unit. Image signal of auxiliary input is transmitted to display unit, and sound signal is transmitted to AV control unit. GPS signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit. Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control unit. Power (antenna amp ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit. Satellite radio signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit. Inputs iPod sound signal from iPod, and outputs iPod sound signal to AV control unit.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS GPS ANTENNA ANTENNA AMP. SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
iPod ADAPTER
AV-380
2009 G37 Coupe
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
INFOID:0000000004246791
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Diagram
F
JSNIA0054GB
System Description
DESCRIPTION
INFOID:0000000004246792
The AV control unit controls navigation function while GPS tuner has built-in map data, GYRO (angle speed sensor), on the HDD (Hard Disk Drive). The AV control unit inputs operation signal with communication signal, through display (touch panel) and multifunction switch and steering switch. Guide sound is output to front speaker through BOSE amp. from AV control unit when operating navigation system. A vehicle position is calculated with the GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehicle sensor, signal from GPS satellite and map data stored on HDD (Hard Disk Drive), and transmits the map image signal (RGB image, RGB area, RGB image synchronizing) to the display unit.
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE

The navigation system periodically calculates the current vehicle position according to the following three types of signals. Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor Vehicle turning angle determined by the gyroscope (angular speed sensor) The travel direction of the vehicle determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information) The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data, which is stored in the HDD (Hard Disk Drive) (map-matching), and indicated on the screen with a current location mark. More accurate data is used by comparing position detection results from GPS to the map-matching. The current position is calculated by detecting the travel distance from the previous calculation point, and its direction change. Travel distance The travel distance is generated from the vehicle speed sensor input signal. The automatic distance correction function is adopted for preventing a miss-detection of the travel distance because of tire wear etc. Travel direction The gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and GPS antenna (GPS information) generate the change of the travel direction. Both have advantages and disadvantages as per the following descriptions.
AV
JSNIA0177GB
SEL684V
AV-381
2009 G37 Coupe
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Type Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) GPS antenna (GPS information) Advantage The turning angle is precisely detected. The travel direction (North/South/East/West) is detected.
Disadvantage Errors are accumulated when driving a long distance without stopping. The travel direction is not precisely detected when driving slowly.
Input signals are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching repositions the vehicle on the road map when a new location is judged to be more accurate. This is done by comparing the current vehicle position (calculated by the normal position detection method) from the map data stored in the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
SEL685V
There is a possibility that the vehicle position may not be corrected in the following case, and when vehicle is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is hard to receive. Correct manually the current location mark on the screen. In map-matching, several alternative routes are prepared and prioritized in addition to the road judged as currently driving on. Therefore, due to errors in the distance and/or direction, an incorrect road may be prioritized, and the current location mark may be repositioned to the incorrect road. If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority. Therefore, the current location mark may appear on either of them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and configuration of the road, etc.
SEL686V
Map-matching does not function correctly when road on which the vehicle is driving is new, etc. and not recorded in the map data. Also, map-matching does not function correctly when road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different due to repair, etc. Therefore, the map-matching function judges other road as a currently driving road if the road is not in the map, and displays the current location mark on it. Later, the current location mark may be repositioned to the road if the correct road is detected. Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road data is limited. Therefore, correction by map-matching is not possible when there is an excessive gap between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
JSNIA0180GB
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
AV-382
2009 G37 Coupe
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satellites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,049 mile). The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional positioning). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimensions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional positionSEL526V ing). GPS position correction is not performed while stopping the vehicle.
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions: In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes. The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely performed. The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites. (Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna. NOTE: The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.81 ft) even with a high-precision three dimensional positioning. There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.
AV
AV-383
2009 G37 Coupe
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246793
JPNIA0468ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
3. 6. 9.
AV-384
2009 G37 Coupe
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246794
AV CONTROL UNIT
It is the master unit that controls each operation of the Navigation system. The HDD (Hard Disk Drive) is built in, and the map data is stored in HDD. The RGB signal (map information) is output to the display unit. The voice guidance signal is output to the BOSE amp.
DISPLAY UNIT
Map image signal is input from AV control unit, and it is indicated on the display. Each operation of navigation can be performed by the touch panel function. Voice guidance signal is input from AV control unit, and it is output to front LH/ RH speakers.
BOSE AMP. DOOR WOOFER DOOR SQUAWKER CENTER SPEAKER TWEETER MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
E
Voice guidance signal from BOSE amp. is output.
F
Each operation of navigation can be performed. Connected with preset switch via cable and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. Each operation of navigation, etc. can be performed. Switch operating signal is output to AV control unit. GPS signal is received and is output to AV control unit.
STEERING SWITCH GPS ANTENNA
AV
AV-385
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM


System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004246795
JSNIA0548GB
System Description
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE
INFOID:0000000004246796
Power is supplied to rear view camera from camera control unit and outputs camera image signal to camera control unit when selector lever is set to R position and the reverse signal on camera control unit is input. Camera control unit synthesizes guide lines and possible route lines with camera image signal from rear view camera, and transmits camera image signal to the display unit. In this case, since the reverse signal is also input to AV control unit, the AV control unit recognizes the selector lever as in R position, and it switches communication signal between AV control unit and display unit, and image that is displayed on the display unit by RGB signal with rear view monitor image. In addition, possible route lines are controlled by original sensor signal from steering angle sensor. The AV control unit determines whether rear view camera is equipped or not, based on the presence of camera connection recognition signal. It switches to rear view monitor image at the time of reverse signal input when it is equipped. Warning message under the rear view monitor display is described by AV control unit. AV control unit is connected in communication with camera control unit and display unit, and it controls operation of rear view monitor system.
AV-386
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004246797
JPNIA0468ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
3. 6. 9.
AV
AV-387
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004246798
Part name AV CONTROL UNIT Description
Image on display is changed to rear view monitor image with serial communication between AV control unit and display unit. Warning displayed in rear view monitor image is illustrated. Camera image signal is transmitted from camera control unit, and RGB signal for warning display is transmitted from AV control unit. Rear view monitor image is changed with the communication for AV control unit. Camera image signal is input from rear view camera, and camera image is indicated on the display unit. Power (camera ON signal) is transmitted to rear view camera. Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit. AV control unit recognizes the presence of camera system with camera connection recognition signal. The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to camera control unit. Steering signal necessary for possible route line control is transmitted to camera control unit.
DISPLAY UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
REAR VIEW CAMERA STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
AV-388
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
INFOID:0000000004246799
AUDIO SYSTEM
System Diagram
F
JPNIA1382GB
System Description
INFOID:0000000004246800
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function is operated with multifunction switch, preset switch, touch panel, steering switch or audio recognition. Operation status of AUDIO is indicated at display unit.
Function AM/FM radio Satellite radio CD Music Box (Hard Disk Drive) CF (Compact Flash) iPod connection Driver's Audio Stage
Operating Signal M Audio system operation can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch, steering switch, touch panel function or voice recognition function. Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction AV switch or preset switch. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering switch. Refer to AV-375, "System Description" for explanation of voice recognition function and touch panel function. O Screen Display Switching of display is performed with serial communication between display unit and AV control unit. The image signal to display operating condition is performed with RGB signal, RGB area signal and RGB image synchronizing signal. AM/FM Radio Mode AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit. Audio signal is received by glass antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp., and finally it is input to AV control unit. Audio signal is input to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer amp. and each speakers for AV control unit.
AV-389
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
Satellite Radio Mode Satellite radio tuner is built into AV control unit. Audio signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna, and it is input to AV control unit. AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. The signal is also outputted from BOSE amp. to both woofer amp. and each speaker. CD Mode CD function is built into AV control unit. AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer amp. and each speaker when CD is inserted to AV control unit. Music Box Mode Music CD data is stored on HDD that is built into AV control unit, and it can be played. AV control unit outputs music (audio signal) that is stored on HDD to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer amp. and each speaker. CF Mode AV control unit has built in CF replay function. Music (audio signal) that is stored in CF outputs to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer amp. and each speaker when CF is inserted into AV control unit. iPod Connection
Connect iPod and iPod adapter with wire harness and iPod adapter input iPod sound signal from iPod. When iPod mode is selected, iPod adapter output iPod sound signal to AV control unit. AV control unit output sound signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. output sound signal to woofer amp. and each speaker. Receiving/transmitting of iPod operation signals are performed as follows: - between AV control unit and iPod adapter: AV communication. - between iPod and iPod adapter: serial communication. The iPod connection status can be recognized whether iPod adapter receives iPod connection recognition signal. The iPod adapter is possible to charge iPod.
Driver's Audio Stage Mode Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to be the center of sounds. ON/OFF signals of Driver's Audio Stage are transmitted from AV control unit to BOSE amp. using Mode signal.
AV-390
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246801
JPNIA0468ZZ
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
3. 6. 9.
AV
AV-391
2009 G37 Coupe
AUDIO SYSTEM
INFOID:0000000004246802
AV CONTROL UNIT
Receiving function of AM/FM/satellite radio, replaying function of CD, replaying/saving function of music box (HDD), replaying function of CF and voice recognition function are integrated. Audio signal is output to BOSE amp. from each function. Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit. Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display directly. Inputs power (amp ON) and sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound signal to woofer amp. and each speaker. Inputs power (amp ON) and sound signal from BOSE amp., and outputs sound signal to rear woofer. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs low-pitched sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs midrange sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high range sound. Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. Outputs sound signal from woofer amp. Outputs low-pitched sound. Each audio operation can be operated. Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. Each audio operation can be operated. Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. Each audio operation can be operated. Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit. It is used for voice activated operation Pronounced voice is converted to voice signal and transmitted to AV control unit. Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control unit. Power (antenna amp ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit. Audio signal (satellite radio) is received and output to AV control unit. Inputs iPod sound signal from iPod, and outputs iPod sound signal to AV control unit.
DISPLAY UNIT
PRESET SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
MICROPHONE
ANTENNA AMP. SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
iPod ADAPTER
AV-392
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246803

Self-diagnosis Mode Press the BACK switch and the UP switch of the 8-direction switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and the self-diagnosis mode starts. The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal. CAUTION: The hazard switch and CD eject switch cannot be checked.
JSNIA0059GB
F Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.

H
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually. The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on the AV control unit, connections between system components as well as connections between AV control unit and GPS antenna and between AV control unit and satellite radio antenna. Then it displays the diagnosis results on the display unit. The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking, modifying or adjusting generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judgment automatically). On Board Diagnosis Item
M
Mode Description AV control unit diagnosis Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV control unit and GPS antenna and between AV control unit and satellite radio antenna.
Self-Diagnosis
AV
AV-393
2009 G37 Coupe

Mode Display Diagnosis

Description The following check functions are available: color tone check by color bar display, light and shade check by gray scale display and touch panel calibration response check. Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake, lights, ignition switch, and reverse. The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone. Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis. Steering Angle Adjustment When there is a difference between the actual turning angle and the vehicle mark turning angle, it can be adjusted. When there is a difference between the current location mark and the actual location, it can be adjusted. The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked. The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past are displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed. The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored. The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be monitored. The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone, microphone speaker check, and erase memory can be performed. The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjusted. The passkey and the device name can be checked and changed. Change Channel Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from the satellite radio system can be set. Any application ID's required to receive traffic information from the satellite radio system can be set. Not used. Erase the connection history of unit and error history. Initializes the AV control unit memory.
Vehicle Signals Speaker Test Climate Control
Navigation
Speed Calibration XM SAT Subscription Status
Confirmation/ Adjustment
Error History Vehicle CAN Diagnosis AV COMM Diagnosis Handsfree Phone
Camera Cont. Bluetooth
SAT
Change Application ID Diag
Delete Unit Connection Log Initialize Settings
STARTING PROCEDURE
JSNIA0060GB
AV-394
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > 4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the items of Self Diagnosis and Confirmation/Adjustment can be selected.
C
JSNIA0061GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select Self Diagnosis. Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the selfdiagnosis mode starts. The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
G
JSNIA0062GB
2.
Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded according to the diagnostic results. Connection line Green Yellow Green

NOTE:
Unit Green Gray Red
Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red. Replace AV control unit if Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View".
If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order of priority: red > yellow > gray.
AV
JSNIA0593GB
AV-395
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a component in the diagnosis result screen.
JSNIA0064GB
JSNIA0561GB
NOTE: Onboard self-diagnosis cannot be started when an error occurs on the dotted-line part above.
Self-diagnosis result chart
AV-396
2009 G37 Coupe


E
AV control unit is malfunction.
H
JSNIA0594GB
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit power supply and ground circuits.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuits. When there is no malfunction, AV control unit is malfunctioning.
AV
JSNIA0595GB
AV-397
2009 G37 Coupe


Malfunction is detected in Cameraconnection recognition signal circuit.
Camera connection recognition signal circuit.
JSNIA0596GB
GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected.
GPS antenna.
JSNIA0597GB
Poor connection is detected in satellite radio antenna.
Satellite radio antenna feeder. Satellite radio antenna.
JSNIA0598GB
AV-398
2009 G37 Coupe


B
Malfunction is detected in communication circuit between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit. Communication circuits between AV control unit and display unit.
D
JSNIA0599GB
JSNIA0600GB
iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between camera control unit and the junction of AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between camera control unit and iPod adapter. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter.
E
iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits. AV communication circuits between camera control unit and the junction of AV control unit and multifunction switch. AV communication circuits between camera control unit and iPod adapter.
1. 2. Start the diagnosis function and select Confirmation/Adjustment. The confirmation/adjustment mode indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted. Select each switch on the Confirmation/Adjustment Mode screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press the BACK switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment Mode screen.
I
L
JSNIA0617GB
AV
AV-399
2009 G37 Coupe

Display Diagnosis
JSNIA0689GB
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB signal error is detected. R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error : Light blue (Cyan) tint : Purple (Magenta) tint : Yellow tint
JSNIA0075GB
AV-400
2009 G37 Coupe

Diagnosis item Vehicle speed Display ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Reverse OFF Vehicle status Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Light switch ON Light switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch in ACC position Shift the selector lever to R position Shift the selector lever other than R position Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.

Remarks
Parking brake
Lights
Ignition
Speaker Test Select SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. Press Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press End to stop the test tones. NOTE: The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
Tweeter Front speaker Rear speaker
: 3 kHz : 300 Hz : 1 kHz

JSNIA0076GB
Climate Control Refer to HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM for details. Navigation STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT The steering angle output value detected with the gyroscope is adjusted.
JSNIA0077GB
AV
SPEED CALIBRATION During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic distance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires.
JSNIA0078GB
AV-401
2009 G37 Coupe

XM SAT SUBSCRIPTION STATUS The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked.
JSNIA0089GB
Error History The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when Self-diagnosis is selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed. However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the Error Record to detect any error that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation. The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of the following points. If there is a malfunction with the GPS antenna circuit board in the AV control unit, the correct date and time of occurrence may not be able to be displayed. Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time an error occurred. If current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occurrence cannot be located correctly. The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending on the error item. Count up method A The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle. The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch or CONSULT-III. Count up method B The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle. The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch or CONSULT-III.
AV-402
2009 G37 Coupe

A
E
JSNIA0079GB
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and then repair the malfunctioning parts according to the diagnosis results. Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)".
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CONTROL UNIT (AV) FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit Connection Of Gyro XM SERIAL COMM Error CAN Controller Memory Error Bluetooth Module Connection Error HDD CONN Error HDD READ Error HDD WRITE Error HDD COMM Error HDD ACCESS Error DSP CONN Error DSP COMM Error Internal Communication Error GPS Communication Error GPS ROM Error GPS RAM Error GPS RTC Error
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV communication circuit initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
AV
AV control unit power supply and ground circuits. An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom (GPS reception error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly.
GPS malfunction is detected.
AV-403
2009 G37 Coupe

Error item Description Display unit power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuits between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit. GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in camera connection recognition circuit between AV control unit and camera control unit. Poor connection is detected in satellite radio antenna. AV control unit power supply and ground circuits malfunction detected. AV control unit malfunction is detected. Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Camera control unit power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and camera control unit. iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between camera control unit and iPod adapter. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between camera control unit and the junction of AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between AV control unit and the junction of camera control unit and multifunction switch.

Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
Display unit power supply and ground circuits. Communication circuits between AV control unit and display unit.
GPS Antenna Error
GPS antenna. Camera connection recognition circuit between AV control unit and camera control unit. Satellite radio antenna feeder. Satellite radio antenna. AV control unit power supply and ground circuits. When there is no malfunction, AV control unit is malfunctioning.
Camera Control Unit Connection Error
XM Antenna Connection Error
AV COMM CIRCUIT Internal Communication Error
AV COMM CIRCUIT Rearview Camera Connection Error
Camera control unit power supply and ground circuits.
AV COMM CIRCUIT iPod Connection Error
iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits. AV communication circuits between camera control unit and iPod adapter.
AV COMM CIRCUIT Rearview Camera Connection Error iPod Connection Error AV COMM CIRCUIT Switches Connection Error Rearview Camera Connection Error iPod Connection Error
AV communication circuits between camera control unit and the junction of camera control unit and multifunction switch. AV communication circuits between AV control unit and the junction of camera control unit and multifunction switch.
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis
AV-404
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CAN communication status and error counter is displayed. The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39. The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Items Tx (HVAC) Rx (ECM) Rx (Cluster) Rx (BCM) Rx (HVAC) Rx (USM) Display (Current) OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN Malfunction counter (Past) OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39
JSNIA0080GB
AV COMM Diagnosis Displays the communication status between AV control unit (master unit) and each unit. The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39. The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Status (Current) OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN OK / UNKWN Counter (Past) OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39 OK / 0 39
JSNIA0081GB
Items C Tx(ITMPrimarySW) C Rx(PrimarySWITM) C Rx(STRG SWITM) C Rx(AudioITM) C Rx(AmpITM) C Rx(RearCameraITM) C Rx(XMITM) C Rx(iPodITM) C Rx(AmpAudio) C Rx(iPodAudio) C Tx(AudioITM) NOTE:
Any units with displayed have no history of vehicle connection. Audio and Amp indicate the same status because Amp indicates the status of the amplifier integrated in the AV control unit. STRG SW, Amp, and XM indicate the same status as Audio.
AV
Hands-Free Phone
AV-405
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment, microphone and speaker test, and memory erase functions are also available.
JSNIA0083GB
Camera Cont. The two functions of Connection Confirmation and Adjust Offset of Rear View Camera are available. CONNECTION CONFIRMATION The steering angle sensor, reverse signal and vehicle speed sensor can be inspected.
JSNIA0084GB
Diagnosis item
Display ON
Vehicle status When steering the vehicle with ignition switch ON (remains ON until connection mode is stopped when it is turned ON) Ignition switch at ACC No steering with ignition switch ON Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal Selector lever is in R with ignition switch ON. Ignition switch at ACC Selector lever is in position other than R with ignition switch ON. Malfunction detected in camera-connection recognition signal Vehicle speed is more than 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON Ignition switch at ACC Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal Not used
Steer. Angle Sensor
OFF ON
Reverse Sensor
OFF ON
Vehicle Speed Sensor
OFF
Side view Switch
ADJUST OFFSET OF REAR VIEW CAMERA Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor camera.
JSNIA0085GB
Bluetooth
AV-406
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Passkey confirmation/change The passkey of Bluetooth can be confirmed and changed. The passkey can be changed by four digits within 0 to 9. [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
A
JSNIA0086GB
Device name check/change The device name of Bluetooth can be confirmed and changed. The device name can be changed by sixteen digits within A to Z (small character can be used) and - (hyphen).
JSNIA0087GB
SAT Change Channel - Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from the satellite radio system can be set.
JSNIA0092GB
Change Application ID - Any application ID'-s required to receive traffic information from the satellite radio system can be set.
AV
O
JSNIA0093GB
Delete Unit Connection Log
AV-407
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been removed.)
JSNIA0088GB
Initialize Settings Deletes data stored in HDD.
JSNIA0095GB

Diagnosis mode Ecu Identification Self Diagnostic Result Data Monitor Description The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
INFOID:0000000004246804
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively. The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
AV COMMUNICATION
AV communication
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.

AV-408
2009 G37 Coupe

Self-diagnosis Detection Range A
H
JSNIA0562GB
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item I

Error item Description CAN communication malfunction is detected. CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV communication circuit initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. Possible malfunction factor/Action to take Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and then repair the malfunctioning parts according to the diagnosis results. Refer to AV-412, "Diagnosis Procedure".
CAN COMM CIRCUIT[U1000]
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] GYRO NO CONN [U1201] CAN CONT [U1216] BLUETOOTH MODULE CONN [U1217] HDD-CONN [U1218] HDD-READ [U1219] XM SERIAL COMM [U1220] HDD-WRITE [U121A] HDD-COMM [U121B] HDD-ACCESS [U121C] DSP CONN [U121D] DSP COMM [U121E] INTERNAL COMM [U121F]
M
AV
P
AV control unit power supply and ground circuits.
AV-409
2009 G37 Coupe

Error item GPS COMM [U1204] GPS ROM [U1205] GPS RAM [U1206] GPS RTC [U1207] Display unit power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in communication circuits between AV control unit and display unit. Malfunction is detected in communication signal between AV control unit and display unit. GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in camera connection recognition circuit between AV control unit and camera control unit. Poor connection is detected in satellite radio antenna. AV control unit power supply and ground circuits. AV control unit malfunction is detected. Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Camera control unit power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and camera control unit. iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between camera control unit and iPod adapter Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between camera control unit and the junction of AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between AV control unit and the junction of camera control unit and multifunction switch. GPS malfunction is detected. Description

Possible malfunction factor/Action to take An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom (GPS reception error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly.
Display unit power supply and ground circuits. Communication circuits between AV control unit and display unit.
GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244]
GPS antenna. Camera connection recognition circuit between AV control unit and camera control unit. Satellite radio antenna feeder. Satellite radio antenna. AV control unit power supply and ground circuits. When there is no malfunction, AV control unit is malfunctioning.
CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250]
XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258]
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] INTERNAL COMM [U121F]
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits AV communication circuits between camera control unit and iPod adapter
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] IPOD CONN [U1254] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] IPOD CONN [U1254]
AV communication circuits between camera control unit and the junction of AV control unit and multifunction switch. AV communication circuits between AV control unit and the junction of camera control unit and multifunction switch.
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit. For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.
AV-410
2009 G37 Coupe

Display Item VHCL SPD SIG Display On Off On Off On ILLUM SIG Off On Off On REV SIG Off Vehicle status Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Block the light beam from the auto light optical sensor when the light SW is ON. Expose the auto light optical sensor to light when the light SW is OFF or ON. Ignition switch ON Ignition switch in ACC position Shift the selector lever to R position Shift the selector lever other than R position Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal. Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.

A
Remarks
PKB SIG
IGN SIG
AV
AV-411
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Description
INFOID:0000000004246805
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004246806
U1000
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246807
AV-412
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246808

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246809
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
C
INFOID:0000000004246810
Diagnosis Procedure

G F
AV
AV-413
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
Part name Description Integrates HDD (hard disk drive) allowing map data and music data to be stored. It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication signals from the AV control unit. The AV control unit includes the audio, hands-free phone, voice control, navigation, satellite radio and vehicle information functions. It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function. It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function. It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming control. It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and parking brake). Auxiliary sound signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks.
INFOID:0000000004246812 INFOID:0000000004246811
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
AV-414
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246813

Description
INFOID:0000000004246814
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] DTC Detection Condition An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit (FLASH-ROM).
H
Action to take
I
U1200
AV
AV-415
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246816 INFOID:0000000004246815
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U1201 Display contents of CONSULT-III GYRO NO CONN [U1201] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (gyrocompass disconnection) is detected.
AV-416
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246817

Description
INFOID:0000000004246818
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
H
AV
AV-417
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246820 INFOID:0000000004246819
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III BLUETOOTH MODULE CONN [U1217] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (Bluetooth module connection malfunction) is detected.
Action to take
U1217
AV-418
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246821

Description
INFOID:0000000004246822
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U1218 Display contents of CONSULT-III HDD-CONN [U1218] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD connection malfunction) is detected.
H
AV
AV-419
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246824 INFOID:0000000004246823
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U1219 Display contents of CONSULT-III HDD-READ [U1219] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD read malfunction) is detected.
AV-420
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246825

Description
INFOID:0000000004246826
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U1220 Display contents of CONSULT-III XM SERIAL COMM [U1220] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (satellite radio tuner communication error) is detected.
H
AV
AV-421
2009 G37 Coupe
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT

U121A AV CONTROL UNIT

Description
INFOID:0000000004246828 INFOID:0000000004246827
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U121A Display contents of CONSULT-III HDD-WRITE [U121A] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD write malfunction) is detected.
AV-422
2009 G37 Coupe
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246829
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT

Description
INFOID:0000000004246830
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U121B Display contents of CONSULT-III HDD-COMM [U121B] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD communication error) is detected.
H
AV
AV-423
2009 G37 Coupe
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT

U121C AV CONTROL UNIT

Description
INFOID:0000000004246832 INFOID:0000000004246831
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U121C Display contents of CONSULT-III HDD-ACCESS [U121C] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD access error) is detected.
AV-424
2009 G37 Coupe
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246833
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT

Description
INFOID:0000000004246834
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U121D Display contents of CONSULT-III DSP CONN [U121D] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (DSP connection error) is detected.
H
AV
AV-425
2009 G37 Coupe
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT

U121E AV CONTROL UNIT

Description
INFOID:0000000004246836 INFOID:0000000004246835
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U121E Display contents of CONSULT-III DSP COMM [U121E] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (DSP communication error) is detected.
AV-426
2009 G37 Coupe
U121F AV CONTROL UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246837
U121F AV CONTROL UNIT

Description
INFOID:0000000004246838
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U121F Display contents of CONSULT-III INTERNAL COMM [U121F] DTC Detection Condition Internal malfunction of AV control unit (internal communication error) is detected.
H
Action to take AV control unit power supply and ground circuit.
INFOID:0000000004246839
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check AV control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-438, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
K
AV
AV-427
2009 G37 Coupe
U1204 GPS
U1204 GPS
Description
INFOID:0000000004246840
An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom (GPS reception error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004246841
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III DTC Detection Condition
Action to take An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless a symptom (GPS reception error,etc.) occurs. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly.
INFOID:0000000004246842
U1204
GPS COMM [U1204]
Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction) is detected.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

1. Delete the self-diagnosis results. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again. 3. Check that the DTC is detected again. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Replace AV control unit. NO >> The intermittent malfunction caused by strong radio interference can be detected.
AV-428
2009 G37 Coupe
U1205 GPS
A
INFOID:0000000004246843
U1205 GPS
Description
INFOID:0000000004246844
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000004246845
U1205
GPS ROM [U1205]
Diagnosis Procedure

AV
AV-429
2009 G37 Coupe
U1206 GPS
U1206 GPS
Description
INFOID:0000000004246846
INFOID:0000000004246847
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000004246848
U1206
GPS RAM [U1206]
Diagnosis Procedure

AV-430
2009 G37 Coupe
U1207 GPS
A
INFOID:0000000004246849
U1207 GPS
Description
INFOID:0000000004246850
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000004246851
U1207
GPS RTC [U1207]
Diagnosis Procedure

AV
AV-431
2009 G37 Coupe
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

Description
Part name Description Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing). Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jack. Camera image signal is input from the camera control unit. Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit. Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display directly.
INFOID:0000000004246853 INFOID:0000000004246852
DISPLAY UNIT
DTC Logic
Possible causes
U1243
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246854


Continuity
Existed
4.

Continuity

1. 2. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON.
AV-432
2009 G37 Coupe
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
A
C
M75 11 Ground When adjusting display brightness.
D
PKIB5039J

I
M75 22 Ground When adjusting display brightness.
J
PKIB5039J
AV
AV-433
2009 G37 Coupe
U1244 GPS ANTENNA

U1244 GPS ANTENNA

Description
Part name GPS ANTENNA Description GPS signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit.
INFOID:0000000004246856 INFOID:0000000004246855
DTC Logic
DTC U1244 Display contents of CONSULT-III GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] DTC Detection Condition GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected.
Possible causes GPS antenna disconnection.

INFOID:0000000004246857
Diagnosis Procedure
1.GPS ANTENNA CHECK

Visually check GPS antenna and antenna feeder. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.

1. 2. 3. Disconnect GPS antenna connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between AV control unit and ground.
(+) AV control unit Terminal 110 Ground 5V () Voltage (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace AV control unit.
AV-434
2009 G37 Coupe
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246858
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

Description
Part name Description Camera image signal is input from rear view camera, and camera image is indicated on the display. Power (camera ON signal) is transmitted to rear view camera. Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit. AV control unit recognizes the presence of camera system with camera connection recognition signal.
INFOID:0000000004246859
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC U1250 Display contents of CONSULT-III CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] DTC Detection Condition Malfunction is detected in Camera-connection recognition signal circuit.
E
Possible causes Camera-connection recognition signal circuit.
INFOID:0000000004246860
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK CAMERA-CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and camera control unit connector. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and camera control unit harness connector.
AV control unit Connector M87 Terminal 40 Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminal 14
Continuity Existed

1. 2. 3. Connect AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) AV control unit Connector M87 Terminal 40 Ground 5V () Voltage (Approx.)
AV
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace camera control unit. NO >> Replace AV control unit.
AV-435
2009 G37 Coupe
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA

U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA

Description
Part name SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Description Satellite radio signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit.
INFOID:0000000004246862 INFOID:0000000004246861
DTC Logic
DTC U1258 Display contents of CONSULT-III XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258] DTC Detection Condition Satellite radio antenna connection malfunction is detected.
Possible causes Satellite radio antenna disconnection.

INFOID:0000000004246863
Diagnosis Procedure
1.SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CHECK

Visually check satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.

1. 2. 3. Disconnect satellite radio antenna connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between AV control unit and ground.
(+) AV control unit Terminal 108 Ground 5V () Voltage (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace AV control unit.
AV-436
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246864

Description

DTC Display contents of CONSULT-III AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] INTERNAL COMM [U121F] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] Description Malfunction is detected in AV control unit power supply and ground circuits. AV control unit malfunction is detected. Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Malfunction is detected in camera control unit power supply and ground circuits. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and camera control unit. iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits malfunction is detected. Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between camera control unit and iPod adapter. Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between camera control unit and the junction of AV control unit and multifunction switch. Possible malfunction factor/Action to take AV control unit power supply and ground circuits. When there is no malfunction, AV control unit is malfunctioning. Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits. AV communication circuits between AV control unit and multifunction switch.
U1300 U121F
U1300 U1240
G
U1300 U1252
H
iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits. AV communication circuits between camera control unit and iPod adapter. AV communication circuits between camera control unit and the junction of AV control unit and multifunction switch.
U1300 U1254
U1300 U1252 U1254
AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] IPOD CONN [U1254] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] IPOD CONN [U1254]
U1300 U1240 U1252 U1254
AV communication circuits between Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits AV control unit and the junction of between AV control unit and the junction of camera concamera control unit and multifunction trol unit and multifunction switch. switch.
AV
AV-437
2009 G37 Coupe


AV CONTROL UNIT
INFOID:0000000004246865
1.CHECK FUSE

Signal name Connector No. M80 Battery power supply M87 M80 M87 M87 Terminal No. 19 22 24 7 25 35 ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage OFF Battery voltage Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
ACC power supply Ignition signal

Signal name Ground Connector No. M87 Terminal No. 21 23 Ignition switch position OFF Continuity Existed
DISPLAY UNIT
INFOID:0000000004246866
1.CHECK FUSE
AV-438
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.

Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between Display unit and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.
Signal name Ground Connector No. M75 Terminal No. 1 13 Ignition switch position OFF Continuity
G
Existed
INFOID:0000000004246867
1.CHECK FUSE

AV

AV-439
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246868
1.CHECK FUSE

Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between camera control unit and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect camera control unit connector. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246869
1.CHECK FUSE
Power source Battery Fuse No. 5, 8

Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
AV-440
2009 G37 Coupe

Signal name Battery power supply Connector No. B42 Terminal No. 10 11

Ignition switch position OFF Value (Approx.) Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
Signal name Ground Connector No. B42 Terminal No. 7 12 Ignition switch position OFF Continuity Existed
WOOFER AMP.
WOOFER AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246870
1.CHECK FUSE
Power source Battery Fuse No. 34

Check voltage between woofer amp. harness connector and ground.
Signal name Battery power supply Connector No. B43 Terminal No. 7 Ignition switch position OFF Value (Approx.) Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between woofer amp. and fuse.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect woofer amp. connector. Check continuity between woofer amp. harness connector and ground.
AV
iPod ADAPTER
AV-441
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004246871
iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE

Check voltage between iPod adapter harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check harness between iPod adapter and fuse.
AV-442
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246872

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246873
Diagnosis Procedure

Continuity Existed
4.


M75
17
Ground
SKIB2238J
AV
AV-443
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246874
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246875

Continuity Existed
4.


M75
Ground
SKIB2236J
AV-444
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246876

Description
B
INFOID:0000000004246877
Diagnosis Procedure

Continuity Existed
4.


M75
18
Ground
SKIB2237J
AV
AV-445
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246878
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246879

Continuity Existed
4.


M75
19
Ground
SKIB3603E
AV-446
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246880

Description
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246881

E
Continuity Existed
4.


(+) Display unit Connector Terminal At RGB image is displayed. 5V () Condition Reference value (Approx.)
M
M75 9 Ground At rear view camera image is displayed.
AV
PKIB4948J
AV-447
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246882
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246883

Continuity Existed
4.


M75
Ground
SKIB3601E
AV-448
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246884

Description
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246885

E
Continuity Existed
4.

G

M
M75 20 Ground
AV
SKIB3598E
AV-449
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
Transmits the image signal of external device from auxiliary input jacks to display unit.
INFOID:0000000004246886
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246887
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and display unit connector. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and display unit harness connector.
Auxiliary input jacks Connector M154*1 M362*2 *1: A/T models *2: M/T models Terminal 7 Display unit Connector M75 Terminal 15
Continuity
Existed
4.
Continuity

1. 2. 3. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.
M362*2
Ground
SKIB2251J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace display unit. NO >> Check that there is no malfunction in the external device.
AV-450
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246888

Description
AV control unit transmits the mode change signal to BOSE amp. Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to be the center of sounds.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246889
1.CHECK CONTINUITY MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector and AV control unit connector. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
BOSE amp. Connector B41 Terminal 37 AV control unit Connector M87 Terminal 44
E
Continuity Existed
4.
Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.

G
BOSE amp. Connector B41 Terminal 37 Ground Continuity Not existed
2.CHECK MODE CHANGE SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Connect BOSE amp. connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
(+) BOSE amp. Connector B41 Terminal 37 Ground Driver's Audio Stage ON Driver's Audio Stage OFF 0V 8.5 V () Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace AV control unit. NO >> Replace BOSE amp.
AV
AV-451
2009 G37 Coupe


INFOID:0000000004246890
INFOID:0000000004246891

Continuity Existed
4.


1. 2. 3. Connect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector terminal 85 and ground.
(+) AV control unit Connector M89 Terminal 85 Ground Pressing the eject switch Except for above 0V 5V () Condition Voltage (Approx.)
AV-452
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246892

Description
Supply power from AV control unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound/voice to the AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246893
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV control unit connector and microphone connector. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
AV control unit Connector Terminals 26 M87 27 28 R17 Microphone Connector Terminals 4 2 1 Existed
E
Continuity
4.

AV control unit Connector M87 Terminals 26 28 Ground Not existed
Continuity
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC

1. 2. 3. Connect AV control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.
(+) AV control unit Connector M87 Terminal 26 () AV control unit Connector M87 Terminal 27 5V Voltage (Approx.)
AV
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL

1. 2. Connect microphone connector. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector.
AV-453
2009 G37 Coupe

(+) AV control unit Connector Terminal () AV control unit Connector Terminal Condition Reference value
M87
28
M87
27
Give a voice.
PKIB5037J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace AV control unit. NO >> Replace microphone.
AV-454
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA CONTROL UNIT)
A
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA CONTROL UNIT)
Description
INFOID:0000000004246894
Camera control unit outputs camera ON signal to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image signal from rear view camera when the reverse signal is input. The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246895
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connector.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminal 6 Rear view camera Connector B305 Terminal 3
F
Continuity Existed
4.
Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
H
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminal 6 Ground Continuity Not existed
2.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Connect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Camera control unit Connector Terminal () Condition Reference value
AV
B241 6 Ground At rear view camera image is displayed.
O
SKIB2251J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace camera control unit. NO >> Replace rear view camera.
AV-455
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT

CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Description
INFOID:0000000004246896
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246897
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connector.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminal 8 Rear view camera Connector B305 Terminal 1
Continuity Existed
4.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminal 8 Ground
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA ON SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Connect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Camera control unit Connector Terminal Shift the selector lever to R position Shift the selector lever other than R position 6V 0V () Condition Voltage (Approx.)
B241
Ground
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace rear view camera. NO >> Replace camera control unit.
AV-456
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT)

A
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT)

Description
INFOID:0000000004246898
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246899
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect camera control unit connector and display unit connector. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and display unit harness connector.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminal 12 Display unit Connector M75 Terminal 12
F
Continuity Existed
4.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminal 12 Ground
2.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Connect camera control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Camera control unit Connector Terminal () Condition Reference value
B241
12
Ground
At rear view camera image is displayed.
AV
O
SKIB2251J
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace display unit. NO >> Replace camera control unit.
AV-457
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL 1, 2 CIRCUIT


Description
INFOID:0000000004246900
Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to the camera control unit. Steering angle sensor signal 3 detects the neutral position of the steering and transmits it to the camera control unit. Camera control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and vehicle speed signal.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246901
1.CHECK CONTINUITY STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL 1, 2 CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect camera control unit connector and steering angle sensor connector. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and steering angle sensor harness connector.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminals 23 24 Steering angle sensor Connector M37 Terminals 3 4
Continuity
Existed
4.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminals 23 24 Ground Not existed
Continuity
2.CHECK SENSOR SIGNAL 1, 2

1. 2. 3. Connect camera control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminals 23 24 Ground 5V () Voltage (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace camera control unit.
3.CHECK SENSOR SIGNAL 1, 2

1. 2. Connect steering angle sensor connector. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
AV-458
2009 G37 Coupe

(+) Camera control unit Connector Terminals () Condition Reference value

A
C
Turn the steering to the right
D
SKIB3827E
B241
23, 24
Ground
A: Sensor signal 1 B: Sensor signal 2
F
Turn the steering to the left
SKIB3828E
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace steering angle sensor.
AV
AV-459
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT


Description
INFOID:0000000004246902
Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to the camera control unit. Steering angle sensor signal 3 detects the neutral position of the steering and transmits it to the camera control unit. Camera control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and vehicle speed signal.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246903
1.CHECK CONTINUITY STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect camera control unit connector and steering angle sensor connector. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and steering angle sensor harness connector.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminals 25 Steering angle sensor Connector M37 Terminals 5
Continuity Existed
4.
Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminals 25 Ground
2.CHECK SENSOR SIGNAL 3

1. 2. 3. Connect camera control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) Camera control unit Connector B241 Terminals 25 Ground 5V () Voltage (Approx.)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace camera control unit.
3.CHECK SENSOR SIGNAL 3

1. 2. Connect steering angle sensor connector. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
AV-460
2009 G37 Coupe

(+) Camera control unit Connector Terminals () Condition Reference value

A
C
B241 25 Ground Turn the steering around the neutral position
D
SKIB3829E
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace steering angle sensor.
AV
AV-461
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246904
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246905

AV control unit Connector M80 Terminal 6 Spiral cable Connector M36 Terminal 24
Continuity Existed
3.

AV control unit Connector M80 Terminal 6 Ground



INFOID:0000000004501243
AV-462
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard

A
Between terminals 14 and 17 ENTER switch ON switch ON MENU DOWN switch ON MENU UP switch ON SOURCE switch ON Between terminals 15 and 17 switch ON switch ON VOL UP switch ON VOL DOWN switch ON
: Approx. 2003 2043 : Approx. 716 730 : Approx. 318 324 : Approx. 120 122 : Approx. 0
JSNIA0112GB
AV
AV-463
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246907
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246908

Continuity Existed
3.




INFOID:0000000004246909
AV-464
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard

A
JSNIA0112GB
AV
AV-465
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004246910
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004246911

Continuity Existed



INFOID:0000000004246912
AV-466
2009 G37 Coupe

Standard

A
JSNIA0112GB
AV
AV-467
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000004246913
Monitor Item VHCL SPD SIG Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON
Condition Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Parking brake is applied. Parking brake is released. Light switch ON Light switch OFF Selector lever in R position Selector lever in any position other than R
Value/Status On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off
PKB SIG
ILLUM SIG
IGN SIG
REV SIG
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0004ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal (Wire color) + 1 (SB) Description Signal name Input/ Output Output Ignition switch ON Condition
Ground
Amp. ON signal
10 V
2 (O)
3 (L)
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
AV-468
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

B
Ignition switch ON
4 (V)
5 (LG)
Output
Voice output
SKIB3609E
Keep pressing SOURCE switch. Keep pressing MENU UP switch. 6 (G) 15 (B) Steering switch signal A Input Ignition switch ON Keep pressing MENU DOWN switch. Keep pressing switch
0V
E
1V 2V 3V 4V 5V Battery voltage 0V 12 V
Keep pressing ENTER switch. Except for above. 7 (V) 9 (L) 10 Ground ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch OFF Lighting switch is OFF. Lighting switch is ON.
Ground
Illumination signal Shield
Input
11 (R)
12 (G)
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
L
SKIB3609E
M
13 (BR) 14 (Y) Sound signal rear RH Output Ignition switch ON Voice output
AV
SKIB3609E
15 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch ON
Keep pressing VOL DOWN switch.
0V
0V 1V 2V 3V 5V
16 (L)
15 (B)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Keep pressing VOL UP switch. Keep pressing Keep pressing Except for above. switch. switch.
AV-469
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal (Wire color) + 19 (Y) 21 (B) 22 (Y) 23 (B) 24 (Y) 25 (V) 26 (G) Description Signal name Input/ Output Input Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Condition

Ground
Battery voltage
Ground
GND
0V
Ground
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
GND
0V
Ground
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
ACC power supply
Input
Battery voltage
27
Microphone VCC
Output
5V
27
Ground
Shield (Microphone ground)
0V
28 (R)
27
Microphone signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
Give a voice
PKIB5037J
35 (G)
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
Parking brake ON
Battery voltage 0V
36 (SB)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
Parking brake OFF
JSNIA0007GB
37 (O)
Ground
Reverse signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
R position Other than R position
12 V 0V
AV-470
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

Reference value (Approx.) NOTE: Maximum voltage may be 12 V due to specifications (connected units).
38 (GR)
Ground
Vehicle speed signal (8pulse)
Input
Ignition switch ON
When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25MPH)
SKIA6649J
40 (W)
Ground
Camera-connection recognition signal
Input
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON
Connected to camera control unit connector Not connected to camera control unit connector
0V 5V
41 (B) 43 (B) 44 (SB) 48 (L) 49 (P) 50 (V) 51 (LG) 52 (L) 53 (P)
Ground
Control signal 1
Input
0V
Ground
Control signal 3
Input
0V
H
0V 8.5 V
Ground
Mode change signal AV communication signal (H) AV communication signal (L) AV communication signal (H) AV communication signal (L) CANH CANL
Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output
M
SKIB2238J
61 (W)
Ground
RGB signal (R: red)
Output
Ignition switch ON
AV
62 (B)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2236J
AV-471
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

63 (R)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2237J
64
Shield
65 (G)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3603E
66
Shield
At RGB image is displayed.
5V
67 (B)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKIB4948J
68 (R)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3601E
69 (W)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3598E
70 (BR)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKIB5039J
AV-472
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT

B
Ignition switch ON
71 (Y)
Ground
Input
PKIB5039J
72
Shield
E
79 (R) 95 (W) Ignition switch ON When iPod mode is selected.
Input
SKIB3609E
80 (B)
96 (G)
Input
Ignition switch ON
When iPod mode is selected.
I
SKIB3609E
81 85 (LG) 86
Ground
Shield Eject signal Shield
Input
0V 5V
87 (W)
88 (B)
AUX sound signal LH
Input
Ignition switch ON
When AUX mode is selected.
M
SKIB3609E
102 (BR)
Ground
SW GND
Ignition switch ON
0V
AV
O
103 (R) 88 (B) AUX sound signal RH Input Ignition switch ON When AUX mode is selected.
P
SKIB3609E
105 106 107
Ground
Input Input Output
Ignition switch ON
12 V
AV-473
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Input Input Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Condition

108 109 110 111
Ground Ground
Satellite antenna signal Shield GPS antenna signal Shield
Not connected to satellite antenna connector. Not connected to GPS antenna connector.
5V 5V
INFOID:0000000004246914
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM NOTE:
AV-474
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH virtually.
AV
JCNWM1795GB
AV-475
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1796GB
AV-476
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1797GB
AV-477
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1798GB
AV-478
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1799GB
AV-479
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1800GB
AV-480
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1801GB
AV-481
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1802GB
AV-482
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1803GB
AV-483
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1804GB
AV-484
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1805GB
AV-485
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1806GB
AV-486
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1807GB
AV-487
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1808GB
AV-488
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1809GB
AV-489
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1810GB
AV-490
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1811GB
AV-491
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1812GB
AV-492
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1813GB
Fail-Safe
P
INFOID:0000000004246915
When the ambiance temperature becomes extremely low or extremely high, or when HDD is malfunctioning, AV control unit displays the message and limits the AV control unit function.
FAIL-SAFE CONDITIONS
When the ambiance temperature is 20C (4F) or lower, or when it is 70C (158F) or higher when HDD is malfunctioning
AV-493
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
Display The messages displayed on fail-safe conditions are as shown below:
JPNIA0414GB
Fail-safe mode When HDD temperature is low When HDD temperature is high When HDD is malfunctioning
Display (display of the fail-safe condition) HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme low temperature. Normal operation will resume when temperature rises. HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme high temperature. Normal operation will resume when temperature drops. HDD system is not functioning. Please contact your dealer for assistance.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS
Function Operation Air conditioner Display Operation Display Operation Display Operation Operation When Fail-safe Function is activated Only multifunction switch (preset switch) can be operated. LED of multifunction switch (preset switch) illuminates. Aimed temperature, blow angle, and flow rate are displayed in simplified mode. Only ON/OFF and volume control operations by multifunction switch (preset switch) are possible. No display (Fail-safe mode is displayed) Image tone cannot be controlled. Cannot be superimposed. (warning display, tone control display) Cannot be operated. Cannot be operated. The display in simplified mode of fail-safe condition Cannot be operated.
Audio
Camera Hands-free phone Navigation
Self diagnosis CONSULT-III diagnosis
Ability Operation Mode There is an ability operation mode for Fail-safes due to low or high ambiance temperature. If HDD data can be read, fail-safe is shown, then normal displays are displayed only for functions which can be operated.
RELEASE CONDITIONS OF FAIL-SAFE

Fail-safe is released on following conditions and normal mode is restored.
When the temperature of HDD is low or high If the ambient temperature becomes out of fail-safe condition range, normal mode is restored. When HDD is malfunctioning If the malfunction disappears, normal mode is restored. NOTE: If fail-safe mode due to HDD malfunction is seen continuously, replace AV control unit. If fail-safe mode due to HDD malfunction is seen temporarily, check the Error History of Confirmation/ Adjustment mode. If this is normal, then continue the normal operation, observing the function. (It might be a temporary malfunction of HDD.)
AV-494
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
INFOID:0000000004246916
DTC Index
DTC U1000 U1010 U1310 U1200 U1201 U1216 U1217 U1218 U1219 U1220 U121A U121B U121C U121D U121E U121F U1204 U1205 U1206 U1207 U1243 U1244 U1250 U1258 U1300 U121F U1300 U1240 U1300 U1252 U1300 U1254 U1300 U1252 U1254 U1300 U1240 U1252 U1254 Display item CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] GYRO NO CONN [U1201] CAN CONT [U1216] BLUETOOTH MODULE CONN [U1217] HD-D-CONN [U1218] HDD-READ [U1219] XM SERIAL COMM [U1220] HDD-WRITE [U121A] HDD-COMM [U121B] HDD-ACCESS [U121C] DSP CONN [U121D] DSP COMM [U121E] INTERNAL COMM [U121F] GPS COMM [U1204] GPS ROM [U1205] GPS RAM [U1206] GPS RTC [U1207] FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] INTERNAL COMM [U121F] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] IPOD CONN [U1254] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] IPOD CONN [U1254] AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] SWITCH CONN [U1240] REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] IPOD CONN [U1254] Refer to
AV-412, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-413, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV-414, "DTC Logic" AV-415, "DTC Logic" AV-416, "DTC Logic" AV-417, "DTC Logic" AV-418, "DTC Logic" AV-419, "DTC Logic" AV-420, "DTC Logic" AV-421, "DTC Logic" AV-422, "DTC Logic" AV-423, "DTC Logic" AV-424, "DTC Logic" AV-425, "DTC Logic" AV-426, "DTC Logic" AV-427, "DTC Logic" AV-428, "DTC Logic" AV-429, "DTC Logic" AV-430, "DTC Logic" AV-431, "DTC Logic" AV-432, "DTC Logic" AV-434, "DTC Logic" AV-435, "DTC Logic" AV-436, "DTC Logic" AV-437, "Description" AV-437, "Description"
M
AV-437, "Description" AV-437, "Description"
AV
O
AV-495
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
INFOID:0000000004246917
JPNIA0006ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal (Wire color) + 1 (B) 2 (Y) 3 (LG) 4 5 (R) Description Signal name Input/ Output Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON Condition
Ground
GND
0V
Ground
Input
Battery voltage
Ground Ground
ACC power supply Shield AUX image GND
Input
Battery voltage 0V
6 (B)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2236J
Shield
8 (R)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3601E
AV-496
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT

At RGB image is displayed.
9 (B)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
C
D
PKIB4948J
E
11 (BR) Communication signal (CONTDISP) Ignition switch ON When adjusting display brightness.
Ground
Input
PKIB5039J
12 (W)
Ground
Camera image signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
I
SKIB2251J
13 (B) 14
Ground
GND Shield
Ignition switch ON
0V
K
15 (G) 5 (R) Ignition switch ON
AUX image signal
Input
SKIB2251J
17 (W)
Ground
RGB signal (R: red)
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2238J
AV
18 (R)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB2237J
AV-497
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT

19 (G)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3603E
20 (W)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3598E
21
Shield
22 (Y)
Ground
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKIB5039J
23
Shield
INFOID:0000000004555418
AV-498
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1795GB
AV-499
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1796GB
AV-500
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1797GB
AV-501
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1798GB
AV-502
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1799GB
AV-503
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1800GB
AV-504
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1801GB
AV-505
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1802GB
AV-506
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1803GB
AV-507
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1804GB
AV-508
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1805GB
AV-509
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1806GB
AV-510
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1807GB
AV-511
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1808GB
AV-512
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1809GB
AV-513
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1810GB
AV-514
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1811GB
AV-515
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1812GB
AV-516
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
AV
O
JCNWM1813GB
AV-517
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
INFOID:0000000004246919
JPNIA0008ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
1 (L)
2 (W)
Sound signal door squawker LH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
4 (V)
3 (LG)
Sound signal door squawker RH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
5 (G)
6 (R)
Sound signal door woofer RH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
7 (B) 10 (Y) 11 (GR) 12 (B)
Ground
GND
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
0V
Ground
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
GND
0V
AV-518
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.

B
Ignition switch ON
14 (B)
9 (W)
Sound signal door woofer LH
Output
Voice output
SKIB3609E
16 (SB)
17 (V)
Output
Ignition switch ON
E
Voice output
F
SKIB3609E
G
18 (L) 19 (P) Sound signal rear speaker LH Output Ignition switch ON Voice output
SKIB3609E
20 (W) 21 22 (GR)
Ground Ground
Amp. ON signal Shield Woofer Amp. ON signal
Input Output
Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ACC
10 V 10 V
24 (V)
23 (SB)
Input
Ignition switch ON
L
Voice output
M
SKIB3609E
AV
26 (BR) 25 (Y) Ignition switch ON
Input
Voice output
SKIB3609E
AV-519
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.

29 (L)
30 (O)
Sound signal center speaker
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
31 (LG)
32 (Y)
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
33 (R)
34 (G)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
35 (P)
36 (L)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
37 (SB)
Ground
Mode change signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
0V 8.5 V
INFOID:0000000004555419
AV-520
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1795GB
AV-521
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1796GB
AV-522
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1797GB
AV-523
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1798GB
AV-524
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1799GB
AV-525
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1800GB
AV-526
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1801GB
AV-527
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1802GB
AV-528
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1803GB
AV-529
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1804GB
AV-530
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1805GB
AV-531
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1806GB
AV-532
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1807GB
AV-533
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1808GB
AV-534
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1809GB
AV-535
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1810GB
AV-536
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1811GB
AV-537
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1812GB
AV-538
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1813GB
AV-539
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
WOOFER AMP.
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
INFOID:0000000004246921
JPNIA0513ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
1 (G)
2 (R)
Sound signal rear woofer RH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
3 (GR)
Ground
Woofer amp. ON signal
Input
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
10 V
5 (W)
4 (B)
Sound signal rear woofer LH
Output
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
7 (Y)
Ground
Input
Ignition switch OFF
Battery voltage
8 (SB)
9 (V)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Voice output
SKIB3609E
10 (B)
Ground
GND
Ignition switch ON
0V
AV-540
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
INFOID:0000000004555420
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM -
AV
JCNWM1795GB
AV-541
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1796GB
AV-542
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1797GB
AV-543
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1798GB
AV-544
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1799GB
AV-545
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1800GB
AV-546
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1801GB
AV-547
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1802GB
AV-548
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1803GB
AV-549
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1804GB
AV-550
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1805GB
AV-551
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1806GB
AV-552
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1807GB
AV-553
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1808GB
AV-554
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1809GB
AV-555
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1810GB
AV-556
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1811GB
AV-557
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
JCNWM1812GB
AV-558
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
AV
O
JCNWM1813GB
AV-559
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
INFOID:0000000004246923
JSNIA0618ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
1 (R)
13 (W)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
2 (B)
14 (G)
Output
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3609E
3 (V) 4 (R) 5 (Y) 8 (W)
Ground
ACC power supply AV communication signal (L) Battery power supply
Input Input/ Output Input
Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Ground
Battery voltage
Ground
iPod battery charge
Output
Connected to iPod
12 V
AV-560
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER

9 (P)
Ground
Communication signal (iPod adapteriPod)
Output
Ignition switch ON
The wave pattern is displayed just after iPod connection.

JPNIA0462GB
NOTE: After the wave pattern display, the value continues Approx 3.3 V
10 (L)
Ground
Communication signal (iPod iPod adapter)
Input
Ignition switch ON
Connected to iPod
G
JPNIA0462GB
11 (O)
Ground
ACCESSORY-IDENTIFY
Ignition switch ON
Connected to iPod
0V
I
12 (W) 23 (R) iPod sound signal RH Input Ignition switch ON When iPod mode is selected
J
SKIB3609E
16 (G) 17 (BR) 19 21 (LG) 22 (G)
AV communication signal (H) GND Shield iPod connection recognition signal
Input/ Output Input
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON
Ground Ground
Not connected to Connected to iPod
0V 4V 0V 0V
iPod
Ground
ACCESSORY-DETECT
Connected to iPod
AV
O
24 (B) 23 (R) iPod sound signal LH Input Ignition switch ON When iPod mode is selected
P
SKIB3609E

INFOID:0000000004555421
AV-561
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1795GB
AV-562
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1796GB
AV-563
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1797GB
AV-564
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1798GB
AV-565
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1799GB
AV-566
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1800GB
AV-567
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1801GB
AV-568
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1802GB
AV-569
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1803GB
AV-570
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1804GB
AV-571
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1805GB
AV-572
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1806GB
AV-573
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1807GB
AV-574
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1808GB
AV-575
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1809GB
AV-576
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1810GB
AV-577
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1811GB
AV-578
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
AV
O
JCNWM1812GB
AV-579
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1813GB
AV-580
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246925
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0007ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal (Wire color) + 5 Shield Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Reference value (Approx.)
H
Ignition switch ON
6 (B)
Ground
Camera image signal
Input
At rear view camera image is displayed
SKIB2251J
7 (W) 8 (R) 11
Ground
GND
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON R position
0V
K
6V 0V
Ground
Camera ON signal Shield
Output
M
12 (W) Ground Camera image signal Output Ignition switch ON At rear view camera image is displayed
AV
SKIB2251J
13 (B)
Ground
Control signal
O
Connected to camera control unit connector Not connected to camera control unit connector 0V
14 (GR) 17 (P)
Ground
Camera-connection recognition signal AV communication signal (L)
0V 5V
Output
Input/ Output
AV-581
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

Terminal (Wire color) + 18 (L) 19 (R) 20 (G) 22 (GR) Description Signal name AV communication signal (H) AV communication signal (L) AV communication signal (H) Reverse signal Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input Ignition switch ON R position Other than R position Condition

12 V 0V
Ground

SKIB3827E
23 (Y)
Ground
Sensor signal 1
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3828E

SKIB3827E
24 (SB)
Ground
Sensor signal 2
Input
Ignition switch ON
SKIB3828E
AV-582
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT


25 (O)
Ground
Sensor signal 3
Input
Ignition switch ON
Turn the steering around the neutral position

SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3 B: Sensor signal 1 NOTE: Maximum voltage may be 12 V due to specifications (connected units). 26 (V) Ground Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse) Input Ignition switch ON When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
G
SKIA6649J
30 (LG) 31 (B) 32 (BR)
Ground
ACC power supply
Input
Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF
H
Battery voltage
I
0V
Ground
GND
J
Battery voltage
Ground
Input
INFOID:0000000004555422
AV
AV-583
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1795GB
AV-584
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1796GB
AV-585
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1797GB
AV-586
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1798GB
AV-587
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1799GB
AV-588
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1800GB
AV-589
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1801GB
AV-590
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1802GB
AV-591
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1803GB
AV-592
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1804GB
AV-593
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1805GB
AV-594
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1806GB
AV-595
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1807GB
AV-596
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1808GB
AV-597
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1809GB
AV-598
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1810GB
AV-599
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1811GB
AV-600
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
AV
O
JCNWM1812GB
AV-601
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

JCNWM1813GB
AV-602
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
A
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Table
RELATED TO NAVIGATION
Symptoms Check items All switches cannot be operated. MULTI AV is displayed on system selection screen when the CONSULT-III is started. Multifunction switch and preset switch operation does not work. All switches cannot be operated. MULTI AV is not displayed on system selection screen when the CONSULT-III is started. Only specified switch cannot be operated. There is malfunction in the CONSULTIII self-diagnosis result. There is no malfunction in the self-diagnosis results. On the setting display select system sound (guide sound volume, etc.), and confirm that guide sound is ON. Possible malfunction location / Action to take Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit. AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multifunction switch. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-438, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction. Perform multifunction switch and preset switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-393, "Diagnosis Description". Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Ignition signal circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-438, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". AV control unit malfunction. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004246927
Fuel economy display, vehicle setting operation is abnormal.
Guide sound is not heard.
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

Check that the cellular phone is corresponding type (Bluetooth correspond) when the hands-free related malfunction vehicle is in service before performing a diagnosis. There is a case that malfunction occurs due to the version change of the phone type, etc. even though it is a corresponding type. Therefore, confirm it by changing the cellular phone to another corresponding type phone, and check that it operates normally. It is necessary to distinguish whether the cause is the vehicle or cellular phone.
Simple Check for Bluetooth Communication K
If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth communication, following procedure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction. 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on a cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth communication. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows . Set CONSULT-III near a cellular phone.
AV
When operated Bluetooth registration by cellular phone, check if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name. (If other Bluetooth device is located near cellular phone, a name of the device would be displayed also.) NOTE: *:Displayed device name is NISSAN. If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunctioning. Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis. If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is normal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
JPNIA0441GB
AV-603
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptoms Does not recognize cellular phone connection. (no connection is displayed on the display at the guide.) Check items Probable malfunction location AV control unit malfunction. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View".
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
Hands-free phone cannot be established.
Hands-free phone operation can be made, but the communication cannot be established. Hands-free phone operation can be performed, however, voice between each other cannot be heard during the conversation. Check the microphone speaker in Inspection & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard. Check the microphone speaker in Inspection & Adjustment Mode if sound is not heard. Sound operation function is normal.
AV control unit malfunction. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View".
The other party's voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone.
AV control unit malfunction. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View". AV control unit malfunction. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View". AV control unit malfunction. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View". Microphone signal circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-453, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Originating sound is not heard by the other party with handsfree phone communication.
Sound operation function does not work.
RELATED TO CAMERA
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-448, "Diagnosis Procedure". Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-449, "Diagnosis Procedure". Camera image signal circuit between camera control unit and rear view camera. Refer to AV-455, "Diagnosis Procedure". Rear view camera ON signal circuit. Refer to AV-456, "Diagnosis Procedure". Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Camera image signal circuit malfunction between camera control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-457, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-447, "Diagnosis Procedure". Reverse signal circuit malfunction (camera control unit). Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-449, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Camera image is not displayed (displayed in black and nothing can be displayed)
AUX image is not displayed.
Camera image is not shown. (Vehicle width and possible route line is displayed.)
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis result. AUX image is normal. Camera image is not displayed. (Only warning message under area is displayed.)
AUX image is not displayed. Select Camera Cont. of confirmation/ Adjustment mode, Reverse Sensor is not turned ON at Connection Confirmation.
CAMERA image is rolling.
AUX image is also rolling.
AV-604
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptoms Check items Malfunction of self-diagnosis result is indicated. Malfunction of self-diagnosis result is not indicated. Steer. Angle Sensor turns ON at Confirmation/Adjustment of on board diagnosis item Camera Cont. turns ON. Steer. Angle Sensor turns ON at Confirmation/Adjustment of on board diagnosis item Camera Cont. does not turns ON.

Probable malfunction location Camera-connection recognition signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and camera control unit. Refer to AV-435, "Diagnosis Procedure". Reverse signal circuit malfunction (AV control unit). Sensor signal 3 circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-460, "Diagnosis Procedure". Sensor signal 1circuit. Refer to AV-458, "Diagnosis Procedure". Sensor signal 2 circuit. Refer to AV-458, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Camera image does not switch.
Possible route line is indicated abnormally when camera image is displayed.

Symptoms Check items All RGB images are not shown. MULTI AV is displayed on system selection screen when the CONSULT-III is started. All RGB images are not shown. MULTI AV is not displayed on system selection screen when the CONSULT-III is started. Light blue (Cyan) tint. Possible malfunction location / Action to take Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-438, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-443, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-444, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-445, "Diagnosis Procedure". RGB synchronizing signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-446, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Color of RGB image is not proper.
Purple (Magenta) tint.
Screen looks yellowish.
RGB screen is rolling.
RELATED TO VOICE CONTROL

Symptoms Check items Voice sounds at Voice Microphone Test of Confirmation/Adjustment mode. Voice does not sound at Voice Microphone Test of Confirmation/Adjustment mode. Steering switch's SOURCE, MENU UP, MENU DOWN, ENTER switches work, but The voice cannot be controlled (Voice control screen is not displayed). switch does not work. Probable malfunction location AV control unit malfunction. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View". Microphone circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-453, "Diagnosis Procedure". Steering switch malfunction. Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-630, "Exploded View". Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-462, "Diagnosis Procedure". Steering switch signal GND circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-466, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AV
The voice cannot be controlled even if the voice control screen is displayed.
Steering switch's SOURCE, MENU UP, MENU DOWN, switches do not work. , ENTER
All steering switches do not work.
AV-605
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms The CD cannot be removed. Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take CD eject signal circuit malfunction between AV control unit and preset switch. Refer to AV-452, "Diagnosis Procedure". Amp. ON signal circuit. BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-440, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure". Woofer amp. power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-441, "WOOFER AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure". Sound signal circuit between BOSE amp. and woofer amp. Sound signal circuit between woofer amp. and rear woofer. Woofer amp. ON signal circuit between BOSE amp. and woofer amp. Sound signal center speaker circuit. Sound signal circuit of suspect system. Mode change signal circuit. Refer to AV-451, "Diagnosis Procedure". Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". Perform the following inspection procedure. 1. Check satellite radio antenna mounting nut for looseness. NOTE: Tightening torque: 6.5 Nm (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb) 2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder. 3. Replace the satellite radio antenna. Refer to AV-627, "Exploded View". 4. Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-616, "Exploded View". Antenna amp. ON signal circuit. Antenna feeder.
No sound from all speakers.
Sound is not heard from rear woofer.
Sound is not heard from center speaker. Sound is heard only from specific places (RH front, RH rear, LH front and LH rear). It does not change to Driver's Audio Stage mode. There is malfunction in the CONSULTIII self-diagnosis result.
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis result.
AM/FM radio is not received.
RELATED TO iPod
Connect another iPod and check if the symptom is reproduced or not. If the symptom is reproduced, diagnose the vehicle. If no malfunction is detected, replace the iPod harness. NOTE: It is unable to check that between iPod and iPod harness.
Symptoms The sound of iPod is not heard. It does not change to iPod mode. Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take iPod sound signal circuit between AV control unit and iPod adapter. iPod sound signal circuit between iPod and iPod adapter. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-408, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)".
There is malfunction in the CONSULTIII self-diagnosis.
AV-606
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptoms iPod is not connected is displayed when it comes to iPod mode. iPod cannot charge the battery. The title of music file in the iPod is not indicated. Accessing the iPod is unavailable from the vehicle. Connected to Check items iPod.

A
iPod connection recognition signal circuit between iPod and iPod adapter. iPod battery charge circuit between iPod and iPod adapter.
C
Communication circuit between iPod and iPod adapter.

Symptoms None of the steering switch operations work. Only specified switch cannot be operated. Steering switch's SOURCE, MENU UP, MENU DOWN, , ENTER switches do not work. Probable malfunction location Steering switch signal GND circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-466, "Diagnosis Procedure". Steering switch malfunction. Refer to AV-630, "Exploded View". Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-462, "Diagnosis Procedure". Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-464, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch's , VOL UP, VOL DOWN, switches do not work.

Symptoms No voice sound is heard when AUX mode is selected. Image is not displayed when AUX mode is selected.
Check items Voice sound is heard when other modes are selected. Camera image is displayed.
Probable malfunction location AUX sound signal circuit (auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit). AUX image signal circuit malfunction. Refer to AV-450, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AV
AV-607
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Description
NOTE: For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
INFOID:0000000004246928
BASIC OPERATIONS
Symptom Possible cause The brightness is at the lowest setting. No image is displayed. The systems in the video mode. The display is turned off. No voice guidance is available. Or The volume is too high or too low. No map is displayed on the screen. The screen is too dim. The movement is slow. Some pixels in the display are darker or brighter than others. Some menu items cannot be selected. The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets (roads displayed in gray). A screen other than map screen is displayed. The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low. This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid crystal displays. Some menu items become unavailable while the vehicle is driven. Possible solution Adjust the brightness of the display. Press <DISC-AUX> to change the mode. Press < > to turn on the display.
Adjust the volume of voice guidance. This is not a malfunction. Press <MAP>. Wait until the interior of the vehicle has warmed up. This is not a malfunction. Park the vehicle in a safe location, and then operate the navigation system.
NOTE: Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is disconnected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the information in the Address Book.
RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION

Related to Basic Operation
Symptom Possible cause The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. The volume of your voice is too low. The volume if your voice is too loud. Your pronunciation is unclear. The system does not recognize your command. or The system recognizes your command incorrectly You are speaking before the voice recognition is ready Possible solution Close the windows or have other occupants quiet. Speak louder. Speak softer. Speak clearly. Press and release switch on the steering switch, and speak a command after the tone sounds. Make sure to speak a command within 8 seconds after you press and release the steering switch. switch on
8 seconds or more have passed after you pressed and released switch on the steering switch.
Only a limited range of voice commands is usable for each screen.
Use a correct voice command appropriate for the current screen. If the air conditioner is set to Auto, the fan speed is automatically lowered and voice commands can be recognized more easily. Lower the fan speed as necessary or set the air conditioner to Auto.
The fan of the air conditioner is too loud.
Related to Item Choice The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.
AV-608
2009 G37 Coupe

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/ error message Solution 1. Ensure that the command format is valid. 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. Displays COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED or the system fails to interpret the command correctly. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on. NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. 4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then command should be tried with these in place. The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Addressbook Directory or Phone Directory command. 2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
Related to Telephone The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom 1. Ensure that the command is valid. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. System fails to interpret the command correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See Speaker adaptation (SA) mode earlier in this section. Refer to OWNERS MANUAL. The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the List Names command. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name. Solution
RELATED TO AUDIO
The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction. AV The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause. O NOTE: CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incorrectly mastered by the customer on a computer. Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disk Logo. If not, the Disk is not mastered to the red book Compact P Disk Standard and may not play.
AV-609
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptom

Cause and Counter measure Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly. Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than .MP3, .WMA, .mp3, or .wma cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disk or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disk close, is done for the disk. Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate files Move immediately to the next song when playing The songs do not play back in the desired order.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty. If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disk, some time may be required before the music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data. When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of .MP3, .WMA, .mp3, or .wma, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might not play in the desired order.
RELATED TO VEHICLE ICON

Symptom Possible cause This is because the quantity of the displayed information is reduced so that the screen does not become too crowded. There is also a chance that names of the roads may be displayed multiple times, and the names appearing on the screen may be different because of a processing procedure. The vehicle was transported after the ignition switch was pressed off, for example, by a ferry or car transporter. The position and direction of the vehicle icon may be incorrect depending on the driving environments and the levels of positioning accuracy of the navigation system. Because the new road is not stored in the map data, the system automatically places the vehicle icon on the nearest road available. Possible solution
Names of roads differ between Plan View and Birdview.
This is not a malfunction.
Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where GPS signals can be received. This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle for a while to automatically correct the position and direction of the vehicle icon. Updated road information will be included in the next version of the map data.
The vehicle icon is not displayed in the correct position.
When the vehicle is traveling on a new road, the vehicle icon is located on another road nearby.
AV-610
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptom The screen does not switch to the night screen even after turning on the headlights. The map does not scroll even when the vehicle is moving. The vehicle icon is not displayed. Possible cause The daytime screen was set the last time the headlights were turned on. The current location map screen is not displayed. The current location map screen is not displayed. When using tire chains or replacing the tires, speed calculations based on the speed sensor may be incorrect. The map data has a mistake or is incomplete (the vehicle icon position is always misaligned in the same area).

Possible solution
A
Set the screen to the night screen mode using < > when you turn on the headlights. Press <MAP>. Press <MAP>. Drive the vehicle for a while (at approximately 19 MPH for about 30 minutes) to automatically correct the vehicle icon position. If this does not correct the vehicle icon position, contact an INFINITI dealer. Updated road information will be included in the next version of the map data.
The location of the vehicle icon is misaligned from the actual position.
RELATED TO ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Symptom Waypoints are not included in the auto reroute calculation. Possible cause Waypoints that you have already passed are not included in the auto reroute calculation. Route calculation has not yet been performed. Route information is not displayed. You are not driving on the suggested route. Route guidance is set to off. Route information is not provided for certain types of roads (roads displayed in gray). The auto reroute calculation (or detour calculation) suggests the same route as the one previously suggested. Route calculations took priority conditions into consideration, but the same route was calculated. Possible solution If you want to go to that waypoint again, you need to edit the route. Set the destination and perform route calculation. Drive on the suggested route. Turn on route guidance. This is not a malfunction.
A waypoint cannot be added.
Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones that you have already passed.
A maximum of 5 waypoints can be set on the route. If you want to go to 6 or more waypoints, perform route calculations multiple times as necessary. Reset the destination to a main or ordinary road, and recalculate the route. Set a more distant destination. Divide your trip by selecting one or two intermediate destinations, and perform route calculations multiple times. Set [Use Time Restricted Roads] to off.
Roads near the destination cannot be calculated. The starting point and destination are too close. The suggested route is not displayed.
The starting point and destination are too far away.
AV
There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by time) near the current vehicle location or destination. The part of the route that you have already passed is deleted. A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If you passed the first waypoint, the section between the starting point and the waypoint is deleted. (It may not be deleted depending on the area.) If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads close to the starting point or destination, the system may suggest an indirect route. The system may suggest an indirect route because route calculation does not take into consideration some areas such as narrow streets (gray roads.)
Adjust the location of the starting of the starting point or destination. Reset the destination to a main or ordinary road, and recalculate the route.
An indirect route is suggested.
AV-611
2009 G37 Coupe

Symptom The landmark information does not correspond to the actual information. The suggested route does not exactly connect to the starting point, waypoints, or destination. Possible cause This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data.

Possible solution Updated information will be included in the next version of the data. Set the starting point, waypoints and destination on a main road, and perform route calculation.
There is no data for route calculation closes to these locations.
RELATED TO VOICE GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections marked with? In some case, voice guidance is not available even when the vehicle should make a turn. Voice guidance is not available The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route. Voice guide is set to off. Route guidance is set to off. The guidance contact does not correspond to the actual condition. The contact of voice guidance may vary, depending on the types of intersections at which turn are made. Possible solution This is not a malfunction. Go back to the suggested route or request route calculation again Turn on voice guidance. Turn on voice guidance. Follow all traffic rules and regulations.
RELATED TO TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Symptom Possible cause The traffic information is not set to on. Possible solution Set the traffic information to on.
The traffic information is not displayed
You are in an area where traffic information is not avail- Scroll to an area where traffic information is able available You have not subscribed to XM NavTraffic or, your subCheck your subscription status of XM NavTraffic. scription to XM NavTraffic has expired. The map scale is set at a level where the display of icons is impossible. Check that the map scale is set at a level in which the display of icons is possible. The automatic detour search is not intended for avoiding traffic jams. It searches for the fastest route taking into consideration such things as traffic jams. Observe the actual road condition and follow the instructions on road for detour when necessary. If the road closure is for certain, use detour function and set the detour distance to avoid the closed road section. Observe the actual road conditions and regulations. Always observe safe driving practices and follow all traffic regulations.
With the automatic detour route search ON, no detour route is set to avoid congested areas. The route does not avoid road section with traffic information stating it is closed due to road construction. Traffic information displayed differs from information from other media (e.g. radio).
There is no faster route compared to the current route, based on the road network and traffic information.
The navigation system is designed not to avoid this event because the actual period of closure may differ from the declared roadwork period.
Other media may use different information sources.
AV-612
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
A
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
INFOID:0000000004246929


INFOID:0000000004246930

INFOID:0000000004246931
AV
PKIA0306E
AV-613
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < PRECAUTION > Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
AV-614
2009 G37 Coupe
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
A
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
INFOID:0000000004246932
Power tool
E
PBIC0191E
AV
AV-615
2009 G37 Coupe
AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246933
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0494ZZ
1. 4.
2.
Bracket LH
3.
AV control unit

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246934
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same form, be careful not to insert them wrongly.
AV-616
2009 G37 Coupe
DISPLAY UNIT
A
INFOID:0000000004246935
DISPLAY UNIT
Exploded View
B
INFOID:0000000004246936

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
E
AV
AV-617
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR SQUAWKER
DOOR SQUAWKER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246937
JPNIA0480ZZ
1. 2.
Door finisher Door squawker

INFOID:0000000004246938

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Exploded View". Remove door squawker from door finisher.
INSTALLATION
AV-618
2009 G37 Coupe
DOOR WOOFER
A
INFOID:0000000004246939
DOOR WOOFER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0481ZZ
E
1. 2. Door woofer Woofer bracket

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Exploded View". Remove door woofer from woofer bracket.
F
INFOID:0000000004246940
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-619
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246941
JPNIA0482ZZ
1.
Rear speaker
INFOID:0000000004246942

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove rear side finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Exploded View". Remove rear speaker from rear side finisher.
INSTALLATION
AV-620
2009 G37 Coupe
TWEETER
A
INFOID:0000000004555410
TWEETER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0483ZZ
E
1. 2. Tweeter Corner cover

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove corner cover. Refer to MIR-17, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View". Remove tweeter from corner cover.
F
INFOID:0000000004555411
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-621
2009 G37 Coupe
CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246945
JSNIA0120ZZ
1.
Center speaker
INFOID:0000000004246946

REMOVAL
1. Remove upper grille, and then remove center speaker. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
AV-622
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR WOOFER
A
INFOID:0000000004246947
REAR WOOFER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0484ZZ
E
1. Rear woofer
INFOID:0000000004246948

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-17, "Exploded View". Remove rear woofer from rear parcel shelf.
INSTALLATION
H
AV
AV-623
2009 G37 Coupe
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246949
JPNIA0485ZZ
1. :
BOSE amp. Vehicle front

INFOID:0000000004246950

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove trunk floor spacer LH. Refer to INT-27, "Exploded View". Remove BOSE amp. from trunk room LH.
INSTALLATION
AV-624
2009 G37 Coupe
WOOFER AMP.
A
INFOID:0000000004246951
WOOFER AMP.
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0469ZZ
E
1. : Woofer amp. Vehicle front

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove trunk floor spacer LH. Refer to INT-27, "Exploded View". Remove Woofer amp. from BOSE amp.
F
INFOID:0000000004246952
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-625
2009 G37 Coupe
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246953
JPNIA0486ZZ
1. 2.

INFOID:0000000004246954

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV-626
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246955

Exploded View
D
JPNIA0487ZZ
E
1. : Satellite radio antenna Vehicle front
F
INFOID:0000000004246956

REMOVAL
1.
2.
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-627
2009 G37 Coupe
Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004555412
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0126ZZ
1. 2.
Center ventilator grille Multifunction switch

INFOID:0000000004555413

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV-628
2009 G37 Coupe
PRESET SWITCH
A
INFOID:0000000004555414
PRESET SWITCH
Exploded View
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
H
JPNIA0477ZZ
1.
Clock
2.
Cluster lid C
3.
Preset switch
INFOID:0000000004555415

REMOVAL
1. Clock
JPNIA0478ZZ
AV
INSTALLATION
O
AV-629
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004246961

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246962
INSTALLATION
AV-630
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD ADAPTER
A
INFOID:0000000004555416
IPOD ADAPTER
Exploded View
D
JPNIA0493ZZ
E
1. iPod adapter
INFOID:0000000004555417

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3. Remove display unit assy. Refer to AV-617, "Removal and Installation". Remove display unit from display bracket. Remove iPod adapter from display bracket.
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-631
2009 G37 Coupe
IPOD CONNECTOR
IPOD CONNECTOR
Exploded View
REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004246965
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0491ZZ
1.
iPod connector
INFOID:0000000004246966

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove center console. (M/T models) Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View". Remove center console. (A/T models) Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View". Push the pawl from the back of center console to remove iPod connector.
INSTALLATION
AV-632
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246967

Exploded View
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0131ZZ
F
1. Auxiliary input jacks
INFOID:0000000004246968

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
J
AV
AV-633
2009 G37 Coupe
MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
Exploded View
REMOVAL
Refer to INL-98, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004246969
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0132ZZ
1.
Microphone
INFOID:0000000004246970

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove map lamp. Refer to INL-98, "Exploded View". Remove microphone from map lamp.
INSTALLATION
AV-634
2009 G37 Coupe
GPS ANTENNA
A
INFOID:0000000004246971
GPS ANTENNA
Exploded View Harness Layout
INFOID:0000000004246972
AV
JPNIA0488GB
AV-635
2009 G37 Coupe
GPS ANTENNA
INFOID:0000000004246973

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove instrument panel. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". Remove GPS antenna (1) from instrument panel.
JSNIA0175ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV-636
2009 G37 Coupe
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004246974
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

Exploded View
D
JPNIA0489ZZ
E
1. Camera control unit
INFOID:0000000004246975

REMOVAL
1.
Remove rear wheel house finisher (RH), and then remove camera control unit. Refer to INT-27, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
H
INFOID:0000000004246976
Adjustment
ADJUSTMENT
There may be a misalignment of possible route line center position of rear view monitor after removing camera control unit. Therefore, correct neutral position with the following procedure. 1. Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost ends. 2. Drive vehicle at 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) min. speed at least 100 m (328.1 ft).
AV
AV-637
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR VIEW CAMERA

REAR VIEW CAMERA

Exploded View
REMOVAL (WITHOUT REAR SPOILER)
Refer to EXT-37, "TRUNK LID OUTER FINISHER : Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004246977
REMOVAL (WITH REAR SPOILER)

Refer to EXT-41, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY (WITHOUT REAR SPOILER)
JSNIA0134ZZ
1.
Rear view camera
DISASSEMBLY (WITH REAR SPOILER)
JPNIA0490ZZ
1.
Rear view camera

INFOID:0000000004246978

REMOVAL
Without rear spoiler
1. 2. 1. 2.
Remove trunk lid finisher outer. Refer to EXT-37, "TRUNK LID OUTER FINISHER : Exploded View". Remove rear view camera from trunk lid finisher outer. Remove rear spoiler. Refer to EXT-41, "Exploded View". Remove rear view camera from rear spoiler.
With rear spoiler
INSTALLATION
Adjustment
INFOID:0000000004246979
Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera.
AV-638
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR VIEW CAMERA

[BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Draw lines on rearward area of the vehicle passing through the following points: 200 mm (7.87 in) from both sides of the vehicle, and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the bumper. 2. Set into Adjust offset of rear view camera mode of Confirmation / Adjustment mode.
G
SKIB3691E
3.
Rotate the center dial, and then select the guiding line pattern so that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the vehicle. Selected pattern :7
4.
Make fine adjustment to the correction line of the rear of the vehicle with up/down/left/right switches so that its position is aligned with the guiding line. Press OK switch and record the adjusted guiding line position to the camera control unit. Up/Down adjustment range Left/Right adjustment range : 20 20 : 20 20
SKIB3689E
CAUTION: Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data. If Confirmation/Adjustment mode does not function in the above procedure, perform one of the following service to adjust the index again. Remove battery for five min. Then reconnect battery. Remove camera control unit connector for five min. Then reconnect camera control unit connector.
AV
AV-639
2009 G37 Coupe
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR


Exploded View
REMOVAL
Refer to SR-15, "Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004246980
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0135ZZ
1. 2.
Spiral cable Steering angle sensor

INFOID:0000000004246981

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove spiral cable. Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable.
INSTALLATION
Adjustment
INFOID:0000000004246982
Perform 4WAS front actuator adjustment. Refer to STC-28, "4WAS FRONT ACTUATOR NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description".
AV-640
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004246983

Harness Layout
AV
P
JPNIA0488GB
AV-641
2009 G37 Coupe


Harness Layout
INFOID:0000000004246984
JPNIA0488GB
AV-642
2009 G37 Coupe
ANTENNA FEEDER (GPS)

A
INFOID:0000000004246985
ANTENNA FEEDER (GPS)

Harness Layout
AV
P
JPNIA0488GB
AV-643
2009 G37 Coupe
ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL
SECTION
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BCS
CONTENTS
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 3 .
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT ......................................................... 3 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................. 3 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ...... 3 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ..................................16 . REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) ....................17 . BUZZER ....................................................................17 . BUZZER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BUZZER) .........................................................................17 . INT LAMP ..................................................................17 . INT LAMP : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INT LAMP) .....................................................................18 . HEADLAMP ..............................................................19 . HEADLAMP : CONSULT-III Function (BCM HEAD LAMP) ..........................................................19 . WIPER .......................................................................21 . WIPER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - WIPER)....21
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 4 .

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ............................... 4 .
System Description .................................................. 4 . Component Parts Location ....................................... 5 .
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM ..... 6

System Diagram ....................................................... 6 . System Description .................................................. 6 . Component Parts Location ....................................... 9 .
K FLASHER ..................................................................22 . FLASHER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM FLASHER) ..............................................................22 . INTELLIGENT KEY ...................................................23 . INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) ...................................23 . COMB SW .................................................................26 . COMB SW : CONSULT-III Function (BCM COMB SW) .............................................................26 . BCM ..........................................................................27 . BCM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BCM) ..........27 . IMMU .........................................................................27 . IMMU : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - IMMU) .......27 . BATTERY SAVER ....................................................28 . BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER) ..............................................28 . TRUNK ......................................................................29 . TRUNK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - TRUNK) 29 .... P
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ..............................10 .

System Diagram ..................................................... 10 . System Description ................................................ 10 .
BCS
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ...................................................................11 .

System Diagram ..................................................... 11 . System Description ................................................ 11 . Component Parts Location ..................................... 13 .
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ...........................14 .

COMMON ITEM ........................................................ 14 . COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .................................................... 14 . DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 15 . DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM DOOR LOCK) ........................................................ 15 .
BCS-1
2009 G37 Coupe
THEFT ALM ............................................................. 30 . THEFT ALM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM THEFT) .................................................................. 30 . SIGNAL BUFFER ..................................................... 31 . SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - SIGNAL BUFFER) ............................................... 31 . AIR PRESSURE MONITOR ..................................... 31 . AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : Diagnosis Description ......................................................................... 31 . AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) .............. 33 .
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 40 .
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT ... 42

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 44

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................. 44 .
Reference Value .................................................... 44 . Wiring Diagram - BCM - ......................................... 67 . Fail-safe ................................................................. 72 . DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................. 74 . DTC Index ............................................................. 76 .

U1000 CAN COMM ........................................... 35 .
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 79

COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ................................................................ 79 .
Symptom Table ...................................................... 79 .
PRECAUTION ............................................ 80
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 80 .
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................ 80 . Precaution for Battery Service ............................... 80 .
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 36 .

DTC Logic .............................................................. 36 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 36 .
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED SIG ........................... 37 .

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 81

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................. 81 .
Exploded View ....................................................... 81 . Removal and Installation ........................................ 81 .
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE .................................... 38 .

DTC Logic .............................................................. 38 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 38 .
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 39 .

COMBINATION SWITCH ................................. 82 .

Exploded View ....................................................... 82 . Removal and Installation ........................................ 82 .
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT ...... 40 .
BCS-2
2009 G37 Coupe

BASIC INSPECTION
INFOID:0000000004469826
Perform the system initialization when replacing BCM, replacing Intelligent Key or registering an additional Intelligent Key.

Refer to the CONSULT-III operation manual for the initialization procedure.
INFOID:0000000004469827
BCS
BCS-3
2009 G37 Coupe
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
OUTLINE
BCM (Body Control Module) controls the various electrical components. It inputs the information required to the control from CAN communication and the signal received from each switch and sensor. BCM has combination switch reading function for reading the operation status of combination switches (light, turn signal, wiper and washer) in addition to a function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. It also has the signal transmission function as the passed point of signal and the power saving control function that reduces the power consumption with the ignition switch OFF. BCM is equipped with the diagnosis function that performs the diagnosis with CONSULT-III and various settings.
INFOID:0000000004469828
BCM control function list

System Combination switch reading system Signal buffer system Power consumption control system Auto light system Turn signal and hazard warning lamp system Headlamp system Parking, license plate and tail lamps system Front fog lamp system Exterior lamp battery saver system Daytime running light system Interior room lamp control system Step lamp system Trunk room lamp system Interior room lamp battery saver system Front wiper and washer system Warning chime system Door lock system Trunk open system Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System (IVIS) - NATS Vehicle security system Panic alarm Automatic drive positioner system Rear window defogger system Door lock function Trunk open function Intelligent Key system/engine start system Remote keyless entry function Key reminder function Warning function Engine start function DLK-15, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Diagram" INL-9, "System Diagram" WW-5, "System Diagram" WCS-5, "WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Diagram" DLK-11, "System Diagram" DLK-43, "System Diagram" SEC-17, "System Diagram" SEC-23, "System Diagram" DLK-28, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description" ADP-13, "AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Diagram" DEF-4, "System Diagram" INL-5, "System Diagram" BCS-6, "System Diagram" BCS-10, "System Diagram" BCS-11, "System Diagram" EXL-12, "System Diagram" EXL-24, "System Diagram" EXL-8, "System Diagram" EXL-26, "System Diagram" EXL-22, "System Diagram" EXL-29, "System Diagram" EXL-15, "System Diagram" Refer to
BCS-4
2009 G37 Coupe
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM

System Power window system Retained accessory power (RAP) system Tire pressure monitor system (TPMS) - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR PWC-7, "System Diagram" PWC-7, "System Description" WT-9, "System Diagram" Refer to
INFOID:0000000004469829
JPMIA0506ZZ
1. A.
BCM Dash side lower (passenger side)
BCS
BCS-5
2009 G37 Coupe
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM


System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004469830
JPMIA0700GB
System Description
OUTLINE
INFOID:0000000004469831
BCM reads the status of the combination switch (light, turn signal, wiper and washer) and recognizes the status of each switch. BCM is a combination of 5 output terminals (OUTPUT 1 - 5) and 5 input terminals (INPUT 1 - 5). It reads a maximum of 20 switch status.
COMBINATION SWITCH MATRIX

Combination switch circuit
JPMIA0701GB
Combination switch INPUT-OUTPUT system list
System INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3
OUTPUT 1 FR WIPER HI INT VOLUME 1
OUTPUT 2 FR WASHER
OUTPUT 3 FR WIPER LOW FR WIPER INT
OUTPUT 4 TURN LH PASSING HEADLAMP 2
OUTPUT 5 TURN RH HEADLAMP 1 HI BEAM
BCS-6
2009 G37 Coupe

System INPUT 4 INPUT 5 NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. OUTPUT 1 INT VOLUME 2 OUTPUT 2 INT VOLUME 3 OUTPUT 3 AUTO LIGHT OUTPUT 4 FR FOG OUTPUT 5 TAIL LAMP
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION

Description BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 10 ms interval normally. C
F
JPMIA0067GB
NOTE: BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 60 ms interval when BCM is controlled at low power consumption mode. BCM operates as follows and judges the status of the combination switch. INPUT 1 - 5 outputs the voltage waveforms of 5 systems simultaneously. It operates the transistor on OUTPUT side in the following order: OUTPUT 5 4 3 2 1. The voltage waveform of INPUT corresponding to the formed circuit changes according to the operation of the transistor on OUTPUT side if any (1 or more) switches are ON. It reads this change of the voltage as the status signal of the combination switch.
BCS
P
JPMIA0068GB
Operation Example In the following operation example, the combination of the status signals of the combination switch is replaced as follows: INPUT 1 - 5 to 1 - 5 and OUTPUT 1 - 5 to A - E.
Example 1: When a switch (TURN RH switch) is turned ON
BCS-7
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > The circuit between INPUT 1 and OUTPUT 5 is formed when the TURN RH switch is turned ON.
JPMIA0702GB
BCM detects the combination switch status signal 1E when the signal of OUTPUT 5 is input to INPUT 1. BCM judges that the TURN RH switch is ON when the signal 1E is detected.
Example 2: When some switches (turn RH switch, front wiper LO switch) are turned ON
The circuits between INPUT 1 and OUTPUT 5 and between INPUT 1 and OUTPUT 3 are formed when the TURN RH switch and FR WIPER LOW switch are turned ON.
JPMIA0703GB
BCM detects the combination switch status signal 1CE when the signals of OUTPUT 3 and OUTPUT 5 are input to INPUT 1. BCM judges that the TURN RH switch and FR WIPER LOW switch are ON when the signal 1CE is detected.
WIPER VOLUME DIAL POSITION

BCM judges the wiper intermittent dial 1 - 7 by the status of INT VOLUME 1, 2 and 3 switches.
Wiper intermittent dial position 1 2 3 4 5 Switch status INT VOLUME 1 ON ON ON OFF OFF INT VOLUME 2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF INT VOLUME 3 ON OFF OFF OFF ON
BCS-8
2009 G37 Coupe

Wiper intermittent dial position 6 7 NOTE: For details of wiper intermittent dial position, refer to WW-5, "System Description". Switch status INT VOLUME 1 OFF OFF INT VOLUME 2 ON ON INT VOLUME 3 ON OFF
C
INFOID:0000000004469832
H
JPMIA0071ZZ
1. A.
Combination switch Dash side lower (passenger side)
2.
BCM
BCS
BCS-9
2009 G37 Coupe
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM

SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM

System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004469833
JPMIA1239GB
System Description
OUTLINE
INFOID:0000000004469834
BCM has the signal transmission function that outputs/transmits each input/received signal to each unit.
Signal transmission function list

Signal name Input Output Description Inputs the push-button ignition switch (push switch) signal and transmits the ignition switch status judged with BCM via CAN communication. Inputs the door switch signal and transmits it via CAN communication. Inputs the trunk room lamp switch signal and transmits the trunk switch signal via CAN communication. Transmits the received oil pressure switch signal via CAN communication. Inputs the stop lamp switch 1 signal and stop lamp switch 2 signal, and transmits the stop lamp switch signal via CAN communication.
Ignition switch ON signal Ignition switch signal
Push-button ignition switch (push switch)
IPDM E/R (CAN) Driver seat control unit (CAN)
Door switch signal
Any door switch
Combination meter (through unified meter and A/C amp.) (CAN) IPDM E/R (CAN) Driver seat control unit (CAN) Combination meter (through unified meter and A/C amp.) (CAN) Combination meter (through unified meter and A/C amp.) (CAN)
Trunk switch signal
Oil pressure switch signal
IPDM E/R (CAN)
Stop lamp switch signal
Stop lamp switch ICC brake hold relay (with ICC)
TCM (CAN)
BCS-10
2009 G37 Coupe
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM


System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004469835
JPMIA0069GB
System Description
OUTLINE
INFOID:0000000004469836
BCM incorporates a power saving control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status. BCM switches the status (control mode) by itself with the power saving control function. It performs the sleep request to each unit [IPDM E/R, combination meter (unified meter and A/C amp.) and driver seat control unit] that operates with the ignition switch OFF.
Normal mode (wake-up)
- CAN communication is normally performed with other units - Each control with BCM is operating properly
CAN communication sleep mode (CAN sleep)
- CAN transmission is stopped - Control with BCM only is operating

Low power consumption mode (BCM sleep)
- Low power consumption control is active - CAN transmission is stopped
LOW POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL WITH BCM

BCM reduces the power consumption with the following operation in the low power consumption mode. The reading interval of the each switches changes from 10 ms interval to 60 ms interval.
BCS
Sleep mode activation

BCM receives the sleep-ready signal (ready) from IPDM E/R and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication. BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (sleep) to each unit when all of the CAN sleep conditions are fulfilled. Each unit stops the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wake up signal. BCM is in CAN communication sleep mode. BCM is in the low power consumption mode and perform the low power consumption control when all of the BCM sleep conditions are fulfilled with CAN sleep condition.
N
BCS-11
2009 G37 Coupe

Sleep condition
CAN sleep condition Receiving the sleep-ready signal (ready) from all units Ignition switch: OFF Vehicle security system and panic alarm: Not operation Warning chime: Not operation Intelligent Key system buzzer: Not operation Trunk room lamp switch status: No change Stop lamp switch: OFF ICC brake hold relay (with ICC): OFF Key slot (card switch) status: No change Turn signal indicator lamp: Not operation Exterior lamp: OFF Door lock status: No change CONSULT-III communication status: Not communication Meter display signal: Non-transmission Door switch status: No change Rear window defogger: OFF
BCM sleep condition
Interior room lamp battery saver: Time out Power window switch communication: No transmission Push-button ignition switch illumination: OFF Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System (IVIS) - NATS: Not operation Remote keyless entry receiver communication status: No communication Tire pressure monitor system (TPMS) - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR: Stop LOCK indicator lamp: OFF ACC indicator lamp: OFF ON indicator lamp: OFF
Wake-up operation
BCM changes from the low power consumption mode to the CAN communication sleep mode when the any of the BCM wake-up conditions is fulfilled. Only the control with BCM is activated. BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (wake up) to each unit when any of the CAN wake-up conditions is fulfilled. It changes from the low power consumption mode or the CAN communication sleep mode to the normal mode. Each unit starts the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wake up signal. In addition, the unified meter and A/C amp. transmits the wake up signal to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start.
Wake-up condition
BCM wake-up condition
CAN wake-up condition Receiving the sleep-ready signal (Not-ready) from any units Key slot (key switch): OFF ON, ON OFF Push-button ignition switch (push switch): OFF ON Hazard switch: OFF ON PASSING switch: OFF ON, ON OFF TAIL LAMP switch: OFF ON Driver door switch: OFF ON, ON OFF Passenger door switch: OFF ON, ON OFF Trunk room lamp switch: OFF ON, ON OFF Driver door request switch: OFF ON Passenger door request switch: OFF ON Trunk lid opener request switch: OFF ON Stop lamp switch: ON ICC brake hold relay (with ICC): ON Clutch interlock switch: OFF ON
Trunk lid opener switch: OFF ON Power window switch communication: Receiving Remote keyless entry receiver communication: Receiving
BCS-12
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004469837
JPMIA0623ZZ
BCS
1. 4. A. D.
BCM Driver seat control unit Dash side lower (passenger side) Backside of the seat cushion (driver seat)
2. B.
IPDM E/R Engine room dash panel (RH)
3. C.
N
Behind Cluster lid C
BCS-13
2009 G37 Coupe
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)


COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode Work Support Self Diagnostic Result CAN Diag Support Monitor Data Monitor Active Test Ecu Identification Configuration Function Description Changes the setting for each system function. Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Refer to CONSULT-III operation manual. The BCM input/output signals are displayed. The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. The BCM part number is displayed. This function is not used even though it is displayed.
INFOID:0000000004469838
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
: Applicable item
System Door lock Rear window defogger Warning chime Interior room lamp timer Exterior lamp Wiper and washer Turn signal and hazard warning lamps Intelligent Key system Engine start system Combination switch Body control system IVIS - NATS Interior room lamp battery saver Trunk lid open Vehicle security system RAP system Signal buffer system TPMS NOTE: *: This item is displayed, but is not used.
Sub system selection item DOOR LOCK REAR DEFOGGER BUZZER INT LAMP HEAD LAMP WIPER FLASHER AIR CONDITONER* INTELLIGENT KEY COMB SW BCM IMMU BATTERY SAVER TRUNK THEFT ALM RETAINED PWR* SIGNAL BUFFER TPMS (AIR PRESSURE MONITOR)
Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)

The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT-III.
BCS-14
2009 G37 Coupe

CONSULT screen item Vehicle Speed Odo/Trip Meter Indication/Unit km/h km SLEEP>LOCK SLEEP>OFF LOCK>ACC ACC>ON RUN>ACC CRANK>RUN RUN>URGENT ACC>OFF OFF>LOCK Vehicle Condition OFF>ACC ON>CRANK OFF>SLEEP LOCK>SLEEP LOCK OFF ACC ON ENGINE RUN CRANKING Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected Description Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is LOCK) While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is OFF.) While turning power supply position from LOCK to ACC While turning power supply position from ACC to IGN While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Vehicle is stopping and selector lever is except P position.) While turning power supply position from CRANKING to RUN (From cranking up the engine to run it) While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF While turning power supply position from OFF to LOCK While turning power supply position from OFF to ACC While turning power supply position from IGN to CRANKING While turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply position is OFF.) to low power consumption mode While turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply position is LOCK.) to low power consumption mode Power supply position is LOCK (Ignition switch OFF with steering is locked.) Power supply position is OFF (Ignition switch OFF with steering is unlocked.) Power supply position is ACC (Ignition switch ACC) Power supply position is IGN (Ignition switch ON with engine stopped) Power supply position is RUN (Ignition switch ON with engine running) Power supply position is CRANKING (At engine cranking) The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. The number increases like 1 2 3...38 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF ON. The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
IGN Counter
0 - 39
BCS
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
Diagnosis mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Function Description Changes the setting for each system function. The BCM input/output signals are displayed. The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
INFOID:0000000004702172
WORK SUPPORT
BCS-15
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET Description Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode. Automatic door lock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode. VH SPD: All doors are locked when vehicle speed more than 24km/h (15MPH) P RANGE*: All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from P position to other than the P position Automatic door unlock function mode can be selected from the following in the mode. MODE 1: All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF MODE 2*: All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position MODE 3: Driver side door is unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF MODE 4*: Driver side door is unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position Automatic door lock/unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode. Off: non-operational Unlock Only: door unlock operation only Lock Only: door lock operation only Lock/Unlock: lock/unlock operation
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT
AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SET
*: P range interlock door lock can be selected for M/T models, but automatic door lock/unlock function does not operate.
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item REQ SW-DR REQ SW-AS REQ SW-BD/TR DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-BK CDL LOCK SW CDL UNLOCK SW KEY CYL LK-SW KEY CYL UN-SW Contents Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (driver side). Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (passenger side). Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of trunk lid opener request switch. Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side). Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side). NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch. Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch. Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder. Indicated [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder.
ACTIVE TEST
Test item Description This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation. The all door lock actuators are locked when ALL LCK on CONSULT-III screen is touched. The all door lock actuators are unlocked when ALL UNLK on CONSULT-III screen is touched. The door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked when DR UNLK on CONSULT-III screen is touched. The door lock actuator (passenger side) is unlocked when AS UNLK on CONSULT- III screen is touched. OTR ULK item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
DOOR LOCK
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BCS-16
2009 G37 Coupe

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER)

INFOID:0000000004702179
Data monitor
B
Monitor Item REAR DEF SW PUSH SW Description This is displayed even when it is not equipped. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push switch.
ACTIVE TEST
D
Test Item REAR DEFOGGER Description This test is able to check rear window defogger operation. Rear window defogger operates when ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
BUZZER
BUZZER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BUZZER)
CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS
G
Test item BUZZER Diagnosis mode Data Monitor Active Test Displays BCM input data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending driving signal to them. Description
INFOID:0000000004702189
DATA MONITOR
I
Display item [Unit] VEH SPEED 1 [Km/h] PUSH SW [On/Off] UNLK SEN-DR [On/Off] KEY SW-SLOT [On/Off] TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off] FR FOG SW [On/Off] DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] Description Value of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line. Status of push button ignition switch judged by BCM.
K
Status of unlock sensor judged by BCM. Status of key slot judged by BCM. Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function.
BCS
Status of front fog lamp switch judged by BCM. Status of driver side door switch judged by BCM.
ACTIVE TEST
O
Display item [Unit] IGN KEY WARN ALM SEAT BELT WARN TEST ID REGIST WARNING LIGHT WARN ALM RUN FLAT/T WARN BUZZER Description The key warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). The seat belt warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). The ID regist warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). The light warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). The run-flat tire warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
INT LAMP
BCS-17
2009 G37 Coupe

INT LAMP : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INT LAMP)

WORK SUPPORT
INFOID:0000000004702182
JPLIA0093GB
Service item SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
Setting item ON* OFF MODE 2
Setting With the interior room lamp timer function Without the interior room lamp timer function 7.5 sec. 15 sec. 30 sec. 0.5 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. 0 sec. 0.5 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing all doors. Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing the driver door only. Sets the interior room lamp gradual dimming time. Sets the interior room lamp gradual brightening time. Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time)
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET
MODE 3* MODE 4 MODE 1 MODE 2*
ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET
MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 MODE 1
ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET
MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4* MODE 1*
R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET *: Factory setting
MODE 2
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item [Unit] REQ SW-DR [On/Off] REQ SW-AS [On/Off] PUSH SW [On/Off] ACC RLY-F/B [On/Off] KEY SW-SLOT [On/Off] Description The switch status input from request switch (driver side) The switch status input from front request switch (passenger side) The switch status input from push-button ignition switch NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Key switch status input from key slot
BCS-18
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item [Unit] DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] DOOR SW- RL [On/Off] DOOR SW-BK [On/Off] CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off] KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off] TRNK/HAT MNTR [On/Off] RKE-LOCK [On/Off] RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] Lock switch status received from the door lock and unlock switch by power window switch serial link Unlock switch status received from the door lock and unlock switch by power window switch serial link Lock switch status received from key cylinder switch by power window switch serial link Unlock switch status received from key cylinder switch by power window switch serial link The switch status input from trunk room lamp switch Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Description The switch status input from driver side door switch The switch status input from passenger side door switch
ACTIVE TEST
Test item INT LAMP Operation On Off STEP LAMP TEST On Off On Off Description Outputs the interior room lamp control signal to turn map lamp ON (Map lamp switch is in DOOR position). Stops the interior room lamp control signal to turn map lamp OFF. Outputs the step lamp control signal to turn step lamp ON. Stops the step lamp control signal to turn step lamp OFF. Outputs the trunk room lamp control signal to turn the trunk room lamp ON. Stops the trunk room lamp control signal to turn the trunk room lamp OFF.
LUGGAGE LAMP TEST
HEADLAMP
HEADLAMP : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - HEAD LAMP)
WORK SUPPORT
Service item BATTERY SAVER SET Setting item On* Off Setting With the exterior lamp battery saver function Without the exterior lamp battery saver function
INFOID:0000000004702180
BCS
BCS-19
2009 G37 Coupe

Service item Setting item MODE 1* MODE 2 MODE 3 ILL DELAY SET MODE 4 MODE 5 MODE 6 MODE 7 MODE 8 MODE 1* CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 *: Factory setting 45 sec. Without the function 30 sec. 60 sec. 90 sec. 120 sec. 150 sec. 180 sec. Normal More sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON earlier than normal operation.) More sensitive setting than MODE 2 (Turns ON earlier than MODE 2.) Less sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON later than normal operation.) Sets delay timer function timer operation time. (All doors closed) Setting
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item [Unit] PUSH SW [On/Off] ENGINE STATE [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] VEH SPEED 1 [km/h] KEY SW-SLOT [On/Off] TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off] TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off] TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off] HI BEAM SW [On/Off] HEAD LAMP SW1 [On/Off] HEAD LAMP SW2 [On/Off] PASSING SW [On/Off] AUTO LIGHT SW [On/Off] FR FOG SW [On/Off] RR FOG SW [On/Off] DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. The switch status input from driver side door switch The switch status input from passenger side door switch Each switch status that BCM judges from the combination switch reading function Description The switch status input from push-button ignition switch The engine status received from ECM with CAN communication The value of the vehicle speed received from unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication Key switch status input from key slot
BCS-20
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item [Unit] DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] DOOR SW- RL [On/Off] DOOR SW-BK [On/Off] OPTICAL SENSOR [V] Description NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. The value of exterior brightness voltage input from the optical sensor
ACTIVE TEST
Test item TAIL LAMP Operation On Off Hi HEAD LAMP Low Off FR FOG LAMP On Off RR FOG LAMP On Off On Off RH CORNERING LAMP LH Off ILL DIM SIGNAL On Off NOTE: The item is indicated, but cannot be tested. NOTE: The item is indicated, but cannot be tested. Description Transmits the position light request signal to IPDM E/R with CAN communication to turn the tail lamp ON. Stops the position light request signal transmission. Transmits the high beam request signal with CAN communication to turn the headlamp (HI). Transmits the low beam request signal with CAN communication to turn the headlamp (LO). Stops the high & low beam request signal transmission. Transmits the front fog light request signal to IPDM E/R with CAN communication to turn the front fog lamp ON. Stops the front fog light request signal transmission. NOTE: The item is indicated, but cannot be tested. NOTE: The item is indicated, but cannot be tested.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT
WIPER
WIPER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - WIPER)
WORK SUPPORT
Service item WIPER SPEED SETTING *:Initial setting Setting item On Off* Description With vehicle speed (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the vehicle speed and wiper intermittent dial position) Without vehicle speed (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the wiper intermittent dial position)
BCS
INFOID:0000000004702186
DATA MONITOR
BCS-21
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item [Unit] VEH SPEED 1 [km/h] PUSH SW [Off/On] FR WIPER HI [Off/On] FR WIPER LOW [Off/On] FR WASHER SW [Off/On] FR WIPER INT [Off/On] FR WIPER STOP [Off/On] INT VOLUME [1 7] Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal received from IPDM E/R with CAN communication. Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function Description Displays the value of the vehicle speed signal received from unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication. The switch status input from push-button ignition switch.
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function
ACTIVE TEST
Test item Operation Hi Lo INT Off Description Transmits the front wiper request signal (HI) to IPDM E/R with CAN communication to operate the front wiper HI operation. Transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R with CAN communication to operate the front wiper LO operation. Transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R with CAN communication to operate the front wiper INT operation. Stops transmitting the front wiper request signal to stop the front wiper operation.
FRONT WIPER
FLASHER
FLASHER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - FLASHER)
WORK SUPPORT
Service item Setting item Lock Only* HAZARD ANSWER BACK Unlk Only Lock/Unlk Off *: Factory setting With locking only With unlocking only With locking/unlocking Without the function Sets the hazard warning lamp answer back function when the door is lock/unlock with the request switch or the key fob. Setting
INFOID:0000000004702181
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item [Unit] REQ SW-DR [On/Off] REQ SW-AS [On/Off] PUSH SW [On/Off] Description The switch status input from the request switch (driver side) The switch status input from the request switch (passenger side) The switch status input from the push-button ignition switch
BCS-22
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item [Unit] TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off] TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off] HAZARD SW [On/Off] RKE-LOCK [On/Off] RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] RKE-PANIC [On/Off] Description
Each switch condition that BCM judges from the combination switch reading function
The switch status input from the hazard switch Lock signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver Unlock signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver Panic alarm signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver
ACTIVE TEST
Test item Operation RH FLASHER LH Off Description Outputs the voltage to blink the right side turn signal lamps. Outputs the voltage to blink the left side turn signal lamps. Stops the voltage to turn the turn signal lamps OFF.
INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)
WORK SUPPORT
Monitor item CONFIRM KEY FOB ID Description It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode. Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode. MODE 1: 1 minute MODE 2: 5 minutes MODE 3: 30 seconds MODE 4: 2 minutes Door lock/unlock function by door request switch (driver side and passenger side) mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) in this mode. Engine start function mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode. Buzzer reminder function mode by trunk opener request switch can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode. Panic alarm button pressing time on Intelligent Key remote control button can be selected from the following with this mode. MODE 1: 0.5 sec. MODE 2: Non-operation MODE 3: 1.5 sec. Unlock button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode. MODE 1: 3 sec. MODE 2: Non-operation MODE 3: 5 sec. Trunk button pressing on Intelligent Key button can be selected as per the following in this mode. MODE 1: Press and hold MODE 2: Press twice MODE 3: Press and hold, or press twice
INFOID:0000000004702175
AUTO LOCK SET
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY ENGINE START BY I-KEY TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
BCS
PANIC ALARM SET
PW DOWN SET
TRUNK OPEN DELAY
BCS-23
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI Description Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode. Key reminder function mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode. Hazard reminder function mode can be selected from the following with this mode. LOCK ONLY: Door lock operation only UNLOCK ONLY: Door unlock operation only LOCK/UNLOCK: Lock/unlock operation OFF: Non-operation Buzzer reminder function (lock operation) mode by door request switch (driver side and passenger side) can be selected from the following with this mode. Horn chirp: Sound horn Buzzer: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer OFF: Non-operation Buzzer reminder function (unlock operation) mode by door request switch can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode. Starter motor can operate during the times below. 70 msec 100 msec 200 msec This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis. Horn reminder function mode by Intelligent Key button can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode.
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK
ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK
SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to DLK-161, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item REQ SW -DR REQ SW -AS REQ SW -BD/TR PUSH SW IGN RLY2 -F/B ACC RLY-FB CLUTCH SW*1 BRAKE SW 1 BRAKE SW 2 DETE/CANCL SW SFT PN/N SW S/L -LOCK S/L -UNLOCK S/L RELAY -F/B UNLK SEN -DR PUSH SW -IPDM IGN RLY1 -F/B DETE SW -IPDM SFT PN -IPDM SFT P -MET Condition Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (driver side). Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (passenger side). Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk opener request switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition relay 2. NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of clutch switch. Indicates [ON/OFF]*2 condition of brake switch power supply. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of brake switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P position. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P or N position. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock unit (LOCK). Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock unit (UNLOCK). Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock relay. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver door UNLOCK status. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition relay 1. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P position. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P or N position. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P position.
BCS-24
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item SFT N -MET ENGINE STATE S/L LOCK-IPDM S/L UNLK-IPDM S/L RELAY-REQ VEH SPEED 1 VEH SPEED 2 DOOR STAT-DR DOOR STAT-AS ID OK FLAG PRMT ENG STRT PRMT RKE STRT KEY SW -SLOT TRNK/HAT MNTR RKE-LOCK RKE-UNLOCK RKE-TR/BD RKE-PANIC RKE-P/W OPEN RKE-MODE CHG RKE OPE COUN1 RKE OPE COUN2 Condition Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of N position. Indicates [STOP/STALL/CRANK/RUN] condition of engine states. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock unit (LOCK). Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock unit (UNLOCK). Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock relay. Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h]. Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [Km/h]. Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLOCK] condition of driver side door status. Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLOCK] condition of passenger side door status. Indicates [SET/RESET] condition of key ID. Indicates [SET/RESET] condition of engine start possibility. NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key slot. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk lid. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of TRUNK OPEN signal from Intelligent Key. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of PANIC button of Intelligent Key. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P/W DOWN signal from Intelligent Key. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key. When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing. NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on M/T models. *2: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
ACTIVE TEST
Test item BATTERY SAVER PW REMOTO DOWN SET OUTSIDE BUZZER Description This test is able to check interior room lamp operation. The interior room lamp is activated after ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check power window down operation. The power window down is activated after ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation. The Intelligent Key warning buzzer is activated after ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation. Take away warning chime sounds when TAKE OUT on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Key warning chime sounds when KEY on CONSULT-III screen is touched. OFF position warning chime sounds when KNOB on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check warning lamp operation. KEY Warning lamp illuminates when KEY ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. KEY Warning lamp blinks when KEY IND on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check interior room lamp operation. The interior room lamp is activated after ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
BCS
INSIDE BUZZER
INDICATOR
INT LAMP
BCS-25
2009 G37 Coupe

Test item Description This test is able to check meter display information Engine start information displays when BP N on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Engine start information displays when BP I on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Key ID warning displays when ID NG on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Steering lock information displays when ROTAT on CONSULT-III screen is touched. P position warning displays when SFT P on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Intelligent Key insert information displays when INSRT on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Intelligent Key low battery warning displays when BATT on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Take away through window warning displays when NO KY on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Take away warning display when OUTKEY on CONSULT-III screen is touched. OFF position warning display when LK WN on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator open operation. This actuator opens when OPEN on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation. The hazard lamps are activated after LH/RH/OFF on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check horn operation. The horn is activated after ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check A/T shift selector power supply A/T shift selector power is supplied when ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation. Push-ignition switch illumination illuminates when ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check LOCK indicator in push-ignition switch operation. LOCK indicator in push-ignition switch illuminates when ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check ACC indicator in push-ignition switch operation. ACC indicator in push-ignition switch illuminates when ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check on indicator in push-ignition switch operation. ON indicator in push-ignition switch illuminates when ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check key slot illumination operation. Key slot illumination blinks when ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator open operation. This actuator opens when OPEN on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
LCD
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH FLASHER HORN P RANGE ENGINE SW ILLUMI
LOCK INDICATOR
ACC INDICATOR
IGNITION ON IND KEY SLOT ILLUMI TRUNK/BACK DOOR
COMB SW
COMB SW : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMB SW)
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item [UNIT] FR WIPER HI [Off/On] FR WIPER LOW [Off/On] FR WASHER SW [Off/On] FR WIPER INT [Off/On] FR WIPER STOP [Off/On] INT VOLUME [1 - 7] Description Displays the status of the FR WIPER HI switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the FR WIPER LOW switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the FR WASHER switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the FR WIPER AUTO switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN communication. Displays the status of wiper volume dial position judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function.
INFOID:0000000004469847
BCS-26
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item [UNIT] TURN SIGNAL R [Off/On] TURN SIGNAL L [Off/On] TAIL LAMP SW [Off/On] HI BEAM SW [Off/On] HEAD LAMP SW 1 [Off/On] HEAD LAMP SW 2 [Off/On] PASSING SW [Off/On] AUTO LIGHT SW [Off/On] FR FOG SW [Off/On] RR FOG SW [Off/On] Description Displays the status of the TURN RH switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the TURN LH switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the TAIL LAMP switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the HI BEAM switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the HEADLAMP 1 switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the HEADLAMP 2 switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the PASSING switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the AUTO LIGHT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. Displays the status of the FR FOG switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored.
BCM
BCM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BCM)
WORK SUPPORT
Item RESET SETTING VALUE Description Return a value set with Work Support of each system to a default value in factory shipment.
INFOID:0000000004469848
IMMU
IMMU : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - IMMU)
APPLICATION ITEM
Diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Function Description The BCM input/output signals are displayed. The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
INFOID:0000000004702194
BCS
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item CONFRM ID ALL CONFIRM ID4 CONFIRM ID3 CONFIRM ID2 CONFIRM ID1 TP 4 TP 3 TP 2 TP 1 Indicates the number of ID which has been registered. Indicates [YET] at all time. Switch to [DONE] when a registered Intelligent Key is inserted into the key slot. Content
BCS-27
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item PUSH SW KEY SW -SLOT Content Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key slot.
ACTIVE TEST
Test item THEFT IND Description This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when ON on CONSULT-III screen touched.
BATTERY SAVER
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER)
WORK SUPPORT
Service item BATTERY SAVER SET Setting item On* Off On* Off MODE 1* MODE 2 Setting With the exterior lamp battery saver function Without the exterior lamp battery saver function With the interior room lamp battery saver function Without the interior room lamp battery saver function 30 min. 60 min. Sets the interior room lamp battery saver timer operating time.
INFOID:0000000004702185
ROOM LAMP BAT SAV SET
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET *: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item [Unit] REQ SW-DR [On/Off] REQ SW-AS [On/Off] REQ SW-RR [On/Off] REQ SW-RL [On/Off] PUSH SW [On/Off] ACC RLY-F/B [On/Off] KEY SW-SLOT [On/Off] UNLK SEN-DR [On/Off] DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] Description The switch status input from request switch (driver side) The switch status input from front request switch (passenger side)
NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored.
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Key switch status input from key slot Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor The switch status input driver side front door switch The switch status input from passenger side door switch
BCS-28
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item [Unit] DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] DOOR SW- RL [On/Off] DOOR SW-BK [On/Off] CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off] KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off] TRNK/HAT MNTR [On/Off] RKE-LOCK [On/Off] RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] Lock switch status received from the door lock and unlock switch by power window switch serial link Unlock switch status received from the door lock and unlock switch by power window switch serial link Lock switch status received from key cylinder switch by power window switch serial link Unlock switch status received from key cylinder switch by power window switch serial link The switch status input from trunk room lamp switch Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Description
G
Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
ACTIVE TEST
Test item BATTERY SAVER *: Each lamp switch is in ON position. Operation Off On Description Cuts the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamp OFF. Outputs the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamp ON.*
TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - TRUNK)
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
Diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR Function Description The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
INFOID:0000000004702177
BCS
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item PUSH SW UNLK SEN -DR VEH SPEED 1 KEY CYL SW-TR TR CANCEL SW TR/BD OPEN SW TRNK/HAT MNTR RKE-TR/BD TRUNK/GLASS HATCH Contents Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock sensor. Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter. NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk lid opener cancel switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk lid opener switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk room lamp switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from Intelligent Key remote controller button. This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator open operation.
BCS-29
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > ACTIVE TEST
Test item TRUNK/GLASS HATCH Description This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator open operation. This actuator opens when OPEN on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
THEFT ALM
THEFT ALM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - THEFT)
APPLICATION ITEM
Diagnosis mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Function Description Changes the setting for each system function. The BCM input/output signals are displayed. The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
INFOID:0000000004702193
DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item REQ SW-DR REQ SW-AS REQ SW-BD/TR PUSH SW UNLK SEN-DR KEY SW -SLOT DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-BK CDL LOCK SW CDL UNLOCK SW KEY CYL LK-SW KEY CYL UN-SW KEY CYL SW-TR TR/BD OPEN SW TRNK/HAT MNTR RKE-LOCK RKE-UNLOCK RKE-TR/BD Description Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (driver side). Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (passenger side). Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk opener request switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver door UNLOCK status. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key slot. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. This is displayed even when it is not equipped. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from front door key cylinder switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from front door key cylinder switch. This is displayed even when it is not equipped. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk lid opener switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk room lamp switch. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of TRUNK OPEN signal from Intelligent Key.
WORK SUPPORT
Test Item SECURITY ALARM SET THEFT ALM TRG Description This mode is able to confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting. The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and erase the record of vehicle security alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching CLEAR on CONSULT-III screen.
ACTIVE TEST
BCS-30
2009 G37 Coupe

Test Item THEFT IND VEHICLE SECURITY HORN HEADLAMP(HI) FLASHER Description This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation. The horns will be activated for 0.5 seconds after ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation. The headlamps will be activated for 0.5 seconds after ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched. This test is able to check vehicle security hazard lamp operation. The hazard lamps will be activated after ON on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
SIGNAL BUFFER
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - SIGNAL BUFFER)
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item [UNIT] PUSH SW [Off/On] Description Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch (push switch) judged by BCM.
INFOID:0000000004469853
ACTIVE TEST
Test item Operation Off OIL PRESSURE SW On OFF BCM transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication, which illuminates the oil pressure warning lamp in the combination meter. Description
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR

AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : Diagnosis Description
DESCRIPTION
During driving, the TPMS receives the signal transmitted from the transmitter installed in each wheel, when the tire pressure becomes low. The control unit (BCM) of this system has pressure judgment and trouble diagnosis functions. When the TPMS detects low inflation pressure or another unusual symptom, the low tire pressure warning lamps in the combination meter comes on.
INFOID:0000000004702195
SELF DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-III)

BCS With CONSULT-III Touch SELF-DIAG RESULT display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. Refer to BCS-76, "DTC Index". N SELF DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-III)
Without CONSULT-III To start the self-diagnostic results mode, ground terminal of the tire pressure warning check connector. The malfunction location is indicated by the low tire pressure warning lamp blinking.
BCS-31
2009 G37 Coupe

JPEIC0030GB
NOTE: When the low tire pressure warning lamp blinks 5 Hz and continues repeating it, the system is normal.
Blinking pattern 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 41 42 43 44 Items Tire pressure value (Front LH) Tire pressure value (Front RH) Tire pressure value (Rear RH) Tire pressure value (Rear LH) Transmitter no data (Front LH) Transmitter no data (Front RH) Transmitter no data (Rear RH) Transmitter no data (Rear LH) Transmitter checksum error (Front LH) Transmitter checksum error (Front RH) Transmitter checksum error (Rear RH) Transmitter checksum error (Rear LH) Transmitter pressure data error (Front LH) Transmitter pressure data error (Front RH) Transmitter pressure data error (Rear RH) Transmitter pressure data error (Rear LH) Transmitter function code error (Front LH) Transmitter function code error (Front RH) Transmitter function code error (Rear RH) Transmitter function code error (Rear LH) Diagnostic items detected when Front LH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less. [NOTE] Front RH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less. [NOTE] Rear RH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less. [NOTE] Rear LH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less. [NOTE] Data from front LH transmitter can not be receive. Data from front RH transmitter can not be receive. Data from rear RH transmitter can not be receive. Data from rear LH transmitter can not be receive. Checksum data from front LH transmitter is malfunctioning. Checksum data from front RH transmitter is malfunctioning. WT-21 Checksum data from rear RH transmitter is malfunctioning. Checksum data from rear LH transmitter is malfunctioning. Air pressure data from front LH transmitter is malfunction. Air pressure data from front RH transmitter is malfunction. WT-24 Air pressure data from rear RH transmitter is malfunction. Air pressure data from rear LH transmitter is malfunction. Function code data from front LH transmitter is malfunction. Function code data from front RH transmitter is malfunction. WT-26 Function code data from rear RH transmitter is malfunction. Function code data from rear LH transmitter is malfunction. WT-19 WT-17 Check item
BCS-32
2009 G37 Coupe

Blinking pattern 45 46 47 48 52 53 No blinking NOTE: 182.7 kPa (1.9 kg/cm2, 26 psi): Standard air pressure is for 230 kPa (2.3 kg/cm2, 33 psi) vehicles. 189.6 kPa (1.9 kg/cm2, 27 psi): Standard air pressure is for 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 35 psi) vehicles. Items Transmitter battery voltage low (Front LH) Transmitter battery voltage low (Front RH) Transmitter battery voltage low (Rear RH) Transmitter battery voltage low (Rear LH) Vehicle speed signal error Control unit Tire pressure warning check switch Diagnostic items detected when Battery voltage of front LH transmitter drops. Battery voltage of front RH transmitter drops. WT-29 Battery voltage of rear RH transmitter drops. Battery voltage of rear LH transmitter drops. Vehicle speed signal error. Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction in BCM. Tire pressure warning switch circuit is open. WT-32 WT-33 Check item
ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-III 1. Perform applicable inspection of malfunctioning item and then repair or replace. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and select SELF-DIAG RESULTS mode for AIR PRESSURE MONITOR with CONSULT-III. 3. Touch ERASE on CONSULT-III screen to erase memory. Without CONSULT-III In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch OFF after performing self-diagnostic or by erasing the memory using the CONSULT-III. G
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR)

WORK SUPPORT MODE
ID Read The registered ID number is displayed. ID Regist Refer to WT-6, "ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE : Special Repair Requirement".
INFOID:0000000004702196
BCS
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Operation Procedure Refer to BCS-76, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR MODE

Screen of data monitor mode is displayed. NOTE: When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-III perform REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
BCS-33
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor item (Unit) AIR PRESS FL (kPa/kg/cm2/Psi) AIR PRESS FR (kPa/kg/cm2/Psi) AIR PRESS RR (kPa/kg/cm2/Psi) AIR PRESS RL (kPa/kg/cm2/Psi) ID REGST FL1 (Green/Red) ID REGST FR1 (Green/Red) ID REGST RR1 (Green/Red) ID REGST RL1 (Green/Red) WARNING LAMP (On/Off) BUZZER (On/Off) Low tire pressure warning lamp Buzzer in combination meter Registration ID Tire pressure Remark
NOTE: Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID, or erase the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on CONSULT-III.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

NOTE: Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID, or erase the actual malfunction may be different from that displayed on CONSULT-III.
TEST ITEM LIST
Test item WARNING LAMP ID REGIST WARNING FLASHER HORN Content This test is able to check to check that the low tire pressure warning lamp turns on. This test is able to check to check that the buzzer sounds or the low tire pressure warning lamp turns on. This test is able to check to check that each turn signal lamp turns on. This test is able to check to check that the horn sounds.
BCS-34
2009 G37 Coupe
U1000 CAN COMM

U1000 CAN COMM
Description
INFOID:0000000004469856
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONSULT-III display description CAN COMM DTC Detection Condition When BCM cannot communicate CAN communication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more. Possible cause
INFOID:0000000004469857
U1000
CAN communication system
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004469858
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check Self Diagnostic Result. Is DTC U1000 displayed? YES >> Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
I
BCS
BCS-35
2009 G37 Coupe


DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC U1010 CONSULT-III display description CONTROL UNIT(CAN) DTC Detection Condition BCM detected internal CAN communication circuit malfunction. BCM
INFOID:0000000004469860 INFOID:0000000004469859
Possible cause
Diagnosis Procedure
1.REPLACE BCM
When DTC U1010 is detected, replace BCM. >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View".
BCS-36
2009 G37 Coupe
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED SIG

U0415 VEHICLE SPEED SIG

Description
INFOID:0000000004469861
U0415 is displayed if any unusual condition is present in the reception status of the vehicle speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONSULT-III display description VEHICLE SPEED DTC Detection Condition When the vehicle speed signal received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) remains abnormal for 2 seconds or more. Probable cause
INFOID:0000000004469862
U0415
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BCM
1.DTC CONFIRMATION
Erase the DTC. Turn ignition switch OFF. Perform the Self Diagnostic Result of CONSULT-III, when passed 2 seconds or more after the ignition switch is turned ON. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Refer to BCS-37, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004469863
1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAG RESULTS

Perform Self-Diagnostic Result of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CONSULT-III. Refer to BRC-26, "CONSULT-III Function". Is any DTC detected? YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View".
J K
BCS
BCS-37
2009 G37 Coupe
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE

B2562 LOW VOLTAGE

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC B2562 CONSULT-III display description LOW VOLTAGE DTC Detection Condition When the power supply voltage to BCM remains less than 8.8 V for 120 seconds or more Possible cause Harness or connector (power supply circuit)
INFOID:0000000004469864
1.DTC CONFIRMATION
1. 2. 3. Erase DTC. Turn ignition switch OFF. Perform the Self Diagnostic Result of CONSULT-III, when passed 120 seconds or more after the ignition switch is turned ON. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Refer to BCS-38, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004469865

Check BCM power supply circuit. Refer to BCS-39, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the circuit normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair the malfunctioning part.
BCS-38
2009 G37 Coupe


Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004469866
1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown.
Signal name Battery power supply Fuse and fusible link No. K 10
Is the fuse fusing? YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is blown. NO >> GO TO 2.

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals (+) BCM Connector M118 M119 Terminal 1 11 Ground Battery voltage () Voltage (Approx.)
Is the measurement value normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM Connector M119 Terminal 13 Ground Continuity Existed
Does continuity exist? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector.
BCS
BCS-39
2009 G37 Coupe
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT


Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004469867
1.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 SYSTEM CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the BCM and combination switch connectors. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination switch harness connector.
BCM Connector Terminal 107 109 M122 88 108 87 M33 Combination switch Connector Terminal 11 9 7 10 13 Existed
System INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5
Continuity
Does continuity exist? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 SYSTEM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

Check for continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM Connector Terminal 107 109 M122 88 108 87 Ground Not existed System INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 Continuity
Does continuity exist? YES >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1. 2. Connect the BCM connector. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals System (+) BCM Connector INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 M122 Terminal 107 109 88 108 87 Ground Refer to BCS44, "Reference Value". () Voltage (Approx.)
Is the measurement value normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View".
BCS-40
2009 G37 Coupe

4.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL

1. 2. 3. Connect the combination switch connector. Turn ON any switch in the system that is malfunctioning. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals System (+) BCM Connector INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 M122 Terminal 107 109 88 108 87 Ground Refer to BCS44, "Reference Value". () Voltage (Approx.)
Is the measurement value normal when any of the switches is turned ON? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View". NO >> Replace the combination switch.
BCS
BCS-41
2009 G37 Coupe
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT


Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004469868
1.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 SYSTEM CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the BCM and combination switch connectors. NOTE: BCM connector disconnects M123 only. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination switch harness connector.
BCM Connector Terminal 143 144 M123 145 146 142 M33 Combination switch Connector Terminal 12 14 5 2 8 Existed
System OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5
Continuity
Does continuity exist? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 SYSTEM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

Check for continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM Connector Terminal 143 144 M123 145 146 142 Ground Not existed System OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5 Continuity
Does continuity exist? YES >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INTERNAL CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Connect the combination switch connector. Turn ON any switch in the system that is malfunctioning. Check voltage between combination switch harness connector and ground. NOTE: Check that the combination switch outputs a signal from combination switch input system.
BCS-42
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminals System (+) Combination switch Connector OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 M33 Terminal 12 14 5 2 Ground () Value (Approx.)
D
JPMIA0041GB
OUTPUT 5
8 1.4 V
Is the measurement value normal when any of the switches is turned ON? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View". NO >> Replace the combination switch.
BCS
BCS-43
2009 G37 Coupe


Reference Value
INFOID:0000000004469869
Monitor Item FR WIPER HI Other than front wiper switch HI Front wiper switch HI Other than front wiper switch LO Front wiper switch LO Front washer switch OFF Front washer switch ON Other than front wiper switch INT Front wiper switch INT Front wiper is not in STOP position Front wiper is in STOP position
Condition
Value/Status Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Wiper intermittent dial position Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Off On Off On Off
FR WIPER LOW
FR WASHER SW
FR WIPER INT
FR WIPER STOP INT VOLUME TURN SIGNAL R
Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7 Other than turn signal switch RH Turn signal switch RH Other than turn signal switch LH Turn signal switch LH Other than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND Other than lighting switch HI Lighting switch HI Other than lighting switch 2ND Lighting switch 2ND Other than lighting switch 2ND Lighting switch 2ND Other than lighting switch PASS Lighting switch PASS Other than lighting switch AUTO Lighting switch AUTO Front fog lamp switch OFF Front fog lamp switch ON NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Driver door closed Driver door opened Passenger door closed Passenger door opened NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored.
TURN SIGNAL L
TAIL LAMP SW
HI BEAM SW
HEAD LAMP SW 1
HEAD LAMP SW 2
PASSING SW
AUTO LIGHT SW
FR FOG SW RR FOG SW DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR
BCS-44
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-BK CDL LOCK SW Condition NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Other than power door lock switch LOCK Power door lock switch LOCK Other than power door lock switch UNLOCK Power door lock switch UNLOCK Other than driver door key cylinder LOCK position Driver door key cylinder LOCK position Other than driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position Driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Hazard switch is OFF Hazard switch is ON NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Trunk lid opener cancel switch OFF Trunk lid opener cancel switch ON Trunk lid opener switch OFF While the trunk lid opener switch is turned ON Trunk lid closed Trunk lid opened LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed TRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed TRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is pressed PANIC button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed PANIC button of the Intelligent Key is pressed UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed and held simultaneously LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held simultaneously OPTICAL SENSOR Bright outside of the vehicle Dark outside of the vehicle Driver door request switch is not pressed Driver door request switch is pressed Passenger door request switch is not pressed Passenger door request switch is pressed NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Value/Status
A
Off Off Off On Off On Off On Off On Off
CDL UNLOCK SW
KEY CYL LK-SW
KEY CYL UN-SW KEY CYL SW-TR HAZARD SW REAR DEF SW H/L WASH SW TR CANCEL SW
F
Off On Off Off Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Close to 5 V Close to 0 V Off On Off On Off
TR/BD OPEN SW
TRNK/HAT MNTR
RKE-LOCK
RKE-UNLOCK
RKE-TR/BD
RKE-PANIC
BCS
RKE-P/W OPEN
RKE-MODE CHG
REQ SW -DR
REQ SW -AS REQ SW -RR
BCS-45
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item REQ SW -RL REQ SW -BD/TR Condition NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Trunk lid opener request switch is not pressed Trunk lid opener request switch is pressed Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is not pressed Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed Ignition switch in OFF or ACC position Ignition switch in ON position NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. The clutch pedal is not depressed The clutch pedal is depressed The brake pedal is depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown BRAKE SW 1 The brake pedal is not depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown, or No. 7 fuse is normal The brake pedal is not depressed The brake pedal is depressed Selector lever in P position (Except M/T models) The clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models) Selector lever in any position other than P (Except M/T models) The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models) Selector lever in any position other than P and N Selector lever in P or N position Steering is unlocked Steering is locked Steering is locked Steering is unlocked Ignition switch in OFF or ACC position Ignition switch in ON position Driver door is unlocked Driver door is locked Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is not pressed Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is pressed Ignition switch in OFF or ACC position Ignition switch in ON position Selector lever in any position other than P Selector lever in P position Selector lever in any position other than P and N (Except M/T models) The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models) Selector lever in P or N position The clutch pedal is depressed Selector lever in any position other than P Selector lever in P position Selector lever in any position other than N Selector lever in N position Value/Status Off Off On Off On Off On Off Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On
PUSH SW
IGN RLY2 -F/B ACC RLY -F/B CLUCH SW
BRAKE SW 2
DETE/CANCL SW
SFT PN/N SW
S/L -LOCK
S/L -UNLOCK
S/L RELAY-F/B
UNLK SEN -DR
PUSH SW -IPDM
IGN RLY1 -F/B
DETE SW -IPDM
SFT PN -IPDM
SFT P -MET
SFT N -MET
BCS-46
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item Engine stopped ENGINE STATE While the engine stalls At engine cranking Engine running S/L LOCK-IPDM Steering is unlocked Steering is locked Steering is locked Steering is unlocked Steering lock system is not the LOCK condition and the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK Steering lock system are not the LOCK condition or the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK While driving While driving Driver door is locked DOOR STAT-DR Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) Driver door is unlocked Passenger door is locked DOOR STAT-AS Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) Passenger door is unlocked ID OK FLAG Steering is locked Steering is unlocked The engine start is prohibited The engine start is permitted NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. The Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot The Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot During the operation of the Intelligent Key NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by any key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by any key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM. Condition Value/Status Stop Stall Crank Run Off On Off On Off On Equivalent to speedometer reading Equivalent to speedometer reading LOCK READY UNLOCK LOCK READY UNLOCK Reset Set Reset Set Reset Off On Operation frequency of the Intelligent Key Yet
S/L UNLK-IPDM
S/L RELAY-REQ
VEH SPEED 1 VEH SPEED 2
PRMT ENG STRT PRMT RKE STRT KEY SW -SLOT RKE OPE COUN1 RKE OPE COUN2
BCS
CONFRM ID ALL
N
Done Yet Done
CONFIRM ID4
P
Yet Done
CONFIRM ID3
BCS-47
2009 G37 Coupe

Monitor Item Condition The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the second key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the second key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM. The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM. The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is registered to BCM The ID of third Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM The ID of third Intelligent Key is registered to BCM The ID of second Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM The ID of second Intelligent Key is registered to BCM The ID of first Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM The ID of first Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) ID of front LH tire transmitter is registered ID of front LH tire transmitter is not registered ID of front RH tire transmitter is registered ID of front RH tire transmitter is not registered ID of rear RH tire transmitter is registered ID of rear RH tire transmitter is not registered ID of rear LH tire transmitter is registered ID of rear LH tire transmitter is not registered Tire pressure indicator OFF Tire pressure indicator ON Tire pressure warning alarm is not sounding Tire pressure warning alarm is sounding Value/Status Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Air pressure of front LH tire Air pressure of front RH tire Air pressure of rear RH tire Air pressure of rear LH tire Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Off On Off On
CONFIRM ID2
CONFIRM ID1
TP 4
TP 3
TP 2
TP 1 AIR PRESS FL AIR PRESS FR AIR PRESS RR AIR PRESS RL ID REGST FL1
ID REGST FR1
ID REGST RR1
ID REGST RL1
WARNING LAMP
BUZZER
BCS-48
2009 G37 Coupe

A
BCS
O
JPMIA0062ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
BCS-49
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + 1 (W) 2 (Y) 3 (O) Ground Ground Ground Description Signal name Battery power supply P/W power supply (BAT) P/W power supply (RAP) Input/ Output Input Output Output Condition Value (Approx.) Battery voltage 12 V 12 V 0V
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON Interior room lamp battery saver is activated. (Cuts the interior room lamp power supply)
4 (LG)
Ground
Interior room lamp power supply
Output
Interior room lamp battery saver is not activated. (Outputs the interior room lamp power supply) Passenger door UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) Other than UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated) ON OFF LOCK (Actuator is activated) Other than LOCK (Actuator is not activated) UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) Other than UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated)
12 V
5 (P)
Ground
Passenger door UNLOCK
12 V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V 12 V 0V Battery voltage 0V 0V NOTE: When the illumination brightening/dimming level is in the neutral position.
Output
7 (SB)
Ground
Step lamp
Output
Step lamp
8 (V)
Ground
All doors, fuel lid LOCK
Output
All doors, fuel lid
9 (G) 11 (R) 13 (B)
Ground
Driver door, fuel lid UNLOCK
Output
Driver door, fuel lid
Ground Ground
Battery power supply Ground
Input
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON OFF
14 (W)
Ground
Push-button ignition switch illumination ground
Output
Tail lamp
ON
JSNIA0010GB
15 (O)
Ground
ACC indicator lamp
Output
Ignition switch
OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated) ACC
Battery voltage 0V
BCS-50
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Turn signal switch OFF Value (Approx.) 0V
17 (W)
Ground
Turn signal RH (Front)
Output
Ignition switch ON
C
D
PKID0926E
6.5 V Turn signal switch OFF 0V
18 (O)
Ground
Turn signal LH (Front)
Output
Ignition switch ON
F
G
PKID0926E
6.5 V 19 (V) Ground Room lamp timer control Output Interior room lamp OFF ON Turn signal switch OFF 12 V 0V 0V
20 (V)
Ground
Turn signal RH (Rear)
Output
Ignition switch ON
PKID0926E
6.5 V OPEN (Trunk lid opener actuator is activated) Other than OPEN (Trunk lid opener actuator is not activated) Turn signal switch OFF 12 V
23 (L)
Ground
Trunk lid open
Output
Trunk lid
0V 0V
BCS
N
25 (Y) Ignition switch ON
Ground
Turn signal LH (Rear)
Output
PKID0926E
6.5 V 30 (P) Ground Trunk room lamp Output Trunk room lamp ON OFF 0V 12 V
BCS-51
2009 G37 Coupe


JMKIA0062GB
34 (SB)
Ground
Trunk room antenna ()
Output
Ignition switch OFF

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB
35 (V)
Ground
Trunk room antenna (+)
Output
Ignition switch OFF

JMKIA0063GB
38 (B)
Ground
Rear bumper antenna ()
Output
BCS-52
2009 G37 Coupe

B
39 (W)
Ground
Rear bumper antenna (+)
Output
47 (Y)
Ground
Ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control
Output
Ignition switch
OFF or ACC ON
12 V 0V
50 (R)
Ground
Input
OFF (Trunk lid is closed)
JPMIA0011GB
11.8 V ON (Trunk lid is opened) Ignition switch ON (A/T models) 52 (SB) Ground Starter relay control Output Ignition switch ON (M/T models) When selector lever is in P or N position When selector lever is not in P or N position When the clutch pedal is depressed When the clutch pedal is not depressed ON (Pressed) 0V 12 V 0V
L
Battery voltage 0V 0V
BCS
N
61 (SB) Trunk lid opener request switch Trunk lid opener request switch
Ground
Input
OFF (Not pressed)
JPMIA0016GB
1.0 V 64 (L) Ground Intelligent Key warning buzzer (Engine room) Output Intelligent Key warning buzzer (Engine room) Sounding Not sounding 0V 12 V
BCS-53
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Pressed Value (Approx.) 0V
67 (GR)
Ground
Input
Not pressed
JPMIA0011GB
11.8 V

JMKIA0062GB
72 (R)
Ground
Room antenna 2 () (Center console)
Output
Ignition switch OFF

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB
73 (G)
Ground
Room antenna 2 (+) (Center console)
Output
Ignition switch OFF

JMKIA0063GB
BCS-54
2009 G37 Coupe

B
74 (SB)
Ground
Passenger door antenna ()
Output
75 (BR)
Ground
Passenger door antenna (+)
Output
BCS
76 (V)
Ground
Driver door antenna ()
Output
BCS-55
2009 G37 Coupe

77 (LG)
Ground
Driver door antenna (+)
Output

JMKIA0062GB
78 (Y)
Ground
Room antenna 1 () (Instrument panel)
Output
Ignition switch OFF

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB
79 (BR)
Ground
Room antenna 1 (+) (Instrument panel)
Output
Ignition switch OFF

JMKIA0063GB
BCS-56
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + 80 (GR) 81 (W) 82 (R) Ground Description Signal name NATS antenna amp (Built in key slot) NATS antenna amp (Built in key slot) Ignition relay [Fuse block (J/B)] control Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Output During waiting Condition Ignition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelligent Key into the key slot. Ignition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelligent Key into the key slot. OFF or ACC ON Value (Approx.) Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should move. Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should move. 0V 12 V
Ground
During waiting
Ground
Ignition switch
E
During waiting
F
JMKIA0064GB
83 (Y)
Ground
Remote keyless entry receiver communication
Input/ Output
When operating either button on the Intelligent Key
JMKIA0065GB
J
K
JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
BCS
87 (Y) Ground Combination switch INPUT 5 Input Combination switch Front fog lamp switch ON (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
N
JPMIA0037GB
1.3 V
O
Any of the conditions below with all switches OFF Wiper intermittent dial 1 Wiper intermittent dial 2 Wiper intermittent dial 6 Wiper intermittent dial 7
JPMIA0040GB
1.3 V
BCS-57
2009 G37 Coupe

JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch HI (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0036GB
88 (O)
Ground
Input
Combination switch
1.3 V
Lighting switch 2ND (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0037GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0040GB
1.3 V 89 (BR) 90 (P) 91 (L) Ground Push-button ignition switch (Push switch) CAN-L CAN-H Input Input/ Output Input/ Output Push-button ig- Pressed nition switch Not pressed (push switch) OFF 0V Battery voltage 0V
Ground Ground
92 (LG)
Ground
Output
Blinking
JPMIA0015GB
6.5 V ON 12 V
BCS-58
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + 93 (Y) 95 (O) 96 (GR) 97 (L) 98 (P) Ground Description Signal name Input/ Output Output Ignition switch Condition OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated) ON Ground ACC relay control A/T shift selector (Detention switch) power supply Steering lock condition No. 1 Steering lock condition No. 2 Selector lever P position switch ASCD clutch switch (M/T models without ICC) Output Ignition switch OFF ACC or ON LOCK status UNLOCK status LOCK status UNLOCK status P position Any position other than P OFF (Clutch pedal is depressed) ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed) OFF (Clutch pedal is depressed) ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed) ON (Pressed) Value (Approx.) Battery voltage 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V
ON indicator lamp
Ground
Output
Ground
Input
Steering lock
Ground
Input
Steering lock
Selector lever
99 (R)
Ground
Input
ASCD clutch switch
H
0V 12 V 0V
ICC clutch switch (M/ T models with ICC)
ICC clutch switch
J
100 (Y) Ground Passenger door request switch Input Passenger door request switch
OFF (Not pressed)
JPMIA0016GB
1.0 V ON (Pressed) 0V
BCS
101 (P) Driver door request switch Driver door request switch
Ground
Input
OFF (Not pressed)
JPMIA0016GB
1.0 V 102 (O) 103 (LG) 106 (W) Ground Blower fan motor relay control Remote keyless entry receiver power supply Steering lock unit power supply Output Ignition switch OFF or ACC ON 0V 12 V 12 V 12 V 0V
Ground
Output
Ignition switch OFF OFF or ACC ON
Ground
Output
Ignition switch
BCS-59
2009 G37 Coupe

All switches OFF
JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
JPMIA0037GB
1.3 V
107 (LG)
Ground
Input
JPMIA0036GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0038GB
1.3 V
Front washer switch ON
JPMIA0039GB
1.3 V
BCS-60
2009 G37 Coupe

B
JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
E
Lighting switch AUTO (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
F
JPMIA0038GB
108 (R)
Ground
Input
Combination switch
1.3 V
Lighting switch 1ST (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0036GB
1.3 V
J
JPMIA0039GB
1.3 V
BCS
BCS-61
2009 G37 Coupe

All switches OFF
JPMIA0041GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch PASS
JPMIA0037GB
1.3 V
109 (W)
Ground
Input
Lighting switch 2ND
JPMIA0036GB
1.3 V
Front wiper switch INT
JPMIA0038GB
1.3 V
Front wiper switch HI
JPMIA0040GB
1.3 V ON 0V
110 (G)
Ground
Hazard switch
Input
Hazard switch
OFF
JPMIA0012GB
1.1 V
BCS-62
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition LOCK status Value (Approx.) 12 V
C
LOCK or UNLOCK 111 (Y) Ground Steering lock unit communication Input/ Output Steering lock
D
JMKIA0066GB
For 15 seconds after UNLOCK 15 seconds or later after UNLOCK 113 (O) Ignition switch ON When bright outside of the vehicle When dark outside of the vehicle OFF (Clutch pedal is not depressed) ON (Clutch pedal is depressed) OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed) ON (Brake pedal is depressed)
12 V 0V
F
Close to 5 V Close to 0 V 0V
Ground
Optical sensor
Input
114 (R) 116 (SB)
Ground
Input
H
Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V
Ground
Stop lamp switch 1
Input
Stop lamp switch 2 (Without ICC) 118 (BR) Ground Stop lamp switch 2 (With ICC) Input
Stop lamp switch
J
Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage
Stop lamp switch OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed) and ICC brake hold relay OFF Stop lamp switch ON (Brake pedal is depressed) or ICC brake hold relay ON
119 (SB)
Ground
Driver side door lock assembly (Unlock sensor)
Input
Driver door
LOCK status (Unlock sensor switch OFF)

JPMIA0012GB
BCS
1.1 V UNLOCK status (Unlock switch sensor ON) 121 (SB) When the Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot When the Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot Ignition switch OFF or ACC ON 0V
12 V
Ground
Key slot switch
Input
P
0V 0V Battery voltage
123 (W)
Ground
IGN feedback
Input
BCS-63
2009 G37 Coupe

124 (LG)
Ground
Input
OFF (Door close)
JPMIA0011GB
11.8 V ON (Door open) 0V
129 (O)
Ground
Input
CANCEL
JPMIA0012GB
1.1 V ON 0V
132 (V)
Ground
Power window switch communication
Input/ Output
Ignition switch ON
JPMIA0013GB
10.2 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC ON (Tail lamps OFF) 12 V 9.5 V NOTE: The pulse width of this wave is varied by the illumination brightening/dimming level. 133 (L) Ground Push-button ignition switch illumination Output Push-button ignition switch il- ON (Tail lamps ON) lumination
JPMIA0159GB
OFF 134 (LG) 137 (O) 138 (V) Ground Ground Ground LOCK indicator lamp Receiver and sensor ground Receiver and sensor power supply Output Input Output LOCK indicator lamp OFF ON
0V Battery voltage 0V 0V 0V 5.0 V
Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF ACC or ON
BCS-64
2009 G37 Coupe

B
Standby state
139 (L)
Ground
Tire pressure receiver communication
Input/ Output
Ignition switch ON
OCC3881D
When receiving the signal from the transmitter
F
OCC3880D
140 (GR)
Ground
Selector lever P/N position (A/T models)
Input
Selector lever
P or N position Except P and N positions ON
12 V 0V 0V
H
141 (R) Security indicator
Ground
Security indicator
Output
Blinking
I
JPMIA0014GB
11.3 V OFF All switches OFF Lighting switch 1ST Combination switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Lighting switch HI Lighting switch 2ND 12 V 0V
142 (BR)
Ground
Output

JPMIA0031GB
BCS
10.7 V
All switches OFF (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Front wiper switch HI (Wiper intermittent dial 4) 143 (V) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 1 Output Combination switch Any of the conditions below with all switches OFF Wiper intermittent dial 1 Wiper intermittent dial 2 Wiper intermittent dial 3 Wiper intermittent dial 6 Wiper intermittent dial 7
0V
P
JPMIA0032GB
10.7 V
BCS-65
2009 G37 Coupe

Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition All switches OFF (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Front washer switch ON (Wiper intermittent dial 4) 144 (G) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 2 Output Combination switch Any of the conditions below with all switches OFF Wiper intermittent dial 1 Wiper intermittent dial 5 Wiper intermittent dial 6 10.7 V All switches OFF Front wiper switch INT Combination switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Front wiper switch LO 0V Value (Approx.) 0V
JPMIA0033GB
145 (L)
Ground
Output
Lighting switch AUTO

JPMIA0034GB
10.7 V All switches OFF Front fog lamp switch ON Combination switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4) Lighting switch 2ND Lighting switch PASS 0V
146 (SB)
Ground
Output

JPMIA0035GB
10.7 V 149 (W) Ground Tire pressure warning check switch Input 12 V
150 (R)
Ground
Driver door switch
Input
Driver door switch
OFF (Door close)
JPMIA0011GB
11.8 V ON (Door open) 151 (G) Ground Rear window defogger relay control Output Rear window defogger Active Not activated 0V 0V Battery voltage
BCS-66
2009 G37 Coupe

Wiring Diagram - BCM -
INFOID:0000000004469870
BCS
JCMWM3046GB
BCS-67
2009 G37 Coupe

JCMWM3047GB
BCS-68
2009 G37 Coupe

A
BCS
O
JCMWM3048GB
BCS-69
2009 G37 Coupe

JCMWM3049GB
BCS-70
2009 G37 Coupe

A
BCS
O
JCMWM3050GB
BCS-71
2009 G37 Coupe

JCMWM3051GB
Fail-safe
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.
INFOID:0000000004469871
BCS-72
2009 G37 Coupe

Display contents of CONSULT B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM B2195: ANTI SCANNING B2557: VEHICLE SPEED Fail-safe Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit steering lock Erase DTC Erase DTC Erase DTC Erase DTC Erase DTC Erase DTC Ignition switch ON OFF When normal vehicle speed signals are received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 500 ms 500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status becomes consistent Starter control relay signal Starter relay status signal 500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consistent Selector lever P position switch signal P range signal (CAN) 5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Ignition switch is in the ON position Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery voltage) Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more 500 ms after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Ignition switch is in the ON position Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery voltage) Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V) 500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Status 1 - Ignition switch is in the ON position - Selector lever P/N position signal: P and N position (battery voltage) - P range signal or N range signal (CAN): ON Status 2 - Ignition switch is in the ON position - Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V) - P range signal and N range signal (CAN): OFF 500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Status 1 - Ignition switch is in the ON position - Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V) - Interlock/PNP switch signal (CAN): OFF Status 2 - Ignition switch is in the ON position - Selector lever P/N position signal: P or N position (battery voltage) - PNP switch signal (CAN): ON 500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status becomes consistent Steering lock relay signal (Request signal) Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal) Cancellation
B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY
B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS
B2604: PNP SW
BCS
B2605: PNP SW
B2606: S/L RELAY
BCS-73
2009 G37 Coupe

Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation 500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status has becomes consistent Steering lock relay signal (Request signal) Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal) 500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent Starter motor relay control signal Starter relay status signal (CAN) When the following steering lock conditions agree BCM steering lock control status Steering lock condition No. 1 signal status Steering lock condition No. 2 signal status 500 ms after the following conditions are fulfilled IGN relay (IPDM E/R) control signal: OFF (Battery voltage) Ignition ON signal (CAN to IPDM E/R): OFF (Request signal) Ignition ON signal (CAN from IPDM E/R): OFF (Condition signal) When any of the following conditions are fulfilled Power position changes to ACC Receives engine status signal (CAN) When any of the following conditions are fulfilled Steering lock unit status signal (CAN) is received normally The BCM steering lock control status matches the steering lock status recognized by the steering lock unit status signal (CAN from IPDM E/R) 1 second after the starter motor relay control inside BCM becomes normal 1 second after the ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control inside BCM becomes normal 1 second after the steering lock unit power supply output control inside BCM becomes normal BCM initialization When any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled Status 1 - Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): ON - Clutch interlock switch signal: OFF (0 V) Status 2 - Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): OFF - Clutch interlock switch signal: ON (Battery voltage) When BCM transmits the LOCK request signal to steering lock unit, and receives LOCK response signal from steering lock unit, the following conditions are fulfilled Steering condition No. 1 signal: LOCK (0 V) Steering condition No. 2 signal: LOCK (Battery voltage)
B2607: S/L RELAY
B2608: STARTER RELAY
B2609: S/L STATUS
B260A: IGNITION RELAY
B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST
Maintains the power supply position attained at the time of DTC detection
B2612: S/L STATUS
B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC B2618: BCM B2619: BCM B261E: VEHICLE TYPE
Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking Inhibit engine cranking
B26E8: CLUTCH SW
B26E9: S/L STATUS
HIGH FLASHER OPERATION

BCM detects the turn signal lamp circuit status by the current value. BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or harness open is detected with the turn signal lamp operating. NOTE: The blinking speed is normal while activating the hazard warning lamp.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
INFOID:0000000004469872
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart.
BCS-74
2009 G37 Coupe

Priority 1 2 B2562: LOW VOLTAGE U1000: CAN COMM U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM B2195: ANTI SCANNING B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM B2553: IGNITION RELAY B2555: STOP LAMP B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B2557: VEHICLE SPEED B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY B2601: SHIFT POSITION B2602: SHIFT POSITION B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS B2604: PNP SW B2605: PNP SW B2606: S/L RELAY B2607: S/L RELAY B2608: STARTER RELAY B2609: S/L STATUS B260A: IGNITION RELAY B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST B2612: S/L STATUS B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC B2618: BCM B2619: BCM B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B261E: VEHICLE TYPE B26E8: CLUTCH SW B26E9: S/L STATUS B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG DTC
BCS
BCS-75
2009 G37 Coupe

Priority C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL C1708: [NO DATA] FL C1709: [NO DATA] FR C1710: [NO DATA] RR C1711: [NO DATA] RL C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL C1720: [CODE ERR] FL C1721: [CODE ERR] FR C1722: [CODE ERR] RR C1723: [CODE ERR] RL C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL C1734: CONTROL UNIT DTC
B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA

INFOID:0000000004469873
DTC Index
NOTE: The details of time display are as follows. CRNT: A malfunction is detected now. PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past. IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to BCS-14, "COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".
Freeze Frame Data Vehicle Speed Odo/Trip Meter Vehicle condition Tire pressure monitor warning lamp ON
CONSULT display
Fail-safe
Intelligent Key warning lamp ON
Reference page
No DTC is detected. further testing may be required. U1000: CAN COMM U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM B2195: ANTI SCANNING B2553: IGNITION RELAY B2555: STOP LAMP
BCS-35 BCS-36 BCS-37 SEC-55 SEC-56 SEC-47 SEC-50 SEC-51 SEC-53 SEC-54 PCS-48 SEC-59
BCS-76
2009 G37 Coupe

CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data Vehicle Speed Odo/Trip Meter Vehicle condition Intelligent Key warning lamp ON (Turn ON for 15 seconds) (Turn ON for 15 seconds) (Turn ON for 15 seconds) Tire pressure monitor warning lamp ON WT-17 Reference page SEC-61 SEC-63 SEC-64 BCS-38 SEC-65 SEC-68 SEC-70 SEC-73 SEC-75 SEC-77 SEC-78 SEC-80 SEC-82 PCS-50 SEC-86 SEC-87 SEC-88 SEC-89 SEC-94 PCS-52 PCS-54 PCS-56 SEC-98 PCS-58 SEC-100 PCS-59
B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B2557: VEHICLE SPEED B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY B2562: LOW VOLTAGE B2601: SHIFT POSITION B2602: SHIFT POSITION B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS B2604: PNP SW B2605: PNP SW B2606: S/L RELAY B2607: S/L RELAY B2608: STARTER RELAY B2609: S/L STATUS B260A: IGNITION RELAY B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST B2612: S/L STATUS B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC B2618: BCM B2619: BCM B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B261E: VEHICLE TYPE B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA B26E8: CLUTCH SW B26E9: S/L STATUS B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL
L
SEC-101 DLK-55 DLK-57 DLK-59 SEC-90 SEC-92 SEC-93
BCS
BCS-77
2009 G37 Coupe

CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data Vehicle Speed Odo/Trip Meter Vehicle condition Intelligent Key warning lamp ON Tire pressure monitor warning lamp ON WT-32 WT-33 WT-29 WT-26 WT-24 WT-21 WT-19 Reference page
C1708: [NO DATA] FL C1709: [NO DATA] FR C1710: [NO DATA] RR C1711: [NO DATA] RL C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL C1720: [CODE ERR] FL C1721: [CODE ERR] FR C1722: [CODE ERR] RR C1723: [CODE ERR] RL C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR C1734: CONTROL UNIT
BCS-78
2009 G37 Coupe
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table
1. 2. Perform Data Monitor of CONSULT-III to check for any malfunctioning item. Check the malfunction combinations.
Malfunction item:
INFOID:0000000004469874
Data monitor item HEAD LAMP SW 1 HEAD LAMP SW 2 AUTO LIGHT SW FR WASHER SW TURN SIGNAL R TURN SIGNAL L FR WIPER LOW TAIL LAMP SW FR WIPER INT PASSING SW FR WIPER HI INT VOLUME HI BEAM SW
D
FR FOG SW
Malfunction combination
A B C D E F G H I J K L
H
All Items
If only one item is detected or the item is not applicable to the combinations A to K
3.
Identify the malfunctioning part from the agreed combination and repair or replace the part.
Malfunction combination A B C D E F G H I J K L Malfunctioning part Combination switch INPUT 1 circuit Combination switch INPUT 2 circuit Combination switch INPUT 3 circuit Combination switch INPUT 4 circuit Combination switch INPUT 5 circuit Combination switch OUTPUT 1 circuit Combination switch OUTPUT 2 circuit Combination switch OUTPUT 3 circuit Combination switch OUTPUT 4 circuit Combination switch OUTPUT 5 circuit BCM Combination switch Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View" Replace the combination switch. Inspect the combination switch output circuit applicable to the malfunctioning part. Refer to BCS-42, "Diagnosis Procedure". Inspect the combination switch input circuit applicable to the malfunctioning part. Refer to BCS-40, "Diagnosis Procedure". Repair or replace
BCS
BCS-79
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
INFOID:0000000004469875

Precaution for Battery Service
INFOID:0000000004469876
Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interference between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, the window slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automatic window function will not work with the battery disconnected.
BCS-80
2009 G37 Coupe


Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004469877
JPMIA0063ZZ
1.
BCM

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3. Remove dash side finisher (passenger side). Refer to INT-14, "Exploded View". Remove bolt and nut. Remove BCM and disconnect the connector.
H
INFOID:0000000004469878
INSTALLATION
K
BCS
BCS-81
2009 G37 Coupe
COMBINATION SWITCH
COMBINATION SWITCH
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004469879
JPLIA0050ZZ
1.
Combination switch
2.
Combination switch connector

INFOID:0000000004469880

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". Remove screws. Disconnect the connector. Pull up the combination switch to remove it.
INSTALLATION
BCS-82
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKES
SECTION
BRAKE SYSTEM
BR
CONTENTS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 4 .
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 4 .
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 . DISC ROTOR ............................................................15 . DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment ............16 .
BR
REAR DISC BRAKE ......................................... 17

BRAKE PAD .............................................................17 . BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment ..............17 . DISC ROTOR ............................................................17 . DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment ............17 .
PRECAUTION .............................................. 5 .
PRECAUTIONS .................................................. 5 .
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................. 5 . Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery Disconnect .................................... 5 . Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover 6 ...... Precaution for Brake System ................................... 6 .
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 19 .

BRAKE PEDAL ................................................. 19
Exploded View ........................................................19 . Removal and Installation ........................................19 . Inspection and Adjustment .....................................20 .
PREPARATION ........................................... 7 .
PREPARATION .................................................. 7 .
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 7 .
BRAKE PIPING ................................................. 21

FRONT ......................................................................21 . FRONT : Exploded View ........................................21 . FRONT : Hydraulic Piping ......................................22 . FRONT : Removal and Installation .........................23 . FRONT : Inspection ................................................25 . REAR ........................................................................25 . REAR : Exploded View ...........................................25 . REAR : Hydraulic Piping .........................................27 . REAR : Removal and Installation ...........................28 . REAR : Inspection ..................................................29 .
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................... 8 .

BRAKE PEDAL .................................................. 8 .
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................... 8 .
BRAKE FLUID ...................................................11 .

Inspection ............................................................... 11 . Draining .................................................................. 11 . Refilling .................................................................. 11 . Bleeding Brake System .......................................... 12 .
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .......................... 30

Exploded View ........................................................30 . Removal and Installation ........................................30 . Disassembly and Assembly ....................................31 . Inspection ...............................................................32 .
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ...........................13 .

Inspection ............................................................... 13 .
BRAKE BOOSTER ...........................................14 .

Inspection ............................................................... 14 .
BRAKE BOOSTER ........................................... 33

Exploded View ........................................................33 . Removal and installation ........................................33 . Inspection and Adjustment .....................................34 .
FRONT DISC BRAKE .......................................15 .

BRAKE PAD ............................................................. 15 . BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment ............. 15 .
BR-1
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR ...... 36 .

Exploded View ....................................................... 36 . Removal and Installation ....................................... 36 . Inspection .............................................................. 36 .
VACUUM LINES ............................................... 37 .

Exploded View ....................................................... 37 . Removal and Installation ....................................... 37 . Inspection .............................................................. 37 .
BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE)... 58 BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View .......................................... 58 . BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation .......................... 58 . BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ................................................. 59 . BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE)... 59 BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View .......................................... 60 . BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation .......................... 60 . BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ................................................. 61 . BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) .............................. 61 . BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View... 62 BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation ................................................................. 62 . BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ......... 64 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) ...................................................... 64 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View ................ 64 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation... 65 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly .......................................................................... 66 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ....................... 67 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) ...................................................... 68 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View ................ 68 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation... 69 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly .......................................................................... 70 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ....................... 72 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)... 72 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View ..................................................... 73 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation ...................................... 73 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 74 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ............................................................. 76 .
FRONT DISC BRAKE ....................................... 39 .

BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) .............................. 39 . BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View... 39 BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation ................................................................ 39 . BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ........ 40 . BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) .............................. 41 . BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View... 41 BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation ................................................................ 41 . BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ........ 42 . BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) .............................. 42 . BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View... 43 BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation ................................................................ 43 . BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ........ 45 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE)... 45 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View ..................................................... 45 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation ..................................... 46 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 47 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ............................................................ 48 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)... 49 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View ..................................................... 49 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation ..................................... 50 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 51 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ............................................................ 52 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE)... 53 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View ..................................................... 53 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation ..................................... 54 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 55 . BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ............................................................ 56 .
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......................................................... 77

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................ 77 .
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE ......................................... 58 .

BR-2
General Specifications ........................................... 77 . Brake Pedal ............................................................ 78 . Brake Booster ........................................................ 78 .
Front Disc Brake .....................................................78 . Rear Disc Brake .....................................................78 .
BR
BR-3
2009 G37 Coupe
Symptom
: Applicable Reference page Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS BRAKE

Noise Shake Pads - damaged Pads - uneven wear Shims damaged Rotor imbalance Rotor damage Rotor runout Rotor deformation Rotor deflection Rotor rust Rotor thickness variation Drum out of round PROPELLER SHAFT DIFFERENTIAL AXLE AND SUSPENSION TIRE ROAD WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT STEERING BR-15, BR-17 BR-15, BR-17 BR-42, BR-45, BR-59, BR-61, BR-64 BR-16, BR-17 BR-16, BR-17 BR-16, BR-17 BR-16, BR-17 BR-16, BR-17 BR-16, BR-17 BR-16, BR-17 NVH in PB section NVH in DLN section NHV in DLN section NVH in FAX, RAX and FSU, RSU section NVH in WT section NVH in WT section NVH in RAX section NVH in ST section
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Shimmy, Judder
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
BR-4

INFOID:0000000004500469
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
INFOID:0000000004685377
The Supplemental Restraint System such as AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER, used along C with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front D air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS AIR BAG and SEAT BELT of this Service Manual. WARNING: E To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. BR Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS AIR BAG. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery Disconnect

INFOID:0000000004685379
NOTE: Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the push-button ignition switch to the LOCK position, then disconnect both battery cables. After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both battery cables. Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results. For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be turned. If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation procedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Connect both battery cables. NOTE: Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged. Turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position. (At this time, the steering lock will be released.) Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables disconnected and the steering wheel can be turned. Perform the necessary repair operation.
2. 3. 4.
BR-5
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > 5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn the push-button ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.) 6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
INFOID:0000000004685380
PIIB3706J
Precaution for Brake System
INFOID:0000000004500473
WARNING: Clean any dust from the front brake and rear brake with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. Only use DOT 3 brake fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". Never reuse drained brake fluid. Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, check each item of brake pedal. Adjust brake pedal if it is outside the standard value. Always clean with new brake fluid when cleaning the master cylinder, brake caliper and other components. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause improper operation. Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench. Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut torque wrench (A). Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work. Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the parts. Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low JPFIA0061ZZ mileage. - Front brake pad: refer to BR-15, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment". - Front disc rotor: refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment". - Rear brake pad: refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment". - Rear disc rotor: refer to BR-17, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
BR-6
2009 G37 Coupe
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000004500474
Power tool
E
PBIC0190E
BR
BR-7
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
Brake Pedal Height Check the height (H1) between the dash lower panel (1) and the brake pedal upper surface.
INFOID:0000000004500475
Standard H1
: Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION: Remove the floor trim.
JPFIA0065ZZ
ASCD Brake Switch and Stop Lamp Switch Check the clearance (C1 and C2) among ASCD brake switch (1) threaded end, stop lamp switch (2) threaded end and the stopper rubber (3).
Standard C1 C2
: Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal". : Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION: The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released. NOTE: JPFIA0004ZZ Pull the brake pedal pad to make the clearance between the stop lamp switch threaded end and the stopper rubber. (The stopper rubber hits ASCD brake switch threaded end.)
Brake Pedal Play Press the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal play (A) (stroke until fluid pressure occurs).
Standard A
JPFIA0277ZZ
Brake Pedal Shaky Fitting Check the brake pedal shaky fitting (B) (the stroke when pulling the brake pedal pad slightly from the free play).
Standard B
JPFIA0278ZZ
BR-8
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PEDAL
Depressed Brake Pedal Height Check the height between the dash lower panel (1) and the brake pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake pedal at 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON. A
Standard H2

C
CAUTION: Remove the floor trim.

JPFIA0068ZZ
ADJUSTMENT
Brake Pedal Height E
1. 2. 3. 4.
Disconnect the harness connector from ASCD brake switch and stop lamp switch. Turn the stop lamp switch 45 counterclockwise. Loosen ASCD brake switch lock nut. Turn ASCD brake switch counterclockwise. Loosen the input rod lock nut (1). Adjust the brake pedal to the specification. Tighten the input lock nut to the specification. Refer to BR-33, "Exploded View". CAUTION: The threaded end of the input rod (2) must project to the inner side (L) of the clevis (3).
BR
I
JPFIA0003ZZ
Standard H1
M
JPFIA0279ZZ
ASCD Brake Switch and Stop Lamp Switch
1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
Disconnect the harness connector from ASCD brake switch and stop lamp switch. Turn the stop lamp switch 45 counterclockwise. Loosen ASCD brake switch lock nut. Turn ASCD brake switch counterclockwise. Press the brake pedal pad slightly. Release the brake pedal. Turn ASCD brake switch (1) until ASCD brake switch threaded end hits to the stopper rubber (2) clockwise. CAUTION: Never press-fit the input rod. Tighten ASCD brake switch lock nut (3) to the specification. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View". CAUTION: The clearance (C1) between the stopper rubber and the ASCD brake switch threaded end must be the specified value. Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal".
JPFIA0071ZZ
BR-9
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 6. Press-fit the stop lamp switch (4) until the stop lamp switch hits the stopper rubber 45 clockwise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly. (ASCD brake switch threaded end hits the stopper rubber.) CAUTION: The clearance (C2) between the stopper rubber and the stop lamp switch threaded end must be the specified value. Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal". The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released.
Brake Pedal Play
1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the harness connector from ASCD brake switch and stop lamp switch. Turn the stop lamp switch 45 counterclockwise. Loosen ASCD brake switch lock nut. Turn ASCD brake switch counterclockwise. Press the brake pedal pad slightly. Release the brake pedal. Turn ASCD brake switch (1) until ASCD brake switch threaded end hits to the stopper rubber (2) clockwise. CAUTION: Never press-fit the input rod. Tighten ASCD brake switch lock nut (3) to the specification. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View". CAUTION: The clearance (C1) between the stopper rubber and the ASCD brake switch threaded end must be the specified value. Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal". JPFIA0071ZZ Press-fit the stop lamp switch (4) until the stop lamp switch hits the stopper rubber 45 clockwise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly. (ASCD brake switch threaded end hits the stopper rubber.) CAUTION: The clearance (C2) between the stopper rubber and the stop lamp switch threaded end must be the specified value. Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal". The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released. Disconnect the harness connector from ASCD brake switch and stop lamp switch. Turn the stop lamp switch 45 counterclockwise. Loosen ASCD brake switch lock nut. Turn ASCD brake switch counterclockwise. Press the brake pedal pad slightly. Release the brake pedal. Turn ASCD brake switch (1) until ASCD brake switch threaded end hits to the stopper rubber (2) clockwise. CAUTION: Never press-fit the input rod. Tighten ASCD brake switch lock nut (3) to the specification. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View". CAUTION: The clearance (C1) between the stopper rubber and the ASCD brake switch threaded end must be the specified value. Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal". JPFIA0071ZZ Press-fit the stop lamp switch (4) until the stop lamp switch hits the stopper rubber 45 clockwise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly. (ASCD brake switch threaded end hits the stopper rubber.) CAUTION: The clearance (C2) between the stopper rubber and the stop lamp switch threaded end must be the specified value. Refer to BR-78, "Brake Pedal". The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released.
Brake Pedal Shaky Fitting
1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
BR-10
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
Inspection
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range (MAX MIN lines). Visually check for any brake fluid leakage around the reservoir tank. Check the brake system for any leakage if the fluid level is extremely low (lower than MIN). Check the brake system for fluid leakage if the warning lamp remains illuminated even after the parking brake is released.
INFOID:0000000004500476
E
JPFIA0007ZZ
BRAKE LINE
1. 2. Check brake line (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. Check for fluid leakage by fully depressing brake pedal while engine is running. CAUTION: If leakage occurs around joints, retighten or, if necessary, replace damaged parts.
BR
SBR389C
Draining
INFOID:0000000004500477
CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleed valve. 2. Depress the brake pedal and loosen the bleeder valve to gradually discharge brake fluid.
O
BRA0007D
Refilling
INFOID:0000000004500478
CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work. 1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid.
BR-11
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the full stroke, and then release the pedal. Repeat this operation at intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new brake fluid is discharged. Then close the bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed. Repeat the same work on each wheel. 3. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System".
Bleeding Brake System
INFOID:0000000004500479
CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work. Monitor the fluid level in the reservoir tank while performing the air bleeding Always use new brake fluid for refilling. Never reuse the drained brake fluid. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve of the rear right brake. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 3. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the bleeder valve. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all of the air is out of the brake line. 5. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque. Front disc brake - 1 piston type: refer to BR-45, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". - 2 piston type: refer to BR-49, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". - 4 piston type: refer to BR-53, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Rear disc brake - 1 piston (front caliper 1 piston) type: refer to BR-64, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". - 1 piston (front caliper 2 piston) type: refer to BR-68, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". - 2 piston type: refer to BR-73, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 for the rear right brake front left brake rear left brake and front right brake in order. 7. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR11, "Inspection". 8. Check each item of brake pedal. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".
BR-12
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER


Inspection
FLUID LEAK
Check for brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder mounting face, reservoir tank mounting face and brake tube connections.
INFOID:0000000004500480
BR
BR-13
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE BOOSTER
BRAKE BOOSTER
Inspection
OPERATION
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases. NOTE: A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due to the brake system operation.
INFOID:0000000004500481
BRA0037D
AIR TIGHT
Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine. Then depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually increases (A B C) each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation.
JPFIA0043ZZ
Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 seconds or more. NOTE: A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due to the brake system operation.
JPFIA0044ZZ
BR-14
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

FRONT DISC BRAKE

BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
1 Piston Type Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder body. Check using a scale if necessary.
INFOID:0000000004500482
Limit Wear thickness
: Refer to BR-78, "Front Disc Brake".
BR
BRA0010D

I
MAA0439D
4 Piston Type Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on caliper. Check using a scale if necessary.
PFIA0228J
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION: Burnish contact surfaces between pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pads and disc rotor are securely fitted. Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
O
DISC ROTOR
BR-15
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment

INSPECTION
INFOID:0000000004500483
Appearance Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Runout
1. 2.
3.
Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with wheel nuts (2 points at least). Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection. Refer to FAX-5, "Inspection" (2WD), FAX-14, "Inspection" (AWD). Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge. Limit Runout
BRA0580D
4.
5.
Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shifting the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing assembly installation position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value. Refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above operation. [When refinishing, use the Pro-Cut PEM On-Car brake Lathe (Tool No. 38-PFM90.5) or equivalent.] CAUTION: Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or more. If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor. Limit Wear thickness
Thickness Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace the disc rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit.
Limit Wear thickness Thickness variation
: Refer to BR-78, "Front Disc Brake". : Refer to BR-78, "Front Disc Brake".
SBR020B
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION: Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted. Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
BR-16
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

REAR DISC BRAKE

BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
INFOID:0000000004500484
: Refer to BR-78, "Rear Disc Brake".
BR
BRA0010D
2 Piston Type Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on caliper. Check using a scale if necessary.

I
PFIA0227J
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION: Burnish contact surfaces between pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pads and disc rotor are securely fitted. Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
K
DISC ROTOR
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
Appearance Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Runout
INFOID:0000000004500485
BR-17
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 1. Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with wheel nuts (2 points at least). 2. Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection. Refer to RAX-5, "Inspection". 3. Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside disc edge.
Limit Runout 4. 5.
BRA0697D
Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shifting the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing assembly installation position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value. Refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above operation. [When refinishing, use the Pro-Cut PEM On-Car brake Lathe (Tool No. 38-PFM90.5) or equivalent.] CAUTION: Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.12 in) or more. If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor. Limit Wear thickness
Thickness Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace the disc rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit.
Limit Wear thickness Thickness variation
: Refer to BR-78, "Rear Disc Brake". : Refer to BR-78, "Rear Disc Brake".
SFIA2284E
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION: Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted. Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
BR-18
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PEDAL

BRAKE PEDAL
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500486
BR
JPFIA0475GB
1. 4. 7.
Brake pedal stroke sensor (with precrash seat belt) Brake pedal pad Lock nut : Apply multi-purpose grease.
2. 5. 8.
Clevis pin Clip ASCD brake switch
3. 6. 9.
Brake pedal assembly Snap pin Stop lamp switch
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
L
INFOID:0000000004500487

REMOVAL
1. 2.
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". Remove steering column assembly. Refer to ST-18, "WITHOUT ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View" (without electric motor), ST-21, "WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR : Exploded View" (with electric motor). 3. Disconnect the stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch harness connectors. 4. Disconnect the brake pedal stroke sensor harness connector. (With pre-crash seat belt) CAUTION: Never removing brake pedal stroke sensor. (With pre-crash seat belt) 5. Turn the stop lamp switch counterclockwise to remove the stop lamp switch. 6. Loosen the lock nut for the ASCD brake switch and remove the ASCD brake switch. 7. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from clevis of brake booster. 8. Remove the cowl top. Refer to EXT-21, "Exploded View". 9. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". 10. Slide the steering member rearward. Refer to HA-50, "Exploded View".
BR-19
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 11. Remove the brake pedal assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and installation in the reverse order of removal. Apply the multi-purpose grease to the clevis pin and the mating faces. (Not necessary if grease has been already applied) NOTE: The clevis pin may be inserted in either direction.

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items and replace the brake pedal assembly if necessary. - Check the brake pedal upper rivet (made by aluminum) (A) for deformation. - Check the brake pedal for bend, damage, and cracks on the welded parts. - Check the lapping length (X) of sub-bracket (B) and slide plate (C). Standard X
INFOID:0000000004500488
: 5.0 mm (0.197 in) or more

JPFIA0321ZZ
Check clevis pin and plastic stopper (A) for damage and deformation. If any damage is found, replace clevis pin.
PFIA0756J
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

Perform the brake pedal adjustment after installing the brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".
BR-20
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
BRAKE PIPING
FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View
1 PISTON AND 2 PISTON TYPE
INFOID:0000000004500489
BR
K
JPFIA0008GB
1. 4. 7. A.
Brake tube Brake booster Union bolt To rear brake tube
2. 5. 8. B.
Connector ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Brake hose To front brake hose
3. 6. 9. C.
Master cylinder Lock plate Copper washer To front brake tube
10. Brake hose bracket
11. Brake tube
4 PISTON TYPE
O
BR-21
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
JPFIA0227GB
1. 4. 7. A.
Brake tube Brake booster Brake tube To rear brake tube
2. 5. 8. B.
Connector ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Brake hose bracket To front brake hose
3. 6. 9. C.
Master cylinder Lock plate Brake hose To front brake tube
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping

1 PISTON AND 2 PISTON TYPE
INFOID:0000000004500490
JPFIA0373ZZ
BR-22
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
1. 4. A. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Brake booster Brake hose : Flare nut : Union bolt 2. 5. B. Front disc brake Connector Brake tube 3. 6. Master cylinder Rear disc brake
4 PISTON TYPE
BR
JPFIA0374ZZ
1. 4. A.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Brake booster Brake hose : Flare nut
2. 5. B.
Front disc brake Connector Brake tube
3. 6.
Master cylinder Rear disc brake
FRONT : Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004500491
1 Piston and 2 Piston Type CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". 3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the hose. CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and tubes. Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 4. Remove the union bolt and copper washers, and remove the brake hose from the brake caliper assembly. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting nut. 6. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose. 4 Piston Type CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
BR-23
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". 3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the hose and caliper. CAUTION: Cover flare nut wrench with a cloth as not to damage the caliper. Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and tubes. Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 4. Remove the brake tube mounting bolt and remove the brake tube. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting nut. 6. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose.
INSTALLATION
1 Piston Type CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Assemble the union bolt and the copper washer to the brake hose. CAUTION: Never reuse the copper washer. 2. Align the brake hose pin to the projection (A) of the brake caliper assembly and tighten the union bolt (1) to the specified torque. 3. Install the brake tube to the brake hose, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate. CAUTION: Check that all brake hoses and tubes are not twisted and bent. 4. Tighten the brake hose mounting nuts to the specified torque. CAUTION: JPFIA0099ZZ Never reuse the brake hose mounting nuts. 5. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut torque wrench. CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. 6. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. 2 Piston Type CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Assemble the union bolt and the copper washer to the brake hose. CAUTION: Never reuse the copper washer. 2. Align the brake hose pin to the projection (A) of the brake caliper assembly and tighten the union bolt (1) to the specified torque. 3. Install the brake tube to the brake hose, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate. CAUTION: Check that all brake hoses and tubes are not twisted and bent. 4. Tighten the brake hose mounting nuts to the specified torque. CAUTION: JPFIA0011ZZ Never reuse the brake hose mounting nuts.
BR-24
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut torque wrench. CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. 6. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid.
4 Piston Type CAUTION: C Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Install the brake tube to the brake hose and caliper, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it dose D not rotate further, and fix the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate. CAUTION: Check that all brake hoses and tubes are not twisted and bent. E 2. Tighten the brake hose mounting nuts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never reuse the brake hose mounting nuts. BR 3. Tighten the brake tube mounting bolt to the specified torque. 4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut torque wrench. CAUTION: G Cover flare nut wrench with a cloth as not to damage the caliper. Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. 5. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: H Never reuse drained brake fluid.
FRONT : Inspection
1. 2.
INFOID:0000000004500492
Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interference with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections. Depress the brake pedal and hold down the pedal for approximately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage. Standard The force applied to the brake pedal
: 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb)
CAUTION: Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present.
REAR
REAR : Exploded View
1 PISTON TYPE
INFOID:0000000004500493
BR-25
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
JPFIA0437GB
1. 4. A.
Brake tube Brake hose To connector
2. 5. B.
Brake hose bracket Union bolt To rear brake hose
3. 6. C.
Lock plate Copper washer To rear brake tube
2 PISTON TYPE
JPFIA0237GB
BR-26
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
1. 4. A. Brake tube Brake hose bracket To connector B. To rear brake hose C. To rear brake tube 2. Lock plate 3. Brake hose
B
INFOID:0000000004500494
REAR : Hydraulic Piping

1 PISTON TYPE
BR
JPFIA0373ZZ
I
1. 4. A. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Brake booster Brake hose : Flare nut : Union bolt 2. 5. B. Front disc brake Connector Brake tube 3. 6. Master cylinder Rear disc brake
2 PISTON TYPE
L
JPFIA0374ZZ
BR-27
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
1. 4. A. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Brake booster Brake hose : Flare nut 2. 5. B. Front disc brake Connector Brake tube 3. 6. Master cylinder Rear disc brake
REAR : Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004500495
1 Piston Type CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". 3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the hose. CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. Never sharply bend, twist or strongly pull the brake hoses and tubes. Cover the open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 4. Remove the union bolt and remove the brake hose from the brake caliper assembly. 5. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose from the vehicle. 2 Piston Type CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". 3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the hose and caliper. CAUTION: Cover flare nut wrench with a cloth as not to damage the caliper. Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. Never sharply bend, twist or strongly pull the brake hoses and tubes. Cover the open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 4. Remove brake hose mounting bolt. 5. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1 Piston Type CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Assemble the union bolt and the copper washer to the brake hose. CAUTION: Never reuse copper washer.
BR-28
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Install the brake hose L-pin by aligning it with the brake caliper assembly positioning hole, and tighten the union bolt (1) to the specified torque. 3. Connect the hose to the brake tube, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate. CAUTION: Check that the brake hoses and tubes are not twisted and bent. 4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut JPFIA0012ZZ torque wrench. CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. 5. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid.
2 Piston Type BR CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Connect the hose to the brake tube, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate fur- G ther, and fix the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate. CAUTION: Check that the brake hoses and tubes are not twisted and bent. H 2. Tighten the brake hose mounting bolt to the specified torque. 3. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut torque wrench. CAUTION: I Cover flare nut wrench with a cloth as not to damage the caliper. Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. 4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". J CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid.
REAR : Inspection
1. 2.
INFOID:0000000004500496
Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interference with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections. Depress the brake pedal and hold down the pedal for approximately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage. Standard The force applied to the brake pedal
: 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb)
CAUTION: Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present.
BR-29
2009 G37 Coupe


Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500497
JPFIA0069GB
1. 4. 7.
Reservoir cap Brake fluid level switch connector O-ring : Apply silicone grease. : Apply brake fluid.
2. 5. 8.
Oil strainer Cylinder body Grommet
3. 6.
Reservoir tank Pin

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004500498
CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. 1. Remove the master cylinder cover. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". 3. Separate the brake fluid level switch harness connector. 4. Separate the brake tube from the master cylinder assembly with a flare nut wrench. CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. 5. Remove the master cylinder assembly. CAUTION: Depress the brake pedal several times to release the vacuum pressure from the brake booster. Then remove the master cylinder assembly. Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed. The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never damage it when removing the master cylinder.
BR-30
2009 G37 Coupe

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > The piston may drop off when pulled out strongly. Never hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it B off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed. C Apply silicone grease to the brake booster [see (A) in the figure] when installing the master cylinder assembly to the brake booster. The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never D damage it when handling the master cylinder and check that no dirt and dust are present on the piston before installation. Clean it with new brake fluid if necessary. The piston may drop off when pulled strongly. Never hold the pisE ton. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder assembly. Never reuse the O ring. BR Temporarily tighten the brake tube flare nut to the master cylinder JPFIA0013ZZ assembly by hand. Then tighten it to the specified torque with a flare nut torque wrench. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Exploded View". CAUTION: G Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. After installation, perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System" CAUTION: H Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Disassembly and Assembly

DISASSEMBLY
INFOID:0000000004500499
CAUTION: Never disassemble the cylinder body. Remove the reservoir tank only when necessary. 1. Fix the master cylinder assembly to a vise. CAUTION: Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips when fixing the cylinder body to a vise. Never overtighten the vise. 2. Remove the reservoir tank mounting pin with a pin punch. 3. Remove the reservoir tank and grommet from the cylinder body. CAUTION: Never drop the removed parts. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped.
JPFIA0015ZZ
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply new brake fluid to the grommet and install it to the cylinder body. CAUTION: Never use mineral oil such as gasoline or light oil. Never reuse the grommets. Install the reservoir tank to the cylinder body. CAUTION: Never drop the parts when installing. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped. Never reuse the reservoir tank.
2.
BR-31
2009 G37 Coupe

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Fix the cylinder body to a vise. CAUTION: Place the reservoir tank with the chamfered pin hole ( ) facing up. Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips when fixing the cylinder body to a vise. Never overtighten the vise.
JPFIA0016ZZ
4.
Tilt the reservoir tank so that a mounting pin can be inserted. Insert a mounting pin. Return the reservoir tank to the horizontal position. Insert another mounting pin into the pin hole on the opposite side in the same manner after the mounting pin passes through the cylinder body pin hole. CAUTION: Never reuse the mounting pins.
JPFIA0015ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000004500500
Fluid Leak Check for brake fluid leakage from the cylinder body-to-brake booster mounting face, reservoir tank mounting face and brake tube connections.
BR-32
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE BOOSTER
BRAKE BOOSTER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500501
BR
G
JPFIA0241GB
1. 4.
Master cylinder assembly Gasket
2. 5.
Brake booster Clevis
3.
Lock nut
Removal and installation

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3.
INFOID:0000000004500502
4. 5. 6.
7.
Remove master cylinder cover. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Exploded View". Remove brake master cylinder assembly. Refer to BR-30, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Depress the brake pedal several times to release the vacuum pressure from the brake booster. Then remove the master cylinder assembly. Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed. The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never damage it when removing the master cylinder. The piston may drop off when pulled out strongly. Never hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder assembly. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to BR-37, "Exploded View". Remove snap pin (1) and clevis pin (2) from inside vehicle. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Hold the brake booster so as to avoid dropping out. Remove brake booster from dash panel in engine room side. CAUTION: Never deform or bend the brake tubes. NOTE: If removing brake booster is difficult, remove clevis from brake JPFIA0019ZZ booster.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted during installation, the dash panel may damage the threads.
BR-33
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Never deform or bend the brake tubes when installing the brake booster. Always use a new gasket between the brake booster and the dash panel. Replace the clevis pin if it is damaged. Refer to BR-20, "Inspection and Adjustment". Install the brake pedal assembly and brake booster mounting nuts, and tighten it to the specified torque. After installation, perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid.

INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004500503
Air Tight CAUTION: Check the air tight condition when the master cylinder and the brake booster is installed. 1. With a handy vacuum pump, apply vacuum pressure of 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.70 inHg) to the brake booster. 2. If the air tight condition cannot be maintained, perform the following operation. a. Check the no dirt and dust are present on the brake booster and brake master cylinder mating faces. Clean it if necessary. b. Check O-ring on the master cylinder. If anything is found, replace the O-ring. c. Check the air tight condition again. If the condition still cannot be maintained, replace the brake booster.

Input Rod Length Inspection
1.
Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the input rod (2) to the specified length (A). Standard A
: Refer to BR-78, "Brake Booster".
2.
Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque.
JPFIA0238ZZ

Operation Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower pane decreases. NOTE: A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due to the brake system operation.
BRA0037D
Air Tight
BR-34
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Idle the engine for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine. Then depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually increases (A B C) each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation.
C
JPFIA0043ZZ
Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 seconds or more. NOTE: A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due to the brake system operation.
BR
G
JPFIA0044ZZ
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

Perform the brake pedal adjustment after installing the brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".
BR-35
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR

Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500504
JPFIA0240GB
1. 4. A.
Brake booster Brake booster pressure sensor Paint mark
2.
Vacuum hose
3.
Clamp

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3. Remove master cylinder cover. Remove brake booster pressure sensor. Remove vacuum hose.
INFOID:0000000004500505
INSTALLATION
Note the following, installation is the reverse order of removal. When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure. Standard A
: 25 mm (0.98 in) or more
Face the marking side vehicle front when assembling. (Brake booster side) CAUTION: Never use lubricating oil during assembly. Face the marking side connector when assembling. (Brake booster pressure sensor side) CAUTION: Never use lubricating oil during assembly.
JPFIA0023ZZ
Inspection
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration. Check for brake booster pressure sensor. Refer to EC-361, "Component Inspection".
INFOID:0000000004500506
BR-36
2009 G37 Coupe
VACUUM LINES
VACUUM LINES
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500507
BR
G
JPFIA0412ZZ
1. 4. A. D.
Clamp Vacuum hose (built in check valve) To brake booster Stamp indicating engine direction
2. 5. B. E.
Vacuum hose Grommet Paint mark To intake manifold
3. C.
Vacuum piping
H
Stamp indicating grommet installation position
I
INFOID:0000000004500508

REMOVAL
1. 2. 3. Remove the engine cover. Refer to EM-25, "Exploded View". Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Exploded View". Remove the vacuum hose and tube.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, install in the reverse order of removal. Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct position. Refer to the stamp to confirm correct installation. Brake booster will not operate normally if the hose is installed in the wrong direction. When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure. Standard A
: 24 mm (0.95 in) or more

O
- Face the marking side up when assembling. CAUTION: Never use lubricating oil during assembly.
JPFIA0023ZZ
Inspection
Appearance
INFOID:0000000004500509
BR-37
2009 G37 Coupe
VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.
Check Valve Airtightness Use a handy vacuum pump (A) to check.
When connected to the booster side (B): Vacuum should decrease within 1.3 kPa (9.8 mmHg, 0.38 inHg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.69 inHg). When connected to the engine side (C): Vacuum should not exist. Replace vacuum hose assembly if vacuum hose and check valve are malfunctioning.
JPFIA0024ZZ
BR-38
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

FRONT DISC BRAKE

BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500543
BR
G
JPFIA0364GB
1. 4. 7.
Cylinder body Location pin Pad return spring
2. 5. 8.
Protector Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) Torque member
3. 6. 9.
Bushing Pad retainer Outer pad
: Apply bentonite noise damping brake grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
J
INFOID:0000000004500544
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Remove the protector and location pin. 3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake hose will not stretch. Then remove the pad return springs and brake pads from the torque member. CAUTION: Never deform the pad return spring when removing the pad return spring. Never deform the pad retainers when removing the pad retainers from the torque member. Never damage the piston boot. Never remove the shims from the brake pads. Never drop the brake pads. Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION:
BR-39
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 1. Apply bentonite noise damping brake grease to the pad retainers before it to installing the torque member if the pad retainers has been removed. CAUTION: Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be lifted up from the torque member. Never deform the pad retainers. 2. Install the brake pads to the torque member. CAUTION: The brake pads is directional. Never mistake the direction. (See the figure)
: Direction of disc rotor rotation (Forward direction)
JPFIA0029ZZ
3.
4.
5. 6. 7.
Install the pad return spring (1) to the brake pad (2). CAUTION: Correctly insert the pad return spring into the pad return spring hole on the brake pad. Install cylinder body to torque member. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When of replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. JPFIA0028ZZ NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install the location pin and tighten it to the specified torque. Install the protector. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer to BR-40, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
INFOID:0000000004500545
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection

Eliminate rust on the pad retainers and the torque member. Replace them if rust is excessively attached.

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Press the piston. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR47, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly".
4. 5. 6.
BR-40
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-15, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".

INFOID:0000000004500510
BR
JPFIA0327GB
1. 4. 7.
Cylinder body Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) Torque member : Apply copper based brake grease.
2. 5. 8.
Inner shim cover Pad retainer Outer shim
3. 6. 9.
Inner shim Torque member Outer shim cover
J
INFOID:0000000004500511

REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt. 3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake hose will not stretch. Then remove the brake pads, shims, shim covers and pad retainers from the torque member. CAUTION: Never deform the pad retainer when removing the pad retainer from the torque member. Never damage the piston boot. Never drop the brake pads, shims and shim covers. Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out.
BR-41
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 1. Apply copper based brake grease to the pad retainers before installing it to the torque member if the pad retainers has been removed. CAUTION: Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be lifted up from the torque member. Never deform the pad retainers. 2. Apply copper based brake grease to the mating faces between the shim and shim cover, and install them to the brake pad. CAUTION: Always replace the shims and shim covers when replacing the brake pad. 3. Install the brake pads to the torque member. CAUTION: Both inner and outer pads have a pad return system on the pad retainer. Install pad return lever (1) securely to pad wear sensor (2). 4. Install cylinder body to torque member. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing JPFIA0027ZZ piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. 5. Install the lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque. 6. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer to BR-42, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

Replace the shims and shim covers if rust is excessively attached.
INFOID:0000000004500512

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Press the pistons. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly" Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-15, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
4. 5. 6. 7.
BR-42
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

INFOID:0000000004500513
BR
JPFIA0384ZZ
1. 4. 7.
Clip Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)* Outer pad
2. 5. 8.
Pad pin Cross spring Outer shim
3. 6.
Inner shim Caliper
*: Some vehicles has pad wear sensor only for one side. : Apply copper based brake grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
I
INFOID:0000000004500514

REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor and caliper. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Remove clips (1) from pad pins.
O
JPFIA0213ZZ
BR-43
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove pad pins while holding down cross spring, then remove cross spring from caliper.
JPFIA0214ZZ
4.
Using pliers, remove brake pads and shims from caliper. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. Never drop the brake pads, shims. Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
JPFIA0215ZZ
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor and caliper. 1. Apply copper based brake grease to the mating faces between the brake pads and shims, and install shims to the brake pad. CAUTION: Always replace the shims together when replacing the brake pad. 2. Apply copper based brake grease to the mating faces between the brake pads and caliper. 3. Install brake pads to caliper. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. In the case of replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. 4. Install upper pad pin from the inner side, then install firmly to the outer side through the hole in the top of brake pad. 5. Place the top of cross spring (1) over the upper pad pin (2), press in the cross spring, install lower pad pin from the inner side to the outer side, and secure cross spring. 6. Install clips to the pad pins. CAUTION: If clip is not fully attached, pad pin or brake pad could fall out while vehicle is in motion. 7. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer to BR-45, "BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
JPFIA0216ZZ
BR-44
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE


Replace the shims if rust is excessively attached.
INFOID:0000000004500515

1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. C Press the pistons. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. D When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: E Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Depress the brake pedal several times. BR Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR55, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly" Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft G pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE)

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View
REMOVAL
I
INFOID:0000000004500546
N
JPFIA0476GB
1.
Brake caliper assembly
DISASSEMBLY
BR-45
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

JPFIA0366GB
1. 4. 7.
Bleeder valve Sliding pin Piston : Apply rubber grease. : Apply brake fluid.
2. 5. 8.
Cap Sliding pin boot Piston boot
3. 6. 9.
Cylinder body Piston seal Torque member
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000004500547
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 4. Remove union bolt and copper washer, and disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to BR21, "FRONT : Exploded View". 5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. CAUTION: Never drop brake pads and caliper assembly. 6. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. Never drop disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION:
BR-46
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. 2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the vehicle and tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture. 3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assembly, and tighten union bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Exploded View". 4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-48, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000004500548
BR
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Never remove the torque member and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body. 1. Remove the protector, location pin and the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never drop brake pads, return springs and pad retainers from torque member. 2. Remove pad return springs and brake pads. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". 3. Remove sliding pin and sliding pin boot from torque member. 4. Remove bushing from cylinder body. 5. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Never get fingers caught in the piston.
M
MAA0272D
6.
7.
Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
JPFIA0038ZZ
ASSEMBLY
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.
BR-47
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Apply brake fluid to piston seal (1), and install them to cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston seal.
JPFIA0039ZZ
3.
Apply rubber grease to piston boot (1). Cover the piston (2) end with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston boot.
JPFIA0040ZZ
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Apply brake fluid to piston (1). Push piston into cylinder body by hand and push piston boot (2) piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. Apply rubber grease to sliding pin and sliding pin boot, and install sliding pin and sliding pin boots to torque member. Install bushing to cylinder body. Install pad return springs and brake pads. Refer to BR-39, JPFIA0034ZZ "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Install the cylinder body to the torque member and tighten the location pin and sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Install the protector.
INFOID:0000000004500549
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Cylinder Body Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the cylinder if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil. Torque Member Check the torque member for wear, cracks or damage. Replace the torque member if any abnormal condition is detected. Eliminate rust on the torque member. Replace them if rust is excessively attached. Piston Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the piston if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper. Location Pin, Protector and Bushing
BR-48
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Check the location pin, protector and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the parts if any abnormal condition is detected.
Sliding Pin and Sliding Pin Boot Check the sliding pin and sliding boots for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the parts if any abnormal condition is detected.

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. C Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Press the piston. CAUTION: D Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. E NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View" BR Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR47, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a G soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
H
INFOID:0000000004500516
4. 5. 6. 7.

REMOVAL
N
JPFIA0391GB
1.
DISASSEMBLY
BR-49
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

JPFIA0329GB
1. 4. 7.
Cap Sliding pin Piston seal
2. 5. 8.
Bleeder valve Sliding pin boot Piston
3. 6. 9.
Cylinder body Bushing Piston boot
10. Torque member : Apply rubber grease. : Apply brake fluid. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

INFOID:0000000004500517
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 4. Remove union bolt and copper washer, and disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to BR21, "FRONT : Exploded View". 5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. CAUTION: Never drop brake pad and caliper assembly. 6. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. Never drop disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air.
BR-50
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. A 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. B 2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the vehicle and tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: C Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture. 3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assembly, and tighten union bolts to the specified D torque. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never reuse copper washer. E 4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. BR 5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-52, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

INFOID:0000000004500518
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Never remove the torque member and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body. 1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-41, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never drop brake pads, shims, shim covers and pad retainers from torque member. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove brake pads, shims and shim covers. Refer to BR-41, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. Remove bushing from sliding pin. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Never get fingers caught in the pistons.
BRB0032D
BR-51
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall. 7. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
SFIA0141E
ASSEMBLY
1. 2. Install bleeder valve and cap. Apply rubber grease to piston seals (1), and install them to cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston seals.
JPFIA0032ZZ
3.
Apply rubber grease to piston boots (1). Cover the piston (2) end with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston boots.
JPFIA0033ZZ
4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Apply brake fluid to pistons (1). Push piston into cylinder body by hand and push piston boot (2) piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. Apply rubber grease to bushing, and install bushing to sliding pin. Apply rubber grease to sliding pins and sliding boots, and install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. JPFIA0034ZZ Install brake pads, shims and shim covers. Refer to BR-41, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Install the cylinder body to the torque member and tighten the sliding pin bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-41, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View".
INFOID:0000000004500519

Cylinder Body
BR-52
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the cylinder if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the torque member if any abnormal condition is detected. Pistons Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the piston if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper. Sliding Pin and Sliding Pin Boot Check the sliding pins and sliding boots for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the parts if any abnormal condition is detected.

1. 2. 3.
BR Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-41, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Press the pistons. G CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. H NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-41, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". I Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". J Burnish contact surface between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment". K
INFOID:0000000004500520
4. 5. 6. 7.

REMOVAL
JPFIA0474GB
BR-53
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

1. Caliper
DISASSEMBLY
JPFIA0386GB
1. 4. 7.
Piston Retaining ring Cap : Apply rubber grease. : Apply brake fluid.
2. 5. 8.
Piston seal Bleeder Valve Caliper
3. 6.
Piston boot Cap

INFOID:0000000004500521
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose and brake tube. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor and caliper. 4. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from caliper. CAUTION: Cover flare nut wrench with a cloth as not to damage the caliper. Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake tube. Cover open end of brake tube when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 5. Remove caliper mounting bolts, and remove caliper. CAUTION: Never drop brake pad and caliper. 6. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION:
BR-54
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Put matching marks on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. Never drop disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
B WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: C Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose and brake tube. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: D Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. 2. Install the brake caliper to the vehicle and tighten the caliper mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: E Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the caliper mounting face, threads, mounting bolts and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture. 3. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut torque wrench. BR CAUTION: Cover crowfoot with a cloth as not to damage the caliper. Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. G 4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor and caliper. H 5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

INFOID:0000000004500522
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never drop brake pads, shims, pad pins and clips. Remove caliper assembly. Refer to BR-53, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots and retaining rings. CAUTION: Never get fingers caught in the pistons.
2. 3.
BRB0261D
BR-55
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove piston seal (1) from cylinder body using suitable tool (A). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
JPFIA0217ZZ
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply brake fluid to piston seals (1), and install them to caliper. CAUTION: Never reuse piston seals.
JPFIA0218ZZ
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Apply rubber grease to piston boots (1). Cover the piston (2) end with piston boots, and then install caliper side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on caliper. CAUTION: Never reuse piston boots. Apply brake fluid to piston. Push piston into caliper by hand and push piston boot piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent caliper inner wall from being rubbed. Secure piston boot with retaining ring. CAUTION: Make sure that boot is securely engaged in the groove on caliper. Never reuse retaining ring. Install the caliper to tighten the caliper mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-53, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Install brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never drop brake pads, shims, pad pins and clips.
PFIA0905J INFOID:0000000004500523

Caliper Check the inner wall of the caliper for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the caliper if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil. Pistons
BR-56
2009 G37 Coupe
FRONT DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the piston if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.

1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". C Press the pistons. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake D fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. E Install brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (4 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR- BR 55, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". Burnish contact surface between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment". G
BR-57
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

REAR DISC BRAKE

BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500550
JPFIA0367GB
1. 4. 7.
Sliding pin bolt Inner shim Torque member
2. 5. 8.
Cylinder body Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)* Outer pad
3. 6. 9.
*: Some vehicles has pad wear sensor only for one side. 1: Apply rubber grease. 2: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000004500551
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Remove the upper sliding pin bolt. 3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake hose will not stretch. Remove the brake pads, shims, shim cover and pad retainers from the torque member. CAUTION: Never deform the pad retainers if removing the pad retainers. Never damage the piston boot. Never drop the brake pad, shims, and the shim cover. Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air.
BR-58
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the pis- A ton may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 1. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the pad retainers before installing it to B the torque member if the pad retainers has been removed. CAUTION: Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be lifted up from the torque member. C Never deform the pad retainers. 2. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the mating faces between the brake pads and shims, and install shims and shim cover to brake pads. D CAUTION: Always replace the shims together with the shim cover when replacing the brake pad. 3. Install cylinder body and brake pads to torque member. CAUTION: E Never damage the piston boot. When of replacing a pads with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. BR NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. 4. Install the upper sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque. G 5. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the rear disc brake. Refer to BR-59, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection

Replace the shims and the shim cover if rust is excessively attached.
INFOID:0000000004500552

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Press the piston. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR66, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". Burnish contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
J
4. 5. 6. 7.
BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE)

O
BR-59
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500524
JPFIA0418GB
1. 4. 7.
Sliding pin bolt Inner shim Torque member
2. 5. 8.
Cylinder body Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)* Outer pad
3. 6. 9.
*: Some vehicles has pad wear sensor only for one side. 1: Apply rubber grease. 2: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000004500525
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Remove the upper sliding pin bolt. 3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake hose will not stretch. Remove the brake pads, shims, shim cover and pad retainers from the torque member. CAUTION: Never deform the pad retainers if removing the pad retainers. Never damage the piston boot. Never drop the brake pad, shims, and the shim cover. Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out.
BR-60
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 1. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the pad retainers before installing it to A the torque member if the pad retainers has been removed. CAUTION: Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be lifted up from the torque member. B Never deform the pad retainers. 2. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the mating faces between the brake pads and shims, and install shims and shim to brake pad. C CAUTION: Always replace the shims together with the shim cover when replacing the brake pad. 3. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the mating faces between the brake D pads and pad retainers and install brake pads to torque member. 4. Apply copper based brake grease to the pawls part of cylinder body, and install them to the cylinder body to torque member. E CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. BR NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. 5. Install the upper sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque. G 6. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the rear disc brake. Refer to BR-61, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection

Replace the shims and the shim cover if rust is excessively attached.
INFOID:0000000004500526

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Press the pistons. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR70, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". Burnish contact surface between brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
J
4. 5. 6. 7.
BR-61
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

INFOID:0000000004500527
JPFIA0462ZZ
1. 4. 7.
Clip Inner shim Caliper
2. 5. 8.
Pad pin Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)* Outer pad
3. 6. 9.
Inner shim cover Cross spring Outer shim
10. Outer shim cover *: Some vehicles has pad wear sensor only for one side. : Apply copper based brake grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004500528
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor and caliper. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Remove clips from pad pins.
JPFIA0220ZZ
BR-62
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove pad pins while holding down cross spring, then remove cross spring from caliper.
C
JPFIA0221ZZ
4.
Using pliers, remove brake pads, shims and shim covers from caliper. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. Never drop the brake pad, shims, and the shim cover. Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
BR
G
JPFIA0222ZZ
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor and caliper. 1. Apply copper based brake grease to the mating faces between the brake pads, shims and shim cover, and install shims and shim cover to the brake pad. CAUTION: Always replace the shims together when replacing the brake pad. 2. Apply copper based brake grease to the mating faces between the brake pads and caliper. 3. Apply copper based brake grease to the mating faces between the brake pads and pad pins. 4. Apply copper based brake grease to the mating faces between the brake pads and cross spring. 5. Install brake pads to caliper. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. In the case of replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. 6. Install upper pad pin from the inner side, then install firmly to the outer side through the hole in the top of brake pad. 7. Place the top of cross spring over the upper pad pin, press in the cross spring, install lower pad pin from the inner side to the outer side, and secure cross spring. 8. Install clips to the pad pins. CAUTION: If clip is not fully attached, pad pin or brake pad could fall out while vehicle is in motion. 9. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the rear disc brake. Refer to BR-64, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
JPFIA0223ZZ
BR-63
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE


Replace the shims and shim cover if rust is excessively attached.
INFOID:0000000004500529

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Press the pistons. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR74, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". Burnish contact surface between brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
4. 5. 6. 7.
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE)

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500553
REMOVAL
JPFIA0311GB
1.
DISASSEMBLY
BR-64
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

A
JPFIA0368GB
BR
1. 4. 7.
Sliding pin bolt Bleeder valve Piston
2. 5. 8.
Bushing Cylinder body Piston boot
3. 6. 9.
Cap Piston seal Sliding pin boot
10. Torque member 1: Apply rubber grease. 2: Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant. : Apply brake fluid. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 4. Remove union bolt and copper washers, and disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to BR25, "REAR : Exploded View" 5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. CAUTION: Never drop brake pads and caliper assembly. 6. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. Never drop disc rotor.
INFOID:0000000004500554
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
BR-65
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. 2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the vehicle and tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts, and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture. 3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assembly, and tighten union bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-25, "REAR : Exploded View". 4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 5. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-67, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
INFOID:0000000004500555
NOTE: Never remove the torque member and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body. 1. Remove the sliding pin bolts and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. 2. Remove brake pads, shims and shim cover. Refer to BR-58, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". 3. Remove sliding pin boots from torque member. 4. Remove bushing form sliding pin bolt. 5. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Never get fingers caught in the piston.
BRD0041D
6.
7.
Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
JPFIA0038ZZ
ASSEMBLY
BR-66
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Install bleeder valve and cap. 2. Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant to piston seal (1), and install them to cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston seal.
JPFIA0039ZZ
3.
Apply rubber grease to piston boot (1). Cover the piston (2) end with the piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on the piston boot securely into the groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston boot.
BR
G
JPFIA0040ZZ
4.
5. 6. 7.
8.
Apply brake fluid to piston (1). Push piston into cylinder body by hand and push piston boot (2) piston side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. Apply rubber grease to bushing, and install bushing to sliding pin bolt. Apply rubber grease to sliding pin boots, and install sliding pin boot to torque member. JPFIA0041ZZ Install brake pads, shims and shim cover. Refer to BR-58, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Apply rubber grease to sliding pin bolts, and install the cylinder body to the torque member and tighten the sliding pin bolts to the specified torque.
INFOID:0000000004500556
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection

Cylinder Body Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the cylinder if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil. Torque Member Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the member if any abnormal condition is detected. Piston Check the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the piston if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
BR-67
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

Sliding Pin Bolt and Sliding Pin Boot Check the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the parts if any abnormal condition is detected.

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-58, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Press the piston. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-58, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR66, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". Burnish contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
4. 5. 6. 7.
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE)

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004500530
REMOVAL
JPFIA0311GB
1.
DISASSEMBLY
BR-68
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

A
JPFIA0388GB
BR
1. 4. 7.
Sliding pin bolt Bleeder valve Piston
2. 5. 8.
Bushing Cylinder body Piston boot
3. 6. 9.
Cap Piston seal Retaining ring
10. Sliding pin boot 1: Apply rubber grease.
11. Torque member
2: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease. : Apply brake fluid. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 4. Remove union bolt and copper washers, and disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to BR25, "REAR : Exploded View". 5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. CAUTION: Never drop brake pad and caliper assembly. 6. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. Never drop disc rotor.
INFOID:0000000004500531
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
BR-69
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. 2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the vehicle and tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts, and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture. 3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assembly, and tighten union bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-25, "REAR : Exploded View". 4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 5. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-72, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
INFOID:0000000004500532
NOTE: Never remove torque member and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body. 1. Remove sliding pin bolts and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. 2. Remove brake pads, shims and shim cover. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". 3. Remove sliding pin boots from torque member. 4. Remove bushing from sliding pin bolt. 5. Remove retaining ring (1) from cylinder body using suitable tool as shown in the figure.
JPFIA0042ZZ
6.
Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Never get fingers caught in the piston.
BRD0041D
BR-70
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall. 8. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
C
JPFIA0038ZZ
ASSEMBLY
1. 2. Install bleeder valve and cap. Apply rubber grease to piston seal (1), and install them to cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston seal.
BR
JPFIA0039ZZ
3.
Apply rubber grease to piston boot (1). Cover the piston (2) end with the piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on the piston boot securely into the groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston boot.
K
JPFIA0040ZZ
4.
Apply brake fluid to piston (1). Push piston into cylinder body by hand and push piston boot (2) piston side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
JPFIA0041ZZ
BR-71
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Secure piston boot with retaining ring (1). CAUTION: Make sure that boot is securely engaged in the groove on cylinder body. Never reuse retaining ring. 6. Apply rubber grease to bushing, and install bushing to sliding pin bolt. 7. Apply rubber grease to sliding pin boots, and install sliding pin boot to torque member. 8. Install brake pads, shims and shim cover. Refer to BR-60, JPFIA0042ZZ "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". 9. Apply rubber grease to sliding pin bolts, and install the cylinder body to the torque member and tighten the sliding pin bolt to the specified torque.
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection

INFOID:0000000004500533

Cylinder Body Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the cylinder if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil. Torque Member Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the member if any abnormal condition is detected. Piston Check the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the piston if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper. Sliding Pin Bolt and Sliding Pin Boot Check the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the parts if any abnormal condition is detected.

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Press the pistons. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR70, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". Burnish contact surface between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
4. 5. 6. 7.
BR-72
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE


REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004500534
BR
JPFIA0389GB
1.
Caliper assembly
DISASSEMBLY
I
JPFIA0390GB
1. 4. 7.
Piston Retaining ring Cap 1: Apply rubber grease. : Apply brake fluid.
2. 5. 8.
Piston seal Cap Caliper
3. 6.
Piston boot Bleeder valve

INFOID:0000000004500535
REMOVAL
BR-73
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose and brake tube. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Draining". CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 4. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from caliper. CAUTION: Cover flare nut wrench with a cloth as not to damage the caliper. Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake tube. Cover open end of brake tube when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 5. Remove brake hose mounting bolt. 6. Remove caliper mounting bolts, and remove caliper. CAUTION: Never drop brake pad and caliper. 7. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. Never drop disc rotor.
JPFIA0224ZZ
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with compressed air. CAUTION: Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. 2. Install the brake caliper to the vehicle and tighten the caliper mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the caliper mounting face, threads, mounting bolts and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture. 3. Install the brake hose mounting bolt to the specified torque. 4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut torque wrench. CAUTION: Cover crowfoot with a cloth as not to damage the caliper. Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. 5. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. 6. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-76, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

INFOID:0000000004500536
DISASSEMBLY
BR-74
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-62, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never drop brake pad, shims, shim covers, pad pins and clips. 2. Remove caliper assembly. Refer to BR-73, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". 3. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots and retaining rings. CAUTION: Never get fingers caught in the pistons.
E
JPFIA0225ZZ
4.
Remove piston seal (1) from cylinder body using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
BR
JPFIA0226ZZ
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply brake fluid to piston seals (1), and install them to caliper. CAUTION: Never reuse piston seals.
J
PFIA0872E
BR-75
2009 G37 Coupe
REAR DISC BRAKE

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Apply rubber grease to piston boots (1). Cover the piston (2) end with piston boots, and then install caliper side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on caliper. CAUTION: Never reuse piston boots. 3. Apply brake fluid to piston. Push piston into caliper by hand and push piston boot piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent caliper inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Secure piston boot with retaining ring. CAUTION: Make sure that boot is securely engaged in the groove on caliper. Never reuse retaining ring. 5. Install the caliper to tighten the caliper mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-73, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". 6. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-62, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never drop brake pads, shims, pad pins and clips.
PFIA0906J

INFOID:0000000004500537
Caliper Check the inner wall of the caliper for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the caliper if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil. Pistons Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the piston if any abnormal condition is detected. CAUTION: A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.

1. 2. 3. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-62, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Press the pistons. CAUTION: Never damage the piston boot. When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-62, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View". Depress the brake pedal several times. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR74, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly". Burnish contact surface between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
4. 5. 6. 7.
BR-76
2009 G37 Coupe
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

General Specifications
FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON AND REAR CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE
Unit: mm (in)
INFOID:0000000004500538
Cylinder bore diameter Front brake Pad length width thickness Rotor outer diameter thickness Cylinder bore diameter Rear brake Pad length width thickness Rotor outer diameter thickness Master cylinder Control valve Brake booster Cylinder bore diameter Valve type Diaphragm diameter
57.15 (2.250) 116.1 51.7 10.3 (4.57 2.035 0.406) 330 32.0 (12.99 1.260) 38.1 (1.500) 83.0 33.0 8.5 (3.268 1.299 0.335) 330 16.0 (12.99 0.630) 23.81 (15/16) Electric brake force distribution Primary: 230 (9.06) Secondary: 205 (8.07) DOT 3
BR
Recommended brake fluid
FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON AND REAR CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE

Unit: mm (in)
45.0 (1.772) 2 130 53.5 11.0 (5.12 2.106 0.433) 320 28.0 (12.60 1.102) 42.86 (1.687) 83.0 33.0 8.5 (3.268 1.299 0.335) 308 16.0 (12.13 0.630) 25.4 (1) Electric brake force distribution Primary: 230 (9.06) Secondary: 205 (8.07) DOT 3
FRONT CALIPER 4 PISTON, REAR CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE

Unit: mm (in)
41.3 (1.626) 2 + 44.45 (1.750) 2 123.2 55.0 11.0 (4.85 2.165 0.433) 355 32.0 (13.98 1.260) 41.3 (1.626) 2 95.8 41.5 8.5 (3.772 1.634 0.335) 350 20.0 (13.78 0.787) 25.4 (1) Electric brake force distribution Primary: 230 (9.06) Secondary: 205 (8.07) DOT 3
BR-77
2009 G37 Coupe

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Brake Pedal
Brake pedal height (H1) Clearance (C1) between ASCD brake switch threaded end and the stopper rubber Clearance (C2) between the stop lamp switch threaded end and the stopper rubber Brake pedal play (A) Brake pedal shaky fitting (B) Depressed brake pedal height (H2) [Depressing 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning the engine ON]
INFOID:0000000004500539
Unit: mm (in)
171.5 181.5 (6.75 7.15) 0 0.6 (0 0.024) 0.74 1.96 (0.0291 0.0772) 2.0 8.0 (0.079 0.315) 0 1.4 (0.0 0.055) 124.0 (4.88) or more
Brake Booster
Vacuum type
INFOID:0000000004500540
Unit: mm (in)
Input rod length (B)
127.5 128.5 (5.02 5.06)

INFOID:0000000004500541
Front Disc Brake

1 PISTON TYPE
Unit: mm (in)
Item Brake pad Wear thickness Wear thickness Disc rotor Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)
Limit 2.0 (0.079) 30.0 (1.181) 0.015 (0.0006) 0.035 (0.0014)
2 PISTON TYPE
Unit: mm (in)
Limit 2.0 (0.079) 26.0 (1.024) 0.015 (0.0006) 0.035 (0.0014)
4 PISTON TYPE
Unit: mm (in)
Limit 2.0 (0.079) 30.0 (1.181) 0.015 (0.0006) 0.035 (0.0014)

INFOID:0000000004500542
Rear Disc Brake

1 PISTON (FRONT 1 PISTON) TYPE
Unit: mm (in)
Limit 2.0 (0.079) 15.0 (0.591) 0.015 (0.0006) 0.055 (0.0022)
BR-78
2009 G37 Coupe

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) 1 PISTON (FRONT 2 PISTON) TYPE
Unit: mm (in)
Limit 2.0 (0.079) 14.0 (0.551) 0.015 (0.0006) 0.055 (0.0022)
C
Unit: mm (in)
2 PISTON TYPE
Item Brake pad Wear thickness Wear thickness Disc rotor Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) Limit 2.0 (0.079) 18.0 (0.709) 0.015 (0.0006) 0.055 (0.0022)
BR
BR-79
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKES
SECTION
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
BRC
CONTENTS
VDC/TCS/ABS BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 4 .
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ......... 4 .
Work Flow ................................................................ 4 . Diagnostic Work Sheet ............................................. 7 . Component Parts Location .....................................19 . Component Description ..........................................21 .
BRC
EBD ................................................................... 22
System Diagram .....................................................22 . System Description .................................................22 . Component Parts Location .....................................23 . Component Description ..........................................25 .

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT ......................................................... 8 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................. 8 . ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ...... 8 ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION ................................................. 8 . ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description ......................... 8 . ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement ......................................................................... 8 .
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)] ....... 26
CONSULT-III Function ...........................................26 .

C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR-1 ................................................................ 31
Description ..............................................................31 . DTC Logic ...............................................................31 . Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................31 . Component Inspection ............................................33 . Special Repair Requirement ...................................33 .

VDC ...................................................................10 .
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR-2 ................................................................ 34

Description ..............................................................34 . DTC Logic ...............................................................34 . Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................34 . Component Inspection ............................................36 . Special Repair Requirement ...................................36 .
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM ........ 37

Description ..............................................................37 . DTC Logic ...............................................................37 . Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................37 . Special Repair Requirement ...................................38 .
TCS ....................................................................14 .
ABS ...................................................................18 .
System Diagram ..................................................... 18 . System Description ................................................ 18 .
C1110, C1153, C1170 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) ................. 39
DTC Logic ...............................................................39 . Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................39 . Special Repair Requirement ...................................39 .
BRC-1
2009 G37 Coupe
C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYSTEM ................................................................... 40 .

Description ............................................................. 40 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 40 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 40 . Component Inspection ........................................... 41 . Special Repair Requirement .................................. 41 .
C1143, C1144 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ... 59

Description ............................................................. 59 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 59 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59 . Component Inspection ........................................... 60 . Special Repair Requirement .................................. 60 .
C1145, C1146 YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR... 61

C1114 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM .............. 42 .

C1147, C1148, C1149, C1150 USV/HSV LINE 64 ...

C1115 WHEEL SENSOR .................................. 44 .

C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH .......... 67 .

C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH ........................... 47 .

C1185 ICC UNIT ............................................... 69 .

Description ............................................................. 69 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 69 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 69 . Special Repair Requirement .................................. 69 .
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL .... 49 .

U1000, U1002 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .............. 70 .

Description ............................................................. 70 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 70 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 70 . Special Repair Requirement .................................. 70 .
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL... 52

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ............................. 71 .

Description ............................................................. 71 . Component Function Check .................................. 71 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 71 . Component Inspection ........................................... 72 .
C1130, C1131, C1132 ENGINE SIGNAL ......... 55 .

Description ............................................................. 55 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 55 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 55 . Special Repair Requirement .................................. 55 .
VDC OFF SWITCH ........................................... 73 .

Description ............................................................. 73 . Component Function Check .................................. 73 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 73 . Component Inspection ........................................... 74 .
C1138 4WAS SYSTEM ..................................... 56 .

Description ............................................................. 56 . DTC Logic .............................................................. 56 . Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 56 . Special Repair Requirement .................................. 56 .
ABS WARNING LAMP ..................................... 75 .

Description ............................................................. 75 . Component Function Check .................................. 75 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 75 .
C1142 PRESS SENSOR .................................. 57 .

BRAKE WARNING LAMP ................................ 76 .

Description ............................................................. 76 . Component Function Check .................................. 76 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 76 .
BRC-2
2009 G37 Coupe
VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP ...........................77 .

Description ............................................................. 77 . Component Function Check ................................... 77 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 77 .
PREPARATION ................................................. 99
Special Service Tool ...............................................99 . Commercial Service Tool .......................................99 . A

WHEEL SENSOR ............................................ 100
SLIP INDICATOR LAMP ...................................78 .

Description ............................................................. 78 . Component Function Check ................................... 78 . Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 78 .
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 79 .

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) .............................................79 .
Reference Value .................................................... 79 . Wiring Diagram - BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM -.... 83 Fail-Safe ................................................................. 87 . DTC No. Index ....................................................... 88 .
SENSOR ROTOR ............................................ 101

FRONT SENSOR ROTOR ...................................... 101 . FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View ........ 101 . FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation ..................................................................... 101 . REAR SENSOR ROTOR ........................................ 101 . REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View ........... 101 . REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation ........................................................................ 101 . D
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 90 .

EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION FREQUENCY ....................................................90 .
BRC
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) ........................................... 102

UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION .................91 .

YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR ........................ 104

Exploded View ...................................................... 104 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 104 . I
THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG ...............92 .

ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ..........93 .

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 105

Exploded View ...................................................... 105 . Removal and Installation ...................................... 105 . J
PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION SOUND OCCURS .............................................94 .

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 106 .

PREVIEW FUNCTION ..................................... 106
System Description ............................................... 106 . Component Parts Location ................................... 107 . Component Description ........................................ 108 . L K
VEHICLE JERKS DURING VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL .........................................................95 .

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................96 .

Description ............................................................. 96 .
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ...................... 109 .

PREVIEW FUNCTION ..................................... 109
PRECAUTION ............................................. 97 .
PRECAUTIONS .................................................97 .
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................ 97 . Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover 97 .... Precaution for Brake System ................................. 97 . Precaution for Brake Control .................................. 98 .

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 110
Description ............................................................ 110 . O
PRECAUTION ........................................... 111 .

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 111
Precautions for Preview Function Service ............ 111 . P
PREPARATION .......................................... 99 .
BRC-3
2009 G37 Coupe

< BASIC INSPECTION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow
PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS
If steering angle sensor, steering system parts, suspension system parts, 4WAS system parts, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or tires have been replaced, or if wheel alignment has been adjusted, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before driving. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
INFOID:0000000004257545
BRC-4
2009 G37 Coupe

< BASIC INSPECTION > OVERALL SEQUENCE [VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
BRC
O
JSFIA0010GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER

Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred) using the diagnosis worksheet. Refer to BRC-7, "Diagnostic Work Sheet". >> GO TO 2.
BRC-5
2009 G37 Coupe


Check the DTC display with the self-diagnosis function. Is there any DTC displayed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4.
3.PERFORM THE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

Perform the diagnosis applicable to the displayed DTC. Refer to BRC-88, "DTC No. Index". >> GO TO 7.
4.CHECK THE SYMPTOM THAT IS NOT CONSIDERED A SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

Check that the symptom is a normal operation that is not considered a system malfunction. Refer to BRC-96, "Description". Is the symptom a normal operation? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THE WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR LAMP FOR ILLUMINATION

Check that the warning lamp and indicator lamp illuminate. ABS warning lamp: Refer to BRC-75, "Description". Brake warning lamp: Refer to BRC-76, "Description". VDC OFF indicator lamp: Refer to BRC-77, "Description". SLIP indicator lamp: Refer to BRC-78, "Description". Is ON/OFF timing normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 2.
6.PERFORM THE DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM

Perform the diagnosis applicable to the symptom. >> GO TO 7.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts. >> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK
Perform the self-diagnosis again, and check that the malfunction is repaired completely. After checking, erase the self-diagnosis memory. Refer to BRC-26, "CONSULT-III Function". Is no other DTC present and the repair completed? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3.
BRC-6
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004257546
Diagnostic Work Sheet
BRC
SFIA3265E
BRC-7
2009 G37 Coupe


INFOID:0000000004257547
After replacing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor.
INFOID:0000000004257548
1.PERFORM THE NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT FOR THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor. >> Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement".
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description
INFOID:0000000004257549
In case of doing work that applies to the list below, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
: Required : Not required
Situation Removing/Installing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Removing/Installing steering angle sensor Replacing steering angle sensor Removing/Installing 4WAS components Replacing 4WAS components Removing/Installing steering components Replacing steering components Removing/Installing suspension components Replacing suspension components Change tires to new ones Tire rotation Adjusting wheel alignment
Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION
CAUTION: To adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, make sure to use CONSULT-III. (Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-III.)
INFOID:0000000004257550
1.ALIGN THE VEHICLE STATUS

Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM THE NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT FOR THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
BRC-8
2009 G37 Coupe

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < BASIC INSPECTION > 1. On the CONSULT-III screen, touch "WORK SUPPORT" and ST ANG SEN ADJUSTMENT" in order. 2. Touch START. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 3. After approximately 10 seconds, touch END. NOTE: After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to perform above operation.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DATA MONITOR

1. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 2. Select DATA MONITOR. Then make sure STR ANGLE SIG is within 02.5. Is the steering angle within the specified range? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor again, GO TO 1.
E
BRC
4.ERASE THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MEMORY

Erase the self-diagnosis memories of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), ECM, 4WAS and ICC. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit): Refer to BRC-26, "CONSULT-III Function". ECM: Refer to EC-112, "Diagnosis Description". 4WAS - 4WAS FRONT CONTROL UNIT: Refer to STC-40, "CONSULT-III Function [4WAS(FRONT)]". - 4WAS MAIN CONTROL UNIT: Refer to STC-44, "CONSULT-III Function [4WAS(MAIN)/RAS/HICAS]". ICC: Refer to CCS-37, "Diagnosis Description". Are the memories erased? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check the items indicated by the self-diagnosis.
G H
BRC-9
2009 G37 Coupe
VDC
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
VDC
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004257551
JSFIA0124GB
System Description
INFOID:0000000004257552
Vehicle Dynamics Control system detects drivers steering operation amount and brake pedal travel from steering angle sensor and pressure sensor. Using information from yaw rate/side G sensor and wheel sensor, VDC judges driving condition (conditions of under steer and over steer) to improve vehicle driving stability by controlling brake application to 4 wheels and engine output. During VDC operation, it informs driver of system operation by flashing SLIP indicator lamp. Electrical system diagnosis by CONSULT-III is available.
BRC-10
2009 G37 Coupe
VDC
INFOID:0000000004257553

For USA
BRC
P
JSFIA0125ZZ
1. 4.
Steering angle sensor VDC OFF indicator lamp
2. 5.
ABS warning lamp SLIP indicator lamp
3. 6.
Brake warning lamp ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
BRC-11
2009 G37 Coupe
VDC
7. Front wheel sensor 8. Yaw rate/side G sensor 9. VDC OFF switch 10. Rear wheel sensor A. D. G. Back of spiral cable assembly Steering knuckle Rear final drive assembly B. E. Combination meter Under center console C. F. Inside brake master cylinder cover Instrument driver lower panel
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
For Canada
JSFIA0126ZZ
BRC-12
2009 G37 Coupe
VDC
1. 4. 7. Steering angle sensor VDC OFF indicator lamp Front wheel sensor 2. 5. 8. ABS warning lamp SLIP indicator lamp Yaw rate/side G sensor 3. 6. 9.
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Brake warning lamp ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) VDC OFF switch
10. Rear wheel sensor A. D. G. Back of spiral cable assembly Steering knuckle Rear final drive assembly
INFOID:0000000004257554
B. E.
Combination meter Under center console
C. F.
Inside brake master cylinder cover Instrument driver lower panel
Component parts Pump Motor Actuator relay (Main relay) ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Solenoid valve Pressure sensor VDC switch-over valve (USV1, USV2, HSV1, HSV2) Wheel sensor Yaw rate/side G sensor Steering angle sensor VDC OFF switch ABS warning lamp Brake warning lamp VDC OFF indicator lamp SLIP indicator lamp
Reference BRC-40, "Description" BRC-42, "Description" BRC-49, "Description" BRC-57, "Description" BRC-64, "Description" BRC-31, "Description" BRC-61, "Description" BRC-59, "Description" BRC-73, "Description" BRC-75, "Description" BRC-76, "Description" BRC-77, "Description" BRC-78, "Description"
BRC
BRC-13
2009 G37 Coupe
TCS
TCS
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004257555
JSFIA0124GB
System Description
INFOID:0000000004257556
Traction Control System is a function that electronically controls engine torque, brake fluid pressure and A/T gear position to ensure the optimum slippage ratio at drive wheels by computing wheel speed signals from 4 wheel sensors. When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) detects a spin at drive wheels (rear wheels), it compares wheel speed signals from all 4 wheels. At this time, LH and RH rear brake fluid pressure are controlled, while fuel being cut to engine and throttle valve being closed to reduce engine torque by the control unit. Further more, throttle position is continuously controlled to ensure the optimum engine torque at all times. During TCS operation, it informs driver of system operation by flashing SLIP indicator lamp. Electrical system diagnosis by CONSULT-III is available.
BRC-14
2009 G37 Coupe
TCS
INFOID:0000000004257557

For USA
BRC
P
JSFIA0125ZZ
1. 4.
2. 5.
3. 6.
BRC-15
2009 G37 Coupe
TCS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
For Canada
JSFIA0126ZZ
BRC-16
2009 G37 Coupe
TCS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
INFOID:0000000004257558
B. E.
C. F.
BRC
BRC-17
2009 G37 Coupe
ABS
ABS
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004257559
JSFIA0124GB
System Description
INFOID:0000000004257560
Anti-Lock Braking System is a function that detects wheel revolution while braking, electronically controls braking force, and prevents wheel locking during sudden braking. It improves handling stability and maneuverability for avoiding obstacles. Electrical system diagnosis by CONSULT-III is available.
BRC-18
2009 G37 Coupe
ABS
INFOID:0000000004257561

For USA
BRC
P
JSFIA0125ZZ
1. 4.
2. 5.
3. 6.
BRC-19
2009 G37 Coupe
ABS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
For Canada
JSFIA0126ZZ
BRC-20
2009 G37 Coupe
ABS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
INFOID:0000000004257562
B. E.
C. F.
BRC
BRC-21
2009 G37 Coupe
EBD
EBD
System Diagram
INFOID:0000000004257563
JSFIA0124GB
System Description
INFOID:0000000004257564
Electric Brake force Distribution is a following function. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels during braking. Then is electronically controls the rear braking force (brake fluid pressure) to reducing and reduces rear wheel slippage. Accordingly it improves vehicle stability. Electrical system diagnosis by CONSULT-III is available.
BRC-22
2009 G37 Coupe
EBD
INFOID:0000000004257565

For USA
BRC
P
JSFIA0125ZZ
1. 4.
2. 5.
3. 6.
BRC-23
2009 G37 Coupe
EBD
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
For Canada
JSFIA0126ZZ
BRC-24
2009 G37 Coupe
EBD
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
INFOID:0000000004257566
B. E.
C. F.
BRC
BRC-25
2009 G37 Coupe
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)]


CONSULT-III Function
FUNCTION
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnostic test mode Work support Self-diagnostic results Data monitor Active test ECU part number Function This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on CONSULT-III. Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. Input/Output data in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) can be read. Diagnostic test mode is which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
INFOID:0000000004257567
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Operation Procedure Before performing the self-diagnosis, start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. How to Erase Self-diagnosis Results After erasing DTC memory, start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute as the final inspection, and make sure that the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and brake warning lamp turn OFF. CAUTION: If memory cannot be erased, perform applicable diagnosis. NOTE: When the wheel sensor malfunctions, after inspecting the wheel sensor system, the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and brake warning lamp will not turn OFF even when the system is normal unless the vehicle is driving at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. Brake warning lamp will turn ON in case of parking brake operation (when switch is ON) or of brake fluid level switch operation (when brake fluid is insufficient). VDC OFF switch should not stay ON position. Display Item List Refer to BRC-88, "DTC No. Index".
DATA MONITOR MODE

Display Item List
: Applicable : Optional item
SELECT MONITOR ITEM Monitor item (Unit) FR LH SENSOR [km/h (MPH)] FR RH SENSOR [km/h (MPH)] RR LH SENSOR [km/h (MPH)] RR RH SENSOR [km/h (MPH)] STOP LAMP SW (On/Off) ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Wheel speed Stop lamp switch signal status Remarks
BRC-26
2009 G37 Coupe

SELECT MONITOR ITEM Monitor item (Unit) BATTERY VOLT (V) SLCT LVR POSI OFF SW (On/Off) YAW RATE SEN (d/s) ACCEL POS SIG (%) SIDE G-SENSOR (m/s2) STR ANGLE SIG () PRESS SENSOR (bar) ENGINE RPM [tr/min (rpm)] FLUID LEV SW (On/Off) PARK BRAKE SW (On/Off) FR RH IN SOL (On/Off) FR RH OUT SOL (On/Off) FR LH IN SOL (On/Off) FR LH OUT SOL (On/Off) RR RH IN SOL (On/Off) RR RH OUT SOL (On/Off) RR LH IN SOL (On/Off) RR LH OUT SOL (On/Off) MOTOR RELAY (On/Off) ACTUATOR RLY (On/Off) ABS WARN LAMP (On/Off) OFF LAMP (On/Off) SLIP LAMP (On/Off) BST OPER SIG EBD SIGNAL (On/Off) ECU INPUT SIGNALS Operation status of each solenoid valve Motor and motor relay operation Actuator relay operation ABS warning lamp VDC OFF indicator lamp SLIP indicator lamp Not applied but displayed. EBD operation MAIN SIGNALS Remarks Battery voltage supplied to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A/T selector lever position VDC OFF switch Yaw rate detected by yaw rate/side G sensor Throttle actuator opening/closing is displayed (Linked with accelerator pedal) Transverse G detected by yaw rate/side G sensor Steering angle detected by steering angle sensor
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
BRC
Brake fluid pressure detected by pressure sensor Engine speed Brake fluid level switch signal status
H
Parking brake switch signal status
BRC-27
2009 G37 Coupe

SELECT MONITOR ITEM Monitor item (Unit) ABS SIGNAL (On/Off) TCS SIGNAL (On/Off) VDC SIGNAL (On/Off) EBD FAIL SIG (On/Off) ABS FAIL SIG (On/Off) TCS FAIL SIG (On/Off) VDC FAIL SIG (On/Off) CRANKING SIG (On/Off) USV [FR-RL] (On/Off) USV [FL-RR] (On/Off) HSV [FR-RL] (On/Off) HSV [FL-RR] (On/Off) V/R OUTPUT (On/Off) M/R OUTPUT (On/Off) Solenoid valve relay activated Actuator motor and motor relay activated ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS ABS operation TCS operation VDC operation EBD fail-safe signal ABS fail-safe signal TCS fail-safe signal VDC fail-safe signal Crank operation Remarks
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
VDC switch-over valve
ACTIVE TEST MODE

CAUTION: Do not perform active test while driving vehicle. Make sure to completely bleed air from brake system. The active test cannot be performed with the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and brake warning lamp are on. ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and brake warning lamp are on during active test. NOTE: When active test is performed while depressing the pedal, the pedal depression amount will change. This is normal. (Only solenoid valve and ABS motor.) TEST IS STOPPED is displayed 10 seconds after operation start. After TEST IS STOPPED is displayed, to perform test again.
Test Item
ABS SOLENOID VALVE
Touch Up, Keep and Down. Then use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve operates as shown in the table below.
BRC-28
2009 G37 Coupe

Test item Display item (Note) FR RH IN SOL FR RH SOL FR RH OUT SOL USV [FR-RL] HSV [FR-RL] FR LH IN SOL FR LH SOL FR LH OUT SOL USV [FL-RR] HSV [FL-RR] RR RH IN SOL RR RH SOL RR RH OUT SOL USV [FL-RR] HSV [FL-RR] RR LH IN SOL RR LH SOL RR LH OUT SOL USV [FR-RL] HSV [FR-RL] *: On for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then Off. NOTE: A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an operation for checking. Display Up Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Keep On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off Down On On* Off Off On On* Off Off On On* Off Off On On* Off Off
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
BRC
ABS SOLENOID VALVE (ACT)
Touch Up, ACT UP and ACT KEEP. Then use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve operates as shown in the table below.
Test item Display item (Note) FR RH IN SOL FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR RH OUT SOL USV [FR-RL] HSV [FR-RL] FR LH IN SOL FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR LH OUT SOL USV [FL-RR] HSV [FL-RR] RR RH IN SOL RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR RH OUT SOL USV [FL-RR] HSV [FL-RR] RR LH IN SOL RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR LH OUT SOL USV [FR-RL] HSV [FR-RL] *: On for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then Off. NOTE: Display Up Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off ACT UP Off Off On On* Off Off On On* Off Off On On* Off Off On On* ACT KEEP Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off
BRC-29
2009 G37 Coupe

A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an operation for checking.
ABS MOTOR
Touch On and Off on screen. Make sure motor relay and actuator relay operates as shown in table below.
Display On On On Off Off On
Test item
Display item MOTOR RELAY ACTUATOR RLY (Note)
ABS MOTOR NOTE:
BRC-30
2009 G37 Coupe
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR-1

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
Description
INFOID:0000000004257568
When the sensor rotor rotates, the magnetic field changes. It converts the magnetic field changes to current signals (rectangular wave) and transmits them to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1101 C1102 C1103 C1104 Display item RR RH SENSOR-1 RR LH SENSOR-1 FR RH SENSOR-1 FR LH SENSOR-1 Malfunction detected condition Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open. Or when the sensor power voltage is outside the standard. Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open. Or when the sensor power voltage is outside the standard. Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open. Or when the sensor power voltage is outside the standard. Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open. Or when the sensor power voltage is outside the standard.
INFOID:0000000004257569
D
Possible cause
E
Harness or connector Wheel sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
BRC
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Check the self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results RR RH SENSOR-1 RR LH SENSOR-1 FR RH SENSOR-1 FR LH SENSOR-1
Is above displayed on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-31, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END
L
INFOID:0000000004257570
Diagnosis Procedure
CAUTION: Do not check between wheel sensor terminals.
1.CHECK TIRES
Check air pressure, wear and size. Are air pressure, wear and size within standard? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Adjust air pressure, or replace tire.
N O
2.CHECK SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR

Check sensor rotor for damage. Check wheel sensor for damage, disconnection or looseness. Are the sensor and sensor rotor normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair wheel sensor mount or replace sensor rotor. Then perform the self-diagnosis.
P
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
BRC-31
2009 G37 Coupe

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 3. Disconnect malfunctioning wheel sensor connector. 4. Check terminal to see if it is deformed, disconnected, loose, etc., Repair or replace it if any malfunction condition is found. 5. Reconnect connectors and then perform the self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector.
4.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Disconnect malfunctioning wheel sensor connector. Check continuity between terminals. (Also check continuity when steering wheel is turned right and left and when sensor harness inside the wheel house is moved.)
Measurement terminal for power supply circuit
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector Terminal 9 E41 26 7 6
Measurement terminal for signal circuit
Wheel sensor Connector E27 (Front RH) E60 (Front LH) B33 (Rear RH) B34 (Rear LH) 1 Terminal
Continuity
Existed
Measurement terminal for ground circuit
Continuity
Existed
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector Terminal 9, 10 E41 26, 5 7, 29 6, 27 E41 1, 4 Connector Terminal
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
5.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Disconnect malfunctioning wheel sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between wheel sensor harness connector power supply terminal and ground.
BRC-32
2009 G37 Coupe

Wheel sensor Connector E27 (Front RH) E60 (Front LH) B33 (Rear RH) B34 (Rear LH) 1 Ground 8 V or more Terminal
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
Voltage
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace applicable wheel sensor. NO >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
D
INFOID:0000000004257571
On DATA MONITOR, select FR LH SENSOR, FR RH SENSOR, RR LH SENSOR, and RR RH SENSOR, and check the vehicle speed. BRC
Wheel sensor FR LH SENSOR FR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR Nearly matches the speedometer display (10% or less) Vehicle speed (DATA MONITOR)
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-31, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
INFOID:0000000004257572
1.ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION

Always perform the ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT in WORK SUPPORT, when replacing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). >> END
K
BRC-33
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
INFOID:0000000004257573
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition When the circuit in the rear RH wheel sensor is short-circuited. Or when the distance between the wheel sensor and sensor rotor is too large and the sensor pulse cannot be recognized by the control unit. When the circuit in the rear LH wheel sensor is short-circuited. Or when the distance between the wheel sensor and sensor rotor is too large and the sensor pulse cannot be recognized by the control unit. When the circuit in the front RH wheel sensor is short-circuited. Or when the distance between the wheel sensor and sensor rotor is too large and the sensor pulse cannot be recognized by the control unit. When the circuit in the front LH wheel sensor is short-circuited. Or when the distance between the wheel sensor and sensor rotor is too large and the sensor pulse cannot be recognized by the control unit.
INFOID:0000000004257574
Possible cause
C1105
RR RH SENSOR-2
C1106
RR LH SENSOR-2
C1107
FR RH SENSOR-2
Harness or connector Wheel sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
C1108
FR LH SENSOR-2

Self-diagnosis results RR RH SENSOR-2 RR LH SENSOR-2 FR RH SENSOR-2 FR LH SENSOR-2
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257575
1.CHECK TIRES

Check sensor rotor for damage. Check wheel sensor for damage, disconnection or looseness. Are the sensor and sensor rotor normal?
BRC-34
2009 G37 Coupe

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair wheel sensor mount or replace sensor rotor. Then perform the self-diagnosis.
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Disconnect malfunctioning wheel sensor connector. Check terminal to see if it is deformed, disconnected, loose, etc., Repair or replace it if any malfunction condition is found. 5. Reconnect connectors and then perform the self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B

1. 2. 3. 4.
E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Disconnect malfunctioning wheel sensor connector. Check continuity between terminals. (Also check continuity when steering wheel is turned right and left BRC and when sensor harness inside the wheel house is moved.) G
Wheel sensor Connector E27 (Front RH) E60 (Front LH) B33 (Rear RH) B34 (Rear LH) 1 Existed Terminal Continuity
J
Wheel sensor Connector E27 (Front RH) E60 (Front LH) B33 (Rear RH) B34 (Rear LH) 2 Existed Terminal Continuity
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector Terminal 9, 10 E41 26, 5 7, 29 6, 27 E41 1, 4 Connector Terminal
M
Continuity
N
Not existed

BRC-35
2009 G37 Coupe

Wheel sensor Connector E27 (Front RH) E60 (Front LH) B33 (Rear RH) B34 (Rear LH) 1 Ground 8 V or more Terminal
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Voltage
INFOID:0000000004257576

On DATA MONITOR, select FR LH SENSOR, FR RH SENSOR, RR LH SENSOR, and RR RH SENSOR, and check the vehicle speed.
INFOID:0000000004257577

BRC-36
2009 G37 Coupe
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM

A
INFOID:0000000004257578

Description
Supplies electric power to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
B
INFOID:0000000004257579
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1109 Display item BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] Malfunction detected condition When the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply voltage is lower than normal.
C
Possible cause Harness or connector ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Self-diagnosis results BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL]
BRC
H
INFOID:0000000004257580
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or replace terminal. 4. Reconnect connectors and then perform the self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector. 1. 2. 3.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT AND
GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON or OFF and check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminal and ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector E41 Terminal 28 Condition Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: OFF Voltage
O
Ground Battery voltage Approx. 0 V
4. 5.
Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals and ground.
BRC-37
2009 G37 Coupe

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector E41 Terminal 1, 4
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Ground
Continuity Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check battery for terminal looseness, low voltage, etc. If any malfunction is found, repair malfunctioning parts. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
INFOID:0000000004257581

BRC-38
2009 G37 Coupe
C1110, C1153, C1170 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
A
C1110, C1153, C1170 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1110 C1153 C1170 Display item CONTROLLER FAILURE EMERGENCY BRAKE VARIANT CODING Malfunction detected condition When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is malfunctioning. (Pressure increase is too much or too little) In a case where VARIANT CODING is different. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Possible cause
INFOID:0000000004257582

Self-diagnosis results CONTROLLER FAILURE EMERGENCY BRAKE VARIANT CODING
BRC
I
INFOID:0000000004257583
Diagnosis Procedure
1.REPLACE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

CAUTION: Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) when self-diagnostic result shows items other than those applicable. >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
L
INFOID:0000000004257584

BRC-39
2009 G37 Coupe
C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYSTEM


Description
PUMP
The pump returns the brake fluid stored in the reservoir to the master cylinder by reducing the pressure.
INFOID:0000000004257585
MOTOR
The motor drives the pump according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition During the actuator motor operating with ON, when the actuator motor turns OFF, or when the control line for actuator motor relay is open. During the actuator motor operating with OFF, when the actuator motor turns ON, or when the control line for relay is shorted to ground.
INFOID:0000000004257586
Possible cause
C1111
PUMP MOTOR
Harness or connector ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Self-diagnosis results PUMP MOTOR
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257587
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check terminal for deformation, disconnect, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or replace terminal. 4. Reconnect connectors and then perform the self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector.
2.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminal and ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector E41 Terminal 2
Ground
Voltage Battery voltage

BRC-40
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components. [VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals and ground.
Ground
Continuity Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
E
INFOID:0000000004257588
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST

1. 2. On ACTIVE TEST, select ABS MOTOR. Touch On and Off on screen. Make sure motor relay and actuator relay operates as shown in table below.
BRC
Test item
Display item MOTOR RELAY ACTUATOR RLY (Note)
ABS MOTOR NOTE:
K
INFOID:0000000004257589

Always perform the ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT in WORK SUPPORT, when replacing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
>> END
N
BRC-41
2009 G37 Coupe
C1114 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM


Description
INFOID:0000000004257590
Activates or deactivates each solenoid valve according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition During the actuator relay operating with OFF, when the actuator relay turns ON, or when the control line for the relay is shorted to the ground. During the actuator relay operating with ON, when the actuator relay turns ON, or when the control line for the relay is open.
INFOID:0000000004257591
Possible cause
C1114
MAIN RELAY

Self-diagnosis results MAIN RELAY
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257592
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
2.CHECK SOLENOID, VDC SWITCH-OVER VALVE AND ACTUATOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminal and ground.
Ground
3.CHECK SOLENOID, VDC SWITCH-OVER VALVE AND ACTUATOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
BRC-42
2009 G37 Coupe

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals and ground.
Ground
Continuity Existed
INFOID:0000000004257593
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST

1. 2. On ACTIVE TEST, select ABS MOTOR. Touch On and Off on screen. Make sure motor relay and actuator relay operates as shown in table below.
BRC
Test item Display item MOTOR RELAY ACTUATOR RLY (Note)
ABS MOTOR NOTE:
INFOID:0000000004257594

Always perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor, when replacing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description". >> END
M K L
BRC-43
2009 G37 Coupe
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR

C1115 WHEEL SENSOR

Description
INFOID:0000000004257595
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] Malfunction detected condition
INFOID:0000000004257596
Possible cause Harness or connector Wheel sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
C1115
When wheel sensor input signal is malfunctioning.

Self-diagnosis results ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257597
1.CHECK TIRES

Check sensor rotor for damage. Check wheel sensor for damage, disconnection or looseness. Are the sensor and sensor rotor normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair wheel sensor mount or replace sensor rotor. Then perform the self-diagnosis.
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Disconnect malfunctioning wheel sensor connector. Check terminal to see if it is deformed, disconnected, loose, etc., Repair or replace it if any malfunction condition is found. 5. Reconnect connectors and then perform the self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector.

BRC-44
2009 G37 Coupe
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 3. Disconnect malfunctioning wheel sensor connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals. (Also check continuity when steering wheel is turned right and left and when sensor harness inside the wheel house is moved.)
Continuity
Existed
E
Continuity
BRC
Existed
H
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector Terminal 9, 10 E41 26, 5 7, 29 6, 27 E41 1, 4 Not existed Connector Terminal
Continuity

Wheel sensor Connector E27 (Front RH) E60 (Front LH) B33 (Rear RH) B34 (Rear LH) Terminal
Voltage
O
1 Ground 8 V or more
INFOID:0000000004257598

BRC-45
2009 G37 Coupe
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > On DATA MONITOR, select FR LH SENSOR, FR RH SENSOR, RR LH SENSOR, and RR RH SENSOR, and check the vehicle speed.
INFOID:0000000004257599

BRC-46
2009 G37 Coupe
C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH

A
INFOID:0000000004257600

Description
The stop lamp switch transmits the stop lamp switch signal (ON/OFF) to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition
INFOID:0000000004257601
Possible cause Harness or connector Stop lamp switch ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
C1116
STOP LAMP SW
When stop lamp switch circuit is open.

Self-diagnosis results STOP LAMP SW
BRC
Diagnosis Procedure
I
INFOID:0000000004257602
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or replace terminal. 5. Reconnect connectors securely. 6. Start engine. 7. Repeat pumping brake pedal carefully several times, and perform self-diagnosis. Is DTCC1116 detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector connection. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CLEARANCE

Check stop lamp switch clearance. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Adjust stop lamp switch clearance. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".
3.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
P
BRC-47
2009 G37 Coupe

Stop lamp switch Connector Terminal 1 2 (Without ICC models) 3 4 (With ICC models) Condition Release stop lamp switch (When brake pedal is depressed.) Push stop lamp switch (When brake pedal is released.)
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Continuity Existed Not existed
E110
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace stop lamp switch.
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. 3. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Connect stop lamp switch connector. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminal and ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector E41 Terminal 30 Condition Brake pedal is depressed Brake pedal is released Voltage Battery voltage Approx. 0 V
INFOID:0000000004257603

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch Connector Terminal 1 2 (Without ICC models) 3 4 (With ICC models) Condition Release stop lamp switch (When brake pedal is depressed.) Push stop lamp switch (When brake pedal is released.) Continuity Existed Not existed
E110
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch.
INFOID:0000000004257604

BRC-48
2009 G37 Coupe
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL

A
INFOID:0000000004257605
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL

Description
The solenoid valve increases, holds or decreases the fluid pressure of each brake caliper according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1120 C1122 C1124 C1126 Display item FR LH IN ABS SOL FR RH IN ABS SOL RR LH IN ABS SOL RR RH IN ABS SOL Malfunction detected condition When the control unit detects a malfunction in the front LH inlet solenoid circuit. When the control unit detects a malfunction in the front RH inlet solenoid circuit. When the control unit detects a malfunction in the rear LH inlet solenoid circuit. When the control unit detects a malfunction in the rear RH inlet solenoid circuit.
INFOID:0000000004257606
Possible cause
E
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
BRC

Self-diagnosis results FR LH IN ABS SOL FR RH IN ABS SOL RR LH IN ABS SOL RR RH IN ABS SOL
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257607
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
M
P
BRC-49
2009 G37 Coupe
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL

[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Ground
Ground
Continuity Existed
INFOID:0000000004257608
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST

1. 2. Select each test menu item on ACTIVE TEST. On the display, touch Up, Keep, and Down, and check that the system operates as shown in the table below.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END

BRC-50
2009 G37 Coupe
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Go to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-49, "Diagnosis Procedure". [VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
INFOID:0000000004257609

BRC
BRC-51
2009 G37 Coupe
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL

C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL

Description
INFOID:0000000004257610
The solenoid valve increases, holds or decreases the fluid pressure of each brake caliper according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1121 C1123 C1125 C1127 Display item FR LH OUT ABS SOL FR RH OUT ABS SOL RR LH OUT ABS SOL RR RH OUT ABS SOL Malfunction detected condition When the control unit detects a malfunction in the front LH outlet solenoid circuit. When the control unit detects a malfunction in the front RH outlet solenoid circuit. When the control unit detects a malfunction in the rear LH outlet solenoid circuit. When the control unit detects a malfunction in the rear RH outlet solenoid circuit.
INFOID:0000000004257611
Possible cause
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Self-diagnosis results FR LH OUT ABS SOL FR RH OUT ABS SOL RR LH OUT ABS SOL RR RH OUT ABS SOL
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257612
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
BRC-52
2009 G37 Coupe
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL

[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
Ground Voltage Battery voltage
Ground
Continuity Existed
BRC
INFOID:0000000004257613
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST

1. 2. Select each test menu item on ACTIVE TEST. On the display, touch Up, Keep, and Down, and check that the system operates as shown in the table below.
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END

BRC-53
2009 G37 Coupe
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Go to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-52, "Diagnosis Procedure". [VDC/TCS/ABS]
INFOID:0000000004257614

BRC-54
2009 G37 Coupe
C1130, C1131, C1132 ENGINE SIGNAL

A
INFOID:0000000004257615
C1130, C1131, C1132 ENGINE SIGNAL

Description
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM exchange the engine signal with CAN communication line.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1130 C1131 C1132 Display item ENGINE SIGNAL 1 ENGINE SIGNAL 2 ENGINE SIGNAL 3 Major engine components are malfunctioning. Malfunction detected condition
INFOID:0000000004257616
Possible cause Harness or connector ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ECM CAN communication line
BRC

Self-diagnosis results ENGINE SIGNAL 1 ENGINE SIGNAL 2 ENGINE SIGNAL 3
Diagnosis Procedure
J
INFOID:0000000004257617
1.CHECK ENGINE SYSTEM

1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Repair or replace items indicated, then perform ECM self-diagnosis again. 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> Repair or replace the affected part. NO >> INSPECTION END
M
INFOID:0000000004257618

BRC-55
2009 G37 Coupe
C1138 4WAS SYSTEM

C1138 4WAS SYSTEM

Description
INFOID:0000000004257619
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and the 4WAS control unit exchange signals via the CAN communication line.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004257620
Possible cause ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4WAS system CAN communication line
C1138
4WAS CIRCUIT
Abnormal condition in major 4WAS parts.

Self-diagnosis results 4WAS CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257621
1.CHECK 4WAS SYSTEM

Perform 4WAS front control unit self-diagnosis and 4WAS main control unit self-diagnosis. Repair or replace items indicated, then perform 4WAS front control unit self-diagnosis and 4WAS main control unit self-diagnosis again. 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> Repair or replace the affected part. NO >> INSPECTION END 1.
INFOID:0000000004257622

BRC-56
2009 G37 Coupe
C1142 PRESS SENSOR

A
INFOID:0000000004257623
C1142 PRESS SENSOR

Description
The pressure sensor converts the brake fluid pressure to an electric signal and transmits it to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). [The pressure sensor is integrated in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).]
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004257624
D
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition Pressure sensor signal line is open or shorted, or pressure sensor is malfunctioning. Possible cause Harness or connector Stop lamp switch ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
C1142
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
BRC

Self-diagnosis results PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
I
INFOID:0000000004257625
Diagnosis Procedure

Check stop lamp switch system. Refer to BRC-47, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning component.
2.CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check brake fluid leakage: Refer to BR-11, "Inspection". Check front brake piping: Refer to BR-25, "FRONT : Inspection". Check rear brake piping: Refer to BR-29, "REAR : Inspection". Check brake pedal: Refer to BR-20, "Inspection and Adjustment". Check master cylinder: Refer to BR-32, "Inspection". Check brake booster: Refer to BR-34, "Inspection and Adjustment". Check front disc brake: Refer to BR-48, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection" (1 piston type), BR-52, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection" (2 piston type), BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (4 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection" (4 piston type). 8. Check rear disc brake: Refer to BR-67, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection" (front caliper 1 piston type), BR-72, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection" (front caliper 2 piston type), BR-76, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection" (2 piston type). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning component. Check the self-diagnosis result. Is above displayed on the self-diagnosis display?
3.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS

BRC-57
2009 G37 Coupe
C1142 PRESS SENSOR

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NO >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
INFOID:0000000004257626

On DATA MONITOR, select PRESS SENSOR and check the brake fluid pressure.
Condition With ignition switch turned ON and brake pedal released. With ignition switch turned ON and brake pedal depressed. PRESS SENSOR (DATA MONITOR) Approx. 0 bar 40 to 300 bar
INFOID:0000000004257627

BRC-58
2009 G37 Coupe
C1143, C1144 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

A
INFOID:0000000004257628

Description
The steering angle sensor detects the rotation amount, angular velocity and direction of the steering wheel, and transmits the data to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1143 Display item ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT Malfunction detected condition Steering angle sensor is malfunctioning.
INFOID:0000000004257629
Possible cause Harness or connector Steering angle sensor 4WAS control unit (4WAS models) ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
C1144
ST ANG SEN SIGNAL
Neutral position of steering angle sensor is not finished.
BRC

Self-diagnosis results ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT ST ANG SEN SIGNAL
Diagnosis Procedure
J
INFOID:0000000004257630
1.VEHICLE INSPECTION
Check that the vehicle equips 4WAS. Does the vehicle equips 4WAS? YES >> Check 4WAS system. Refer to STC-40, "CONSULT-III Function [4WAS(FRONT)]" (4WAS FRONT CONTROL UNIT), STC-44, "CONSULT-III Function [4WAS(MAIN)/RAS/HICAS]" (4WAS MAIN CONTROL UNIT). NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector. Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or replace terminal. 5. Reconnect connectors and then perform the self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector. 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR HARNESS

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector. Check continuity between steering angle sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
BRC-59
2009 G37 Coupe

Steering angle sensor Connector M37 Terminal 7
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Ground
Continuity Existed
4. 5.
Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between steering angle sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Steering angle sensor Connector M37 Terminal 8
Ground
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace steering angle sensor and adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.

1. 2. Connect the steering angle sensor connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Select STR ANGLE SIG in DATA MONITOR and check steering angle sensor signal.
Steering condition Straight-ahead Turn 90 to right Turn 90 to left STR ANGLE SIG (DATA MONITOR) 2.5 Approx. +90 Approx. 90
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NO >> Replace steering angle sensor and adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
INFOID:0000000004257631

Select STR ANGLE SIG in DATA MONITOR and check steering angle sensor signal.
Steering condition Straight-ahead Turn 90 to right Turn 90 to left STR ANGLE SIG (DATA MONITOR) 2.5 Approx. +90 Approx. 90
INFOID:0000000004257632

Always perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor, when replacing the steering angle sensor or the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description". >> END
BRC-60
2009 G37 Coupe
C1145, C1146 YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR

A
INFOID:0000000004257633

Description
The yaw rate/side G sensor detects the yaw rate/side G affecting the vehicle, and transmits the data to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) as an analog voltage signal.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1145 C1146 Display item YAW RATE SENSOR SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT Malfunction detected condition Yaw rate sensor is malfunctioning, or the yaw rate sensor signal line is open or shorted. Side G sensor is malfunctioning, or circuit of side G sensor is open or shorted.
INFOID:0000000004257634
Possible cause Harness or connector ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Yaw rate/side G sensor

Self-diagnosis results YAW RATE SENSOR SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT
BRC
I
INFOID:0000000004257635
Diagnosis Procedure
CAUTION: Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc., when VDC function is off (VDC OFF switch ON) may cause yaw rate/side G sensor system to indicate a malfunction. However, this is not a malfunction, if normal operation can be resumed after restarting engine. Then erase memory of self-diagnosis. If vehicle is on turn-table at entrance to parking garage, or on other moving surface, VDC OFF indicator lamp may illuminate and CONSULT-III self-diagnosis may indicate yaw rate sensor system malfunction. However, in this case there is no malfunction in yaw rate sensor system. Take vehicle off of turn-table or other moving surface, and start engine. Results will return to normal. And after doing spin turns or acceleration turns with VDC function is being off (VDC OFF switch ON), too, the results will return to a normal condition by re-starting vehicle.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Disconnect yaw rate/side G sensor connector. Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or replace terminal. 5. Reconnect connectors and then perform the self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.CHECK YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect yaw rate/side G sensor connector.
BRC-61
2009 G37 Coupe

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 3. Turn ignition switch ON or OFF and check voltage between yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Yaw rate/side G sensor Connector M143 Terminal 4 Condition Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: OFF Voltage Battery voltage Approx. 0 V
Ground
3.CHECK YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Yaw rate/side G sensor Connector M143 Terminal 1 Ground Continuity Existed
4.CHECK YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR HARNESS

1. 2. Disconnect yaw rate/side G sensor connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check continuity between yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector terminals and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector E41 Terminal 25 45 Yaw rate/side G sensor Connector M143 Terminal 2 3 Continuity
Existed

1. 2. Connect the yaw rate/side G sensor connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Select YAW RATE SEN, SIDE G-SENSOR in DATA MONITOR and check yaw rate/side G sensor signal.
Vehicle condition Vehicle stopped Turning right Turning left YAW RATE SEN (DATA MONITOR) Approx. 0 d/s Negative value Positive value SIDE G-SENSOR (DATA MONITOR) Approx. 0 m/s2 Negative value Positive value
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NO >> Replace yaw rate/side G sensor.
INFOID:0000000004257636

Select YAW RATE SEN, SIDE G-SENSOR in DATA MONITOR and check yaw rate/side G sensor signal.
BRC-62
2009 G37 Coupe

Vehicle condition Vehicle stopped Turning right Turning left YAW RATE SEN (DATA MONITOR) Approx. 0 d/s Negative value Positive value SIDE G-SENSOR (DATA MONITOR) Approx. 0 m/s2 Negative value Positive value
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
INFOID:0000000004257637

BRC
BRC-63
2009 G37 Coupe
C1147, C1148, C1149, C1150 USV/HSV LINE

C1147, C1148, C1149, C1150 USV/HSV LINE

Description
USV1, USV2 (CUT VALVE)
The cut valve shuts off the normal brake fluid path from the master cylinder, when VDC/TCS is activated.
INFOID:0000000004257638
HSV1, HSV2 (SUCTION VALVE)

The suction valve supplies the brake fluid from the master cylinder to the pump, when VDC/TCS is activated.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1147 Display item USV LINE [FL-RR] Malfunction detected condition VDC switch-over solenoid valve (USV1) on the primary side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the power supply or the ground. VDC switch-over solenoid valve (USV2) on the primary side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the power supply or the ground. VDC switch-over solenoid valve (HSV1) on the primary side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the power supply or the ground. VDC switch-over solenoid valve (HSV2) on the primary side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the power supply or the ground.
INFOID:0000000004257639
Possible cause
C1148
USV LINE [FR-RL]
C1149
HSV LINE [FL-RR]
C1150
HSV LINE [FR-RL]

Self-diagnosis results USV LINE [FL-RR] USV LINE [FR-RL] HSV LINE [FL-RR] HSV LINE [FR-RL]
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257640
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
BRC-64
2009 G37 Coupe
C1147, C1148, C1149, C1150 USV/HSV LINE

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 3. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminal and ground.
Ground
E
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector E41 Terminal 1, 4 Ground Continuity Existed
BRC
G
INFOID:0000000004257641
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST

1. 2. Select each test menu item on ACTIVE TEST. On the display, touch Up, ACT UP, and ACT KEEP, and check that the system operates as shown in the table below.
Test item Display item (Note) FR RH IN SOL FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR RH OUT SOL USV [FR-RL] HSV [FR-RL] FR LH IN SOL FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR LH OUT SOL USV [FL-RR] HSV [FL-RR] RR RH IN SOL RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR RH OUT SOL USV [FL-RR] HSV [FL-RR] RR LH IN SOL RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR LH OUT SOL USV [FR-RL] HSV [FR-RL] *: On for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then Off. NOTE: A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an operation for checking. Display Up Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off ACT UP Off Off On On* Off Off On On* Off Off On On* Off Off On On* ACT KEEP Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off
BRC-65
2009 G37 Coupe
C1147, C1148, C1149, C1150 USV/HSV LINE

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-64, "Diagnosis Procedure". [VDC/TCS/ABS]
INFOID:0000000004257642

BRC-66
2009 G37 Coupe
C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

A
INFOID:0000000004257643

Description
The brake fluid level switch converts the brake fluid level to an electric signal and transmits it to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC C1155 Display item BR FLUID LEVEL LOW Malfunction detected condition Brake fluid level is low or communication line between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake fluid level switch is open or shorted.
INFOID:0000000004257644
Possible cause Harness or connector Brake fluid level switch Unified meter and A/C amp.

Self-diagnosis results BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
BRC
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257645
1.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

Check the brake fluid level. Refer to BR-11, "Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refill the brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Refilling".
J
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect brake fluid level switch connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector. Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or replace terminal. 4. Reconnect connectors and then perform the self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector. 1. 2. 3.
L
3.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect brake fluid level switch connector. Check continuity between brake fluid level switch connector terminals.
Brake fluid level switch Connector E47 Terminal 12 Condition When brake fluid is full in the reservoir tank. When brake fluid is empty in the reservoir tank. Continuity Not existed Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4.

BRC-67
2009 G37 Coupe

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Brake fluid level switch is malfunction. Replace reservoir tank. [VDC/TCS/ABS]
4.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. 2. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector. Check continuity between brake fluid level switch harness connector terminals, unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal and/or ground.
Unified meter and A/C amp. Connector M67 Terminal 57 Brake fluid level switch Connector E47 Terminal 1
Continuity Existed
Unified meter and A/C amp. Connector M67 Terminal 57
Ground
Brake fluid level switch Connector E47 Terminal 2
Ground
Continuity Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
INFOID:0000000004257646
1.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect brake fluid level switch connector. Check continuity between brake fluid level switch connector terminals.
Brake fluid level switch Connector E47 Terminal 12 Condition When brake fluid is full in the reservoir tank. When brake fluid is empty in the reservoir tank. Continuity Not existed Existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace reservoir tank.
INFOID:0000000004257647

BRC-68
2009 G37 Coupe
C1185 ICC UNIT

A
INFOID:0000000004257648
C1185 ICC UNIT

Description
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and the ICC sensor integrated unit exchange signals via the CAN communication line.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
INFOID:0000000004257649
Possible cause Harness or connector ICC sensor integrated unit ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) CAN communication line
C1185
ACC CONT
ICC sensor integrated unit internal malfunction.
BRC

Self-diagnosis results ACC CONT
I
INFOID:0000000004257650
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT CIRCUIT

Perform ICC sensor integrated unit self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> Repair or replace malfunction components. NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> Repair or replace malfunction components. NO >> INSPECTION END
INFOID:0000000004257651

O
BRC-69
2009 G37 Coupe
U1000, U1002 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

U1000, U1002 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

Description
INFOID:0000000004257652
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC U1000 Display item CAN COMM CIRCUIT Malfunction detected condition When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or less.
INFOID:0000000004257653
Possible cause
U1002
SYSTEM COMM
CAN communication line ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257654
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or replace terminal. Reconnect connector and perform self-diagnosis.
Self-diagnosis results CAN COMM CIRCUIT SYSTEM COMM
Is above displayed on the self-diagnosis display? YES >> Go to LAN-27, "CAN System Specification Chart". NO >> INSPECTION END
INFOID:0000000004257655

BRC-70
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004257656

Description
The parking brake switch converts the status of the parking brake lever (M/T models) or the parking brake pedal (A/T models) to an electric signal and transmits it to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
INFOID:0000000004257657
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH OPERATION

Operate the parking brake lever (M/T models) or the parking brake pedal (A/T models). Then check that the brake warning lamp in the combination meter turns on/off correctly.
Condition When the parking brake switch is operation When the parking brake switch is not operation. Brake warning lamp illumination status
E
ON OFF
BRC
G
INFOID:0000000004257658
Diagnosis Procedure

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect parking brake switch connector. Check continuity between parking brake switch connector terminal.
Parking brake switch Connector B14 (M/T models) E107 (A/T models) Terminal 1 Condition When the parking brake switch is operated. When the parking brake switch is not operated. Continuity Existed Not existed
Ground
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace parking brake switch.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check if the indication and operation of combination meter are normal. Refer to MWI-35, "Diagnosis Description". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace combination meter.
M

On DATA MONITOR, select PARK BRAKE SW and perform the parking brake switch inspection.
Condition Parking brake switch is active Parking brake switch is inactive PARK BRAKE SW (DATA MONITOR) On Off
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-37, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
BRC-71
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004257659

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect parking brake switch connector. Check continuity between parking brake switch connector terminal.
Parking brake switch Connector B14 (M/T models) E107 (A/T models) Terminal 1 Condition When the parking brake switch is operated. When the parking brake switch is not operated. Continuity Existed Not existed
Ground
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace parking brake switch.
BRC-72
2009 G37 Coupe
VDC OFF SWITCH

A
INFOID:0000000004257660
VDC OFF SWITCH

VDC OFF switch can deactivate (turn OFF) the VDC/TCS function by pressing the VDC OFF switch.
INFOID:0000000004257661
1.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH OPERATION

Turn ON/OFF the VDC OFF switch and check that the VDC OFF indicator lamp in the combination meter turns ON/OFF correctly.
D
Condition VDC OFF switch: ON VDC OFF switch: OFF VDC OFF indicator lamp illumination status ON OFF
BRC
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257662
1.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VDC OFF switch connector. Check continuity between VDC OFF switch connector terminals.
VDC OFF switch Connector M19 Terminal 12 Condition When VDC OFF switch is hold pressed. When releasing VDC OFF switch. Continuity Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> VDC OFF switch is malfunctioning. Replace VDC OFF switch.
2.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH HARNESS

1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check continuity between VDC OFF switch connector terminals and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal and/or ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector E41 Terminal 31 VDC OFF switch Connector M19 Terminal 1 Existed
Continuity
O
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector E41 Terminal 31 Ground Continuity Not existed
VDC OFF switch Connector M19 Terminal 2
Ground
Continuity Existed

BRC-73
2009 G37 Coupe
VDC OFF SWITCH

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> If the open or short in harness, repair or replace harness. [VDC/TCS/ABS]

Check if the indication and operation of combination meter are normal. Refer to MWI-35, "Diagnosis Description". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NO >> Repair or replace combination meter.
INFOID:0000000004257663

1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VDC OFF switch connector. Check continuity between VDC OFF switch connector terminals.
VDC OFF switch Connector M19 Terminal 12 Condition When VDC OFF switch is hold pressed. When releasing VDC OFF switch. Continuity Existed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace VDC OFF switch.
BRC-74
2009 G37 Coupe
ABS WARNING LAMP

A
INFOID:0000000004257664
ABS WARNING LAMP

Description
Condition Ignition switch OFF For 1 second after turning ON ignition switch 1 second later after turning ON ignition switch ABS function is malfunctioning. EBD function is malfunctioning. ABS warning lamp
INFOID:0000000004257665
: ON : OFF
1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP OPERATION

Check that the lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
BRC
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257666
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check items displayed by self-diagnosis.

BRC-75
2009 G37 Coupe
BRAKE WARNING LAMP

BRAKE WARNING LAMP

Description
Condition Ignition switch OFF For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 1 second later after turning ignition switch ON EBD function is malfunctioning. NOTE: 1: Brake warning lamp will turn on in case of parking brake operation (when switch is ON) or of brake fluid level switch operation (when brake fluid is insufficient). 2: After starting engine, brake warning lamp is turned off. Brake warning lamp (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 2)
INFOID:0000000004257667
: ON : OFF
INFOID:0000000004257668
1.BRAKE WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK 1

Check that the lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-76, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.BRAKE WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK 2

Check that the brake warning lamp in the combination meter turns ON/OFF correctly when operating the parking brake lever (M/T models) or the parking brake pedal (A/T models). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-71, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257669

Check that the brake warning lamp in the combination meter turns ON/OFF correctly when operating the parking brake lever (M/T models) or the parking brake pedal (A/T models). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-71, "Diagnosis Procedure".

BRC-76
2009 G37 Coupe
VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP

A
INFOID:0000000004257670
VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP

Description
Condition Ignition switch OFF For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 1 second later after turning ignition switch ON VDC OFF switch turned ON. (VDC function is OFF.) VDC/TCS function is malfunctioning. ABS function is malfunctioning. EBD function is malfunctioning. VDC OFF indicator lamp
INFOID:0000000004257671
: ON : OFF
1.VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION CHECK 1

Check that the lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-77, "Diagnosis Procedure".
BRC
2.VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION CHECK 2

Check that the VDC OFF indicator lamp in the combination meter turns ON/OFF correctly when operating the VDC OFF switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-73, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257672

Check that the VDC OFF indicator lamp in the combination meter turns ON/OFF correctly when operating the VDC OFF switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-73, "Diagnosis Procedure".

BRC-77
2009 G37 Coupe
SLIP INDICATOR LAMP

SLIP INDICATOR LAMP

Description
Condition Ignition switch OFF For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 1 second later after turning ignition switch ON VDC/TCS function is malfunctioning. ABS function is malfunctioning. EBD function is malfunctioning. SLIP indicator lamp
INFOID:0000000004257674 INFOID:0000000004257673
: ON : OFF
1.CHECK SLIP INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION

Check that the lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-78, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257675

BRC-78
2009 G37 Coupe
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
A

Reference Value
CAUTION: The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the event the output circuit (harness) is open or short-circuited.
INFOID:0000000004257676
Data monitor Monitor item Display content Condition Vehicle stopped FR LH SENSOR Wheel speed Vehicle running (Note 1) Vehicle stopped FR RH SENSOR Wheel speed Vehicle running (Note 1) Vehicle stopped RR LH SENSOR Wheel speed Vehicle running (Note 1) Vehicle stopped RR RH SENSOR Wheel speed Vehicle running (Note 1) When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is not depressed Ignition switch ON P position R position N position D position VDC OFF switch ON (When VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON) VDC OFF switch OFF (When VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF) Vehicle stopped YAW RATE SEN Yaw rate detected by yaw rate/side G sensor Turning right Turning left Throttle actuator opening/closing is displayed (linked with accelerator pedal) Accelerator pedal not depressed (ignition switch is ON) Depress accelerator pedal (ignition switch is ON) Reference value in normal operation 0 [km/h (MPH)] Nearly matches the speed meter display ( 10 % or less) 0 [km/h (MPH)] Nearly matches the speed meter display ( 10 % or less) 0 [km/h (MPH)] Nearly matches the speed meter display ( 10 % or less) 0 [km/h (MPH)] Nearly matches the speed meter display ( 10 % or less) On Off 10 16 V P R N D On Off Approx. 0 d/s Negative value Positive value 0%
BRC
STOP LAMP SW BATTERY VOLT
Stop lamp switch signal status Battery voltage supplied to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
SLCT LVR POSI
A/T selector lever position
OFF SW
VDC OFF switch ON/OFF
ACCEL POS SIG
P
0 - 100 %
BRC-79
2009 G37 Coupe

Data monitor Monitor item Display content Condition Vehicle stopped SIDE G-SENSOR Transverse G detected by side G sensor Turning right Turning left Straight-ahead STR ANGLE SIG Steering angle detected by steering angle sensor Turn 90 to right Turn 90 to left Brake fluid pressure detected by pressure sensor With ignition switch turned ON and brake pedal released With ignition switch turned ON and brake pedal depressed With engine stopped ENGINE RPM With engine running Engine running When brake fluid level switch ON When brake fluid level switch OFF Parking brake switch is active Parking brake switch is inactive Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) FR RH IN SOL Operation status of each solenoid valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) FR RH OUT SOL Operation status of each solenoid valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) FR LH IN SOL Operation status of each solenoid valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) FR LH OUT SOL Operation status of each solenoid valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) RR RH IN SOL Operation status of each solenoid valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) RR RH OUT SOL Operation status of each solenoid valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) Reference value in normal operation Approx. 0 m/s2 Negative value (m/s2) Positive value (m/s2) 2.5 Approx. +90 Approx. 90 Approx. 0 bar 40 to 300 bar 0 [tr/min (rpm)] Almost in accordance with tachometer display On Off On Off On
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
PRESS SENSOR
FLUID LEV SW
Brake fluid level switch signal status
PARK BRAKE SW
Parking brake switch signal status
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
BRC-80
2009 G37 Coupe

Data monitor Monitor item Display content Condition Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) RR LH IN SOL Operation status of each solenoid valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) RR LH OUT SOL Operation status of each solenoid valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) When the motor relay and motor are operating When the motor relay and motor are not operating When the actuator relay is operating When the actuator relay is not operating When ABS warning lamp is ON When ABS warning lamp is OFF When VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON When VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF When SLIP indicator lamp is ON When SLIP indicator lamp is OFF EBD is active EBD is inactive ABS is active ABS is inactive TCS is active TCS is inactive VDC is active VDC is inactive In EBD fail-safe EBD is normal In ABS fail-safe ABS is normal In TCS fail-safe TCS is normal In VDC fail-safe VDC is normal Crank is active Crank is inactive When actuator (switch-over valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) VDC switch-over valve When actuator (switch-over valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) Reference value in normal operation On
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
Off
C
On
D
Off
On Off
MOTOR RELAY
Motor and motor relay operation
BRC
On Off On Off On Off On Off Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On
ACTUATOR RLY (Note 2) ABS WARN LAMP
Actuator relay operation ABS warning lamp (Note 3) VDC OFF indicator lamp (Note 3) SLIP indicator lamp (Note 3) Not applied but displayed EBD operation
OFF LAMP
SLIP LAMP BST OPER SIG EBD SIGNAL
ABS SIGNAL
ABS operation
TCS SIGNAL
TCS operation
VDC SIGNAL
VDC operation
EBD FAIL SIG
EBD fail-safe signal
ABS FAIL SIG
ABS fail-safe signal
TCS FAIL SIG
TCS fail-safe signal
VDC FAIL SIG
VDC fail-safe signal
CRANKING SIG
Crank operation
USV [FL-RR] (Note 2)
Off
BRC-81
2009 G37 Coupe

Data monitor Monitor item Display content Condition When actuator (switch-over valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) VDC switch-over valve When actuator (switch-over valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) When actuator (switch-over valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) VDC switch-over valve When actuator (switch-over valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) When actuator (switch-over valve) is active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) VDC switch-over valve When actuator (switch-over valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON) When the solenoid valve relay is active (When ignition switch OFF) When the solenoid valve relay is not active (in the fail-safe mode) When the actuator motor and motor relay are active (ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-III) When the actuator motor and motor relay are inactive NOTE: 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal. 2: A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an operation for checking. 3: On and off timing for warning lamp and indicator lamp. - ABS warning lamp: Refer to BRC-75, "Description". - Brake warning lamp: Refer to BRC-76, "Description". - VDC OFF indicator lamp: Refer to BRC-77, "Description". - SLIP indicator lamp: Refer to BRC-78, "Description". Reference value in normal operation On
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
USV [FR-RL] (Note 2)
Off
On
HSV [FL-RR] (Note 2)
Off
On
HSV [FR-RL] (Note 2)
Off
V/R OUTPUT (Note 2)
On Off
Solenoid valve relay activated
On
M/R OUTPUT
Actuator motor and motor relay activated
Off
BRC-82
2009 G37 Coupe

INFOID:0000000004257677
Wiring Diagram - BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM -
BRC
P
JCFWM0273GB
BRC-83
2009 G37 Coupe

JCFWM0274GB
BRC-84
2009 G37 Coupe

A
BRC
O
JCFWM0275GB
BRC-85
2009 G37 Coupe

JCFWM0276GB
BRC-86
2009 G37 Coupe

A
BRC
O
JCFWM0277GB
Fail-Safe
ABS, EBD SYSTEM
P
INFOID:0000000004257678
In case of electrical malfunctions with the ABS, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. In case of electrical malfunctions with the EBD, brake warning lamp, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. Simultaneously, the VDC/TCS/ABS become one of the following conditions of the fail-safe function.
BRC-87
2009 G37 Coupe

[VDC/TCS/ABS] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > For malfunction of ABS, only the EBD is activated and the condition of vehicle is the same condition of vehicles without TCS/ABS system. NOTE: ABS self-diagnosis sound may be heard. That is a normal condition because a self-diagnosis for Ignition switch ON and The first starting are being performed. For malfunction of EBD, EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without TCS/ABS, EBD system.
VDC / TCS
In case of malfunction in the VDC/TCS/ABS system, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp are turned on, and the condition of vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without VDC/TCS control. CAUTION: If the Fail-Safe function is activated, then perform self-diagnosis for VDC/TCS/ABS control system.
DTC No. Index

DTC C1101 C1102 C1103 C1104 C1105 C1106 C1107 C1108 C1109 C1110 C1111 C1114 C1115 C1116 C1120 C1121 C1122 C1123 C1124 C1125 C1126 C1127 C1130 C1131 C1132 C1138 C1142 C1143 C1144 C1145 C1146 Items (CONSULT screen terms) RR RH SENSOR-1 RR LH SENSOR-1 FR RH SENSOR-1 FR LH SENSOR-1 RR RH SENSOR-2 RR LH SENSOR-2 FR RH SENSOR-2 FR LH SENSOR-2 BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] CONTROLLER FAILURE PUMP MOTOR MAIN RELAY ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] STOP LAMP SW FR LH IN ABS SOL FR LH OUT ABS SOL FR RH IN ABS SOL FR RH OUT ABS SOL RR LH IN ABS SOL RR LH OUT ABS SOL RR RH IN ABS SOL RR RH OUT ABS SOL ENGINE SIGNAL 1 ENGINE SIGNAL 2 ENGINE SIGNAL 3 4WAS CIRCUIT PRESS SEN CIRCUIT ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT ST ANG SEN SIGNAL YAW RATE SENSOR SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT Reference
INFOID:0000000004257679
BRC-31, "DTC Logic"
BRC-34, "DTC Logic"
BRC-37, "DTC Logic" BRC-39, "DTC Logic" BRC-40, "DTC Logic" BRC-42, "DTC Logic" BRC-44, "DTC Logic" BRC-47, "DTC Logic" BRC-49, "DTC Logic" BRC-52, "DTC Logic" BRC-49, "DTC Logic" BRC-52, "DTC Logic" BRC-49, "DTC Logic" BRC-52, "DTC Logic" BRC-49, "DTC Logic" BRC-52, "DTC Logic"
BRC-55, "DTC Logic"
BRC-56, "DTC Logic" BRC-57, "DTC Logic" BRC-59, "DTC Logic"
BRC-61, "DTC Logic"
BRC-88
2009 G37 Coupe

DTC C1147 C1148 C1149 C1150 C1153 C1155 C1170 C1185 U1000 U1002 Items (CONSULT screen terms) USV LINE [FL-RR] USV LINE [FR-RL] HSV LINE [FL-RR] HSV LINE [FR-RL] EMERGENCY BRAKE BR FLUID LEVEL LOW VARIANT CORDING ACC CONT CAN COMM CIRCUIT SYSTEM COMM BRC-39, "DTC Logic" BRC-67, "DTC Logic" BRC-39, "DTC Logic" BRC-69, "DTC Logic" BRC-70, "DTC Logic" BRC-64, "DTC Logic"
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
Reference
BRC
BRC-89
2009 G37 Coupe
EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION FREQUENCY

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION FREQUENCY
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257680
1.CHECK START
Check front and rear brake force distribution using a brake tester. Refer to BR-77, "General Specifications". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check brake system.
2.CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLE

Make sure that there is no excessive play in the front and rear axles. Front - 2WD: refer to FAX-5, "Inspection". - AWD: refer to FAX-14, "Inspection". Rear: refer to RAX-5, "Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
3.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR

Check the following. Wheel sensor installation for damage. Sensor rotor installation for damage. Wheel sensor connector connection. Wheel sensor harness inspection. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace wheel sensor or sensor rotor. Repair harness.
4.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP DISPLAY

Make sure that the ABS warning lamp is turned off after the ignition switch is turned ON or when driving. Is the ABS warning lamp illuminated? YES >> Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-26, "CONSULT-III Function". NO >> Normal
BRC-90
2009 G37 Coupe
UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION

A
INFOID:0000000004257681
UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION

Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE

Check brake pedal stroke. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment". Is the stroke too large? YES >> Bleed air from brake tube and hose. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". Check brake pedal, brake booster, and master cylinder for mount play, looseness, brake system fluid leakage, etc. - Brake pedal: Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment". - Brake master cylinder: Refer to BR-13, "Inspection". - Brake booster: Refer to BR-14, "Inspection". - Brake fluid: Refer to BR-11, "Inspection". NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUNCTION
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS. Check if braking force is BRC normal in this condition. Connect connector after inspection. Is the inspection result normal? G YES >> Normal NO >> Check brake system.
H
BRC-91
2009 G37 Coupe
THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG

THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG

Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257682
CAUTION: The stopping distance on slippery road surfaces might be longer when the ABS is operating than when the ABS is not operating.
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS. In this condition, check stopping distance. After inspection, connect connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Normal NO >> Check brake system.
BRC-92
2009 G37 Coupe
ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

A
INFOID:0000000004257683
ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

Diagnosis Procedure
CAUTION: ABS does not operate when speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or lower.
1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP DISPLAY

Make sure that the ABS warning lamp turns OFF after ignition switch is turned ON or when driving. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Normal NO >> Perform self-diagnosis.
C D
BRC
BRC-93
2009 G37 Coupe
PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION SOUND OCCURS

PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION SOUND OCCURS

Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004257684
CAUTION: Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly depressed (just place a foot on it). However, this is normal. When shifting gears When driving on slippery road During cornering at high speed When passing over bumps or grooves [at approximately 50 mm (1.97 in) or more] When pulling away just after starting engine [at approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH) or higher]
1.SYMPTOM CHECK 1
Check that there are pedal vibrations when the engine is started. Do vibrations occur? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspect the brake pedal.
2.SYMPTOM CHECK 2
Check that there are ABS operation noises when the engine is started. Do the operation noises occur? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Perform self -diagnosis.
3.SYMPTOM CHECK 3
Check symptoms when electrical component (headlamps, etc.) switches are operated. Do symptoms occur? YES >> Check if there is a radio, antenna, antenna lead wire, or wiring close to the control unit. If there is, move it farther away. NO >> Normal
BRC-94
2009 G37 Coupe
VEHICLE JERKS DURING VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL

A
INFOID:0000000004257685
VEHICLE JERKS DURING VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL

Diagnosis Procedure
1.SYMPTOM CHECK
Check if the vehicle jerks during VDC/TCS/ABS control. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Normal. NO >> GO TO 2.

Perform self-diagnostic of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Are self-diagnosis results indicated? YES >> Check corresponding items, make repairs, and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, etc. 2. Securely connect connectors and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis results indicated? YES >> If poor contact, damage, open or short circuit of connector terminal is found, repair or replace. NO >> GO TO 4.
BRC
4.CHECK ECM AND A/T SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Perform ECM self-diagnosis and A/T self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis results indicated? YES >> Check the corresponding items. NO >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
I
BRC-95
2009 G37 Coupe


Description
Symptom Slight vibrations are felt on the brake pedal and the operation noises occur, when VDC, TCS or ABS is activated. Stopping distance is longer than that of vehicles without ABS when the vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. The brake pedal moves and generates noises, when TCS or VDC is activated due to rapid acceleration or sharp turn. The brake pedal vibrates and motor operation noises occur from the engine room, after the engine starts and just after the vehicle starts. Depending on the road conditions, the driver may experience a sluggish feel. TCS may activate momentarily if wheel speed changes when driving over location where friction coefficient varies, when downshifting, or when fully depressing accelerator pedal. The ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn ON when the vehicle is subject to strong shaking or large vibration, such as when the vehicle is rotating on a turntable or located on a ship while the engine is running. VDC may not operate normally or the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp may illuminate, when running on a special road that is extremely slanted (e.g. bank in a circuit course). A malfunction may occur in the yaw rate/side G sensor system, when the vehicle turns sharply, such as during a spin turn, axle turn, or drift driving, while the VDC function is off (VDC OFF indicator lamp illuminated). This is a normal, and it is caused by the ABS operation check. This is normal, because TCS places the highest priority on the optimum traction (stability). In this case, restart the engine on a normal road. If the normal condition is restored, there is no malfunction. At that time, erase the selfdiagnosis memory. Normal (Deactivate the VDC/TCS function before performing an inspection on a chassis dynamometer.) This is not a VDC system error but results from characteristic change of tire. This is a normal condition due to the VDC, TCS or ABS activation.
INFOID:0000000004257686
Result
The vehicle speed will not increase even though the accelerator pedal is depressed, when inspecting the speedometer on a 2-wheel chassis dynamometer.
VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may simultaneously turn on when low tire pressure warning lamp turns on.
BRC-96
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
INFOID:0000000004685381
The Supplemental Restraint System such as AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER, used along C with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front D air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS AIR BAG and SEAT BELT of this Service Manual. WARNING: E To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. BRC Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS AIR BAG. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
INFOID:0000000004685382
N
PIIB3706J
Precaution for Brake System
INFOID:0000000004257689
WARNING: Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Only use DOT 3 brake fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". Never reuse drained brake fluid. Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil. They may damage rubber parts and cause improper operation. Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
BRC-97
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A) and torque wrench (B). Always conform the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes. Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction is detected, replace part with a new one. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work. [VDC/TCS/ABS]
JPFIA0001ZZ
Precaution for Brake Control
INFOID:0000000004257690
When starting engine or when starting vehicle just after starting engine, brake pedal may vibrate or motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is normal condition. When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for estimate causes before starting diagnostic servicing. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and oil leaks. If tire size and type are used in an improper combination, or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate. ABS might be out of order or malfunctions by putting a radio (wiring inclusive), an antenna and a lead-in wire near the control unit. If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness pinches, open circuits, and improper wiring. VDC system may not operate normally or a VDC OFF indicator lamp or SLIP indicator lamp may light. - When replacing the following parts with parts other than genuine parts or making modifications: Suspension related parts (shock absorber, spring, bushing, etc.), tires, wheels (other than specified sizes), brake-related parts (pad, rotor, caliper, etc.), engine-related parts (muffler, ECM, etc.) and body reinforcement-related parts (roll bar, tower bar, etc.). - When driving with worn or deteriorated suspension, tires and brake-related parts.
BRC-98
2009 G37 Coupe
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000004257691
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name
C
Description
D
ST30720000 (J-25405) Drift a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
ZZA0701D
BRC
ST27863000 ( ) Drift a: 74.5 mm (2.933 in) dia. b: 62.5 mm (2.461 in) dia.
ZZA0832D
G
Installing rear sensor rotor
I
KV40104710 ( ) a: 76.3 mm (3.004 in) dia. b: 67.9 mm (2.673 in) dia.
ZZA0832D
Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000004257692
M
1. Flare nut crowfoot a: 10 mm (0.39 in) /12 mm (0.47 in) 2. Torque wrench Installing brake tube
N
S-NT360
BRC-99
2009 G37 Coupe
WHEEL SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]

WHEEL SENSOR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004257693
JSFIA0001GB
1. A.
Front LH wheel sensor Front : Vehicle front
2. B.
Rear LH wheel sensor Rear
3.
Rear RH wheel sensor
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbol marks in the figure.
NOTE: The above figure (front side) shows left side. Right side is the mirror image.

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004257694
Pay attention to the following when removing sensor. CAUTION: Do not twist sensor harness as much as possible, when removing it. Pull sensors out without pulling sensor harness. Take care to avoid damaging sensor edges or rotor teeth. Remove wheel sensor first before removing front or rear wheel hub. This is to avoid damage to sensor wiring and loss of sensor function.
INSTALLATION
Pay attention to the following when installing wheel sensor. Tighten installation bolts to the specified torques. When installing, make sure there is no foreign material such as iron chips on and in the mounting hole of the wheel sensor. Make sure no foreign material has been caught in the sensor rotor. Remove any foreign material and clean the mount. When installing wheel sensor, be sure to press rubber grommets in until they lock at locations shown above in the figure. When installed, harness must not be twisted.
BRC-100
2009 G37 Coupe
SENSOR ROTOR
A
INFOID:0000000004257695
SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View
Refer to FAX-6, "Exploded View" (2WD models), FAX-16, "Exploded View" (AWD models).
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004257696
Sensor rotor cannot be disassembled. Remove the sensor rotor together with hub bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-6, "Exploded View" (2WD models), FAX-16, "Exploded View" (AWD models).
INSTALLATION
Sensor rotor cannot be disassembled. Remove the sensor rotor together with hub bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-6, "Exploded View" (2WD models), FAX-16, "Exploded View" (AWD models).
E
REAR SENSOR ROTOR

REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004257697
BRC
I
JSFIA0054JP
1.
Side flange
2.
Rear wheel sensor rotor
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
K
INFOID:0000000004257698
Follow the procedure below to remove rear sensor rotor. - Remove side flange. Refer to DLN-176, "2WD : Exploded View" (R200: 2WD models), DLN-189, "AWD : Exploded View" (R200: AWD models), DLN-249, "M/T : Exploded View" (R200V: M/T models), DLN-261, "A/ T : Exploded View" (R200V: A/T models). - Using a bearing replacer (suitable tool) and puller (suitable tool), remove sensor rotor from side flange.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor rotor. Follow the procedure below to install rear sensor rotor. - Using a drifts, press rear sensor rotor onto side flange. A: Drift [SST: ST30720000 (J-25405)] B: Drift [SST: ST27863000 ( )] C: Drift [SST: KV40104710 ( )] - Install side flange. Refer to DLN-176, "2WD : Exploded View" (R200: 2WD models), DLN-189, "AWD : Exploded View" (R200: AWD models), DLN-249, "M/T : Exploded View" (R200V: M/T models), DLN-261, "A/T : Exploded View" (R200V: A/T models).
SFIA3387E
BRC-101
2009 G37 Coupe


Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004257699
JSFIA0007GB
1. 4. A. D. G.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control 2. unit) Bracket Left side of dash panel To front LH brake caliper To front RH brake caliper : Vehicle front B. E.
Connector
3.
Bushing
From master cylinder secondary side C. To rear RH brake caliper F.
From master cylinder primary side To Rear LH brake caliper

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004257700
CAUTION: Before servicing, disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal. To remove brake tube, use a flare nut wrench to prevent flare nuts and brake tube from being damaged. To install, use flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Do not apply excessive impact to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), such as dropping it. Do not remove and install actuator by holding harness. After work is completed, bleed air from brake tube. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". 1. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Exploded View". 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 3. Loosen brake tube flare nuts, then remove brake tubes from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 4. Remove tire (front LH side). 5. Remove fender protector (rear): (front LH side). Refer to EXT-24, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View". 6. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) bracket mounting nut.
BRC-102
2009 G37 Coupe

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) from vehicle. [VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Before servicing, disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal. To remove brake tube, use a flare nut wrench to prevent flare nuts and brake tube from being damaged. To install, use flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Do not apply excessive impact to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), such as dropping it. Do not remove and install actuator by holding harness. After work is completed, bleed air from brake tube. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System". After installing harness connector in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), make sure connector is securely locked. When replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
BRC
BRC-103
2009 G37 Coupe
YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR

YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR

Exploded View
INFOID:0000000004257701
JSFIA0002GB
1.
Yaw rate/side G sensor : Vehicle front
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbol makes in the figure.

REMOVAL
INFOID:0000000004257702
CAUTION: Do not drop or strike yaw rate/side G sensor, or do not use power tool etc., because yaw rate/side G sensor is sensitive to the impact. 1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View". 2. Disconnect yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector. 3. Remove mounting bolts. Remove yaw rate/side G sensor.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not drop or strike yaw rate/side G sensor, or do not use power tool etc., because yaw rate/side G sensor is sensitive to the impact.
BRC-104
2009 G37 Coupe

A
INFOID:0000000004257703

Exploded View
JSFIA0003ZZ
1.
Steering angle sensor : Vehicle front
BRC
INFOID:0000000004257704

REMOVAL
1. 2. Remove spiral cable assembly. Refer to SR-15, "Exploded View". Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After work, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description". Perform 4WAS front actuator adjustment. Refer to STC-28, "4WAS FRONT ACTUATOR NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description".
I
BRC-105
2009 G37 Coupe
PREVIEW FUNCTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BRAKE ASSIST]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PREVIEW FUNCTION
System Description
When the Preview Function identifies the need to apply emergency braking by sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane and the distance and relative speed from it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before the driver depress the brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play. The Preview Function shares component parts and diagnosis with the ICC (Intelligent Cruise Control) system. CAUTION: This system is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
INFOID:0000000004500850
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Operation The system detects the distance to the vehicle in front with the ICC sensor integrated unit of ICC and judges the necessity of emergency braking. The system detects the accelerator pedal release operation of the driver by the accelerator pedal position sensor and estimates the driver's brake operation intention. If the system is judged that the emergency braking is necessary or that the driver has the intention to operate the brake it supplies the power supply to the brake booster to apply pre-pressure and adjusts the brake play. NOTE: This system will not operate when the vehicle is moving at approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH) or less. End of Operation The pre-pressure function ceases when the following conditions are met: 1. When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. 2. If the driver does not operate the accelerator pedal or brake pedal within approximately 1 second.
BRC-106
2009 G37 Coupe
PREVIEW FUNCTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BRAKE ASSIST]
INFOID:0000000004509832
BRC
P
JSOIA0078GB
1. 4. 7.
ICC system display ECM ICC brake switch
2. 5. 8.
Buzzer ICC sensor integrated unit Stop lamp switch
3. 6. 9.
ICC steering switch ICC brake hold relay ICC clutch switch
10. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
BRC-107
2009 G37 Coupe
PREVIEW FUNCTION
A. D. G. In combination meter Instrument passenger lower cover removed Brake pedal : Vehicle front B. E. H. Back of combination meter Front bumper LH Clutch pedal C. F.
[BRAKE ASSIST]
Steering wheel RH Engine room LH
Function Description *1 *2 *3
INFOID:0000000004500852
: Applicable
Component ICC sensor integrated unit ECM ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BCM
Description Refer to CCS-43, "Description". Refer to CCS-70, "Description". Refer to CCS-50, "Description". Transmits the front wiper request signal to ICC sensor integrated unit via CAN communication. Receives the meter display signal, buzzer output signal, and ICC warning lamp signal from ICC sensor integrated unit via CAN communication and transmits them to the combination meter via the communication line. Performs the following operations using the signals received from the unified meter and A/C amp. via the communication line. Displays the ICC system operation status using the meter display signal. Illuminates the ICC system warning lamp using the ICC warning lamp signal. Operates the buzzer (ICC warning chime) using the buzzer output signal. Refer to CCS-52, "Description". Refer to CCS-64, "Description". Refer to CCS-103, "Description". Refer to CCS-52, "Description".
Combination meter
ICC brake switch Stop lamp switch ICC brake hold relay Park/neutral position switch ICC clutch switch *1: Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
*2: Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode *3: Brake Assist (With Preview Function)
BRC-108
2009 G37 Coupe
PREVIEW FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BRAKE ASSIST]
A
PREVIEW FUNCTION
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000004500853
1.PREVIEW FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS

When the preview function is not operating properly, the buzzer sounds and the preview function warning lamp will come on. NOTE: The preview function warning lamp shares the ICC system warning lamp. >> Go to ICC. Refer to CCS-4, "Work Flow".
E C
BRC
BRC-109
2009 G37 Coupe

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BRAKE ASSIST]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Description
PRECAUTIONS FOR PREVIEW FUNCTION
This system is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. As there is a performance limit to the Preview Function, never rely solely on this system. This system does not correct careless inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the brake, in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead, depending on road or weather conditions. While the vehicle still travels and the Brake Assist System operates under normal conditions, the Preview Function may operate improperly under the following conditions: - When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor - When strong light (for example, at sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle - Winding or hilly roads may cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect objects or vehicles in other lanes. - Vehicle position in the lane may cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect objects or vehicles in other lanes. The system will not detect: - Pedestrians or objects in the roadway - Oncoming vehicles in the same lane - Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane as illustrated When the Preview Function operates, the brake pedal may move slightly and may make a small noise. This is not a system malfunction.
INFOID:0000000004500854
JSFIA0390ZZ
BRC-110
2009 G37 Coupe
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BRAKE ASSIST]
A
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Preview Function Service
INFOID:0000000004500855
CAUTION: Never look straight into the laser beam discharger when adjusting laser beam aiming. Never use the ICC sensor integrated unit removed from vehicle. Never disassemble or remodel.
BRC
BRC-111
2009 G37 Coupe

Infiniti G37-09-Coupe1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Infiniti G37-09-Coupe1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGINE

ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 3 .

Revision: 2009 October

2009 G37 Coupe

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS

Revision: 2009 October

2009 G37 Coupe

ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal and Installation

Revision: 2009 October

2009 G37 Coupe

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................... 9 .

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 13 .

Revision: 2009 October

2009 G37 Coupe

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT C/U) .... 45 .

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 48 .

SLIDING SWITCH ............................................ 67 .

RECLINING SWITCH ....................................... 69 .

B2112 SLIDING MOTOR .................................. 49 .

LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) ............................. 71 .

B2113 RECLINING MOTOR ............................. 51 .

B2118 TILT SENSOR ....................................... 53 .

LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) ............................... 73 .

B2119 TELESCOPIC SENSOR ........................ 56 .

FORWARD SWITCH ........................................ 75 .

B2126 DETENT SW .......................................... 59 .

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH ....................... 77 .

B2127 PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ................. 61 .

SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH .................................. 79 .

B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE ........... 63 .

POWER WALK-IN SWITCH ............................. 81 .

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 64 .

Revision: 2009 October

2009 G37 Coupe

TILT SWITCH ....................................................83 .

Component Function Check ............................... 104 . Diagnosis Procedure ........................................... 104 .

LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) ........................... 107

TELESCOPIC SWITCH .....................................85 .

LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) ............................. 110

SEAT MEMORY SWITCH .................................87 .

TILT SENSOR ................................................. 113

DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH .............................................................90 .

TELESCOPIC SENSOR .................................. 116

MIRROR SENSOR .......................................... 119

POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ....95

SLIDING MOTOR ............................................ 124

TILT &TELESCOPIC SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ...................................................................96 .

DETENTION SWITCH .......................................97 .

RECLINING MOTOR ....................................... 126

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH .............................99 .

LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) ............................. 128

SLIDING SENSOR .......................................... 101 .

LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) ............................... 130

RECLINING SENSOR ..................................... 104 .

TILT MOTOR ................................................... 132

Revision: 2009 October

2009 G37 Coupe

TELESCOPIC MOTOR ................................... 134 .